i) ee ees ee A yy FUrypern F FV Verte Hee 4 RTS A Re PO Eee L. aren oy 9.9 pe ses O74, frre com y @ wwe? © 4

arsites OANA A OR CURT Apa RAE SO Aa A Hsieh Siainae Makeencant tomatbanmekagette

’ fheun’e ‘

eV re ey tee wre Vr tun whee Ce Oe q Tae Ay belt aan, ep ae tr AS nf Of tA ed. seh

wer regan try ra Pe ye PO e ee ee ROE LR ie Nh dash di A ge Bel § ota den 4 1 hs Oa

bays Yak ge ry pon tenn Lach Ws Ci ee re ee Noe ~ ' Fy ahi ily Se pea ong oe

jiu desea hehe NUS ee TCU WO Ua RO HO BY 2 VO CeCt ee aa 4 ten

bh ee tage aes Peed eae eee Pee ee ee ee he ey oe ee sis: sra'ued poaeNedreta nara, we ndes orn fae eepep Ys

tebe eee beet Cepeae? OCR OO ORO A Re ot

reere ‘ Ci ee | ee even OY . Cs ee Ce i ot a ied ce oe a ee ’ Ac pe ete

. r er ae on er i} Hod dee Fo MT MAE GCN Sm Us wD Aastha NA Oe ee WR Ardre ee ee Tete Ue Us e's we

hod) ey oe Poy Peewee ye et ec Ce hob ep Oe Oe oe Ce er ere »

Aare | ‘ ‘ ' ieeue Oe ce en eS ete tate de

“ee re hd , seh one Se a Oe ven AP eG Ug ee

‘ prune bane Powe tna Cn Oe td ee eg vote de® tote wey Cad fur

what Te ee ‘ wes ma ‘s wy Att ae | Ce ee ee Oe waite

te ‘ Ce a a . we 1 eet by rs 7 rs War

‘ i er ao Ta ' “ ws} wien

bts teen ‘ ae anew Wt *

er TR Fwy vienna t aay BCC + iy

' vue ans + Pree bee we i eds 4

ornare re Pa lab Psd | aE) BAe evi ue Ailod

' ‘4 ‘ Le ka La A

' ' ' Sy Fee ee ve we ‘ t

‘ ‘ “ ‘ trey Pleuqeye eye , ‘ Carrer vias

on ‘ ' ‘ s/ aay ’ ” er 7

ete 4 ' UNRATE ‘ wire ae Ae ft re Ts , Sens Oe Pe Oe Ait aA

" teuat ‘ eben ‘ ee ea ee exer

nh Ee Sa Ae A Cara Seah wie tla a ee OER Te Crane ey AP see ome beac ick veto a

(rev ba et eee et ey LA he Pewee te ELT ee ee rh ee ey baat 2 en ee sien 7 wine

veay eo re ee ee) eee tea ree erro « Ae ‘ mei CeO rer rs the ee Ae

paeae va ' oe pr Nowy “We aha me au we PERL tebe: " “fon 4 yee

wre ic ‘ ip ee an nO De a See Ee ee ee Po Der A ee a ee he oe fee a)

pes , ave aoe wr ‘i ’ ee | Oe ee rer a ne Ae bee et @ Pee a eae terse Ge fog! fe

ot 1eVep ay en ‘ Coes ee ee cM a ns | Te ee a4 nA SHON YN Oe Lem ALY bm. Be het diy | cl aay A

vie fo) A ae Ge a] Pes bette tee ’ 1D Dey pk ee eee Ce ee rd iw he aw Weis MLW denna rtemedtehy Ht Ryman ee

ys eee var i i A cc eT i ee ee Oe ee EY Beer meer TT ham unas senha re ery wt Hh Oe Same es

va ae ‘ " re rr bye toe i Cs ce ee Pe eat Ue UUs ate Cee ik they ty teh oem ALO witerine, eae as,

Ja i ee er ee Ce et se er eee ee ee eB ey et mate 04 sen pete trae Ae Ad haa cm}

' ee hee ata : PE re Se Or Dd been Aig co Dak om ape i) Pe er ee ee eer ol A Pig Her rer tn re tte dteraiarc, yy

ee eC) eae oa) Oe ee fea th a be telah EES meget NPR, ’

a) a ot t+ eae er ee. oe ry ioe ran ou a ec ec Td Poe Goth bee OP WR ME Ort ee mee bom trae he LAr, iA Mote trreayar

' oe pa Pt We ee me here ek ce ce et VT ee te Me SO ee Deets Hotel

Cr eC a or ee Ce ee ee Ce Ta ek cs eC Oe Sk ee err it 2 Meee ee ee Teor oo ont, so ae

clo Yue Ce cara eee er ey Ca i ce et loypuew an RA A RAC OCR OO RRS DIE IG Ke Bait va Ve Se ne) Ee te tee 4

ay . ee Yue eee Pe eo oe yep bee ene ve Ee Oo OO PUR we LAG Satie We Oy Seep bee bebe ter, Snowe te ive testy ff

we. o- Soak -§ he ' + e t Cr ee er NALIN oferta AD al Ve mt ae pe Paoi4. toh Regain Dorr Coo ee ™

“ . ' . 1 a] ’ rt ‘ ‘ one DE ew pe ke we et Ws: 1@t ¢aeo meek Aras aaa oe Re nae pew wetetet oe » nh day

a) (Hevea eo ee eee Oe ee ee Lh eee ee oe Pt) eh Marty Oe 4 Nias ste Pe wate ites

ths ' te vere Vr ee ee Ce | tes Sava eeeinclnt wer ve hete *' a kre eee ov 058 ries

wa ' ' Pr er eT ’ ee . ee es et be WP rt 92 Le Metts ate he 1 Are » hoe NEO er |

4; ‘ Caray ee ey PEO tae OP tee ede pee eh i eee a ta yer

' ' vane easy PUNY OES wht ent det A MBO Nea D & ae AEA Is

aa) ‘ ' 0 » ‘ bpeeud Feb sete W EB: Get, tn ee see A hy Stine bees A ee Saheim

‘ ‘ \ ” ys ' Vie ' Ce ee DY Wok te YW heey ee ay \ Hl tec Ne {Me emeeah yeas ache Latte

any) aw 1 tw ey a re Aeh 4 . were To ee Oe | SY PEERY aL CENTRE TA a Ta a, 8. Tk A el ome (yl

Pe ea 1 re . ee pee A en ee me ge ee ey ee ee ee Oe ee ee 7

eagle of ' ‘ baboe ewes Pe EMM OE pel ey eee Pe eee SSO On Ce ee ICR AEE wha Reet ee Desa

1 ey aren Fi 14 LE Ten Fu eran tau on ACR a ROE, RO LC ARS 5 "He io ey tat

te. ‘ ry wy H 1 CYP De Ob veh ye Ot YR ee Ble & om adhe He

‘ ‘ ‘ va Parry er os ee acer a ee Ta) Ht A bw » : i eH 89 te te ch 1,

1 bet re) ' ‘ a oe Oe ' ‘ ‘ * WH ae Weems 4. '95@ we Ny

rs 1 1 , ’ woe UP ery tw hin) AS SLY, be pots re &

is ey ‘ ‘ ‘s ’ we wa HeRetede ts be ate We wl ANE

. i ' oe Lew een) " nr Sr Mul tetany Aer ms cyt we

Ws (os ; Par) Pa et ire ei ay eiabete ter h Woe Mp wae an rib b na ted are

eu eons 5 ' ‘ A * wissen wy vhs nha phe Wee 9 Pee ee ae eT Ce alae

ae Wee POE AT BY Pk eB begs Pe RN wep Or wena 99 Ad Anh m byte rhe sh Behe Ne ees

1 mt ‘ Veh Re he aay a gt thee Ha Tg re ac ee a) t i a ee bee Aa wine chel Weh Ape b. er er wrt

‘ cwy , . 4 ‘ cr : ; hap va Perey TY ee Oe eC ee RRA A A, CRG NRE a rn Cote OL Fh Aandi 2 Ta ten ee OF «

‘ou ei ’ my ’ 4 ia - + CC es re ee ee cc ee a a rk wreoa se oF wa wees EN yA iT og b dep) vag 1 ee ey We ge a Ap phy tet pot, ’

et of 1 ; ab ebkeud t on 4 +o Cverue Par ew vert ted MDL Ure hits if A ase WY seg be ty 4.9. oe tke Ve om pi ele eee ee oe oe a een

. o4 , ’ r ‘ wy yt t rn ee ee joe ecom erat ¥ Tirton wy «dt we arb ty ete Rhee teach} he Cr ee re trot cr

tae 4 4 ' i 1 TW eek ’ a Pein ee were , rarer vagy Malt bd ed | fy et) tree ete gy cepa otgtes Oe Fe ay % oA

owe 7 cue y Cn er er ce Ce ee my yee , rhe hee cee HT mr ntell ogi t Pea en oe ats +e be Ae we m8 Heth, {Aint Ce St eke oe | fy beh ty

\ ‘ an ‘4 io ; Peau ques ee ee ee a ve gery ree ty oyun wh x76, 9) wad tais we defo a eer A LAI oe tl arate “4 ot

~A :° tees eer rarer ie trier rar eer Brae eri ter ier rer reed NY Le Be rh eee NACL Mbp Meow ue a go my ie m3 nym ty Waa agen ashe ted aras cone astts

4 ‘ bead ‘ ‘ sy ae ow rey ‘ COP Way ee Qe ke yung S Ce ee | ” NEN dye bey bee Ae ty tet gd thee ba by he Arran tech eH ares oe

‘ ree ' ‘ ee er une eit PEI ROCK SET ¢ He ahr ct ket tone A ae eT be ets © ite

iy gh a ‘24 : are bron, corer ee pee at ede el a ‘ ‘ ' tren Vee Ve MY yer he ene ard Re Ses yw opps AM UO Hs atte Ae te Pe pete OO ete te Hate ae ltrle n

' ' ' , oy Cee Wy gee a ee 4 rr a io Sm BD Pt hehe Me ty be hh tots Bete A My Care ae ap tetey rary Any

‘ ' . ane » Cee e ee en e he Oe ge { Lyn etiert ple Vsyotmraneg i Fo Beh wes YR swye ¥ Nall HM he te a Oy Mh yw eg oe oat) & nC 9%

n Fl 1 ‘ Lee ee ee er ' PeUB Ve RP RO eat oe se ee ek ee SO et ee oe 2 Meo AL Wy tyt ts Opp ne eh hetete ure

1 y i , ' ny, Pre cen) qe c oe ee i el er Pe re or Se 2 PO Rae eC ea ee aT he ter, i 4

’ ' * 1 ae ee ee Ped pa i a ec ee a a Oo ae ety wy ME hd eh ee mp Pyne 16D Hy OF

ryt i) ‘ ’ 1 soy t oe ae yee ‘ vruPpee ‘ Wyre we Pye ey pe SRE Re oe sa tome wey Pe ark Ay mp Leh inete ty WOES.

\ ¢ ‘ t ae fet Cee | woes tra ede fetes Vr ewe weed ~<qiine © iby t 1 fe we ele iyi a ee HhAwty

Pan at Tae das eivers wey, ys v4 wy oe Reo ie sping a gh il ar Nb canst? Mt ag! Wb § su oip ha} sseylte bhai

? ‘ ‘ +4 ’ ayovy ‘ty ty y pute tebe tha eo ee A Te OY tea he pal 150m ty't9 oy

11 it ‘ oy wd pry an ee ae rani ' " sone tee waa t oe agen mate ‘Od wry

al 43 i r ne Pe ee ay worygey even i ‘ond Chery eb eee tet

: LPL Ses ‘a Lo i te ee ae

42 Ced Vi tage he e@

wheat

% ‘

a sae nae

4 yd Sa Ra iit f

‘ wewe su

me iyo awe i oo

: oh a bind eh he

HWA} hs bets Pate Y fe 8 ToP ef eco t pee

: vde vated hk Hts Phew ey BY it ey tae

ate Deg here erat yp tet wreatee ye ta! tt er

VADs peu Et 4, Sey 113. WN be BAN Oto ge eo eh A. 7

LeMehtd ldegerad Le be Harte, rif ob har yews wy Wet ayee a

Ae san deat Fe hos he

' ri)

inate . aes

Aba, 0 Shute

7 iat oer iw ye a

Hh te Ath +h He Ve pve peered }

: 240 ‘eesti tek a oe ya bee

jut thy wat Pen w Rtas eet wiih hae

1 re wg! yal ese Re yah ® ha

ih tyes a) Lear oe} Bvt hs wie ay eh: * ae

; Be utente be Sipe am ia hg at tt Ral & Dev oat dadg at)

why ee hed t yet Vow ig tape dave a tade wba WSs beagta rae Pt:

y J hort od fe y Pyne seas Slab jah haa eek eked yw a

: Le Gure > detwhe raat eb MA 1th te ae Ve leon um Ay haved, @ yar

: (wae ehe hoe heat 2 eh 2 isha rh ‘lee

' Vpn aeaed ‘heigg i DO Oe he as Wh ose ue Tt th ey

ie eee em Te) Derey eae an Anew ie tae ltd

isa Ow the be Beate 40% ? gles tee & ‘a

Le tipo heae tad tai wl he fy tai hab ap tT VE

\ ER ee Oe ee feud eh DY ea eee he lee

PF MERIN SE she hw te ba be dale FW de

gest WS Bele Bi 13k Ba r he ny mh ao

; Ue ota Ss Tak be bro dep Pai PUrypenase hin tae sa wes ie ba Sart pes

Ae EN ae tnt i Dy go 4 OH ia jee g

ei 14) ae ' epee see te FE Lh ie lols gata ielowe 4 iepe

‘ Va ite be ta) ite wey ay a a ee edt 1H WM as Saale tee cement eas,

ody \ Lata i ate a imeiiekadd tn is

Pa sortin Co wih 's Pe be te be le Me te Be

fhVotvga let Hatter st Ay jm atl ighy be wae

APY) 1A sm Vit 140i willed ty hin Be Py Bie Gao ieite be He "

DS Ade bs he cat at aed leslie Ue wpe ode rye

wag ise Powe ny ae 4 > i mW BP 24.0 ire yey seve Surbecnr

LepoWas se Wb Le ifede . Pe 47a ine & bs Dap boc ae Ly re 4 4

BY ae ita BD a bah 0 de Nes Ma The ts iW Oe het Moe hae eS 4

Quy irik De tod Breeder a ht techy ty Ci yf Pi rie) fart ee

Mrs we 15 Yet Dee ee » hit reat Re ah Plea hint &

eirve Mie laa Of ry hin A ule

a an Pia ere i112 hege ele a En dat er ior pte s

1 vo i La ee va et weer ise e, ies 60 sha A fetes

ere bated ee tte oem) ted beet |, ih dee eh be, Ga bath we eiiwate

an) Kerberos age Lab ob “ss CW ure Hi Wy @lielrom Ss: week

‘ i La -”, Mirae) a jale egy meul Pry ery i be 19 Bad. Caw doer ne oh

ES wit ‘ ee wiah UIE irate

bea ot beds 344s bey a |

ie Pied time Bid Mele ariba ta set qarcitine Yin Pye reita eS

a , yy LF f ’ purie we i) i nt Pear

ars vibe F f, Tt de tl Aerals i iy View Ur pee et aC es

‘ ‘ d . ") apigr

4 Tae de Phe

GH tnt re:

” , UK med Vasae dapat

ey af Wy eh argh ase Cl rites

os tit ties Sy lated ae

gs ihc ateleddy taht isietaete ree es re

see eae

‘ HE ee en i dee by

s. Wate ae led wre Me

etal wild ae & ue

’ 1 i eee Se ee) oF ae el |

: aor a bak Linon de eta cn vei ow haps ee a Hise aa at pay + ee

AS Pe ee ee wilesae dh b t Vb ee da tet ti arley ohh te Uigd bi ge Spaske rt)

tae Lad ted ad trae Ch de asic be PN Nb beEeth We OL Dd @ jute ha ba R34 .de Bald Pie’ Rye t saan

. ey wee rt eee eee Pee ee ee Pee Wee eee a Re ee ee er reat fe ah e ry

woe ee ee ie ae eT yeh vty eve bee acy gl pda ete aD woaty

: Oe det nee bg Wd we Bee use be ved padi

rd ee ee ee

rs out ‘ aria Rate dee db gailogt Sat ee doask '

Wedd Wy (aad anh a Ce Bineer) fe re Ps ety) oge fede de Ad e

ry ae ' peace Ga eee ae ft dda UF teed wile DW we whee Whe

cone vA bee ee RT Be the ob get bbe eh ide We itee be eh ma oe

i Car eet ee ie Dede Nev ayy cana Sea ee eee ke Cee ro as vy hw oe

rider @ ela rem Gh tert Ce eet ee ee whe ke,

* be , 3 sae awe eth tee bef ‘ . ee a chee Or) Mild

7 ‘ eee ea ‘ pasa iia Ser Aeaks ite Bik ee ett ve aan s con to atl we oe

rf BT ds licey ah py i vie bape

7 rr Wire we at

ti - ae

> rere ae

: 2 gehen we ey

: eee he

4 nt)

om Otley aes ie

“jer Bt aie m4 - Rp a

oo ey det mn “ ie ea ne asi * os

Lia bath Ae led ae hore 44 ta $e a 8

fa ere tid Bede ek ee ” wee me 7

ee UO tls Sls b Lele Be Nee :

‘ ore i o4 i> Af Gow ad Pram bets hr er etek STE Te eo Ae we hee

tt . . wha i Hadad Pay Oe ee wi thawte Po eh et tbe Ate et Bie ct tld

' te etn fet loeb bet 8 te A HOD Daa Patel RAY xl

, ‘ Dilut wo iA a4 oa rida boa oa Ce ee | ee eee ee er ter ie ee ee te ”

t. doy ae oe iow en ee eee ey bbe hadee Tp ee td wd nes eee ee LD APD te ede bee dete tei BG BMA inn wend © eGo ve Ue Uke

‘ wa oo tive re Per aren be on Wr os OF i YP wend wad ea Pe a! jibe arto an bor ead tetok di ORO yn eee

rl ra handny a Sef hea Weick Fe ark | f PVD ee ra crepe dag thew babe be Fee dey aa veneers

V4 are ee near Ol aries ee SA ed ie Bl an wd ae ge ob ed othe von top reign

’ i! we i tee tie lh Panda ve ew A Tare Fe Pan teen Ber ; a et “7,

ae . 4s ber be aw tae Fc Whee 06h ah oh oe dl One

oat ‘ey hea eet a eC ne wei ory et bes LW beth kite wth eid ee &

Mn atte, att Not SEAT He a RR oR ASCE AA UE aad

i Ee ed Wal be Pe ere Mt, Ce ee ee Oe nee ey Yee BLK) He Be ou

ant te ‘ Coe Se ee ae) Ce one ta aly una e A eitsbe tp bibake at are 58 Pw lates

‘ ROS ELT eee ee ee ee ee ee ee eet ‘ tt Ee vicew we O

Pe eee a were ee en ee we ad Indy wi Ate Darke oan & Tyree * atl fos ¥:

or ee Oe ere Oe Ce eT ee ene eee Wie &e ee ee came

pei we k Cw eT ee Cd eRe bi @ Wee de ee To er eee ee en Roane a eile ice ated

tft ea eM dy ee My foie ahe eee btm PuMrmren nuere beeen eet rere Bent oly] «

Lee wi bibw bead oie ga Gott Piletied Wie eee be bey fae twa we ey PLA ht hh Oty toll Ae se

ota wansti area Thee Me a ec ere al aa wikek 4 et ee ee oe er er 2 Sivas weit ee ee

bret veded bob t We Waves Ue Pee eer ere re Rene et et 0 ab ron arteet ele ater

ce ee dei tee bed hibegie Pe phe bah wD a ere ree rn err ee ee |

wah On ee a ee er eeu stn oe bn v=,

piri Wea th pe bce piainths oe hate Pardon & lee ote hia at eae

Bw eve Herth asttod lid wet ed te Dad ge Me, Sat

re Sc RC Ce Ce Oe ee Pte ae ee pidas ty! a

wo ee ao a ee AL Bw, Mews mbites be OY Pade bee oe b ee

Benet vor, Wess Ce ee er

ds ae A wwe Boren

1d eee

wet b28 PA oH the hee

ORR NR SEA)

OA Ieee , ene he te daw

Coen ee cy aot det poe Pahon ” dew

rie Te it box ha Peyvrermpre ere enTe wre AM Ch at ea

5 ew on) Rare nriprn hy ot ert a Let ao ee

ee ee A RAL ALA tg Tere Ue ee

Ca Maw eard we aw © Tae ee |

aye eh re ene tee oneanee

Ce ont i" sae

i ee ee cart iae ak ae

eb yAa ow mi

’ ’

Salat

ona 73

A IMD 7

ANNALS

OF THE

NEW YORK

Sea UEMY OF SCIENCES

VOLUME XIV

1901-1903

Editor:

CHARLES LANE POOR

New York

Published by the Academy

The New Era Printing Company

Lancaster, Pa.

iG@ab4]

= ig .

7 x «

’

® -

——

= ij

' 4

a i

oil

» . ba

‘

* 4

: *< j

Zz i ,

7 ‘

a ,

. ¢

->°%

ak 4 ai ‘

; }

Fel | ' i

iy wh a | ye | eat SAT a! 2p eee

A en & aoe . ;

SOR RIE Pn ann

e ¥

SF j ry »

OTA] rivien “A > ’

f 4 i 2 - ‘

ye PA rte

: ae , ; ) j eh yi

“ ‘s =. 4 ots 4 eT ge

4 oem ~ as. Oy ee! AT, % 7

TABLE OF CONTENTS OF Vot. XIV.

1.—McMurrich, J. Playfair. Report on the Hex-

actiniae of the Columbia University Expedi-

tion to Puget Sound during the Summer of

1896. ES ae el oak Cos a ee

2.—Huntington, Geo. 8. The Morphological Sig-

nificance of Certain Periclavicular Supernumer-

ary Muscles

3.—Hollick, Arthur. Discovery of a Mastodon’s

Tooth and the Remains of a Boreal Vegeta-

tion in a Swamp on Staten Island, N. Y. .

4.—_Woodward, R. 8. Observations and Experi-

ment. se ene sions oat Ne, Ue

5.—Dodge, Richard E., Recording Secretary. Rec-

ord of Meetings of the New York Academy

of Sciences, January, 1901, to December, 1901

6.—Torrey, John Cutler. The Early Embryology

of Thalassema Mellita (Conn.)

7.—Finlay, George I. The Geology of the San José

District, Tamaulipas, Mexico .

PAGE

53-66

67-68

69-384

85-163

. 165-246

. 247-318

eee eee . ZIQ-337

mead ew) la Tome , = . —_ yea?

», d

‘

“

’ é « i

P ' * .

Ps «

® : i+ =

~ - o

) - j .

. . : - 7

a a?

e S r ? ‘bl

a | a. Oo Ln)

Ria eer Jae ed Sebo

Vou. XIV Part I

ANNALS

OF THE

NEW YORK

ACADEMY OF SCIENCES

Editor:

CHARLES LANE POOR

The New Era Printing Company

Lancaster, Pa.

NEW YORK -ACADEMY. OF SCIENCES

OFFICERS, IQOO—IQOI

President—RoBERT S. Woopwarp, Columbia University.

Recording Secretary—RicHARD E. Donce, Teachers College.

Corresponding Secretary—HAROLD JAcosy, Columbia University.

Treasurer —CHARLES F. Cox, Grand Central Depot.

Librarian—LIVINGSTON FARRAND, Columbia University.

E:ditor—CHARLES LANE Poor, 4 East 48th Street.

SECTION OF ASTRONOMY, PHYSICS, AND CHEMISTRY

Chatrman—W™n. HAttock, Columbia University.

Secretary—F. L. Turrs, Columbia University.

SECTION OF BIOLOGY

Charman—Cuas. L. BristoLt, New York University.

Secretary—HENrRY E. Crampton, Barnard College.

SECTION OF GEOLOGY AND MINERALOGY

Chairman—ALExis A. JULIEN, Columbia University.

Secretary—THEODORE G. WHITE.*

SECTION OF ANTHROPOLOGY AND PSYCHOLOGY

Chaitrman—LIVINGSTON FARRAND, Columbia University.

Secretary—R. S. WoopwortH, N. Y. Univ. Med. Coll., Belle-

vue Hospital.

SESSION, 1901-1902

The Academy will meet on Monday evenings at 8.15 o'clock,

from October 7th to May togth, in the rooms of the Chemist’s

Club, 108 West 55th Street.

* Deceased.

[Annals N. Y. Acap. Sci., Vol. XIV, No. I, pp. I-52, June 5, 1901. ]

REPORT ON THE HEXACTINIZ OF THE COLUMBIA

UNIVERSITY EXPEDITION TO PUGET SOUND

DURING THE SUMMER OF 1896

J. Prayrarr McMurricu

[Plates I-III; text figures I-II. ]

(Read November 14, 1898)

In presenting this report | must testify to the pleasure I ex-

perienced in studying the collection, a pleasure due both to the

admirable preservation of all the specimens and to the careful

notes and drawings which accompanied them. The credit for

both belongs to Dr. Gary N. Calkins. The method employed

for the preservation was a preliminary immersion in magnesium

sulphate as suggested by Tullberg, followed by fixation and

preservationin formalin. Nearly all the specimens were beauti -

fully expanded and the histological preservation was excellent.

The only disadvantage presented by the method, probably due

to the formalin, was the failure of preparations to stain with the

ordinary carmine stains, such as Grenacher’s borax carmine ;

hzmatoxylin stains acted admirably, however.

I wish also to express my thanks to Mr. Alexander Agassiz

for his kindness in loaning me, for comparison, a number of

drawings of West Coast forms prepared from livings specimens

several years ago.

The manuscript of this paper was originally completed in

April, 1898, but I have taken advantage of the long delay which

has occurred in its publication to introduce some references to

papers which have appeared more recently, and also to correct

a grievous misapprehension into which I had fallen with regard

to the systematic position of Efzactis prolifera. The nature of

this misapprehension is explained in the description of the

species.

(1)

ANNALS N. Y. AcaD. Sci., XIV, June 5, 190I—I1.

2 McMURRICH

HEXACTINI/ZE®

ACTININE

Family SAGAR TM Dze

Actininee with adherent base; with a mesoglceal (rarely a

weak endodermal sphincter); and with acontia which are

emitted either through the mouth alone or also through special

openings (cinclides) in the column wall.

The family Sagartiide, since its first establishment by Gosse

in 1858, has undergone certain changes which have for the

most part been fully discussed by various authors. Within

recent years there has been introduced a subdivision into sub-

families. The family Phelline of Verrill (68) has been added

as a subfamily and the remaining forms assigned to the sub-

families Sagartiinz or Metridiinee according as they possessed

more than six pairs of perfect mesenteries or only that number

(Carlgren ’93); a subfamily Chondractinine had previously

been proposed by Haddon (’89); Simon (’92), recognized two

subfamilies Aiptasiinae and Sagartiine, the former characterized

by possessing an endodermal sphincter or none at all; and,

finally, Haddon accepts all the proposed subdivisions, admitting

the existence of no less than five subfamilies.

It seems to me that the subdivision proposed by Carlgren

is that to be preferred. I do not think the recognition of a sub-

family Aiptasiinze is advisable since several undoubted Aiptasias

are known to possess a mesoglceal sphincter, as, for instance A.

pallida (Ag.), A. sp. (from the Bermudas, McM.)and A. /uceda

(Duch. & Mich.) Duerden. In all these, it is true, the muscle

is exceeding weak, but it nevertheless is present, and its absence

in certain species is merely the fulfillment of the reduction of it

which is characteristic of the genus. A separation of the forms

with no mesoglceal sphincter would be an act of violence, and,

if this be avoided, the genus Azffasza is properly referable to

the Metridiine.

In the second place, it does not seem to me that a recognition

of the Phelliinaze and Chondractiniinz as distinct subfamilies is

necessary. Both lack cinclides, have a coriaceous column wall

REPORT ON THE HEXACTINIZ& 3

provided with an epidermis, a distinct mesogloeal sphincter and

only 6 pairs of perfect mesenteries. Haddon makes the dis-

tinction rest upon the occurrence of gonads in the mesenteries

of the first cycle which he has found in certain Phellias. It

does not seem to me that this peculiarity deserves the im-

portance that Haddon has assigned to it, and I may again refer

to the genus Azféasza as providing ammunition for use against

my friend’s proposition. In A. pallida and in A. sp. (Bermudas,

McM.) gonads occur in the mesenteries of the first cycle, and yet

I imagine that no one would therefore suggest the assignment

of these species to a different subfamily than that which shelters

A. annulata, etc. We may, apparently, find occasionally an

infringement of the right of sterility usually enjoyed by the first-

cycle mesenteries, but it does not seem to me that we should

at present legitimize the infringement by granting it the rank of

a subfamily characteristic.

In the present collection I have found no representatives of

either the Sagartiine or Phelliine, but a representative of the

Metridiinz occurred.

Subfamily Metrripun, Carlgren.

Sagartiide in which the column wall is perforated by cin-

clides and in which only the mesenteries of the first cycle are

perfect.

I. Metridium dianthus (Ellis) Oken.

Synonyms.—Actinia dianthus, Ellis, 1767.

Actinia plumosa, Miiller, 1776.

Metridium dianthus, Oken, 1815.

Actinoloba dianthus, Blainville, 1830.

Actinia marginata, Lesueur, 1817.

Metridium marginatum, Milne-Edwards, 1857.

Metridium fimbriatum, Verrill, 1865.

? Actinia priapus, Tilesius, 1809.

(For a more complete synonymy see Andres, ’83. )

As may be seen from the above synonymy, I have united into

a single species three forms which have been usually regarded

as distinct, though several authors have recognized the possi-

bility of their identity. I wish it to be understood, however,

a3 McMURRICH

that in employing the specific term dianthus, I do not desire to

imply any prejudice to the claims to priority of two other terms,

namely the fe/izwim of Linnzeus and the peztapetala of Pennant ;

I have not access at present to the works in which these terms

were first used, and cannot, therefore, decide as to their validity.

Habitat.—I find in the present collection several representa-

tives of this species, the majority of which were collected in

shallow water principally from the piles of wharves or from

stones, two specimens only coming from deeper water, one

from 9.5 meters, where it was adherent to a deserted clam shell,

and the other from 13.7 meters.

External Form.—Allowing for differences plainly due to size

and degree of contraction, the external form is essentially the

same in all the specimens. The base is adherent and the

column is essentially cylindrical and smooth, except for, in

some cases, fine longitudinal or transverse ridges, evidently due

to contraction. A short distance below the margin there isa

well-marked circular fold or collar, above which the wall is

considerably thinner than it is below, and scattered over the

surface below the collar, cinclides may be observed.

The margin is distinctly lobed and is tentaculate, the tenta-

cles being very numerous and closely crowded in many cycles.

They are rather short, and acuminate and entacmzous; I do

not find, however, that the relative length and thickness of the

tentacles is the same in all the specimens, differences of contrac-

tion causing them in some cases to be rather conical in shape,

while in others they are much more slender and almost filiform.

The disk is smooth and slightly concave, the mouth being some-

what prominent. The lips appear to be tuberculate, this appear-

ance being due to the continuation upon them of the longitu-

dinal ridges which occur upon the stomatodeum. In all the

specimens in which the mouth is visible two gonidial grooves

can be distinguished, except in one specimen in which there

seemed to be only one.

Color.—Dr. Calkins’ notes of the various specimens show

that they can be arranged in three groups according to the pre-

vailing color. Thus there is a group (I) in which the column

REPORT ON THE HEXACTINLZ® 5

is of a drown color, the tentacles being of the same color, while

the lips are usually yellowish or orange. Dr. Calkins’ descrip-

tion of one of the members of this group is as follows:

‘Light brown with long feathery tentacles of still lighter color.

The extreme tips of the tentacles are white. The mouth parts

are almost an olive green”’ and the disk is ‘‘ transparent from

mouth to margin.”’

In a second group (II), the column is of an orange or salmon

color. Four representatives of this group occur in the collec-

tion: one of these Dr. Calkins describes as being of a “ bright

orange”’ color, and the other three as being “‘ yellowish pink.”

The third group (III) has but two representatives in the col-

lection and these are described by Dr. Calkins as being ‘pure

white.”

Size.—The specimens belonging to the brown variety are on

the whole smaller than the others. Some of them are, however,

considerably contracted, measuring, in this condition, 1.3-1.5

cm. in height, the base being broadly expanded and measuring

1.8—3.5 in diameter, while at the upper part of the column the

diameter is only 1.3-1.2 cm. One specimen, which was well

expanded measured 3 cm. in height and had a diameter at about

half way up the column of about 1.5 cm., while the base

measured about 2cm. Another specimen, also well expanded

is about 4 cm. in height and about half way up the column has

a diameter of 2.3 cm.

The specimens belonging to the orange variety have a greater

average size. Three specimens measured 2.3 cm., I.5 cm., and

3.5 cm. in height, with a column diameter of 2.3 cm., I.3 cm.,

and 2.5 cm. respectively. Another specimen, taken at a depth

of 13.7 meters, was much larger, measuring in its present con-

dition, 12.5 cm. in height, the base having a diameter of 4.5

cm. and the column about its middle measuring 3.7 cm. in di-

ameter. These figures do not, however, represent the original

size of the specimen, since Dr. Calkins states that soon after it

was placed in formalin its dimensions were ‘‘seven inches from

base to mouth, five inches across the crown and three inches in

. diameter.”

6 McMURRICH

The two white specimens are of about the same size and

measure 8 cm. in height and about 4 cm. in diameter.

As stated above, considerable variation occurs in the length

of the tentacles. Thus in a brown individual measuring 4 cm.

in height the inner tentacles measured 3.5 mm. in length, while

in another individual of the same variety, measuring only 1.3

em. in height, the inner tentacles were 5 mm. lone, Inthe

large orange specimen the inner tentacles measured about 4 mm.

Structure.—Considerable differences in the structural details

are found in the various individuals, but these seem to be corre-

lated, in part at least, with differences of age, that is to say of size.

A comparison of the structure of the smallest individual with that

of the largest would almost lead one to regard the two as dis-

tinct species; intermediate conditions, however, occur and it

seems clear that the differences are growth differences assocrated

with some tendency to variability.

The mesogloea of the column wall has a fibrillar structure,

or is even distinctly fibrous, especially in the region of the

sphincter. Above the level of the collar the wall is much

thinner than below, the difference being due to a difference in

the thickness of the mesogloea. The circular musculature of

the column is well developed and in the smaller specimens, its

mesoglceal processes are clearly marked off and show a tendency

to branch slightly. In the larger forms, however, they are

sometimes stout, with rounded extremities and may contain

muscle cavities imbedded in their substance.

The sphincter is always well developed and is imbedded in

the mesoglcea in the collar region. In different individuals,

however, it presents decided differences in its minuter structure

and I give on Pl. I three figures (Figs. 1, 2 and 3) showing

some of the variations observed in the present collection. In

Fig. 1, which is from an individual measuring 1.5 cm. in height,

the muscle cavities are more or less circular and are scattered

irregularly in the mesoglcea, being separated by a narrow band

from its endodermal surface. In Fig. 2, which represents only a

portion of the sphincter of an individual of the white variety

measuring 8 cm. in height, the muscle cavities are much more

REPORT ON THE HEXACTINIZ 7

numerous and extend quite up to the endodermal surface of the

mesoglcea, even the processes found on that surface containing

numerous cavities. In Fig. 3, finally another arrangement is

shown. The preparation from which the drawing was made

was from a brown specimen which measured 3 cm. in height,

and the peculiarity which it presents lies in the band of mesogloea

destitute of cavities which traverses the muscle longitudinally,

dividing it into an outer and an inner portion, the latter being

separated from the endodermal surface by a distinct interval as

in Fig. 1. This last condition recalls the arrangement figured

by Carlgren (’93) for the European /. dianthus and may be

termed the “ layered” condition.

The occurrence of a band of mesoglcea, destitute of muscle

cavities, between the inner surface of the sphincters and the en-

doderm is probably to be regarded as leading to a layered con-

dition of the muscle. If, in a specimen similar to that from

which Fig. 1 was taken, the inclusion of muscle fibers within

the mesoglcea were to occur again with the continued growth

of the individual, an arrangement would be found similar to that

seen in Fig. 3, and an alternation of periods of growth during

which inclusion went on with periods in which it ceased, would

result in the arrangement figured by Carlgren. It may be pre-

sumed that in the larger specimens of J/. dianthus a layered ar-

rangement of the sphincter will be the most frequent, but cases

like that represented in Fig. 2 show that it is not an invariable

arrangement for the species.

I have examined the structure of the pietkets in one speci-

men of the collection and find that it agrees with what Carlgren

has described for the European individuals, the canals being

lined by endodermal cells, so that the cinclides may be regarded

as endodermal evaginations. The same is true with regard to a

specimen from our eastern coast (the J marginatum Auct.),

and this mode of formation may probably be regarded as typical

for Metridium dianthus, though further observations are neces-

sary to determine whether it can be regarded as characteristic of

the entire subfamily.

The longitudinal musculature of the tentacles, and the radial

8 McMURRICH

musculature of the disk is ectodermal and but moderately de-

veloped. The stomatodeum is provided with well-marked

longitudinal ridges, and in all the six specimens which were ex-

amined with regard to this point ¢wo siphonoglyphes were present.

In all the specimens examined, with a single exception, there

were six pairs of perfect mesenteries, two of these being direc-

tives. In the majority of the specimens there were altogether

five cycles of mesenteries, that is to say ninety-six pairs, but in

some there were only four cycles and occasionally the fifth

cycle was only imperfectly developed. In the exceptional

specimen referred to above, there were only four pairs of per-

fect mesenteries. Two of these were directives, and between

these two pairs on one side there were two pairs of perfect

mesenteries, but none on the other. In other words, the irreg-

ularity affected only one-half of the specimen. In the normal

half there were five cycles of mesenteries represented, the me-

senteries of the fifth cycle, as is usual, lacking mesenterial fila-

ment. In the irregular half the various cycles could not be de-

termined accurately, but judging from the relative breadths of

the mesenteries the arrangement was D-iv-iii-iv-ii-iv-ili-iv-ill-1v-

D, the mesenteries of the fifth cycle being omitted in this count.

The longitudinal muscles of the mesenteries were fairly well

developed, forming a moderate thickening upon the inner por-

tion of the primary mesenteries as represented in Fig. 4. Oc-

casionally the pennon was somewhat narrower and more promi-

nent, this condition being apparently normal for the directive

mesenteries, the pennon in these having the form represented in

Fig. 5. Parieto-basilar muscles are hardly at all developed

(Fig. 4), and the basilar muscles have the form described by

Carlgren, though not usually as large as those he has figured.

In only two specimens of those examined were reproductive

organs present; in these they were borne upon the mesenteries

of the second, third and fourth cycles. Acontia occurred and

both the inner and outer stomata were found in the perfect

mesenteries.

The specimens here described are undoubtedly identical with

those described by Verrill (65 and ’69) as Metridium fimbria-

REPORT ON THE HEXACTINIZE 9

tum. Verrill founded this species (’65) on a specimen from San

Francisco, but later (69) gave a more complete description

based on additional specimens from Puget Sound. In both

papers he states his belief that the species is closely allied to

the JZ. marginatum of the Eastern Coast of America, differing

from it, however, “chiefly in having longer and more slender

tentacles, with the parapet further from the margin of the disk.”’

He further suggests that JZ. marginatum, M. fimbriatum and

M. dianthus “will eventually be found to belong to one very

variable and widely diffused species. .

Andres (’83) considers JZ fimbriatum a synonym for J.

marginatum, accepting Verrill’s suggestion to this extent, and

though retaining marginatum distinct for dianthus, states his

belief that it may be identical with that form.

We have here two questions of synonomy to consider: (1) Is

M. fimbriatum identical with MZ marginatum? (2) Is either

of these species identical with the European JZ dianthus? To

the first of these questions I would answer in the affirmative.

I have carefully compared specimens of IZ marginatum from

the coast of Massachusetts (Woods Holl) with the Puget Sound

specimens, and, allowing for the variability which seems to ob-

tain even in specimens from the same locality, I see no reason

for regarding the two as distinct. It may be well however to

compare in some detail the specimens from the two sides of the

Continent, that my conclusions in the matter may not be merely

ex cathedrad statements.

1. As to the coloration. It has been stated above that three

principal color varieties occur in the Puget Sound specimens.

The same three varieties are readily distinguishable in the

Woods Holl individuals, and, in connection with this, two points

of some interest may be incidentally referred to. So far as I

have seen in the examination of several hundred specimens of

the east coast form, the smaller individuals are always brown,

the individuals of a salmon or white color being invariably large

and one is tempted to suppose that the salmon and white varie-

ties are not distinct from the brown variety from the beginning,

but that the brown color is characteristic of all younger individ-

10 McMURRICH

uals and is, in some cases, after the individuals have obtained a

considerable size, replaced by salmon color or by white. Insup-

port of this idea it may be stated that individuals are frequently

found whose color is chiefly salmon or white, but whose column

is splashed with irregular bands, spots or dots of brown. This

fact seems to be true also of the Puget Sound forms according

to the description given by Verrill (69). Of course all individ-

uals do not necessarily undergo a change from the brown color

with advancing age, since brown forms may frequently be found

quite as large as the individuals of the other colors.

The second point to which I wish to call attention receives a

‘simple explanation from the conclusion just stated. Salmon-

colored individuals blotched with brown are not uncommon and

white individuals similarly marked are also found, but, never as

far as I have seen, do individuals of a salmon color blotched

with white, or vice versa, occur. In other words the salmon-

colored and white varieties never merge into one another while

both merge into the brown variety.

2. As to dimensions the specimens which I have collected at

Woods Holl agree in size fairly well with those of the present

collection, except that I have never found any East Coast speci-

men as large as the largest Puget Sound specimen. Verrill, how-

ever, states (’64) that the more northern forms, especially those

from the Bay of Fundy, are larger than those from more south-

erly localities.

3. As to external form I have not been able to distinguish

any constant differences in the external form of the individuals

from the two localities. The differences which Verrill con-

sidered to exist in the slenderness of the tentacles and the dis-

tance of the collar from the margin cannot be regarded as of

much importance since they are apt to be due to contraction ; I

find indeed as much difference in both these respects between

different specimens from Puget Sound or Woods Holl as be-

tween specimens from the two localities.

As to internal structure. Making due allowance for the vari-

ability in the details of the internal structure shown to exist in

the Puget Sound specimens, and for the similar variability occur-

REPORT ON THE HEXACTINIA 11

ring in the East Coast specimens, I can see no reason for consider-

ing the two distinct. In nearly all essential peculiarities there is

practical similarity, the striking differences being in the apparent

absence of variation in the number of siphonoglyphes and direc-

tives in the Puget Sound specimens. This difference will, how-

ever, be discussed later.

One other point may be mentioned. J. marginatum has

been described from the coast of New Jersey to as far north as

Labrador, JZ. fimbriatum from San Francisco and Puget Sound

and Dr. Calkins informs me that it also occurs at Sitka. There

is no record however of its occurrence in more northerly

regions, the report from the American Station of the Inter-

national Polar Expedition at Point Barrow (Murdoch ’85)

making no mention of any species which can be considered a

Metridium. If, however, the East and West Coast species are

identical it is probable that further observation will reveal their

presence in the Arctic regions.

The specific identity of the East and West Coast forms being

regarded as established, the question as to their identity with

the European JZ. dianthus may now be considered. As pointed

out above, suggestions as to their identity have been made, and,

indeed, the American form has been actually identified with

dianthus by some authors. Thus Couthouy (’38) speaks of the

occurrence in the Charles River at Boston of Actinta plumosa

Miller, and Dawson (’58) describes specimens from the Gaspé

basin ‘“‘ which appear identical with the A. danthus of the British

Coast.”

Certainly the two forms resemble one another closely both in

external form and in coloration, three of the color varieties of

dianthus recognized by Gosse (60) being identical with those

recognized for MZ. marginatum, while the fourth, the yellow,

also occurs in the American species, but has been considered

above as belonging to the salmon-colored variety. Of the

internal structure of dtanthus several more or less complete

accounts exist, the most recent and most thorough being that

of Carlgren (’93), and on comparing this point by point with

what occurs in the American forms, the similarity is so great

12 McMURRICH

that there can be no doubt, I think, as to the identity of the

two forms.’

I have not in the above discussion considered the variability

in the number of the siphonoglyphes and directives, which is so

pronounced in the European and American East Coast forms,

and which might be regarded as of sufficient importance to be

regarded as a specific characteristic. Sufficient data are not

available to determine definitely whether this variability also

occurs in the American West Coast forms, but in the six speci-

mens I examined it was not observed. But even granting that

no variability in this respect occurs in the fmbriatum forms, it

does not seem that this would be sufficient for considering

these specifically distinct from the szarginatum and dianthus

forms. No one has suggested that the danthus forms with

the siphonoglyphe and one pair of directives should be sepa-

rated from those with two siphonoglyphes and two pairs of

directives, and it would be even less reasonable, it seems to me,

to separate fimbriatum forms from marginatum or dianthus

forms with two siphonoglyphes and two pairs of directives,

other structural characteristics being so similar.

There are not at present sufficient data at hand for deter-

mining accurately the relative frequency of the monoglyphic

condition in the European and frmdbriatum forms. To judge,

however, from the statements of Thorell (58), Gosse (’60), and

Carlgren (93), among others, the monoglyphic condition is by

far the most frequent in the European specimens; the thor-

ough observations of Parker (97) show that it occurs in some-

what over one-half of the total number of smarginatum forms

which he examined ; while, as stated above, it would seem to

be much less frequent in the fimbriatum forms.

At the close of the list of synonyms of the species I have

1 To judge from certain statements made by Gosse (’60) I should imagine that

the relations of the different color varieties described above for JZ. marginatum do

not hold for JZ. dianthus. What the physiological causes may be which produce

the different varieties is at present unknown, but a fact quoted by Gosse is of interest

in thisconnection. It is to the effect that on a water-logged board brought in by a

trawler there were between four and five hundred specimens of JZ dianthus, and

all the individuals ‘‘ v7 one side the board were white, all on the other orange.”’

REPORT ON THE HEXACTINL# 13

added Actinia priapus of Tilesius. The description which

Tilesius gives of this Kamtchatkian form, though given at some

length and accompanied with numerous figures, leaves one in

considerable doubt as to its actual affinites. The figures of

the entire animal given in his Pl. XIV, certainly resemble very

creatly large specimens of JZ dianthus, especially those con-

tained in the present collection, and I should have little hesita-

tion in identifying with that species were it not for Fig. 1, of Pl.

XV, which suggests a Thalassianthan character for the ten-

tacles. Andres has accepted this figure as representing the

true structure of the tentacles and has assigned the form to a

new genus Dendractinia, placing it however among the Actiniae

incertae sedis. It seems to me quite probable however that the

structure of the disc shown in Pl. XV, Fig. 1, is not natural

but has been made by dissection, the figure being ofa dissected

specimen. In the text (p. 407) Tilesius says that the disk ‘in

quinque vel sex ramos, ramulos et surculos papilliferos villi-

ferosve divisus et subdivisus est, ita, ut peripheria disci a numer-

osissimis tentaculorum fasciculis formetur.’”’ This might be

taken as confirming the accuracy of Fig. 1, but earlier in the

paper (p. 396) be divides Actiniz into two groups, of which the

first contains “‘actinias disco diviso, scilicet in ramos ramulos

et surculos tentacula efformantes’”’ and includes Actinza plumosa,

Miller, Priapus polypus Forskal, Actinia effoeta Baster and

Actinia priapus. The same description then which he applies

to the tentacles of A. priapus serves also for A. plumosa, and

this, taken in connection with the figures in Pl. XIV, seems to

me to render exceedingly probable the identity of Actua

priapus with Metridium dianthus. It may also be mentioned

that from what we now know of the distribution of JZ. dianthus

there is reaaon to expect its occurrence on Kamtchatkian shores,

while, on the hand, the occurrence of a Thalassianthid is not to

be expected, since, so far as at present known, such forms are

essentially tropical in their distribution.

Finally I may add, that if the identification of A. priapus

be correct, itis possible that Brandt’s A. farcimen (35) may also

be a synonym.

14 McMURRICH

Family CRIBRINID.

Synonyms.—Bunodide. Gosse, 1858.

Tealide. R. Hertwig, 1882.

Bunodactide. Verrill, 1890.

Actiniine with adherent base, with a strong circumscribed

endodermal sphincter; usually with the column more or less

verrucose and frequently with acrorhagi at the margin, these,

however, never being ramose or frondose. Perfect mesenteries

usually numerous and gonophoric. No cinclides or acontia.

I have ventured to employ a new term for the family to which

Gosse originally applied the name Bunodide. The change

I have regarded as necessary on the ground that the family

name should be a derivative from the name of the typical genus ;

my reasons for adopting Cribrina as the name for the typical

genus are based upon a strict interpretation of the rules of pri-

ority and are as follows: | or

The family Bunodidz was instituted by Gosse (’58) with the

genus Bunodes (established in 1855) as its type, though previously

Milne-Edwards had separated all actinians with verrucose

column wall to form his group of actinines verruqueuses. Gosse

took as the type of his new genus 4. gemmacea, a form which

had long been known and has been referred by Ehrenberg in

1834, to the subgenus Cribrina. An interesting question of

priority here arises. The first species mentioned by Ehrenberg

under the genus Cribrina, is this very one, and following the

rule, it would be taken as the type of the genus. Haddon, how-

ever, has adduced reasons (’89) for believing that Ehrenberg

regarded the fifth species which he included under Cribrina,

namely, the Prrapus polypus of Forskal, as the type, and for this

reason retains Gosse’s genus. The genus Bunodes certainly

cannot be retained, since, as Verrill has pointed out (’99), the

term had already been applied in 1854 to a genus of Euryp-

teroidea, and it seems better under the circumstances to con-

sistently apply the rule and disregard Ehrenberg’s possible or

one might even say probable intention rather than introduce an

entirely new term, such as Bunodactis, proposed by Verrill

REPORT ON THE HEXACTINIA 15

(99). The genus Bunodella established by Verrill (99, p. 43)

has already been withdrawn by him (’99, p. 146) and need not

be considered here, and the genus Evactis, also established by

Verrill, is discussed later, and I need merely state here that after

an examination of the type species, £. artemisia, Pickering, I

see no reason for regarding it as distinct from Cribrina.

In 1834 Ehrenberg established a subgenus Urticina with the

A. crassicomis of Miller as the type and later Gosse (’58) estab-

lished for the same form the genus Tealia. The priority of

Ehrenberg’s term is generally admitted and consequently the

use of Hertwig’s name Tealiidz for the family is inadmissibie

since Tealia is a nomen delendum.

I shall have occasion later to discuss another group of

generic terms namely Anthopleura Duch. & Mich., Aulactinia

Verrill, 4#geon Gosse and Bunodosoma Verrill, and may state

here simply my belief that they cannot be separated but must

all be included under the title Anthopleura.

_ The genus Phymactis M. Edw. (’57) has usually been re-

garded as a Cribrinid (Bunodid), Haddon, I believe, being the

first to suggest that it might possibly be more correctly referred

to the family Aliciide. Carlgren in a recent paper (’99) has

published the result of his studies of P. clematzs (Drayton), of

which he finds Milne-Edwards’ type species P. florida (Drayton)

to be a synonym, and shows that Haddon was correct in his

suggestion. I may add that I can confirm Carlgren’s conclu-

sions both as to the reference of the genus to the Aliciide and

as to the synonymy of the two species mentioned, but may

point out that one species, P. cavernata, which in the past has

generally been referred to the genus Phymactis, must be re-

moved from this genus and referred to Anthopleura. Verrill

has practically already (99) made the transfer, since he has in-

cluded the species in his genus Bunodosoma.

With regard to the remaining genera which have been re-

ferred to the family little may be said, as for the most part too little

is known of them to allow of certainty as to their true positions.

I have already (’97) suggested the reference of Gyractis Boveri,

to the Bunodide a suggestion which has been accepted by

16 McMURRICH

Haddon. Carlgren’s Isotealia (99) must be allowed to stand

for the present on account of the imperfect information in our

possession concerning Hertwig’s Leiotealia (’82) with which it is

possibly identical, and Haddon’s Ixalactis (’98) and Klunzinger’s

Thelactis (’77) will also stand as somewhat aberrant members of

the family though it must be confessed that at present we are

entirely in the dark as to the true systematic position of The-

lactis as we are also to that of Physactis Verrill (’69), the last

named genus being quite probably really an Aliciid, somewhat

similar to Haddon’s A. vhadina (98). The genus Epiactis

(Verrill 69) is considered further on. |

Finally there remain to be considered Pseudophellia Verrill

(99), Tealiopsis Danielssen ('90) and Epigonactis Verrill (99).

Danielssen refers his Zealzopsis polaris to R. Hertwig’s Tealidz

without however giving any definite evidence ofits possessing the

qualifications necessary for admission to that family; it may

possess a circumscribed endodermal sphincter but neither in the

text nor figuresis there any indication of the existence of such a

structure. If it does occur, then there seems to me a probability

of Verrill’s Pseudophellia being identical with Tealiopsis ; it is im-

possible at present to speak with certainty on this point, however.

Verrill’s Epigonactis was established quite recently (’99) for two

species which closely resemble each other and are not a little sug-

gestive of Urticina crassicornis from which they are distinguished

however by possessing on the surface of the column depressions

which serve as ‘“‘ brood-pouches.’’ With regard to the systema-

tic value of this peculiarity I am exceedingly sceptical and be-

lieve that judgment on the admissibility of the genus must be

suspended until a more detailed description accompanied with

figures showing the structural details has appeared.

My views as to the relationships of the various aes men-

tioned above may be briefly expressed thus:

Cribrina, Ehr.—Synonyms, Bunodes Gosse, Evactis Verrill,

Bunodactis Verrill, Bunodella Verrill.

Urticina, Ehr.—Synonyms, Tealia Gosse, possibly Epigonactis

Verrill.

Anthopleura, Duch. & Mich.—Synonyms, Aulactinia Verrill,

Azgeon Gosse, Bunodosoma Verrill.

REPORT ON THE HEXACTINIZAD 17

Leiotealia, Hertwig.

Isotealia, Carlgren—possibly a synonym of Leiotealia.

Fpiactis, Verrill.

Gyractis, Boveri— possibly a synonym of Cribrina.

Ixalactis, Haddon.

Pseudophellia, Verrill—possibly a synonym of Tealiopsis.

? Tealiopsis, Danielssen.

? Thelactis, Klunzinger.

? Physactis, Verrill.

Representatives of the first three of these genera occur in the

collection. }

Genus CRIBRINA Ehr.

Cribrinide without true acrorhagi; usually with numerous

perfect mesenteries which are in some cases arranged on other

than a hexamerous plan; sphincter strong ; ectodermal muscu-

lature of the disk and tentacles not imbedded in the mesogleea’;

column wall destitute of an epidermal covering and provided

with verrucee arranged more or less distinctly in vertical rows ;

tentacles simple.

Rather too much attention has been devoted in the past to

the arrangement of the verrucz, in members of the Cribrinide,

whether they were arranged distinctly in vertical rows or not

and whether these rows extended all the way down the column

or only part of the way down. I plead guilty to such a misunder-

standing of the value of the verruce in an earlier paper (89) in

which, basing my identification on this feature I described as an

Aulactinia (A. ste//oides) a form which is really a Cribrina and as

a Bunodes (BL. ¢eniatus) a form which is really an Anthopleura

(A. granulifera).

It seems now that the presence of verruce, without regard to

their arrangement, is sufficient for the genus, distinguishing it at

once from Leiotealia, Epiactis and Isotealia. The absence of true

acrorhagi, characterized by a marked development of nemato-

cysts, distinguish it from Anthopleura, while the ectodermal situ-

ation of the longitudinal muscles of the tentacles and of the radial

muscles of the disc may serve as a distinction from Urticina.

ANNALS N. Y. ACAD. SclI., XIV, June 5, 1901—2.

18 McMURRICH>

From Ixalactis and Pseudophellia it is readily separated by the

simplicity of the tentacles and by the absence of an epidermal

covering to the column wall.

2. Cribrina elegantissima (Brandt)

Synonyms.—Actinia (Taractostephanus) elegantissima, Brandt.

? Urticina crassicornis, Verrill.

The identification of the species here described with Brandt's

A. elegantissima is necessarily somewhat uncertain, since the

original description is not as complete as could be wished. So

far as the description goes, however, the agreement is sufficiently

close to warrant the identification.

Flabitat.—‘ A very common form on the rocks and piles”’ in

Puget Sound. (Calkins.)

External form.—The base is circular and adherent. The

column is almost cylindrical (Figs. 7 and 8) and in its upper

part is provided with vertical rows of verrucae, which become

obsolete towards the base. Some of the rows extend much

farther down the column than others, and according to their

length, about four sets can be distinguished, of which the third

and fourth sets are much shorter than the other’ two. The

lower part of the column is ridged transversely probably as the

result of contraction. A well-defined margin is present, anda

distinct interval exists between it and the bases of the outermost

tentacles.

These are short, rather blunt at the apex and all finely ridged

longitudinally. They appear to be arranged in about five cycles,

though their total number does not agree with what would be

expected from such an arrangement; as will be seen later there

are irregularities in the arrangement of the mesenteries which

probably explain the irregularities of the tentacles. The disk

is marked by fine radiating furrows and is slightly concave, the

peristome being prominent. In two of the specimens the stom-

atodzum is somewhat evaginated and it can be seen that its

walls are longitudinally ridged. Two siphonoglyphes seem to

be present as a rule, though sometimes irregular in position,

and in one individual there were three, and in another only one.

REPORT ON THE HEXACTINILE 19

Color.—The specimens when I received them were in formalin

and showed a distinct green coloration in the upper part of the

column, while the lower part was a dingy white. On transfer-

ring them to alcohol the green coloration gradually disappeared,

the pigment to which it was due being evidently soluble in that

medium. In life the coloration, according to Dr. Calkins’ de-

scription, was quite brilliant. He says, ‘The ground color is

bright green while rows of bright red vary it. Each tentacle is

colored in the middle by a ring of brown and the tip is of the

same color. They are very gorgeous”’ (Fig. 8).

Brandt’s description of the coloration of his A. elegantisstina

is as follows: ‘Red, green, blue or fuscous, or even green

spotted with purple. Disc olivaceous, striated with white.

Tentacles white, purple at the tips and marked at the middle

by a purple band.’’ Comparing this with Dr. Calkins’ de-

scription a decided similarity is noticeable, Brandt’s account,

however, indicating considerable variation in the color of the

column. The markings of the tentacles Calkins describes as

brown, while Brandt states that they are purple, a discrepancy

perhaps due to variation, or perhaps to the uncertain way in

which the term purple is frequently used. In both descriptions

the arrangement of the markings is identical.

Szze.—The three specimens sent me were all apparently small,

measuring 3, 1.6 and 2.5 cm. in height, and 3, 3, and 1.5 cm.

in breadth, respectively. Dr. Calkins in his notes says that

some individuals ‘are of large size, five or six inches long and

three or four in diameter, and Brandt’s statement regarding the

size is ‘Corpus magnum.” The inner tentacles have a length

of about 0.4—0.5 cm., while the outer ones seem to be slightly

longer.

Structure.—TVhe verrucze are hollow outpouchings of the

column wall (Fig. 9). The circular musculature of the col-

umn is well developed in the intervals between the verrucz

and is supported upon branched mesoglceal processes, which

are frequently grouped together in bunches arising from a

common base. The walls of the verrucal outpouchings are,

however, almost destitute of musculature, except at the very

20 McMURRICH

summit of the pouch. Here a small number of muscle proc-

esses may be seen projecting from the inner surface of the

mesoglcea, which is here slightly thickened. The ectoderm

over the summits of the verruce is similar to that described for

the verruce of Cereus pedunculatus by von Heider (77) and

for those of Phymanthus crucifer by myself (’89), the layer of

cells at the base of the epithelium in the latter form being also

present here. Indeed, the only difference between the structure

of the verrucz of the present species and those of Phymanthus

is the existence of a special. musculature on the endodermal

surface of the summits of the papillz in the former.

The sphincter, which occurs below the fosse intervening be-

tween the margin and the bases of the outermost tentacles, is of

the circumscribed pedunculate bipinnate variety ' (Fig. 10), and

is strong. The ectodermal musculature of the disc is well de-

veloped, the processes of mesoglcea which support it anastomos-

ing somewhat to form a reticulum, a condition intermediate be-

tween the typical ectodermal and the mesoglceal arrangements

being thus produced (Fig. 11). Transverse sections of the

tentacles show that their ectodermal musculature is also well

developed, but no anastomoses of the mesoglceal processes

occur (Fig. 12).

The walls of the stomatodeum are thrown into well-marked

longitudinal ridges and are richly supplied with glands, except

‘It seems advisable that certain terms should be agreed upon for the descrip-

tion of the principal varieties of endodermal and mesoglceal sphincters. So far as

the endodermal are concerned, the terms ‘‘ diffuse ’’? and ‘ circumscribed,’’ already

in general use, serve to divide them into two groups; but a further subdivision of

the circumscribed forms would be useful. I would suggest as a first subdivision

that those which arise by a number of main branches from the column mesoglcea,

as in Myonanthus ambiguus and Oulactis californica for example, be grouped as

‘*sessile,’’ while those which have a distinct peduncle be termed ‘ pedunculate.’’

The latter group may again be divided, according as the lamelle radiate from a

central mass or are inserted into an axial lamella, into ‘‘ palmate ’’ and ‘“ pinnate ’”’

varieties. Such a classification may be represented in tabular form, thus :

Endodermal sphincter... . fetus: { sessile.

( circumscribed .... 1} peduneulace ae palmate.

" (pinnate.

Such a classification is of course merely tentative and presumably imperfect, but

it may serve to some extent to obviate the long description now necessary.

REPORT ON THE HEXACTINIZ 21

in the regions of the siphonoglyphes. That irregularities occur

the arrangement of the latter structures has already been noted.

In one of the three specimens which I sectioned I found three

siphonoglyphes, while in the second individual though only two

were present they were not opposite one another, thirty-seven

pairs of mesenteries intervening between the two on one side while

on the other side there were fifty-five pairs. In the third speci-

men but a single siphonoglyphe occurred.

In connection with the siphonoglyphe a peculiarity of structure

exists. The endoderm over the general surface of the stomato-

dzeum is comparatively low and inconspicuous, but in the region

of the siphonoglyphes it suddenly becomes very high and retains

this condition over the entire surface of the grooves (Fig. 12).

I speak of the endoderm being thickened, but the appearance is

rather as if the endodermal surface of the mesoglcea were drawn

out into exceedingly fine fibrillae which anastomose with one

another to form a reticulum with elongated meshes, the endo-

dermal cells being arranged on the terminal part of the fibrillz.

The appearance presented is very similar to that which I have

described as occurring in the mesenteries of Cerianthus ameri-

canus (’90).

The individual with three siphonoglyphes had three pairs of

directives, while the one with two siphonoglyphes had corre-

spondingly two pairs unequally spaced, and the third specimen

with one siphonoglyphe had but a single pair. As might be ex-

pected from the arrangement of the directives considerable irregu-

larity occurred inthe mesenteries. In the upper part of the col-

umn each alternate pair seemed to be perfect as a rule, but lower

down seven imperfect pairs intervened in certain sectors between

successive perfect ones. It may be supposed from this that there

were typically four cycles of mesenteries, three of which were

perfect and one imperfect. The typical arrangement occurred

however only in a few sectors ; examples ofa fifth incomplete cycle

occurred here and there and in addition both imperfect and per-

fect pairs were not infrequently intercalated so that it was impos-

sible to determine even whether the arrangement was hexamer-

ous or not, although it may be supposed that in one specimen at

22 McMURRICH

least it was decamerous. To illustrate the irregularity which

exists, Fig. 1, representing the arrangement of the mesenteries

in the specimen with two siphonoglyphes a little below the mid-

dle of the stomatodzeum, 1s appended.

Attention may be called to one interesting irregularity in this

specimen, and that is the development of two pairs of mesenteries

in the endoccel of one of the perfect pairs.

The longitudinal musculature of the perfect mesenteries is

fairly well developed (Fig. 14) and there is a well-marked parieto-

basilar forming a fold upon the peripheral portion of each mesen-

tery. Both inner and outer mesenterial stomata are present.

Reproductive organs may apparently be developed on any of

the mesenteries, with the exception of the directives and of the

incomplete cycle, but in the two specimens examined minutely

with this point in view they are not distributed with perfect

regularity, some mesenteries of every cycle lacking them.

There is no doubt but that in many respects of structure this

form approaches closely to Urticina crassicornis, the differences

REPORT ON THE HEXACTINIZ 33

in the arrangement of the ectodermal musculature of the disk

and tentacles and in the form of the sphincter being possibly ex-

plicable on the assumption that the specimens examined by me

were all young. I have not had the opportunity of comparing

any of the large specimens of this species with fully grown urti-

cinas, but it would seem that the irregularities in the siphono-

glyphes which occurred in all of the three specimens examined

indicate the distinctness of the species, since such irregularities

have not been found to occur in Urticina.

3. Cribrina artemisia (Pickering)

Synonym. —Actinia artemisia, Pickering in Dana.

Cereus artemisia, Milne-Edwards.

Evactis artemisia, Verrill.

Hlabitat—The individuals of this species were found at Dis-

covery Bay, the same locality from which they were originally

described by Dana (’46). They live buried in the sand, the

disk being flush with the surface in expansion, and are attached

below to valves of shells or more rarely to stones.

External Forms.—The base is adherent and the column in

contraction is club-shaped (Fig. 25). A short distance above the

limbus the column suddenly contracts and then gradually en-

larges again until above it may equal or exceed the base in

diameter. In all three specimens which I had for examination

the tentacles and disk were completely hidden and the upper

extremity of the column presented an almost flat surface, slightly

depressed towards the center. The appearance presented by

these specimens little resembles accordingly the figure given by

Dana, but it must be remembered that this figure is of an ex-

panded individual. Dana describes the column as being en-

larged at its middle and contracted more or less above and be-

low. It is probable that in the preserved specimens the upper

contracted portion is completely involuted, and the enlarged ex-

tremity corresponds to the middle enlargement of the expanded

form: -*

The column in its lower part is horizontally rugose, evi-

dently as the result of contraction, and is provided with a

24 McMURRICH

number of rather low tubercles arranged in about twelve lon-

gitudinal rows, the individual tubercles of each row being

separated by considerable intervals. Higher up, where the

column begins to enlarge, the rows are more numerous, and

at the upper part, the tubercles become decidedly papilliform.

They are arranged in about 96 rows and have particles of sand

and shell adhering to them, their verrucal nature being thus

demonstrated.

By dividing the column longitudinally, it became evident

that there were no acrorhagi, the papillae of the margin being

the uppermost verrucz of the longitudinal rows.

The number of the tentacles could not be determined with

certainty. They were simple, rather short and acuminate, and,

as Dana has stated, are ectacmzous. The disk and mouth

were hidden in all the specimens.

Color.—The coloration as stated in Dr. Calkins’ notes differs

a little for that described by Dana. It was “ greenish-yellow ”’

at the upper portion of the column and “ yellowish-white ”’ lower

down, while the tentacles are stated to have “scarlet or purplish

tips.”’ According to Dana, who quotes a description by Drayton

‘the general color of the exterior of the body is a yellowish-

green. The tubercles have adark sap-green color ; they become

obsolete below, yet the green line continues to the base of the

animal. The colors of the tentacles are various and shaded

like those of the prism; the disk is dull greenish, becoming

darker towards the base of the tentacles, and the mouth is flesh-

colored.”

Szze.—In the preserved specimens the base measured 2.5 cm.

in diameter. The column a short distance above the limbus,

at its narrowest point, measured I cm. in diameter, but above it

equalled the diameter of the base or even reached a diameter of

2.8cm. The height of the column was about 6.0 cm.

The inner tentacles were about 0.5 cm. in length, while the

outer ones measured 0.65-0.7 cm. For the expanded animal,

Dana gives the greatest diameters of the column as about 5.5 cm.

(2% inches), while the outer tentacles he states to have been

2.5 cm. (1 inch) in length and the inner ones 1.25 cm.(% inch).

REPORT ON THE HEXACTINLE 25

Internal Structure—The mesogloea of the column wall is,

relatively to the size of the individuals, rather thin and is pro-

vided with a well-developed circular musculature, whose general

appearance resembles that of C. elegantissima. Inthe upper part

of the column, however, it is comparatively poorly developed,

and also on the inner walls of the evaginations which produce

the verruce, being entirely wanting at the apex of these.

The sphincter (Fig. 18) is large and is of the pedunculate bi-

pinnate type, the lateral lamellz of one side being, however,

stronger than those of the other so that it is properly described

as unequally bipinnate. In one of the three specimens a deep

incisure occurred on one side of the sphincter, reaching almost

to the median axis and giving the section of the sphincter a

reniform outline. This was wanting, however, in the other two

in which the sphincters were oval in section.

The tentacles are not ridged and have a well-developed, though

simple, ectodermal musculature. Their endoderm, as well as

that of the disk and of the upper part of the column wall, is

richly laden with granules of black pigment, insoluble in the

reagents employed in hardening and sectioning. The ectoder-

mal musculature of the disk (Fig. 18) resembles that of the ten-

tacles, being supported on well-developed simple or but slightly

branched processes of mesoglcea.

Two siphonoglyphes are present and the walls of the stoma-

todzum are longitudinally ridged and in addition considerably

folded.

The mesenteries are arranged in four cycles and there are in

all forty-eight pairs (6, 6, 12, 24). In sections through the

upper part of the column all but those of the fourth cycle are

seen to be perfect, but below the level of the stomatodzeum the

various cycles can be distinguished by the relative breadths of

the various pairs, those of the first and second cycles being how-

ever nearly similar in this respect. The mesenteries of’ the

fourth cycle do not bear mesenterial filaments and there are two

pairs of directives, placed symmetrically.

The longitudinal musculature is well developed (Fig. 19),

covering almost half of the non-gonophoric portion of the

26 McMURRICH

mesenteries and ending somewhat abruptly at either edge. At

the outer edge a mesogloeal process, stronger than usual, is

developed and from it a number of mesoglceal processes arise.

The parieto-basilar muscles form a distinct fold on the lower

portions of the mesenteries, and the basilar is fairly well devel-

oped, having the appearance shown in Pl. III, Fig. 20.

Both the inner and outer mesenterial stomata are present,

and all the mesenteries, with the exception of those of the

fourth cycle and the directives, bear reproductive organs.

From the examination of this species it has seemed to me

impossible to separate it from the genus Cribrina. Verrill (’69)

has established for its reception the genus Evactis characterized

by possessing pores in the column wall as well as verruce and

by the tentacles being ectacmzous.. I have not been able in

sections to discover any distinct pores in the column wall and

am inclined to believe that the emission of jets of water ‘as

from a watering pot’’ which has been observed, was through

minute ruptures of the wall, the mesoglcea being comparatively

thin especially in the upper part of the column. If this be

correct, little importance can be attributed to their power of

ejecting water. The tentacles of C. artemisia are, indeed,

ectacmzous but in every other respect the form has the typical

structural characteristies of a Cribrina, and it seems advisable

to regard the ectacmzous arrangement of the tentacles as a

specific rather than as a generic peculiarity.

Genus Urticina Ehrenberg.

Cribrinide without true acrorhagi; with numerous perfect

mesenteries frequently arranged decamerously;_ sphincter

strong ; ectodermal musculature of the disk and tentacles im-

bedded in the mesoglcea; column wall destitute of an epider-

mal covering, and usually provided with verrucze arranged

more or less definitely in vertical series ; tentacles simple.

The synonymy of this genus has been recorded by Andres

(83) and more recently by Carlgren (’93). As at present un-

derstood it includes but a single species, A. crasstcornis, a fact

REPORT ON THE HEXACTINLE > G7

which renders the establishment of a final definition exceed-

ingly uncertain.

The name Urticina was originally applied by Ehrenberg

(34) to a subdivision of his subgenus Actinia Isacmaa, and in-

cluded numerous forms now assigned to other genera. It was

not until much later that the genus became at all definitely

limited and then it was under the name Tealia, proposed by

Gosse in 1858. The essential peculiarity of the genus accord-

ing to the definition given by Gosse, was that the verrucze were

‘scattered irregularly over the column wall and were not ar-

ranged in vertical series, and this supposed characteristic was gen-

erally accepted by succeeding authors. Messrs.G. Y.and A. F.

Dixon (’89) pointed out that this peculiarity does not really ex-

ist, the verrucz being really in vertical series, though the regu-

larity of the arrangement is not always readily perceivable, and

Carlgren (’93) has called attention to the same fact. The

original distinguishing peculiarity which separated the genus

from Cribrina being thus disposed of, both the Dixons and

Carlgren found a new distinction in the decamerous arrange-

ment of the mesenteries, the former authors, indeed, going so

far as to suggest that this peculiarity was worthy of being

raised to the dignity of a family characteristic.

To establish a genus on its decamerism seems to me, in view

of what we now know concerning departures from hexamerism

in the Hexactiniz, to place it-on an exceedingly insecure

foundation. And that this is true in the present case has been

recently shown by Verrill (’99, p. 216, note) who states that he

found ‘‘ many specimens [ of Urticina crassicornis] hexamerous

both as to tentacles and mesenteries ; many others decamerous ;

some octamerous ; anda few irregular or unequally developed

on opposite sides.”’ A careful study of the mesenteries of the

individuals contained in the present collection reveals in no

case a perfect decamerism, but an irregular arrangement which

appears, however, to be based on adecamerism. Consequently

we may, I believe, hold the character of decamerism to be in-

sufficient for the characterization of the genus, and if it is to

be maintained distinct from Cribrina, we must seek for other

peculiarities.

28 McMURRICH

As the definition I have given above suggests, such a distinc-

tion may possibly be found in the enclosure of the longitudinal

musculature of the tentacles and the radial musculature of the

disk in the mesogloea, an arrangement which seems to be ab-

sent in typical Cribrinas. It must be remembered, however,

that as in the case of C. elegantissimus described above, transi-

tional conditions between what is found in Urticina and in typ-

ical Cribrinas occur, and the absolute value of such a char-

acteristic is accordingly open to question. Personally I am

somewhat inclined to regard the distinctness of Urticina from

Cribrina as not proven, but prefer to await the discovery either

of additional species clearly belonging to the former genus

or of transitional forms which will clearly bridge over such

differences as may appear to exist between the two.

4. Urticina crassicornis (Miller) Ehr.

[For the synonymy of this species vide Andres (’83) and

Carlgren (93). ]

Several specimens of this form, which has previously been

described for the West Coast by Verrill (°69), occur in the col-

lection and show considerable variation in their external char-

acters.

Flabitat.—The majority of the specimens were found attached

to stones under wharves and accordingly in shallow water.

Two, however, were found imbedded in sand to a depth of six

inches or a foot, being attached below to stones. This habit

does not seem to be a usual one for the species but Dic-

quemare (’73) has described it for individuals obtained by him

at Havre, and Teale (’37) speaks of individuals being partly

buried in sand on the coast of Yorkshire.

Lixternal Form.—It does not seem necessary to give a de-

tailed description of this well-known form, but mention should

be made of certain peculiarities presented by the various speci-

mens:.. And first-as regards:the verruce. These mm allethe

specimens were distinctly in vertical series, but their distribution

varied somewhat. In some specimens they were large and

REPORT ON THE HEXACTINIZ#& 29

somewhat irregular in shape and were distributed over the en-

tire surface of the column, those towards both the margin and

the limbus being, however, smaller than those situated in the

intervening region. In others again they became obsolete above,

occurring on only the lower two-thirds or three-quarters of the

column and in one specimen they occurred only on the lower

half of the body, those at the limbus in this case being rel-

atively very small, while those above were larger, about I mm.

in diameter, but were more scattered, that is to say were

separated from one another by larger intervals than usual. In

the arenicolous specimens again the verruce were limited to the

upper third of the column, not extending upwards, however,

quite as far as the margin, and the lower portion of the body

presented no signs of them, except very faint indications im-

mediately above the limbus. A further peculiarity of these

forms was that numerous particles of sand and shell were ad-

herent to the verrucose region of the column, a condition not

presented by any other specimens in the collections.

I have not access at present to all the literature dealing with

this species, but it seems evident that there is considerable vari-

ation in the distribution, size and number of the verruce in dif-

ferent individuals. As regards their distribution the verruce

may present the various conditions described above, or may be

apparently entirely absent. Toa certain extent at least these

variations as seen in preserved specimens may be due to the re-

tractibility of the verrucz, which, to quote the statement of

Teale (’37) ‘admit of retractibility to such a degree as to ren-

der the corium perfectly smooth, so that the small opaque spot

alone indicates their former situation ; they also can be protruded

to nearly a line in length, when they bear a close resemblance to

rudimentary tentacula. The eminences on one side are often

seen in the utmost degree of protrusion, whilst, on the other,

they are scarcely perceptible.’”’ In some of the present speci-

mens, ‘‘the small opaque spots’’ mentioned by Teale and due

to the peculiar structure of the epithelium of the summits of the

verruce, could be perceived on those portions of the column

which appeared to be destitute of verrucz, but this was not the

30 McMURRICH

case in the arenicolous individuals. The extent of the protru-

sion of the verrucz together with the amount of contraction of

the column would bring about variations in the proximity of the

verruce, which are frequently described as being separated from

one another, though in the present specimens they are so

closely approximated as to be in some cases more or less

quadrangular in outline, owing to mutual contact. So too the

amount of protrusion will produce variations in their size; in

all the specimens of the present collection the verrucze about the

middle of the column are larger than those above and below,

but in the different individuals the size of the largest ones vary,

being as much as over I mm. in diameter in some specimens,

while in others they are less than half that size.

I have discussed these varieties of the verrucae somewhat at

length because they serve to illustrate very pointedly the un-

certainty of taking external peculiarities alone as a basis for

specific distinctions. When I first examined the specimens of

the present collection I regarded the arenicolous forms as quite

distinct from the others and it was only after I had studied the

internal structure of both that I became certain of their identity.

One other point in the external structure I may refer to

briefly namely, the arrangement of the tentacles. The decamer-

ism is fairly well pronounced, but never perfect: thus in one

specimen is which an accurate count was made there were 133

tentacles only, instead of the 160 which might be expected. The

variations of the tentacles however being associated with the

arrangement of the mesenteries, need not be discussed in detail

and I mention it merely on account of the importance which has

been assigned to it by Cunningham (89).

Color.—All the specimens collected were uniform in color

throughout the column, and were either red or orange brown

(the ‘color of an over ripe banana”’ Calkins). The arenicolous

forms were of a bright vermilion color, with paler tentacles, and

their appearance when dug from the sand has been so graphic-

ally described by Dr. Calkins that I quote his description. ‘‘ They

look very much like a tomato baked in bread crumbs. They

have the same wrinkled appearance of the skin, while the ap-

el ——

REPORT ON THE HEXACTINIZ 31

pearance of the bread crumbs is given by the numerous small

pieces of shell attached to the upper end.”’ The tentacles in

some of the specimens at least were banded with color. Al-

though none of the specimens showed any traces of green in

their coloration, yet such varieties have been described from the

West Coast. Verrill (69) has described them, and one of the

drawings of Mr. Agassiz is evidently of an individual of this

species in which the color of the column is grass green ir-

‘regularly blotched with deep red, the tentacles being pinkish,

with a dark red banda short distance above the base. The

drawing shows no indication of warts in the lower portion of the

column; whether or not they were present on the upper part

cannot be determined since it is hidden by the tentacles.

Size.-—All the specimens were of a goodly size, the smallest

measuring about 4.5 cm. in height and diameter while the

largest was 7.5 cm. in height and 5.5 cm. in diameter. Dr.

Calkins describes one of the specimens as having in life a

height of 7.5 cm. and a diameter of 5.0 cm. while another he

describes as reaching a height of 12.5 cm.

L[nternal Structure.—\ have found some variation in the form

of the sphincter in the Puget Sound specimens. Its general

appearance in the majority of the individuals examined resembles

closely the condition figured by the Hertwigs (’79), that is to

say, the mesogloeal lamellz radiate out for a central mass of

mesogloea, sometimes more or less homogeneous in appearance,

sometimes showing more or less clearly its origin by fusion of the

basal portions of the lamellz. In all my preparations, however,

the lamella are much more numerous and much more delicate

than figured by the Hertwigs, a condition also noted by Carl-

eren (93) in the specimens examined by him. It may be noticed

that at one point inthe periphery of the specimen figured by the

1 Since writing the above lines I have received from Professor Verrill drawings

of a specimen tak:n at Port Townsend in 30 fathoms which is evidently the same as

the arenicolous variety of (/rticiza cra:sicornis described above. The drawing

represents the column as being of a bright scarlet color, with very numerous and

distinctly marked verrucz of a yellowish color in its upper part and with long, rather

stout tentacles of a yellowish or buff color without bands but with a certain amount

of red at the base.

32 McMURRICH

Hertwigs there is a deep incisure, extending almost to the cen-

tral core of mesoglcea; I found a similar incision, somewhat

more extensive indeed, in one specimen I examined, but in others

it was entirely wanting. Carlgren ('93) states that in the indi-

viduals he examined the arrangement of the lamellz differed

from what the Hertwigs describe in being attached at their bases

to an axial lamella instead of a solid core ; that is, he finds the

sphincter is bipinnate instead of palmate as the Hertwigs describe

it. Inasingle specimen of those I examined I found a typically

bipinnate sphincter a figure of which is given on Pl. I. (Fig. 6).

It seems accordingly that we may find in individuals of Zeala

crassicornis, either palmate or pinnate sphincters, the latter prob-

ably representing what may be considered a persistence of an

embryonic condition from which the palmate is derived by a

fusion of the basal portions of the lateral lamelle.

As to the arrangement of the musculature of the mesenteries

and of the tentacles and disk I find nothing to add to the de-

scriptions given by Carlgren.

It is well known that the mesenteries of U. crassicornis are

arranged more or less perfectly on a decamerous plan. In

none of the specimens I have examined, however, is the total

number of mesenteries an exact multiple of ten; thus in one

specimen there were altogether 81 pairs of mesenteries, in an-

other 91, and in another 104. The variation from the typical

number depends on irregularities in the development of the

younger series of mesenteries. Thus in the three specimens

just referred to the first three cycles were regularly decamerous,

their formula being 10, 10, 20, but considerable irregularity oc-

curred in the succeeding cycles. Thus in the specimen with a

total of 81 pairs the fourth cycle was completely developed ex-

cept that in a primary interspace on one side of one of the di-

rective pairs there were only two representatives of it instead of

four, the two pairs which were lacking being those nearest the

pair of directives. To compensate for this diminution in the

total number, in another primary interspace there were two ac-

cessory pairs of mesenteries which may be regarded as repre-

sentatives of a fifth cycle, and in still another interspace there

REPORT ON THE HEXACTINIZ 33

was a single additional pair of this fifth cycle. In the individual

with a total of 91 pairs irregularities occurred in only two of

the primary interspaces. The fourth cycle was completely de-

veloped so that there were 10, 10, 20, 40 = 80 pairs of regular

mesenteries ; and in addition I1 pairs representing a fifth cycle.

Eight of these were situated in a primary interspace next one

of the directive pairs and alternated in a regular manner with

BPiGsTi:

the pairs of the older cycles; the other three occurred in the

middle lateral interspace of the other side of the body, one of

them intervening between the primary mesenteries on one side

of the interspace and the succeeding member of the fourth

cycle, while the other two alternated with the fourth cycle pair

next the primary pair on the other side of the interspace. Fin-

ally in the individual with 104 pairs there are again four cycles

regularly developed ; in a primary interspace next one of the

ANNALS N. Y. ACAD. Sci., XIV, June 5, 1901—3.

34 McMURRICH

directive pairs there are 8 pairs of a fifth cycle regularly ar-

ranged and in the interspace lateral to this there are two pairs

of the fifth cycle. In each the two interspaces on the other

side of the same directives there is a single pair of the fifth

cycle, and in the middle lateral interspace of this same side of

the body there are 8 pairs of the fifth cycle and in addition 6 rep-

resentatives of a sixth cycle. The arrangement in this speci-

men is shown in the annexed figure, from which it may be seen

that Carlgren’s law that the mesenteries of the last cycle develop

earliest in the interspaces adjoining the oldest pairs already pres-

ent, is complied with.

The mesenteries of the first cycle are complete throughout

the entire length of the stomatodzeum; those of the second

cycle are also complete, but are not attached so far down the

stomatodeum as the members of the first cycle, while those

of the third cycle reach the stomatodzum only in its upper-

most part. The fourth, fifth and sixth cycles are incomplete.

All the members of the first two cycles are sterile, the repro-

ductive organs being borne apparently by the members of the

third and fourth cycles. Both oral and marginal mesenterial

stomata are present, the latter usually quite small.

Finally a word as to the synonymy of the West Coast speci-

mens of U. crassicornis. As already stated, Verrill (69) was

the first to correctly identify this species from the West Coast of

America, and he records its occurrence in Puget Sound, and in

the Arctic Ocean north of Behring Straits, while Murdoch (’85),

found it at Point Barrow. Verrill in his list of synonyms in-

cludes, with some doubt however, the A. Laurent and the

A. elegantissima of Brandt (’35) obtained in Behring Sea and

at Sitka; Andres regards these two forms as being species

delendeé on account of the insufficiency of their descriptions. I

believe, however, that there are sufficient grounds for identify-

ing the A. Laurent with U. crassicornis, though I think Verrill

was probably in error in likewise identifying the A. e/egan-

“asstma with that species, since I have found in the present col-

lection forms, described in preceding pages, which seem to

agree with Brandt’s description. I may say that I made an

a UE See.

REPORT ON THE HEXACTINLZE 35

endeavor to ascertain if any of the specimens collected by

Mertens were still in existence, but the endeavor proved futile.

Genus ANTHOPLEURA, Duch. & Mich.

In 1860 Duchassaing & Michelotti established the genus

Anthopleura for a Cribrinid characterized by possessing verruce

arranged in longitudinal rows and with tentaculiform acrorhagi.

In a later paper (’64) they added to the original single species,

A. Krebst upon which the genus was founded, other forms, one

of which at least possessed lobed acrorhagi, altering at the

same time the definition of the genus so that it became rather

indefinite. In 1864 Verrill established a genus Aulactinia for a

Cribrinid also possessing verruce arranged in longitudinal

rows though becoming obsolete below and having prominent

acrorhagi which were distinctly lobed. The later action of

Duchassaing and Michelotti in including in their genus a form

with lobed verruce led Verrill in 1869 to suggest the possi-

bility of the identity of the two genera, but Andres (’83), going

back to first principles, recognizes both, placing the forms with

simple acrorhagi in the genus Anthopleura, while those in

which they are distinctly lobed he refers to Aulactinia. Verrill

in his most recent papers (’99) considers the two genera dis-

tinct and adds a third Bunodosoma to which he refers the A.

granulifera of Lesueur and his Bunodes cavernata, and which he

characterizes by possessing lobulated acrorhagi and verruce

which are not adhesive.

It does not seem to me that the simplicity or lobulation of

the acrorhagi is a feature worthy of generic importance when we

find as much general similarity in such forms as Avdactinia capi-

tata, Anthopleura granulifera and Bunodosoma cavernata, all of

which forms I have had the opportunity of studying. /<\s to

whether the adhesiveness of the verrucze may prove tobea

feature of generic importance, I feel more uncertain, but at pres-

ent am inclined to deny it that value.

The genus A®geon described by Gosse (’65) seems to be un-

doubtedly identical with Aulactinia and need not be discussed.

I would then define the genus Anthopleura as follows :

36 McMURRICH

Genus ANTHOPLEURA Duch. & Mich.

Synonyms.—Aulactinia, Verrill, 1864.

“Egeon, Gosse, 1865.

Bunodosoma, Verrill, 1899.

Cribrinidz with true acrorhagi, usually with numerous per-

fect mesenteries, sphincter strong, column destitute of an epi-

dermal covering and provided with verruce arranged more or

less definitely in vertical series, tentacles simple.

5. Anthopleura xanthogrammuica (Brandt)

Synonym.—Actinia (Taractostephanus) xanthogrammica, Brandt, 1835.

This species was found in only one locality, under the slaughter

house at Port Townsend, but it occurred there in large num-

bers. An excellent figure of it is among the drawings kindly

lent me by Mr. Agassiz, the individual figured having been ob-

tained at San Francisco. Dr. Calkins states that evidences of

multiplication by fission were not unfrequent among the Port

Townsend specimens.

External Form.—The base is adherent. The column (PL. II,

Fig. 17) is provided with rows of tuberculiform verruce, to

which particles of sand and small stones adhere and which are

arranged in distinct vertical rows extending to the limbus as a

rule, though in the upper part of the column shorter rows alter-

nate with the longer ones. The margin is separated by a dis-

tinct though shallow fosse from the bases of the outermost ten-

tacles, and from the margin of the outer wall of the fosse there

project blunt processes, one of which corresponds to the summit

of each row of verruce (Fig. 19, a,c). These are undoubtedly

acrorhagi. They are much more distinct in some of the pre-

served individuals than in others and, indeed, may be more

prominent at one portion of the margin than at another in the

same individual, here appearing as mere hemispherical elevations

and there as distinct blunt tentaculiform projections, or again

having a distinctly lobed form.

The tentacles in the preserved specimens are very moderate

in length, conical and rather obtusely pointed. In Mr. Agassiz’s

drawing they are represented however as rather long and slender,

REPORT ON THE HEXACTINIZ 37

while in that by Dr. Calkins they agree more with the condition

in the preserved specimens. They are quite smooth and are ar-

ranged in about four cycles and are fairly numerous, though I

did not succeed in making an accurate enumeration of them.

The disk is smooth and somewhat concave and the peristome

slightly elevated. The lips are ridged and there are two rather

feebly marked gonidial grooves in the specimens examined.

Color.—Dr. Calkins describes the individuals obtained by him

as being ‘“‘crystalline”’ in appearance with “ pink-tipped tenta-

cles.” The drawing which accompanied his notes (Fig. 17)

shows the column, disk and bases of the tentacles to be faintly

greenish-yellow, the tips of the tentacles being the only brightly

colored portions of the animal. Mr. Agassiz’s drawing, which

is undoubtedly of the same species, represents the column as

being of a bright green color, the disk of a dark olive green ; this

color extending upon the bases of the tentacles, being there suc-

ceeded by a yellow band, beyond which the tentacles are of a

bright pink.

Size.—The preserved specimens sent me measured 1.0—1.5

cm. in height and about the same in diameter. Dr. Calkins

states that the largest individuals ‘“‘ when expanded, measured

fully three inches across the crown, but the average was much

less.”

Structure.—A longitudinal section of the column wall re-

sembles closely what I have described and figured for Cribrina

elegantissima. The tubercles differ from those of C7zbrina only

in the absence of a special development of endodermal muscles

at their summits and in the presence of a distinct though fine

band of nerve fibers in the basal portion of the modified ectoderm.

The sphincter is situated upon the floor of the fosse, just in-

ternal to the acrorhagi. It is oval in section and is of the pe-

dunculate palmate variety (Fig. 22). The ectoderm of the

acrorhagi is abundantly supplied with nematocysts, whereby they

can readily be distinguished from tentacles in section. In these

latter the longitudinal musculature is not imbedded in the mes-

ogloea and resembles in appearance that of C. elegantissima, as

does also the radiating musculature of the disk, though here the

38 McMURRICH

reticular arrangement of the mesoglceal processes cannot be

distinguished as clearly as in that form.

The stomatodzum is longitudinally ridged and in the speci-

mens examined was provided with two siphonoglyphes, which

have the same structure as those of C. elegantissima.

The arrangement of the mesenteries is somewhat irregular.

Apparently an hexamerous arrangement is the basis, the pri-

maries, secondaries and tertiary cycles being perfect, the last to

a less extent than the others. A fourth cycle is also present

and is complete, but there are in addition representatives of a

fifth and even of a sixth cycle irregularly distributed, a distur-

bance of the symmetry being thus produced.

Both the outer and inner stomata are present. The longitu-

dinal musculature is well developed and in sections of the per-

fect mesenteries about half way down the column terminates at

its outer edge in a strong process from which lateral lamelle

arise (Fig. 23). Lower down this arrangement is not apparent,

the muscle processes diminishing in size toward each edge of

the muscle area. The parieto-basilar (Fig. 24) is well developed,

forming a marked fold. The basilar muscle (Fig. 25) is fairly

well developed, resembling somewhat that of C. artemusza,

though smaller in accordance with the smaller size of the speci-

mens. The tertiary mesenteries are all fertile, and, in addition,

reproductive organs occur on some of the mesenteries of the

fourth cycle.

The identification of this species with Brandt’s <Actna

ranthogrammica is suggested in the memoranda accompanying

Mr. Agassiz’ drawing, and though Brandt makes no mention of

the conspicuously pink-tipped tentacles yet it is quite possible,

indeed probable, that this is the proper identification, as it is

evident that the coloration of the species may vary considerably.

1 was for a time -inclined to identify it with )Vemilils

Anthopleura Dow, but hesitate to do so on account of the

geographical distribution of that form and the absence of data

as to its internal structure. It is evidently a highly variable

species, so far as its coloration is concerned, and it may be

noted that a specimen from Acajutla is described as having the

REPORT ON THE HEXACTINL 39

tips of the tentacles ‘dark red.” For the present, however, it

seems advisable to regard it as distinct from the present form, but

I may point out that the form described by Fewkes from Santa

Barbara as Bunodes californica is in all probability assignable to

Verrill’s species.

Genus Eptactis, Verrill.

This genus was established by Verrill in 1869 for the re-

ception of a form from Puget Sound which was characterized by

having the young adherent to the outer surface of the column.

In 1899 Verrill published a brief description of the structural

peculiarities of the type, referring it to the family Cribrinidz

(Bunodactidz) on account of its possession of a circumscribed

endodermal sphincter.

It seems doubtful whether the fact that the young adhere to

the column wall is sufficient for the establishment of a distinct

genus, but in other respects £. prolifera seems to be sufficiently

distinct from other Cribrinids to warrant the retention of the

genus. It is one of the smooth-walled genera and differs from

Leiotealia (Hertwig, ’82) in the form of the sphincter and of the

muscle pennon, while from Isotealia (Carlgren, '99) it is dis-

tinguished by the absence of pseudoacrorhagi.'

6. Epzactis prolifera, Verrill.

Synonyms.—Epiactis prolifera, Verrill, 18697.

Epiactis fertilis, Andres, 1883.

The specimens in the collection were found growing upon

the weeds and water grasses at Hadlock Harbor, Puget Sound.

External Form (Fig. 25).—The base is adherent. The column

is marked by longitudinal grooves and more distinctly with

transverse grooves and wrinkles, probably due to contraction,

1T am inclined to agree with Carlgren (’99) that the form I described (’93) as

Leiotealia badia is identical with his /sotea/ia antarctica. In looking over my prepa-

rations I notice that in some of the sections the sphincter is decidedly nearer the

margin than it isin others, though in all it is the same distance above the floor of

the fosse. This seems to indicate the existence of the pseudoacrorhagi which Carl-

gren describes. But, since my preparations were made from a small portion of a

single highly contracted individual, it seems preferable to await a reéxamination of

the type, now in the U. S. National Museum, before deciding the question.

40 McMURRICH

but otherwise it is smooth and is unprovided with verruce or

tubercles. In two of the specimens embryos were adherent to

the surface, and appeared as small, oval, pale bodies, in one

specimen arranged in a single incomplete and interrupted circle

a short distance above the limbus, a few lying a short distance

above this circle in one part of the circumference, while a single

one was attached high up on the column wall not far from the

margin (Fig. 28, Z7.). In the second specimen but one embryo

occurred, situated a short distance below the margin.

The margin is quite distinct, but smooth, except for wrinkles

produced by contraction, and it is separated by a slight fosse

from the bases of the outer tentacles. The tentacles are moder-

ately long and acuminate and are distinctly entacmeous. I

did not succeed in making a satisfactory enumeration of them,

but they are fairly numerous and appear to be arranged in five

or Siccy cles.

The disk in the only specimen in which it could be seen was

of slight extent and concave. The peristome is prominent and

the lips grooved. Two gonidial grooves were distinguishable.

Color.—According to Dr. Calkins’ description the color is a

‘bright grass green or weed green”’ striped with darker green.

Verrill apparently had no notes of the coloration of the speci-

mens he studied, but among the drawings loaned me by Mr.

Agassiz I find two which apparently represent this species.

One is undoubtedly identical though it has no embryos ad-

herent. The column is represented as bright grass green

marked with longitudinal streaks of dark brown. The disk is

very dark green with numerous radiating stripes of cream white

and the tentacles are buff with a distinct dark greerish-brown

spot at the base of each. This specimen was obtained at

Crescent City. The other specimen is less certainly identical

though having the same general external form. The column is

dark brown streaked longitudinally with lighter brown and the

tentacles are a dull grayish green. This specimen was obtained

at San Rosario.

Szze.—The living specimens measure from 1.2 to 2.5 cm. in

diameter and the largest about 1.2 cm. in height. The preserved

REPORT ON THE HEXACTINIA 4]

individuals measure I cm. on the average in height and about

1.2 cm. in diameter, the base being in all cases somewhat

larger than the column. Verrill’s measurements of preserved

specimens are identical with those just given. The tentacles

in the most expanded form I examined measured 1.3 cm. in

length but in others they were only about half that length.

Structure —The column mesogloea is thin and of a fibrous

structure and itsinner surface bears a well-developed layer of

simple muscle processes. The inner ends of the endoderm cells

are heavily laden with dense, black pigment. At the margin

the endodermal musculature becomes considerably lower and on

the inner wall of the fosse there is situated the sphincter.

In the first individual I examined this had the form shown in

Fig. 26 and was situated on the outer wall of the fosse, and

from its general appearance I was led to regard it as being meso-

gloeal and so referred the species to the family Paractide.

The publication of Verrill’s description (’99) of the structure of

the type and correspondence which I had with him on the sub-

ject induce me to examine the sphincter in other individuals

and in these I found perfect agreement with what Verrill had

described. The sphincter is of the circumscribed sessile form,

situated upon the inner wall of the fosse, and has an almost

circular form in cross-section ; the mesoglceal lamellae which

compose it are rather fine and anastomose more or less in places.

It was evident then that the first individual that I examined

either had an abnormal sphincter or else belonged to a differ-

ent species from the others. The latter possibility seems very

improbable on account of the complete similarity in other re-

spects and I conclude that the former one is correct. An

extension of the area of attachment of the sphincter and a

greater development of anastomoses of the lamellz would

readily convert the normal sphincter into the condition shown

in Fig. 26.)

1This figure is, accordingly, of interest only as representing an abnormality.

The plates were unfortunately in process of reproduction before I perceived the

error into which I had fallen and it was not possible, therefore, to replace the figure

by a represention of the normal sphincter.

42 McMURRICH

I may add that Mr. H. B. Torrey has recently informed me

that in all the specimens of &. prolifera which he has examined,

the sphincter was of the circumscribed sessile type.

In Fig. 27 is represented a section through a portion of the

column wall bearing one of the embryos. It shows that the

embryos are in an early stage of development, having just

reached the stage at which the stomatodzum (s/) is being in-

vaginated. The ectoderm of the embryo (e. ec) forms a con-

tinuous sheet completely separated at every point from the

ectoderm of the parent (ec) on which it rests, and it is evident that

the embryos are not buds, but really egg-embryos which have

become attached to the surface of the adult actinian and are

held there by the mucus (7) secreted by the numerous

ectodermal gland cells.

In the specimens which Verrill (69) originally examined and

which he has _ recently figured (’99) the attached embryos had

reached a much more advanced stage of development than those

just described, the smallest one having twelve tentacles and the

largest twenty-four. Verrill seemed inclined, in his earlier

paper, to regard the embryos as buds and states that they

‘probably derive nutriment from the parent.” In his more re-

cent account he evidently recedes somewhat from this position

and I may point out that it seems clear from what I have stated

above as to the distinct separation of the embryos from the

parent that they are not nourished by the parent in the sense

that there is any communication between the cavities of the

parent and those of the embryos.

The tentacles are thin-walled and their ectodermal muscula-

ture is but feebly developed. The radial musculature of the

disk is fairly strong in its peripheral portions, but more centrally

it is very feeble ; it is throughout ectodermal.

In the region of the lips the mesoglcea becomes considerably

thickened forming ridges corresponding to the ridges of the

stomatodeum. Occasionally, though not always, the tip of

one of the thickenings seems to be separated from its main

portion by a slight interval, producing a minute tubercle im-

mediately external to the lips. The stomatodzum is ridged and

REPORT ON, THE HEXACTINIAL 43

there are two siphonoglyphes, one of which is much deeper than

the other.

The mesenteries are arranged in four cycles with occasional

representatives of a fifth. Twelve pairs are perfect in the upper

part of the body, but a little farther down, even above the

middle of the body, only the six primary pairs reach the stoma-

todeum. There are two pairs of directives.

The longitudinal musculature of the mesenteries (Fig. 28) is

fairly well developed, but possesses no special features of in-

terest ; it gradually tapers off towards both edges and occupies

about half the muscular portion of the mesentery at the level of

the middle of the stomatodeum. ‘The parieto-basilar in its

lower part does not form a special fold, but consists of a number

of processes arising directly from the surface of the outer por-

tions of the mesenteries, but above a slight fold is visible in

some of the mesenteries as shown in Fig. 28. The basilar

muscle has the appearance represented in Fig. 29. All the

mesenteries, with the exception of those of the first and fifth

cycles, are gonophoric.

UNIVERSITY OF MICHIGAN, February 22, IgoI.

LITERATURE

Andres, A.

(oer ue Attinie

fauna u. Flora des Golfes von Neapel. Monogr. XI.

1883

Brandt, J. F.

°35 Prodromus descriptionis animalium ab H. Mertensio

observatorum., 1835

Carlgren, O.

93 ~~ Studien iiber Nordische Actinien. I

Kongl. Svensk. Vet. Akad. Handl., XXV. 1893

Carlgren, O.

‘99. «= Zoantharien. Hamburger Magalhaenische Sammelreise.

Hamburg. 1899

44 McMURRICH

Couthouy, J. P.

38. = Descriptions of new species of Mollusca and Shells, and

remarks on several Polyps found in Massachusetts Bay

Boston Journ. Nat. Hiist., UW. 1838

Cunningham, J. T.

89s Tealia tuberculata, a study in Synonomy

Journ. Marine Biolog. Assoc., N. S., 1. 1889

Dana, J. D.

46 Zoophytes. United States Exploring Expedition. Phila-

delphia. 1846

Dawson, J. W.

58 On Sea-Anemones and Hydroid Polyps from the Gulf

of St. Lawrence

Canadian Naturalist and Geologist, Il. 1858

Dicquemare, J. F.

‘73 An Essay towards Elucidating the History of the Sea-

Anemones

Phil Tras. 2 eh G72.

Dixon,'G. Y., and A. F.

°89. Notes on Bunodes thallia, Bunodes verrucosa and Tealia

crassicornis

Sct. Prot. Koy: Dublin Soc... N,-S., Vis, xSéo

Duchassaing, P., and Michelotti, G.

60 Mémoire sur les Coralliaires des Antilles

Mém. Acad. Sci. Torino, Sér: Il, XIX. 1860

Duchassaing, P., and Michelotti, G.

64 Supplement au Mémoire sur les Coralliaires des Antilles.

Mem. Acad. Sa. Tortno, Ser. Il, XXIM.: £864

Duerden, J. E.

"95 On the genus Alicia (Cladactis), with an anatomical de-

scription of 4. Costae Panc.

Ann and Mas. Nat. THist., Set. 6, XVo Tos:

Duerden, J. E.

‘97 = The Actiniarian Family Aliciidz

Ann. and Mag. Nat. Fist., Ser. 6, XX. 1897

Ehrenberg

’°34 Die Corallenthiere des rothen Meeres physiologisch

untersucht und systematisch verzeichnet. Berlin. 1834

Fewkes, J. W.

’°89_ New Invertebrata from the Coast of California. Boston.

1889

REPORT ON THE HEXACTINIZ 45

Gosse, P. H.

55 On Peachia hastata, with observations on the family of

Actiniadze

Trans. Linnean Soc., XXII. 1855

Gosse, P. H.

60 ~=Actinologia Britannica. London. 1860

Haddon, A. C.

89. =A Revision of the British Actiniz. Part I

Sct. Trans. Roy. Dublin Soc. Ser. 2, IV. 1889

Von Heider, A.

‘77 ~=— Sagartia troglodytes, ein Beitrag zur Anatomie der Actinien

Setzber. K. Acad. Wien. Math.-Nat. Cl., LXXV. 1877

Hertwig, 0. & R.

‘79 +=Die Actinien. Jena. 1879

Hertwig, R.

°82 ~=Report of the Actiniaria

Report on the Sci. Results of the Voyage of H. M.S. Chat-

lenger. Zool. Part XV. 1882

Hertwig, R.

’°88 =Supplement to the Report on the Actiniaria

Report on the Sct. Results of the Voyage of H. M. S. Chat-

lenger. Zool. Part LXXIII. 1888

Jourdan, E.

80. = Recherches Zoologiques et histologiques sur les Zoanthaires

du Golfe de Marseilles

Am. Sci. Nat. Zool., 6mesér., X. 1880

McMurrich, J. P.

°89° ~The Actiniaria of the Bahama Islands, W. I.

Journ. of Morph., Wl. 1889.

MecMurrich, J.P.

"90 =Contributions on the Morphology of the Actinozoa. I.

The Structure of Cerianthus Americanus

Journ. of Morph., iV. 1890

McMurrich, J. P.

‘93. —- Report on the Actiniz collected by the U. S. Fish Com-

mission Steamer Albatross during the winter of 1887-88

Proc. U. S. Natl. Museum, XVI. 1893

McMurrich, J. P.

‘97 ~—- Contributions on the Morphology of the Actinozoa. IV

Zoolog. Bull., 1. 1897

46 McMURRICH

Murdock, J.

°85 ~=Marine Invertebrata in Report of the International Polar

Expedition to Point Barrow, Alaska. Washington. 1885

Parker, G. H.

‘97 The mesenteries and siphonoglyphs in Metridium margi-

natum, Milne-Edwards.

Bull. Mus. Comp. Zool., XXX. 1897

Teale. 2. 2.

’°37 Onthe Anatomy of Actinia coriacea

Trans, Phil. Soc. Leeds, 1. “1824

Thorell, T.

‘58 =Om den inre byggnaden af Actinia plumosa Miill.

Ofvers. K. Vet. Akad. Forh. Stockholm, XV. 1858

Tilesius, G. T.

09 ~=—- De nova actiniarum specie gigantea Kamtschatica

Mém. Acad. Iinp. St. Petersbourg, 1. 1809

Verrill, A. E.

64 ~=—s Revision of the Polypi of the Eastern Coast of the United

States.

Mem. Boston Soc. Nat. Hist., 1. 1864

Verrill, A. E.

65 ~=- Classification of Polyps

Proc, Essex Jast., AV.) 13865

Verrill, A: BE.

’°69 Synopsis of the Polyps and Corals of the North Pacific

Exploring Expedition

Proc. Lissex Jas; Vin. 1860

Verrill, A. E.

69a Review of the Corals and Polyps of the West Coast of

America

Trans. Connecticut Acad. Arts and Sct., 1. 1869

Verrill, A. E.

°99_ ~=Descriptions of imperfectly known and new Actinians,

with critical notes on other species

Amer. Journ. Sct., VII. 1899

Fig.

PLATE. 1,

Transverse section of sphincter of a specimen of JZe-

tridium dianthus measuring 1.5 cm. in height (Leitz

[, 3, camera):

Transverse section of sphincter of a specimen of AZetrz-

dium dianthus measuring 8 cm. in height (Leitz I,

3, camera).

Transverse section of sphincter of aspecimen of Jezri-

dium dianthus measuring 3 cm. in height (Leitz I,

3, camera).

Transverse section of a mesentery of the first cycle of

Metridium dianthus (Zeiss a, Leitz I, camera).

Transverse section of a directive mesentery of JMetri-

dium dianthus (Leitz I, 3, camera).

Transverse section of sphincter of Urticina crassicornts

Leitz I, Zeiss a, camera).

Cribrina elegantissima, from a preserved specimen.

Natural size.

(48 )

N..

ta 4?

1 0G 9

ae Th ae

aie DZ 9) f

* f Z a Hj 2

YB E ce

lA ee ee a0

be a pao se rat ee

eee ‘4 a # -

DEL

A Sa se 1 Ker

PLATE

’ ot /

? = }

% Go — & of s

o- een ! X NI

%, c 1 | mah

é Ta { | Nees

\ 9 Tod Cc > € : BY »

= ; \ » S »

gy s fu \ My ¢ ®

’ \> Ss MY L 4Q2 % \ Ny Bt 9

\ 9) “ y “sy Bh % (At ta ete §) \. Bey ne

=. oe et, ¢§ o. QYs A He, DWE gd

oD a ie ee S| il eras Q shh “4 4 he %

ed N Pp S yX

AY)

: | ‘

: 2,0 _ XQ ’ le

eet ae eta cee a vet Syne

(NS ARR Sea SPOR EF OLZa oh p> Saee ot

\ eae) SS? ) : ; AY Se i]

} ihe SKS 09%! (PY aS \.

ee TSO \y “WWs py ste.) GHG.D Up e8od Pro YAK yore

Se ae bear! 2) y yo Ye. LV VQ Qs LAY Dacide, Rep:

Saag SS OSE AQ BETS ARS LG OY Mig WS

Ze sae Soy ON g® VANE TYE Qa any Qa9 B®. sik

Eaeae EN NLEN Sete tee GREE e 5

t 5 2 “4 Sees ane Ww WSS

= te sents 4 8 BH

TARY

—-=

ANNALS N.Y. AGAD. SCL., VOL. XIV.

PLATE 1,

Fig.

Io.

Il.

TAs

15.

£6.

17.

PEATE, i,

Cribrina elegantissima (drawn by Dr. G. N. Calkins).

Longitudinal section of upper part of the column wall

of Cribrina elegantissima. cm = circular muscle at

apex of verruca; ec = column ectoderm ; e7” = col-

umn endoderm; ve = modified epithelium at the apex

of the verruca (Leitz I, 3, camera).

Transverse section of sphincter of C7zérina elegantissima

(Heitz 35 camera).

Tangential section of disk of C7brina elegantissima

(Leitz I, 3, camera).

Transverse section of tentacle of C7zbrina elegantissima

(Leitz I, 3, camera):

Transverse section of siphonoglyphe of Cvzbrina ele-

gantissima (Zeiss a, Leitz I, camera).

Transverse section of perfect mesentery of Cr7zbrina ele-

gantissima (Zeitz a, Leitz I, camera).

Cribrina artemisia from a preserved specimen. Natural

SIZE:

Transverse section of Crtbrina artemista (Zeiss a, Leitz

I, camera).

Anthopleura xanthogrammica (drawn by Dr. G. N. Cal-

kins.

(50)

ANNALS N. Y. ACAD. SCI., VOL: XIV.

> Att fs Wi

ny Crag

GaN Goce JP MMe NDE

Il.

PLATE

wogo®

moos?!

oor.

= = = -

a = Pe

ge ee

er gs : z

’

F-

~ \

&.-,

Pee

2 4

‘

al 7

1 ,

ANNALS N. Y. ACAD. Scl., VOL. XIV.

PLATE IL.

able

Tee

a bn

iy,

GON. C.& I PMOM DEL.

Jith Ansty BA.Funke, Leipata

18.

LG.

20.

Pyle

22.

26.

27.

28.

29.

PAPE. If.

Tangential section of disk of Cvribrina artemisia

(ettzel,<3, camera).

Transverse section of perfect mesentery of Cvzbrina

artemista (Leitz I, 3, camera).

Transverse section of basilar muscle of C7vibrina arte-

mista (Leitz I, 3, camera).

Portion of upper part of a perfect mesentery, with

disk, margin, and upper part of column in section,

of Anthopleura xanthogrammica ; ac = acrorhagus ;

ip — Sphincter ; (4 == tentacle. s(3< 16.)

Transverse section of sphincter of Anthopleura xantho-

grammica (Leitz I, 3, camera).

Transverse section of primary mesentery of Axntho-

pleura xanthogrammica (Zeiss a, Leitz 1V, camera).

Transverse section of basilar muscle of Axnthopleura

xanthogrammica (Leitz I, 3, camera).

Epiactis prolifera from a preserved specimen. Lm =

adherent embryo (nat. size).

Transverse section of sphincter of Ffzactts prolifera.

f= lower’ extremity of section; CO upper ex

tremity.>. (Aueuz I, 3, camer)

Transverse section of a portion of the column wall of

LE piactis prolifera, with an adherent embryo. 4¢c=

column ectoderm; Z.ec = ectoderm of embryo;

#.én—= endoderm of embryo; 47 == mucus 5,

stomatodzal invagination. (Leitz I, 3, camera).

Transverse section of perfect mesentery of Epzactis pro-

lifera. (Zeiss a, Leitz Il, camera).

Transverse section of basilar muscle of Epzacts prolifera

(iheitz tT, 35-camieéra ).

(52 )

ANNALS N. Y. ACAD. SCL., VOL. BB XIV.

AR Mi { \ i) i

LZ,

ot i eg Kas 9 a a

PLATE WW.

By 4

nA | |

ots

AAS

i¢ nee

it fee

eS S

)

Rives

—

ANNALS N.Y. ACAD. SCL., VOL. XIV.

J.-P Me M. DEL. : (2 easter

{Annas N. Y. Acap. Sci., Vol. XIV, No. 2, pp. 53-66, June 5, I901.]

THE MORPHOLOGICAL SIGNIFICANCE OF

Git AINVPERICUAVICULAR. SUPER-

NUMERARY MUSCLES

WitH A Report oF A New M. SUPRACLAVICULARIS PRo-

PRIUS POSTERIOR

Gro. S. HUNTINGTON

[Plates IV-V.]

(Read February 12, 1900)

Among the muscular variations of the human pectoral girdle

the group of periclavicular supernumerary muscles possesses a

peculiar morphological interest, by reason of the complex myo-

logical character of the region involved and the importance of

correctly interpreting the significance of the variant conditions.

The abnormal muscle, of which this paper treats, is now

described and figured for the first time as the J/7 supra-

clavicularis proprius posterior. It was found as a nearly sym-

metrical bilateral muscular slip in a male subject, of German

birth, 43 years of age, arising by a slender tendon from the

upper surface of the sternal extremity of the clavicle, under cover

of the sterno-cleido-mastoid and extending laterad across the

supraclavicular fossa to be inserted behind the clavicular attach-

ment of the trapezius into the superior surface of the acromial

end of the clavicle by a narrow tendon which on the left side

can be followed nearly to the extremity of the bone.

SUPERNUMERARY CLAVICULAR MUSCLES

The nearest. approach to the conditions presented by this

variant muscle—as regards the attachment by both extremities

to the clavicle—is afforded by a group of supernumerary cla-

vicular muscles, of which five instances have been recorded,

possessing the following common characters: Origin from the

(53 )

54 HUNTINGTON

sternal extremity of the clavicle, vexztrad to the clavicular at-

tachment of the sterno-cleido-mastoid. The muscle, fleshy in

the middle and tendinous at either end, passes laterad, above

the clavicle, inserting at the acromial end of the bone, between

the trapezius and the deltoid.

WENZEL GRUBER described the first of these instances under

the name of AZ supra-clavicularis proprius, s. preclavicularis

subcutaneus, in 1865, in Reichert’s Archiv, p. 703. The same

author subsequently in 1877 observed a second instance of the

variation which is recorded in Virchow’s Archiv, Vol. LX XII,

p.496. BARDELEBEN has recorded an example of the muscle in

the ‘“ Sitzungsberichte d. Jenaischen Gesellschaft fir Med. und

Naturwiss.,’’ March, 1877.

Knott (Jour. Anat. and_Phys., Vol. XV, p. 139) observed

the fourth case, which he reports as M/. supraclavicularis pro-

prius, vel. Tensor fascie colli (Gruber). The muscle in this

instance had a medial attachment in front of the clavicular head

of the sterno-cleido-mastoid, about 134’’ outside the sterno-

clavicular articulation, while the lateral extremity, at a distance

of about 2”” from the acromial end of the bone, had a somewhat

broader attachment in front of the trapezius. The muscle was

enclosed in a sheath formed by the deep cervical fascia, a con-

dition also noted in Gruber’s cases, whence this author defines

the muscle as a “‘ Tensor of the cervical fascia.”

Dusar (Soc. Anat. Paris, 1880) described a ‘“ muscle ansi-

form sus-claviculaire’’ which presented the same connection

with the clavicle at both ends and was enclosed in a sheath de-

rived from the cervical fascia.

While the clavicular attachments of these five muscles agree

with those of the variation above described, their position ven-

trad of sterno-cleido-mastoid and trapezius differentiates them

sharply from the muscle here under consideration whose course is

dorsad to both. Iconsider this superfictal position of the sapra-

clavicularis proprius of Gruber and of the other authors quoted,

as determining the definite relationship of the five variations re-

corded to the other members of the pre@clayicular group of

supernumerary muscles. In spite of the similarity of attach-

PERICLAVICULAR SUPERNUMERARY MUSCLES 55d

ment to both extremities of the clavicle the muscle described in

this paper belongs to the vetro-clavicular group and possesses

hence an entirely different morphological significance. The fol-

lowing instances have been observed of supraclavicular muscles

situated behind the sterno-cleido-mastoid and trapezius.

M. J. Weser (Vollstandiges Handbuch der Anatomie des

Menschlichen Korpers (Zergliederungs-Kunde und Kunst), I

Bd., Bonn, 1839, p. 560) says:

‘‘T have observed once a variation, remarkable on account of

the analogy of the clavicles and ribs, and of the subclavius with

the intercostals, in which from the posterior surface of the

manubrium sterni to the post. surfaces of the sternal ends of

both clavicles a fairly strong semicircular flat muscle passed

which could depress the clavicles down and in.”’

Lawson Tair (Journ. of Anat. and Phys., p. 237) described

a muscle arising by two heads, one from the posterior surface

of the manubrium sterni at its junction with the cartilage of the

first rib, the other from the posterior edge of the first rib itself.

It lay on the brachiocephalic trunk, on the lower thyroid veins

and the scalenus anticus, and was inserted into the clavicle,

along the posterior border of the bone, at the inner margin of

the insertion of the trapezius.

Knott is quoted as having observed a muscle identical in all

respects with that described by Tair.

These two instances of WEBER and Tait are quoted by most

authors treating of the periclavicular supernumerary muscles

under the name of JZ. retroclavicularis or sternoclavicularis pos-

terior. MACALISTER (‘‘ Additional Observations on Muscular

Anomalies in Human Anatomy (Third series), with a cata-

logue of the principal muscular variations hitherto published,”

feaens, Oval trish Acad: Vol!) XXV, Pt. I, Dublin, 1872,

p. 51) quotes Weber’s and Tait’s cases as instances of the “ M.

retroclavicularis’ and adds concerning the latter’s case: ‘‘ This

is much rarer than the foregoing (M. supraclavicularis of

Luschka and Haller, cf. infra), and is probably only a form of

the M. supraclavicularis given above.”

Both Tesrur (‘‘ Les anomalies musculaires chez l’homme,”’

56 HUNTINGTON

Paris, 1884, p. 55) and Le Dounste (‘‘ Traité des variations du

systeme musculaire de l’homme,’’ Tome I, Paris, 1897, p.

266) quote Weber’s and Tait’s cases—under the name of ‘‘ JZ.

retro-clavicularis”’ or “ Sterno-clavicularis posterior’’—without

adding any new instances of the variation.

In the interests of a consistent terminology it would ap-

pear advisable to describe Weber’s case as a ‘‘ M. Sterno-

clavicularis posterior,’ Tait’s instance as ‘“ JZ chondro-sterno-

clavicularis postertor,’ the five cases of superficial muscles above

quoted as examples of the “ AZ. supra-clavicularis proprius

anterior’? and the muscles here described as ‘ WZ. supra-clavic-

ularis proprius posterior.”

MORPHOLOGICAL SIGNIFICANCE

To establish the morphological significance of the muscle in

question, the following facts deserve consideration: GRUBER

(‘Die Supernumeraren Brustmuskeln des Menschen,’ Mem.

de l’Acad. Imp..des Sciences des Sts Petersbourg. sv tl Sere

Tome III, No. 2, 1860, pp. 3 and 6) describes a ‘‘ M sterno-

clavicularis supertor, seu supraclavicularis,’ as arising from the

manubrium sterni above and behind the origin of the sternal head

of the sterno-cleido-mastoid, from the margin of the clavicular

incisure and in some cases also from the margin of the semi-

lunar incisure. The muscle passes upward and outward, over

the sterno-clavicular capsule, behind the clavicular head of the

sterno-cleido-mastoid, to be inserted into the posterior surface

of the clavicle between ‘ the beginning of the second and third

fifth of the bone.” GRuBER found this muscle five times in 100

subjects, four adult males and one boy. Twice it was bilateral,

twice present only on one side (right) and in one case only on the

left side. He figures an instance of the variation (loc. cit., Taf.

Lge x),

A number of other anatomists have observed and described

the muscle, beginning with Harter, in 1766 (‘‘ Elem. physiol.,”’

Tome III, p. 46, Lausanne, 1766). LuscuKa (‘ Ein M. Su-

pra-clavicularis beim Menschen,’ Miller's Archiv, 1856, p.

=<"

PERICLAVICULAR SUPERNUMERARY MUSCLES 57

282) describes and figures a supra-clavicular muscle as arising

from the middle of the posterior surface of the clavicle and

passing over the sternal end of the bone to be inserted into

the manubrium sterni just below the inter-clavicular ligament.

Luschka suggests a relation between this muscle and the ossa

suprasternalia.

He found the muscle three times in male subjects, once

bilateral, twice only on one side. - Later (quoted from Gruber,

loc. cit., p. 4) Luschka encountered four additional instances of

the muscle.

Hyrr_ (‘ Zwei Varianten des M. Sterno-clavicularis,”’ Sitzber.

d. Math. naturw. cl. d.. Kais. Akad. der Wiss., Bd. X XIX,

Wien, 1858, p. 265) describes Luschka’s supra-clavicularis as

‘““M. sterno-clavicularis’”’ in six subjects out of 83, 5 men and

I woman. In four of these (3 bilateral, 1 on left side) the

muscle corresponded to Luschka’s description. The two re-

maining cases Hyrtl regards as variations of the same muscle.

The first variation (subject zt. 30) consisted of a tendinous

bundle, arising from the manubrium sterni at the level of its

junction with the body, which ascended to. the jugular notch

and divided into two diverging transverse bundles, which, be-

coming muscular, passed over the sterno-clavicular joint, behind

the clavicular head of the sterno-cleido-mastoid, to the clavicle.

The second variation appeared as an 7nter-clavicular muscle, a

flat transverse band uniting the sternal extremities of both

clavicles lying upon the inter-clavicular ligament above the upper

margin of the manubrium. The muscle was.attached to the

sterno-clavicular capsule between the inter-clavicular and sterno-

clavicular ligaments and to the intra-articular cartilage of the

joint. Hyrtl regards this variation as derived from the first by

suppression of the median tendon of origin from the manubrium

and by arched fusion of the two muscular bellies thus detached

across the median line.

Other instances of the WZ. supraclavicularis or sternoclavi-

cularis superior are recorded by Retzius (‘‘ Hygeia,’” 1856,

Bd. 18, p. 649), Hellema (Geneeskundig Tijdschieft, 5 Jahrg.,

I Afd.) and Macalister (loc. cit., p. 50). I have observed 13

examples of the muscle.

58 ; HUNTINGTON

If the muscle forming the subject of this communication is

compared with the typical swpraclavicularis or sternoclavicu-

faris superior it will appear that the lateral attachment and the

relation to the clavicular head of the sterno-cleido-mastoid of

both agree. In our J. supraclavicularis proprius posterior

the lateral extremity of the muscle is attached to the posterior

surface of the clavicle, and it attains this position by passing

dorsad of the clavicular head of the sterno-cleido-mastoid. The

same arrangement obtains in those instances of the typical

sternoclavicularts in which the muscle extends further laterad

than is usually the case (Retzius’ example, outer third of

clavicle), although in the majority of recorded cases the typical

sternoclavicular muscle is short, not extending beyond the inner

third of the clavicle. That the lateral end of the muscle here

under consideration extended beyond and behind the trape-

zius to the acromial end of the clavicle is therefore unusual

when compared with the typical arrangement of the sterno-

clavicularis, but it brings the entire group, to which both

muscles belong, into harmony with other muscular variations

which serve to satisfactorily explain the significance of the

aberrant condition.

The mesal extremity of the muscle herein described differs

at first sight radically from the typical sternoclavicularis. The

mesal tendon is attached behind the sterno-cleido-mastoid to

the posterior and upper border of the sternal extremity of the

clavicle, but entirely confined to that bone, not extending to

the sterno-clavicular capsule or to the manubrium. In contrast

to this arrangement the mesal tendon in the great majority of

the typical sternoclaviculares occupies a more ventral position,

being attached above and in front of the sterno-clavicular artic-

ulation to the manubrium.

If, however, this typical arrangement of the mesal tendon of

the usual sternoclavicularis is compared with the variations re-

ported by Hyrtl, and with the cases described by Weber and

Tait, it will be seen that a series, depending upon regression of

the sternal extremity of the common form of the variant muscle,

can be established, leading from the usual type, through three

PERICLAVICULAR SUPERNUMERARY MUSCLES 59

stages, to the conditions found in our MZ. supraclavicularis

proprius posterior. In Hyrtl’s first recorded case the beginning

loss of the sternal attachment is signalized by the single median

tendon which connects the two muscles with the manubrium.

In his second variation the muscles have largely given up the

manubrial attachment and have fused into an inter-clavicular

muscle. Separation of the inter-clavicular muscle in the median

line into its original components, and further regression of each

laterad would lead to the arrangement described in Weber’s

case, while Tait’s case only differs in having an additional at-

tachment to the posterior margin at the first rib, which is likely

to be acquired in the course of migration. Lastly, in our in-

stance, the mesal extremity of the muscle has lost all con-

nection with the sternum, the episternal (inter-clavicular)

structures and the sterno-clavicular articulation and has ac-

quired a purely clavicular attachment. We may, therefore, be

justified in regarding the typical sterno-clavicularis as_ the ante-

cedent of the mesal extremity of the three supra- or retro-

clavicular muscles heretofore recorded, the condition presented

by our case being the final stage in a progressive migration of

the mesal tendon of the muscle from the sternum succes-

sively to the inter-clavicular ligament, the capsule of the sterno-

clavicular articulation and finally to the posterior surface of the

clavicle.

Turning to the lateral termination of the muscle under con-

sideration and examining cognate variations in order to deter-

mine its significance, we have to consider in the first place, a

group of aberrant muscles extending between the upper border

of the scapula and the clavicle.

The J. scapulo-clavicularis, or coraco-clavicularis has in

several instances been observed to extend as a muscular slip

between the superior border of the scapula, or the transverse

ligament, or base of coracoid process, and the posterior border

or inferior surface of the clavicle, passing behind the clavicular

attachments of the trapezius and sterno-mastoid.

Moreover, a human muscular .variation, described by Wood,

Gruber, Hellema, Curnow, Reid and Taylor, Shepherd, and

60 HUNTINGTON

Brown, the MZ. sterno-chondro-scapularis, corresponding to a

muscle normally encountered in many mammalia, is found not

very uncommonly, extending between manubrium of thesternum,

or the first rib or its cartilage and the upper border of the scapula,

usually near the suprascapular notch or the base of the cora-

coid process. This aberrant muscle passes behind the normal

subclavius, when that muscle is present, while in other cases the

typical subclavius is absent and is replaced by the abnormal

muscle.

Considering the relationship of the subclavius insertion to the

coraco-clavicular ligaments and to the coracoid process of the

scapula it is not a very farfetched view to regard the normal

human subclavius muscle as a derivative from the mammalian

sterno-chondro-scapular sheet, which has lost its scapular at-

tachment, and receded to the inferior surface of the clavicle,

while its original distal portion, metamorphosed into fibrous

tissue, remains as the coraco-clavicular ligaments.

Again the whole group of retro-clavicular supernumerary

muscles are properly to be referred to the same mammalian

sterno-chondro-scapular muscular sheet of which they represent

myotypical reversions in the sense defined by me on a previous

occasion. I think that Testut (loc. cit., p. 55), in quoting the

only two previously recorded cases of retro-clavicular supernu-

merary muscles (Weber’s and Tait’s), strikes the correct key-

note of their morphological significance, when he says, regard-

ing Tait’s case: “If this muscle had had a few centimeters

greater length it would have become attached to the upper

border of the scapula, and we would have changed its name and

place in the classification ; it would have been a sterno-chondro-

scapularis.”

REPORTED INSTANCES: OF "UNIORR OP Err.

STERNO-CLEIDO-MASTOID AND

TRAPEZIUS

In conclusion it may be well to consider that some reported

instances of more or less complete union of the sterno-cleido-

PERICLAVICULAR SUPERNUMERARY MUSCLES 61

mastoid and trapezius may. find their explanation in the per-

sistence of portions of this same muscular plane and their sec-

ondary fusion with the muscles named near their clavicular

attachment.

Thus Quain (‘‘ Anat. of the Arteries,’ p. 186) describes a

muscular fasciculus which detaches itself from the anterior bor-

der of the trapezius and joins the sterno-cleido-mastoid, passing

above the subclavian artery. Testut quotes this instance as

representing a first stage in the fusion of the two muscles.

Davirs-CoLLey encountered in several cases a distinct mus-

cular fasciculus which left the anterior border of the trapezius,

crossed the subclavian triangle diagonally and inserted into the

clavicle underneath the sterno-cleido-mastoid. In some in-

stances the descending branches of the superficial cervical

plexus were placed behind this fasciculus.

In the case of the muscle here reported the supra-clavicular

nerves descended to the thorax between the clavicle and the

abnormal muscle. The connection of the two extremities of

the muscle with the deep surface of the clavicular head of the

sterno-cleido-mastoid and the trapezius was very intimate. <A

firm fibrous fusion of its sheath with the fascia of these muscles

made a complete exposure from behind and careful dissection

necessary in order to demonstrate the independence of the mus-

cular fibres and their true insertion into the clavicle. When first

encountered zz s¢¢z from in front the case was reported as a

muscular band joining the anterior edge of the trapezius to the

deep surface of the clavicular head of the sterno-cleido-mastoid.

It is conceivable that further reduction of the intermediate por-

tion of the typical sterno-chendro-scapularis, with loss of the

secondary clavicular attachment seen in our case of supraclavic-

ularis proprius posterior might leave a muscular fasciculus ap-

parently extending between the deep surfaces of trapezius and

sterno-cleido-mastoid, and thus give rise to the reports of partial

fusion of these muscles.

Peeters try Saath oe AS 3 alas aiees gaa! Mle ae Bs

ee eC pha ae

eee Pe, m thy ote e Pe eek .

| peigeall ess nchaeetened ho

wee’ Pong News. le ik Ce a

Fa Sta ie Te gris SPAT 5c ds eee

435s Shr 4 Be ae “ls 1) Soe Pe eee oat

Pp ataee: Feats a tes Te ere $e es om

Bd ae” ah RES Sry Thm

' ieee a ae as, er Lee. eee oy,

Mie) th et a ees ae Aas

Loses sre a a “eit SS eee

eee : i Dee Pra at tr

are A.D Che eS aS ee Th are ee 5

ibe co ee 7 thay ip (ee een Renee |

oO) (ee ee 33 eee Se aes axe We 7

Bs Gh: oe alge

peers Baba St) case St nalts; ces alam

Pre Oe ei ei re ea

Re Pca D3." | eee Hp eae ae

ers ee Pett 2 * 3 atten ghee ae ce

Sr ee oe aaee ne

ae t ve Bicep tl Se Ne ese ee Pacey rE

aes Jaa Po ee F “‘wnhecri. > acciettiel

nents : ae APR i) @ ern Gat ta yy ge 2 a aiem

A eet ae RE ee nee

Sap > Wie. ar “9 ’ phe

4 ees aa oe, a ee ee oor

eee ere oe ie sae: as

aee, "gto ree fa ian Piers

‘

. ‘ - re ae 7 ;

* : ta > Fs OP see

Pepi ao, =? pied. ¥.. GYR Hs s <ask Delia

ae ada a Ne sees ig ae

joey

J «

> 5 +e

PLATE IV.

With the case here recorded it is possible to present the entire

group of retro-clavicular supernumerary muscles in their mutual re-

lationship and in their common reference to the potential parent

muscular system of the mammalian sterno-chondro-scapularis. Sche-

matically this can be done as indicated in the plate IV.

Fig. 1 represents the typical mammalian sterno-chondro-scapularis,

encountered as already stated in the human subject, as an occasional

variation.

Fig. 2 corresponds to the retro-clavicular muscle as described by

Weber and Tait; the ‘‘ WZ. sterno-chondro-clavicularis postertor’’

results from the sterno-chondro-scapularis by loss of the scapular at-

tachment and transference of the distal insertion to the clavicle.

Fig. 3 may be taken as illustrating Hyrtl’s variations of the usual

M. sterno-clavicularis in which the.sternal attachment of the slip is

beginning to show a tendency to migration laterad towards the

clavicle.

Fig. 4 shows a theoretical combination between the sterno-clavicu-

laris posterior and the occasional scapulo-clavicularis or coraco-clav-

icularis. These two muscular slips would appear respectively as the

proximal and distal segments of a typical sterno-chondro-scapularis

whose intermediate portion had disappeared.

In Fig. 5 is shown the reverse condition, illustrated by the case

reported inthis paper. In place of the disappearance of the inter-

mediate segment of the sterno-chondro-scapularis, which produced

in Fig. 4 two muscles, a sterno-clavicularis and a scapulo-clavicu-

laris, we have in. our instance the converse of this. ~Whe central

part of the typical sterno-chondro-scapularis persists, while the loss

of the proximal sternal and distal scapular attachment leaves us with

a retro-clavicular muscle, fixed at both extremities to the clavicle,

and hence properly designated as the ‘‘supraclavicularis proprius

posterior.’’ This muscle, as well as the remaining members of the

retro-clavicular groups are, therefore, to be regarded as myotypical

reversions, in the sense that they represent the occasional develop-

ment of portions of a common ancestral mammalian muscular plane,

which in many living forms finds its expression in the sterno-chondro-

scapularis.

( 64 )

ANNAES ‘N..Y.:ACAD.-SEI.. VOL. XIV. PLATE

STERNO-CLEIDO- STERNO-CLEIDO-

MASTOID. TRAPEZIUS. aeeror: TRAPEZIUS.

M. STERNO-

CLAVICULARIS

(HY RTL)

M. STERNO-

CHONDRO-

SCAPULARIS.

M. STERNO-

CLAVICULARIS

(HY RTL)

STERNO-CLEIDO-

MASTOID A TRAPEZIUS.

MASTOID. TRAPEZIUS.

M. STERNO-

CHONDRO-

CLAVICULARIS

(WEBER, TAIT)

M. STERNO-

CLAVICULARIS

STERNO-CLEIDO-

MASTOID. ~ TRAPEZIUS.

M. SUPRA-

CLAVICULARIS.

PROPRIUS POSTERIOR.

CHUNTINGTON.)

M,. SCAPULO-

Ss, CORACO-

CLAVICULARIS

eo ere %

> » = a

+2 ty

t 7 cs

~ “és

a :

. ’

ANNALS N. Y. ACAD. SCI. VOL. XIV. PLATE V.

Clavicular attach-

ment of Trapezius.

M. Supra-clavicu-

laris proprius pos-

terior.

Clavicular head of

Sterno-cleido-

mastoid.

Clavicular attach-

ment of Pectoralis

major.

[Annas N. Y. Acap. Scr., Vol. XIV, No. 3, pp. 67-68, July 6, 1gor.]

DISCOVERY OF A MASTODON’S TOOTH AND THE

REMAINS OF A BOREAL VEGETATION IN

A SWAMP ON STATEN ISLAND, N. Y.

By ARTHUR HOLLICK

(Read Nov. 13, 1899)

In the Moravian Cemetery at New Dorp, Staten Island, was

a swamp, which, until the past summer, was rather a conspicu-

ous feature, by reason of its quaking margin of peat and sedges,

with a pool of dark coffee-colored water towards the center.

It occupied a depression in the moraine, at a distance of about

1,200 feet from the margin and at an elevation of about 120 feet

above tidewater. The superficial area of the swamp was about

3,500 square feet and the pool of water would fill up and over-

flow in time of rains and become almost or completely dry in

periods of drought.

In the recent development of the cemetery it was decided to

drain off the water, dig out the mud, and allow the depression

to fill up again as a pond. It was during the progress of this

work that the discoveries here recorded were made.

The surface deposit was found to consist of a fine moss peat

and a coarse peat composed of all kinds of swamp vegetation,

extending out to the margin of the pool, while below this and

forming the bottom of the pool was a black organic mud, such

as may be seen in almost any swamp where decaying vegetation

has accumulated. Below this the deposit was a fine sandy silt,

distinctly stratified, the layers following the general contour of

the depression, thicker towards the middle and thinning out at

the edges. The general shape of the depression is roughly

pyramidal, with steeper sides on the north and east than on the

south and west. The deepest part is in the northeast angle,

where the entire deposit was about 25 feet in thickness. All

this deposit has been taken out and the sides and bottom of the

depression are now exposed to view.

(67)

68 HOLLICK

The first thing which attracted my attention was a number of

logs and branches in the upper part of the silt, beginning at a

depth of about 5 feet from the surface. There was nothing in

connection with these to indicate that they were anything more

than the remains of a comparatively recent forest growth.

Below this, however, at a depth of about 8 feet, were a number

of layers, aggregating about 2 feet in thickness, containing a

large number of small cones andtwigs. There are no coniferous

trees now growing in the vicinity and no record of any in recent

years so that these were manifestly the remains of a forest growth

which antedated the one now growing there and a subsequent

careful examination and comparison of the cones showed

them to belong to the white spruce (Picea Canadensis (Mill)

B.S. P.)—a tree of northern range, which does not now extend

farther south than northern New England and the Adirondacks

—and this fact naturally led to the conclusion that at least the

lower portion of the deposit was of Quaternary age.

On inquiry of the superintendent of the cemetery, Mr. N. J.

Ostrander, information was subsequently obtained to the effect

that ‘‘some bones ”’ had been dug out by one of the workmen,

at a depth of about 23 feet, and these were very kindly turned

over to me. They proved to be the broken pieces of a masto-

don’s molar and the Quaternary age of the deposit was estab-

lished beyond question and inasmuch as it was in a morainal

basin it must all have been post-morainal in age.

The indications are that a pond was formed inthe depression

immediately after the recession of the ice sheet and that this

pond was a receptacle for silt, dust and decayed vegetation ever

since ; the accumulations finally filling it up and converting it

into a swamp, with a little pool of casual water remaining in

the middle.

Incidentally it may also be worth recording, that a consider-

able amount of charcoal and charred wood was found in connec-

tion with the cones, near the northeastern side, which fact might

indicate the presence of man at the time this portion of the

deposit was laid down.

[ANNALS‘N. Y, AcAD. Sct., Vol. XIV, No. 4, pp. 69-84, July 2, Igor. ]

OBSERVATION AND EXPERIMENT!

By R. S. WooDWARD

The near coincidence of this anniversary meeting of the Acad-

emy with the end of the nineteenth and with the beginning of

the twentieth century imposes peculiar and quite unexpected re-

strictions in the way of freedom of choice of a fitting subject for

an address. Naturally one would like to pass in review some

of the brilliant achievements of science in the past century, and

perhaps forecast the still more brilliant advances that may be

expected to mature in the present century. Especially one

might feel tempted to present a semi-popular inventory of the

more striking or recondite scientific events with which he is

particularly familiar. But all this and more, strange as it may

seem, has been done, or is being done, by the public press.

Specialists in almost every branch of science have been employed

to expound and to summarize the discoveries, the theories, and

the useful applications which have rendered science, by com-

mon consent, the most important factor in the civilization of the

nineteenth century. Statesmen, philosophers and divines are

likewise sounding the praises of science and the scientific method

with a warmth of recognition and with a stamp of approval

which tend to make one who is old enough to have lived in the

pre-scientific, as well as in the present epoch, feel as if a millen-

nium were close at hand. Indeed, such a wealth of good scien-

tific literature is just now thrust before us and such a wealth of

praise is just now bestowed on scientific achievement that the

modest man of science must hesitate before adding a word to

that literature or a qualification to that praise.

1 Address of the President of the New York Academy of Sciences, read before

the Academy on February 25, 1901.

ANNALS N. Y. ACAD. Scl., XIV, July 2, 1901—6.

(69)

70 WOODWARD

The requirements of official position are remorseless, however,

and one must speak his thought although silence with respect

to science may appear to be the most urgent need of the hour.

In view of these circumstances, it seems best to avoid topics of

current interest and to invite your attention toa brief considera-

tion of the elements which lie at the basis of scientific investiga -

tion and scientific progress. A recurrence to the slow and pain-

ful beginnings of knowledge and the first principles evolved

therefrom is always instructive ; and it is especially fitting at a

time, like the present, when the ardor of research is somewhat

in danger of the sedative influences which spring from the

popular glorification of triumphant successes.

The fundamental data from which all scientific knowledge

grows are furnished by observation and experiment. After

these come the higher steps of comparison, hypothesis, and

finally the correlation and unification of phenomena under

theory. Even pure mathematics, though long held apart from

the other sciences, must be founded, I think, in the last analysis,

on observation and experiment.

Of the infinite variety of phenomena, which appeal to our

senses, some, like those of sidereal astronomy, are subject, in

the main, to observation only ; while others, like those of ter-

restrial physics, chemistry, and biology, are subject to both ob-

servation and experiment. All phenomena are more or less

entangled. They point backward and forward in time ; any one

of them appears and disappears only in connection with others ;

and the record any one of them leaves is known only by its

interaction with others. Out of this plexus of relations and in-

terrelations it is the business of science to discover the condi-

tions of occurrence and the laws of the continuity. Happily

for man, although the ultimate complexity of phenomena is

everywhere very great, it is frequently possible to discern those

conditions and occasionally possible to trace out those laws.

But the results we reach are essentially first approximations,

depending, in general, on the extent to which we may ignore

other phenomena than those specially considered. In fact, a

first step towards the solution of a problem in science consists

OBSERVATION AND EXPERIMENT 71

in determining how much of the universe may be safely left

out of account, Thus the method of approximating to a

knowledge of the laws of nature is somewhat like the method

of infinite series so much used by mathematicians in numer-

ical calculations; and as it is a condition of success in the

use of such series that they be convergent rather than divergent,

so is it an essential of scientific sanity that the mind be re-

stricted by observed facts rather than diverted by pleasing

fancies.

The prime characteristic of the kind of knowledge that leads

up to science is. its dependence on facts which are permanent

and hence verifiable. In the course of the progress of our race

there have been certain luminous epochs during which observ-

ers and experimentalists have revealed more or less of such

knowledge. These epochs have been followed, generally, by

others of camparative dullness, or positive darkness, during

which fact has been replaced by fancy and what is permanent

and verifiable has been eclipsed by what is ephemeral and illu-

sory. It is my purpose to-night to recall some of the principal

events of these epochs, and to enforce, as well as I may, the

great lesson they seem to teach us, namely, that science can be

maintained only, and can be advanced only, by a constant ap-

peal to observation and experiment.

As we look out on the universe about us the most striking

phenomena visible are those which belong to what Galileo and

his successors have fitly called ‘“‘the system of the world.’ The

rising and setting of the sun and moon ; the majestic procession

of the seasons ; the splendid array of the stars in the heavens ;

the ebb and flow of the sea; and the never-ending variety from

wind and weather, need only to be mentioned to enable us to

understand why astronomy is at once the oldest and one of the

most highly developed of the sciences. No classes of phenom-

ena are so obvious, so omnipresent, and so enduring. They

have furnished the symbols of continuity and permanence for

all languages in all historic times. The “fixed stars,” for ex-

ample, are in fact, as well as in fiction, our standards of refer-

ence in the reckoning of time and space; for are not “ Sirius

(2 WOODWARD

and Orion and the Pleiades,’ as Carlyle has remarked, “ still

shining young and clear in their courses as when the shepherds

first noted them on the plains of Shinar’’?

But before astronomy there were mythology and astrology,

and we may well marvel how it has been possible, even after

the lapse of twenty odd centuries, to educe the orderly precision

of science out of the complicated miscellany of fiction, fact, re-

ligion, and politics bequeathed to our era by the fertile imagina-

tions of our distinguished ancestors. What, for example, could

be more confusing than the paleontological jungle called the

stellar constellations, with its gods and goddesses; with its

dogs, lions, bears and fish, great and small, northern and

southern; with its horse, whale, and goat; and with the slimy

forms of serpents intertwining them all ? :

Although it is impossible to set any date for the emergence

of astronomy out of mythology and astrology, the epoch of

Hipparchus undoubtedly is the earliest one of conspicuous ad-

vances knowntous. This epoch, which may be called also the

epoch of the Alexandrian school of science, extends from about

300 B.c. to about 150 A.D. It is distinguished by the remark-

ably perfect work in pure geometry of Euclid and Apollonius,

and by the still more noteworthy work of Archimedes in laying

the foundations of statics and hydrostatics; it comprises the

measurements according to correct principles of the obliquity of

the ecliptic and the dimensions of the earth by Eratosthenes ;

it includes the observations of the sun, moon, stars and planets

collected by Aristyllus and Timocharis and later turned to so

good account by Hipparchus; it embraces the work of Aris-

tarchus, who maintained the heliocentric theory of the solar

system and who was the first to attempt a measure of the di-

mensions of that system by means of the fine fact of observa-

tion that the earth, sun and moon form a right triangle with

the right angle at the moon when the latter is in dichotomy—

or when its face is just half illuminated ; and finally it includes

the work of Ptolemy, a worthy disciple of Hipparchus, whose

Almagest has come down to our own time.

From the observational point of view we must rank the prin-

OBSERVATION AND EXPERIMENT le

ciples with respect to fluids at rest discovered by Archimedes

as amongst the capital contributions to the science of all times ;

for while his successors, of the last two centuries especially,

have added to hydromechanics the large and vastly more difficult

branch of hydrokinetics, they have found no change essential

in his laws of hydrostatics.

Equally important, also, in its far-reaching connections was

the work of Eratosthenes in determining the size of the earth.

This work required an hypothesis as to the shape of the earth

and appropriate observations. Supposing the earth to be spher-

ical,an assumption which Eratosthenes knew well how to justify,

he saw that to determine its size it is only necessary to apply

the rule of three to the measured length of an arc of a meridian

and to the measured difference of the latitudes of the ends of

such arc. He observed that atthe city of Syene, which is about

500 miles south of Alexandria, the sun shone vertically down-

wards into deep wells at noon on the day of the summer solstice,

showing thus that at that place and time the sun was in the

zenith. On the same day at Alexandria he observed, by means

of the gnomon, that the sun at noon was south of the zenith by

one-fiftieth of a circle, or 7°.2. The distance between the two

points was found by the royal road masters of the country to

be 5,000 stadia, thus giving for the complete circumference of

the earth 250,000 stadia. Although the measurements thus

made by Eratosthenes were very crude and undoubtedly subject

to large errors, we see in them the beginnings of some of the

most refined geodetic operations of the present day. Unfor-

tunately for us, also, the measurement of the distance is ex-

pressed in a unit whose relation to modern units is only roughly

known.'

But commendable as was the work of his predecessors and

contemporaries, the work of Hipparchus rises to a still higher

1 As illustrating the slow growth of ideas with respect to precision, it may be re-

lated that when the Arabians, in the ninth century undertook, for the same purpose,

the measurement of a meriodinal arc on the plain Singiar, in Mesopotamia, they

were not more successful in preserving for posterity the standard of length used by

them. This standard is said to have been the ‘‘ black cubit, which consists of 27

inches, each inch being the thickness of six grains of barley.”’

74 WOODWARD

plane. He was an observer and a theorist of the highest type,

being able at once to collect facts and to interpret their relations,

and he deserves to be ranked among the great astronomers of

all times. He was the first to clearly appreciate the value of a

catalogue of the fixed stars and constructed one giving the rel-

ative positions of 1,080 stars. He observed with surprising

precision the interval of the tropical year; he made the first

tables of the sun and moon; he discovered the remarkable fact

of the precession of the equinoxes; and he thus early led the

way to the great advances of modern times.

The peculiar merit of the work of Hipparchus lies not alone

in the fact that he saw how the apparent motions of the heav-

enly bodies may be determined by observations, but also in the

fact that he saw how these motions may be determined by a

very small number of appropriate observations. Thus, for ex-

ample, the interval from the vernal equinox to the summer sol-

stice and the interval from the latter to the autumnal equinox

sufficed to give him a close approximation to the apparent mo-

tion of the sun; while the records of a few eclipses of the moon

enabled him to deduce a closely correct value of the precession

of the equinoxes, that shifting of the line of intersection of the

equator and the ecliptic which goes on so slowly that an inter-

val of nearly 26,000 years is required for a complete circuit.

Hipparchus may be called the founder of the geocentric the-

ory, since he demonstrated the accordance of the phenomena

known to him with that theory. The fact that this theory is

false detracts little from his merits ; for the sole requisites of a

good theory are simplicity of statement and conformity with ob-

servation. We now know, indeed, that mechanical phenomena

are, in general, susceptible of multiple interpretations, and that

observation must decide which of them is to be preferred.

The method which Hipparchus used to measure the sun’s

apparent motion among the fixed stars is very noteworthy,

especially when we consider the utter lack of effective instru-

ments in his time. Ifthe sun moves regularly about the earth,

as first supposed by Hipparchus, it ought to return at any

epoch, as that of an equinox, to the same position among the

OBSERVATION AND EXPERIMENT 75

fixed stars. Imagine a line drawn at the time of the vernal

equinox, say, from the center of the earth to the center of the

sun. This line prolonged will pierce the celestial sphere in two

points, and if either point can be located, the position of the

sun with reference to the stars becomes known. Hipparchus

fixed this position by noting the location among the stars of the

center of the shadow cast by the earth at the times of eclipses

of the moon. Byacomparison of his own observations of such

eclipses with those made by his predecessors he was able to de-

termine the apparent motion of the sun with reference to the

stars, or what we now know to be the motion of the equinoxes

with reference to the stars. To establish this fact of precession

from such meager observations was a great step; and it seems

not a little singular that a phenomenon so striking should not

have led to speedy investigations for its source. But about

eighteen centuries elapsed before Newton clearly visualized the

mechanical interpretation of this phenomenon, and it was only

after an additional half century that the interpretation was fully

worked out by d’Alembert.

How rapidly the spirit of science dies out when its devotees

cease to observe and experiment is shown by the failure of the

“Divine School of Alexandria”’ to maintain the high standard

set by Hipparchus. His immediate successors became at best

only commentators. They wrote much but observed little ;

and it does not appear that any of them attempted even to ver-

ify the remarkable discoveries of Hipparchus during the two

hundred and fifty years which elapsed between the period of his

activity and the advent of his worthy disciple and expounder

Ptolemy.

It is to the work of Ptolemy chiefly that we owe our knowl-

edge of the discoveries and theories of the Hipparchian epoch.

His treatise on the ‘Great Construction,” the Megiste Syn-

taxis, or the Al Magisti and hence Almagest of the Arabians,

is the earliest of the great systematic treatises on astronomy.

It is in this work that the theory of eccentrics and epicycles of

Hipparchus is explained and elaborated, and it is this work

which has given the name of Ptolemy rather than that of his

76 WOODWARD

acknowledged master to a system of the world which dominated

scientific thought for nearly fifteen hundred years:

The period during which the observations and researches of

Ptolemy were carried on is commonly referred to in history as

extending from the reign of the emperor Hadrian to that of

Marcus Aurelius. Thus, while Ptolemy was an Egyptian by

birth, the fact that he was permitted to pursue his astronomical

studies under the empire helps to: some extent to relieve the

Romans of the charge that they were, as regards science, the most

ignorant people of antiquity. But the gravity of that charge is

only palliated by the work of Ptolemy, for he ieft no successors.

Roman astronomy did not rise above the level of astrology ; the

spirit of scientific enquiry gave way to speculation and declama-

tion; and the long night which followed was not broken until

the dawn of the epoch of Galileo—the modern epoch, whose

advances have been founded on observation an experiment.

If astronomy is preeminent among the sciences for its depen-

dence on observation, chemistry and physics are equally preem-

inent for their dependence on’ experiment. This difference in

methods of investigation between the former and the two latter

sciences is a difference imposed by the circumstances that astron-

omy deals chiefly with objects at long range while chemistry

and physics are concerned with objects near at hand. It seems

not a little singular, however, at first thought, that progress in

the development of knowledge concerning the behavior of dis-

tant bodies should have been almost as rapid up to the present

time as the development of knowledge concerning bodies much

more familiar and accessible to us.

Chemistry and physics, like astronomy, had their forerunners

in mythological follies and extravagances. Semi-civilized and

civilized man required a long time after he had learned how

to talk and to write well, after he had founded states and con-

structed systems of philosophy and religion, before he could

reason rationally and successfully with respect to the common-

est material things about him. Thus, chemistry was long ob-

scured by merely verbal speculations on the “four elements,

earth, air, fire and water’’ or onthe “ three elements, salt, sul-

—_——

OBSERVATION AND EXPERIMENT

phur and mercury”; while the beginnings of physics were

perhaps even more clouded by the fantastic unrealities of fertile

but unchecked imaginations.

But man early learned to measure the value of chemistry by

the ‘‘ gold standard.” It is hinted, in fact, though without ade-

quate evidence, that the Golden Fleece of the Argonautic ex-

pedition was a manuscript containing valuable secrets of the

chemist’s art; and Suidas, of the eleventh century, to whom

the word chemistry is attributed, relates that Diocletian, fearing

that the Egyptians, by reason of their knowledge, might become

rich and restive, ordered, in true Roman fashion, that their

books on chemistry should be burned. The thirst for gold as-

sisted also in the development of alchemy, which flourished from

the eleventh to the fifteenth century, especially, and has had not

a few adherents, it would seem, during all the centuries down to

_ and including the one just past. The philosopher's stone was

almost universally believed to bea real agent in medieval times ;

and this strange fiction also has its survivals in the ‘mad

stones,” “moon stones,” “lucky stones,” and other “charms ”’

whose use even at the present time is not uncommonly Jjusti-

fied by the wise saying that ‘there may be something in

them.”’

The difficulty in getting the human mind started with the ele-

ments of physical science is well illustrated, likewise, by the

superstitious rubbish that encumbered the early progress of

knowledge concerning magnets. They were endowed with

imaginary qualities far more wonderful than subsequent obser-

vation and experiment have disclosed. It was believed, for ex-

ample, that they would cause some diseases and cure others ;

that they were effective as love philters ; that they would lose

their properties when rubbed with garlic (which seems not so

unlikely), but that a bath in goat’s blood would readily counter-

act this destructive effect. And in this case, also, as with alchemy

and the philosopher’s stone, it is to be noted that such crude

notions of the phenomena of matter find their survivals at the

present day in a wide acceptance of the unverified efficacy of

“magnetic healers” and “ electric belts,” and in the ease with

78 WOODWARD

which capitalists can be persuaded to invest in a ‘“‘ Keely motor ”

or in anything that promises the marvelous.

With the decline of alchemy the field for chemistry shifted

somewhat. Not unnaturally, since most chemists were also

physicians in those days, a knowledge of the chemical properties

of substances came to occupy a prominent place in the physi-

cian’s art. Thus Paracelsus in the sixteenth century, cutting

loose from the teachings of Aristotle and Galen, boldly asserted

that the true use of chemistry is not to make gold but to pre-

pare medicine ; and he and his follower Van Helmont, in addi-

tion to attaining fame for skill in compounding remedies, were

amongst the first to appreciate the true import of the processes of

analysis and synthesis which came to be called in their day the

spagyric art. Then followed the doctrine ofthe mutually neu-

tralizing substances, acid and alkali; the fruitful hypothesis of

elective attractions or affinities; the ingenious, if erroneous,

theory of phlogiston, and the more permanent theory of

oxygen. All these led up through more and more searching

experimentation to the first great epoch in the history of chem-

istry—the epoch of Lavoisier.

Among the early workers in the century preceding the epoch

of Lavoisier the names of Becher and his disciple Stahl deserve

especial mention, not only by reason of their introduction of the

theory of phlogiston, but also by reason of their enthusiastic

and steadfast devotion to science without hope of pecuniary re-

ward. In his remarkable treatise entitled ‘‘ Physica Subter-

ranez,’’ published in 1681, Becher defends the scientific pursuit

of chemistry as not less worthy of attention than philosophical

and theological studies. He insists especially on the need of

careful observations and on the necessity of constantly verify-

ing theory by experiment. With true scientific enthusiasm he

describes the chemist as one willing to work amid the flames

and fumes, and, if need be, the poisons and poverty of the

laboratory. He has no patience with the charlatans, of which it

appears there were still many in his day, who are looking chiefly

for ways and means of extracting the precious from the baser

metals. As for himself he says, “My kingdom is not of this

OBSERVATION AND EXPERIMENT i,

world. I trust that I have got hold of my pitcher by the right

handle—the true method of treating this study ; for the pseudo-

chemists seek gold, but the true philosophers, science, which is

more precious than any gold.”

It is a peculiarly noteworthy fact that while much attention

was given to chemistry during ancient and medieval times, com-

paratively little attention was given to the other branches of physi-

calscience. Our knowledge of heat, light, electricity, and mag-

netism is almost wholly a development of modern times. The

Greeks were acquainted with a few of the more elementary

phenomena of electricity and light; and Ptolemy and Alhazen

came near discovering the law of optical refraction; but there

was no contribution made to either of those physical sciences

comparable with the discoveries of Hipparchus in astronomy

until the epoch of Galileo. What a marvelous increase in the

rate of scientific progress began with this epoch is shown on

nearly every page of the subsequent history of science. Galileo

and his contemporaries may be said to have established the

methods of observation and experiment. Their systematic ap-

plication has borne fruit in every science. Almost every step

forward has led to additional advances, until now each of the

physical sciences has its wide array of determinate facts correlated

under a great theory. In the domain of light, for example, the

only solid contribution of the ancients is the obvious fact of

radiation in straight lines. After nearly sixteen hundred years

of our era had elapsed, there came Galileo’s invention of the

telescope, and about the same time Snell’s discovery of the law

of refraction. To the telescope were soon added the microscope

and the camera obscura. Then followed Newton with explana-

tions of the rainbow, dispersion, and kindred phenomena ;

Hooke with his discovery of the colors of thin plates ; Dolland

with the combination of two lenses to produce achromatism ;

and Huygens with his discoveries and explanations of double

refraction and polarization ; while in the meantime Roemer had

measured the velocity of light. All these accessions crowded

one another so closely that the emission theory of Newton and

the undulatory theory of Huygens followed almost as a matter

80 WOODWARD

of necessity. The battle royal of these two rival theories, as

you know, lasted for nearly a century until the emission theory,

by the sheer force of critical observations and experiments, was

displaced by the undulatory theory through the brilliant re-

searches of Young and Fresnel.

When we turn from the physical to the geological and _ bio-

logical sciences, the same lessons of the necessity and the effi-

ciency of observation and experiment are still more strikingly

apparent. For although geology and biology are the youngest

of the grand divisions of science, they have accomplished more

than all others toward giving man a proper orientation with re-

spect to the rest of the universe. Geology as we now under-

stand the term is but little more than a hundred years old, and

biology in the sense now attached to the word, is less than fifty

years old. Nevertheless, these sciences have been the chief

contributors to the doctrine of evolution, which, in view of the

wide range of its applicability, must be regarded as the most

important generalization of science. 7

It is a singular circumstance, however, considering the early

advances made in the interpretation of the phenomena of as-

tronomy, that the equally ubiquitous and far more accessible

phenomena of geology and biology should have been so tardily

investigated. The cause of this delay seems to lie in the fact,

not without examples in the present day, that our remote an-

cestors had the habit of constructing their theories first and

making their observations, if at all, afterwards ; and in the cases

of geology and biology they were so well satisfied with their

theories that the trouble of making observations was for a long

time dispensed with.

We of the present day have no right, perhaps—and I for one

would not be disposed to use such a right if conceded—to blame

our predecessors for the narrow, and in some instances crooked

views they held with regard to these subjects. But on the other

hand, we shall fail, I think, to make proper use of our oppor-

tunities if we do not learn speedily to conduct scientific investi-

gations in the future so as to avoid such colossal blunders as

mar the history of geology and biology from its beginnings

down almost to our own time.

OBsERVATION AND EXPERIMENT 81

As an illustration of the blunders referred to I may cite the

profound reluctance even of eminent men of science to accept

the plainest teachings of observation with respect to geological

time up to the middle of the century just passed. Not until

Lyell the great champion of uniformitarianism, as opposed to

catastrophism, had published his “ Principles” (1830) did

scientific opinion show a tendency to accept the fact of the

hoary age of the earth everywhere attested by the rocks in her

crust.

And what a storm of opposition and condemnation, amount-

ing almost in some cases to social ostracism, was visited by the

very “salt of the earth” against those who ventured during the

sixties and the seventies of the last century to consider favorably

the arguments of the “ Origin of Species”?! All this has about

it the freshness, and possibly the pain and the humor, of per-

sonal recollection for those of us who are old enough to have

lived in two epochs. That a mistake of this sort could have

been made thirty or forty years ago seems strange enough in

these peaceful times of ours. But while we may properly let

the recollection of the storm and stress of this earlier period

fade away, the moral of the conflict should be held up as a per-

manent warning to scientific as well as unscientific men ; for no

episode in the previous experience of the race demonstrates so

clearly the sources of knowledge and the methods of attain-

ing it.

As a final illustration of the validity of my thesis I would in-

vite your attention to one of the most instructive and beneficent

of the many brilliant biological researches of recent times. No

one who has suffered from repeated attacks of intermittent fever

and has survived the ravages of the materia medica, can fail to

take a lively interest in the wonderful progress made during the

last twenty years towards a definite knowledge of the natural

history of that disease. Nor can any one interested in the

general aspect of science fail to see in the investigations leading

up to this progress some of the finest examples of the scientific

method.

It would appear that malarial fever has been one of the com-

82 WOODWARD

monest disorders, in certain localities, with which man in his

struggle for existence has had to cope; and before the dis-

covery of the properties of Peruvian bark it must have been a

very serious affliction by reason of its secondary if not by reason

of its primary effects. The symptoms, course, and distinguish-

ing characteristics of the disease, as well as the remedies there-

for, were long known, however, before it was suspected that the

mosquito had anything to do with its dissemination. Bad

water, foul air, and sudden or extreme changes of temperature

were supposed to be promoting causes. The dampness of

marshes, swamps, and other areas holding stagnant water was

held to be an especially common attendant, if not inducing, con-

dition. There was, indeed, no lack of acute and painstaking

observations and no lack of ingenious and well-supported

hypotheses with regard to this widely prevalent but obscure

disorder. The details of its diagnosis, prognosis, nature, and

causation as laid down in the medical manuals of a few decades

ago, are particularly interesting and instructive reading now in

view of recent developments. For example, Hartshorne in his

“Essentials of the Principles and Practice of Medicine,” pub-

lished in 1871, gives the following explanations :

‘‘ No disease has ordinarily so regular a succession of definite

stages as intermittent fever, namely the cold, the hot, and the

sweating stage.” * * * “Upon the origin of malarial fevers,” he

adds, ‘‘the following facts seem to be established: 1. They are

reasonably designated as autumnal fevers, because very much the

largest number of cases occur in the fall of the year. Spring

has the next greatest number of cases. 2. They are “always

strictly localized in prevalence. 3. They never prevail in the

thickly built portions of cities. 4. An average summer heat

of at least 60° F. for two months is necessary for their develop-

ment. Their violence and mortality are greatest, however, in

tropical and subtropical climates. 5. They prevail least where

the surface of the earth is rocky ; and most near marshes, shal-

low lakes and slow streams. The vicinity of the sea is free from

them, unless marshes lie nearit. 6. The draining of dams or

ponds, and the first culture of new soil, often originates them.

OBSERVATION AND EXPERIMENT 83

7. Their local prevalence in the autumn is always checked by

a decided frost.”

Here we have the facts with regard to the symptoms and

cause of the disease stated with a clearness and a conciseness

that could hardly be surpassed. But the real cause of the

malady eluded the insight of the discriminating observers who

collected those facts. A quite different class of facts required

consideration. It was essential to concentrate attention on the

pathological aspects of the enquiry. As to the nature of the

disease Hartshorne writes, with commendable caution, ‘It is

only possible to speculate at present. It is most probable that

ague is a toxemic neurosis. The importance of the blood

change attending it is shown by the disintegration of the blood

corpuscles, and deposit of pigment in various organs.” This

destruction of the blood corpuscles was the critical point on

which the investigation turned. About 1880, Laveran, a French

army surgeon, discovered the destructive agency ina minute

parasite, one of the protozoa, which takes up its residence in,

and then ungratefully enough, destroys our red blood corpus-

cles. Whatasplendid problem was presented by the facts thus

brought to light! The exquisite refinement of .the researches

which followed may be inferred when we reflect on the minute-

ness of an organism which can work out a part of its life his-

tory within blood corpuscles so small that four to six millions

of them find plenty of room in a cubic millimeter. But

stranger still is the fact established within the past year or two

that the mosquito plays the role of an intermediary host and

transmits the parasites to us while feasting upon our blood.

The details of this remarkable discovery need only be alluded

to here, for they have been so recently explained by the experts

participating in them that their essential features are a part of

popular information. Suffice it to remark that they show how

we may secure almost complete immunity from malarial fevers

at no distant day.

Thus, in whatever direction we look for the sources of scien-

tific progress, the same elementary methods of advancement

are found to be effective. Whether we consider the dimensions

84 WOODWARD

of the solar system or the distances between the molecules of

a gas; whether we seek the history of a star as revealed by its

light or the history of the earth as recorded in its crust;

whether we would learn the evolution of man or the develop-

ment of a protozoon; whether we would study the physical

or chemical properties of the sun or the corresponding prop-

erties of a grain of sand; in short, whether we turn to the

macrocosm or to the microcosm for definite, verifiable knowl-

edge, it is found to originate in and to advance with observa-

tion and experiment.

PUBLICATIONS

OF THE

NEW YORK ACADEMY OF SCIENCES

[Lyceum or Natural History 1818-1876]

The publications of the Academy consist of two series, viz :—

(1) The Annals (octavo series), established in 1823, contain

the scientific contributions and reports of researches, together

with the records of meetings, annual exhibitions, etc.

Publication of the Transactions of the Academy was discon-

tinued with the issue of Volume XVI, 1898, and merged in the

Annals. A volume of the Annals will hereafter coincide with

the calendar year and will be distributed in three parts, during

the year. The price of current issues is one dollar per part or

three dollars per volume. Authors’ reprints are issued as soon

as the separate papers are printed, the dates appearing above the

title of each paper.

(2) The Memoirs (quarto series), established in 1895, are is-

sued at irregular intervals. It is intended that each volume shall

be devoted to monographs relating to some particular depart-

ment of science. Volume I is devoted to Astronomical Mem-

oirs, Volume II, to Zoological Memoirs, etc. The price is one

dollar per part, as issued.

All publications will hereafter be sent free to fellows and

members who desire to receive them; but other fellows and

members will only receive the Records, issued as a separate

from the Annals. The Annals will be sent, as before, to

honorary and corresponding members desiring them.

. Subscriptions and inquiries concerning current and back

numbers of any of the publications of the Academy should be

addressed to THE Lisprarian

New York Academy of Sciences

Columbia University

New York City.

PRICES OF PUBLICATIONS

Annals of the Lyceum (Vols. I-XI), . . . per Vol., $5.00

Proceedings “‘ ONO. IED) eee SS ARS OO

‘dans. of the Academy (Vols. I-X VI), 2)... “5,00

Annals ‘“ a Uo CAR SN ER eae a a cae cea ae OF, &

Annals “ s (Vol. XI e¢ seg.), 23.00

Memoirs ‘‘ ‘ ie ig ot Bo) ed Pts. L, II, Toe

Pee ante ros gn 1.00

CONTENTS, OF MOL. X1¥, PART A

1.—McMurrich, J. Playfair. Report on the Hex-

actiniz of the Columbia University Expedition : . ee

to Puget Sound during the Summer of 1896 . | 18a a

ia 2.—Huntington, Geo. 8. The Morphological ‘Sig-

, nificance of Certain Periclavicular Supernu-

micfary, Myselesses 6:6 3,06 eat Ue en a oe 53-66

3.—Hollick, Arthur. Discovery of a Mastodon’s

Tooth and the Remains of a Boreal Vegetation 7

in a Swamp on Staten Island, N.Y. . . . 67-68

4.—Woodward, R. 8. Observation and Experiment Bete ts:

VoL. XIV PART II

ANNALS

OF THE

NEW YORK

ACADEMY OF SCIENCES

Editor:

CHARLES LANE POOR

The New Era Printing Company

Lancaster, Pa.

NEW YORK ACADEMY OF SCIENCES

OFFICERS, IQO0-I901

President—RoBERT S. Woopwarp, Columbia University.

Recording Secretary—RIcHARD E, Donce, Teachers College.

Corresponding Secretary—HAROLD Jacosy, Columbia University.

Treasureyr-—CHARLES F. Cox, Grand Central Depot.

Librarian—LIvINGSTON FARRAND, Columbia University.

Editor—CHARLES LANE Poor, 4 East 48th Street.

SECTION OF ASTRONOMY, PHYSICS, AND CHEMISTRY

Chairman—Wmn. Hatiock, Columbia University.

Secretary—F. L. Turts, Columbia University.

SECTION OF BIOLOGY

Chairman—Cuas. L. BristoLt, New York University.

Secretary—-HENrRY E. Crampton, Barnard College.

SECTION OF GEOLOGY AND MINERALOGY

Chairman—ALExis A. JULIEN, Columbia University.

Secretary—EpmunD O, Hovey, American Museum of Natural

History.

SECTION OF ANTHROPOLOGY AND PSYCHOLOGY

Chairman—LIVINGSTON FARRAND, Columbia University.

Secretary—R. S. WoopwortH, N. Y. Univ. Med. Coll., Belle-

vue Hospital.

SESSION, 1901-1902

The Academy will meet on Monday evenings at 8.15 o'clock,

from October 7th to May tgth, in the rooms of the Chemist’s

Club, 108 West 55th Street. |

[ ANNALS N. Y. AcaD. Sci., VoL. XIV, No. 5, pp. 85-163, March 4, 1902. }

mecOnRD OF MEETINGS

NEW YORK

ACADEMY OF SCIENCES

JANUARY, 1901, TO DECEMBER, IgoI

RICHARD E. DODGE

Recording Secretary

[Annals N. Y. AcAb. Scr. No. 5, pp. 85-163, March 4, 1902. ]

RECORDS OF MEETINGS

OF THE

Rein YORK “ACADEMY .OP SCIENCES.

January, 1901, to December, 1901.,

RicHAaRD E. DovGe, Recording Secretary.

BUSINESS MEETING.

JANUARY 7, IQOI.

Academy met at 8:15 P. M., Professor William Hallock

presiding.

The minutes of the last business meeting were read and

approved.

The Secretary reported from the Council as follows :

That Volume XIII of the Annals would be very shortly

completed, the larger part of the manuscript being already in

press. Also that the Council had voted, beginning with Volume

XIV, of the ANNAts, to send the Zvansactions of the Academy

only to all members, but to send the rest of the publications to

such members as may signify their desire to receive them, and to

take steps to find out the will of the members in reference to this

point.

The name of one candidate for resident membership was read

and referred to the Council.

RICHARD E. DOopGE,

Recording Secretary.

88 RECORDS

SECTION OF ASTRONOMY, PHYSIC?

CHEMISTRY:

JANUARY 7, IQOI.

Section met at 8:20 P. M., Professor William Hallock pre-

siding.

The minutes of the last meeting of Section were read and

approved.

The following program was then offered :

Harold Jacoby, A New TELESCOPE FOR PHOTOGRAPHING

THE POLE OF THE Heavens. Illustrated.

Geo. B. Pegram, REFLECTION oF LIGHT FROM WHITE SuR-

FACES.

Professor Jacoby announced that this plan of photographing

the close polar stars had made material progress. A special

instrument has been constructed and mounted at the observa-

tory at Helsingfors, Finland. Photographs of the actual instru-

ment in position for use were exhibited. It is planned to make

photographs with this instrument in which the close polar stars

will trace out ‘trails’? on the plate corresponding to their diur-

nal motion. The effects of refraction, etc., having been elimi-

nated by computation, it is possible to obtain from such photo-

graphs the exact position of the celestial pole among the

stars and on the date of observation. The intercomparison of

results taken on dates six months apart should furnish a new

determination of the constant of aberration, and photographs

taken annually throughout a series of years should determine

the constant of nutation and ultimately perhaps even that of

precession.

The actual observing with the instrument will commence in

the spring as soon as the Helsingfors astronomers have fin-

ished with the observations of Eros now in progress, and the

plates will be sent to Columbia University, New York, for

measurements and reductions. An outline of the method to be

used, together with a preliminary trial of the same, has already

been published by Professor Jacoby under the title ‘ Photo-

graphic Researches near the Pole of the Heavens,” Ludletin of

RECORDS 89

the Imperial Academy of Sctences of St. Petersburg, 5th Series,

Vol. 9, p. 41, 1898, June.

The second paper presented the results of an experimental

study of some white surfaces with regard to the relation between

the intensity of the reflected ray and the angles of incidence and

reflection. .It was carried out by means of a special photometer

allowing the use of any desired angles of incidence and reflec-

tion. Among the surfaces tested were plaster of Paris, several

kinds of unglazed paper, compressed powders of several kinds,

powders not compressed, but gently smoothed with a metal

plate, and finally a surface made by allowing fine plaster dust

to settle from suspension in the air on a suitable plate. These

surfaces in the order named showed decreasing polarization of

the reflected light, and less approach to specular reflection. The

fine dust surface showed no polarization and almost no tendency

to regular reflection. The results with this surface as shown

by sets of curves, follow pretty closely the old Lambert’s or

cosine law.

Intensity = A cos7 cosy.

with some departure when both angles were very large. With

all the other surfaces the departure was very great for angles

greater than 70°. Contrary to the results of Mr. Wright (Pr:/.

Mag., Feb., 1900) these experiments were quite in accord with

the demand of theory that the intensity of the reflected ray

should be expressed as a symmetric function of the angles of

incidence and reflection.

Wituiam S. Day.

Secretary.

SECTION OF BIOLOGY.

JANUARY 14, IQOI.

Section met at 8:15 P. M., Professor C. L. Bristol presiding.

The minutes of the last meeting of Section were read and

approved.

The name of one candidate for resident membership was read

and referred to the Council according to the By-Laws.

90 RECORDS

The following program was then offered :

H. B. Torrey, A New Species oF Phoronis.

J. H. McGregor, CHarAcTERS AND RELATIONSHIPS OF THE

BELODONT REPTILES.

F. E. Lloyd, (1) Notes on Chrysoma pauciflosculosa, (2) ON

THE OCCURRENCE OF NECTARIES IN Peris aguilina.

Prior to the reading of the minutes, Dr. H. E. Crampton was

elected Secretary of the Section, in place of Professor Lloyd,

resigned.

SUMMARY OF PAPERS.

Mr. Torrey described a new species of Phoronis, the first that

has been collected on the western coast of America. It is inter-

mediate in its characters between the European and eastern

American species, and those found in Australia and the Philip-

pines. Insizeit agrees with P. Lusku. The lophophore, though

spirally coiled—thus differing from that of the European spe-

cies—is less complex than that of P. Lusk, and the tentacles

are fewer innumber (200). The longitudinal muscles are stouter

than those of P. Lusk, agreeing more nearly with the condition

in P. architecta of the east coast. The new species agrees with

the latter species in habit, in the possession of a longitudinal

ciliated ridge in the digestive tract, and in the possible separation

of the sexes.

Dr. McGregor presented the results of a recent study of the

Belodonts, a group of fossil reptiles occurring in the Triassic of _

Germany and North America. The Belodonts have usually

been regarded as ancestral Crocodiles, though many students of

the group have admitted possible affinities with Rhynchocephalia

and Dinosauria. The material used in the present study, chiefly

from the genera JZ striosuchus and Rhytinodon, yielded some

parts new to science, é. g., the atlas and the clavicle. The pres-

ence of two cervical intercentra and a large clavicle tends to ally

the group more closely to the Rhynchocephalia. The hyoid

apparatus was found to be suspended from the skull as in //at-

teria; and there is strong evidence that the carpals (and prob-

ably also the tarsals) remained cartilaginous throughout life.

Some doubt was expressed regarding the Belodont ancestry of

RECORDS a!

the Crocodiles, though it was admitted that the Belodonts stand

near the Crocodilian stem. The suggestion was made that the

Belodonts may belong on or very close to the line of descent

of the Ichthyosauria, occupying a position midway between

some Permian land-living Rhynchocephalian and the marine

Ichthyosauria of the Jurassic. In support of this theory, many

structures of the Belodonts were shown to be such as one

would expect to find in an ancestor of the Ichthyosauria, ¢. g¢.,

position of nares, elongated premaxillary, bicipital ribs, two or

more cervical intercentra, abdominal ribs, form of shoulder-gir-

dle, etc. Some other structures, apparently incompatible with

this view, were shown to be in reality not inconsistent with it.

In discussion of Dr. McGregor’s paper, Professor Osborn

emphasized the importance of the Belodonts, and the conflicting

nature of thc opinions regarding them. Huxley placed them

near the crocodiles as evidenced by his choice of the name

Parasuchia for the group. The paleontologists of the Stuttgart

school relate them to the Dinosaurs. Dr. McGregor is the first

to bring out the idea of their relationship to the Ichthyo-

sauria, and based as it is upon many new characters described

for the first time, the theory is of great interest and importance.

Professor Lloyd stated that the chief point of interest in

Chrysoma pauciflosculosa, a sub-tropical marine form, is in the

structure of the leaves. The surface of these is sculptured in

the form of a mosaic. This appearance is caused by deep and

regularly-arranged involutions of the epidermis. At the bottom

of each sulcus are to be found flagellated and glandular hairs,

such as have been described by Vesque for the Composite.

Transverse sections show that each element of the mosaic con-

tains chlorenchyma, which, though packed densely around the

edges, forms in the middle a large air-chamber, suggesting in

appearance the air-chambers of certain Hepatice. The leaf, a

bifacial one, is maintained in a vertical position.

In a second paper, Professor Lloyd drew attention to the

occurrence, in Preris aquilina, of nectaries near the bases of the

pinne. The activity of these glands reaches a maximum dur-

ing the development of the frond in spring and early summer,

92 RECORDS

at which time large drops of syrupy nectar exude from the

openings, which are modified stomata. The object of the

speaker was to call the attention of teachers of general biology .

to the presence, in a much-used laboratory type, of organs

which, though discovered by Francis Darwin in 1877, were

very generally overlooked.

In discussion of Professor Lloyd’s first paper, Professor Brit-

ton remarked that the author’s results were of value as throw-

ing light upon the vexed question of the relationship of Chry-

soma to the golden-rods (Solidago). The two groups were

probably distinct. It was also recalled that the late Dr.

Grégory- had worked extensively upon the problem, but her full

results had never been published.

Henry E. CRAMPTON,

Secretary.

SECTION OF GEOLOGY AND MINERATLOGs

JANUARY 21, .IQOI.

Section met at 8:15 P. M., Dr. A. A. Julien presiding.

The minutes of the last meeting of Section were read and

approved.

The following program was then offered :

Richard E. Dodge, THE LANDSLIDES OF THE ECHO AND VER-

MILION CLIFFS.

William Hallock, Some Pecutiar MINERALOGICAL EFFECTS

OF LIGHTNING DISCHARGE.

Alexis A. Julien, A PETRoGRAPHIC STUDY OF THE SPECIMENS

DESCRIBED BY PROFESSOR HALLOCK.

THEODORE G. WHITE,

Secretary.

SECTION OF ANTHROPOLOGY AND \PSYCHORGE

JANUARY 28, IQOI.

Section met at 8:15 P. M., Dr. Franz Boas presiding.

The minutes of the last meeting of Section were read and

approved.

RECORDS 93

The following program was then offered :

Dr. A. Hrdlicka, CERTAIN RacIAL CHARACTERISTICS OF THE

BASE OF THE SKULL.

Dr. L. Farrand, THe ALsEA INDIANS OF OREGON.

SUMMARY OF PAPERS.

The first paper dealt with the middle lacerated foramen, the

petrous portions of the temporal bones, and the styloid. The

author demonstrated the different stages of development of

these parts in primates and at different stages of life in the

whites, and the differences of those parts, fully developed, in

the negroes, Indians and whites. In the adult whites the mid-

dle lacerated foramen is large, the petrous portions appear con-

siderably sunken ( bulging of surrounding parts), the styloid is

well developed. In the Indian the foramen is but a moderate

size, in the negro small, in apes absent ; the petrous portions are

less sunken in the Indian than in the white, on, or almost on,

the level with the surrounding parts in the negro, bulging more

or less beyond these in the primates; the styloid is in the ma-

jority of cases small in the negro and small to rudimentary in

most of the Indians. Where the styloid is rudimentary the

vaginal process often plays a compensatory part. In whites all

thé mentioned stages of the parts described may be observed

at different periods of life. Brain development accounts for the

differences in the size of the middle lacerated foramen and the

relative position of the petrous portions.

The second paper reported observations made by the author

on the language, customs, and traditions of the Alsea Indians

of Oregon.

CHARLES H. Jupp,

Secretary’.

BUSINESS MEETING.

FEBRUARY 4, IQOI.

Academy met at 8.15 P. M., President Woodward presiding.

The minutes of the last business meeting were read and ap-

proved.

94 RECORDS

The Secretary reported from the Council as follows :

The nomination of the following four candidates for honorary

membership: Charles Vernon Boys, F.R.S., 66 Victoria St,

London, S. W., England ; Emil Fischer, Professor of Chemistry,

University of Berlin; William Ramsay, PhD, Li pes pe

F.R.S., University College, London, England; James Geikie,

LL. Diy Di@. Ey Bans. (Lo & FE.) Universityote dinbursae

Scotland.

That the Council had voted not to nominate any correspond-

ing members.

That the Council nominated the following resident members

to be promoted to Fellows: Dr. Henry E. Crampton, Drie

A. Herter, Prof. (Graham Lusk, Dr. Charlés' Lane Poors Vie

C. A, Post, Dr: E. 2 Thorndike, Dr. (ROS. Weodwertt

The Secretary also reported the list of officers to be nomi-

nated according to the by-laws.

The following Candidate for resident membership, approved

by the Council was duly elected:

Herman C. Bumpus, American Museum of Natural His-

tory.

RICHARD E. DonceE,

Recording Secretary.

SEC TIGNIOERCASTRONOMY PEVSies

AND CHEMISTRY:

FEBRUARY 4, IQOI.

Section met at 8:20 P. M., Prof. William Hallock presid-

ing.

The minutes of the last meeting of Section were read and

approved.

The following program was then offered :

George E. Hale, AsTRoNOMICAL PHOTOGRAPHY WITH A

VISUAL TELESCOPE.

W.G. Levison, Nore on A CAUSE OF THE DETERIORATION

OF GELATINE PHOTOGRAPHIC Dry PLATES. |

RECORDS 95

SUMMARY OF PAPERS.

Photography was discovered in 1837 and the first astronomi-

cal photograph was taken in 1840 by Dr. Draper of New York.

It was a photograph of the moon made on a daguerreotype

plate and gave great promise for the future. Bond in 1850

made the first photographs of the stars. Rutherford of New

York in 1858 made some remarkable photographs of the moon,

and later some star photographs.

Photography has now become so valuable in astronomy that

it is applied in every department. It is not true, however, that

it will displace the eye. There are certain fields where the eye

will be superior to the photographic plate, but in many other

fields photography has led to results that never could have been

obtained by visual observation. I shall speak to-night of work

done at the Yerkes observatory with a telescope designed for

visual observation. It is fortunate that this telescope was not

designed for photography alone, for by the use of methods re-

cently devised it has been possible to use it for photography and

the results are not at all inferior to what they might have been

in a telescope designed for photography alone.

The forty-inch telescope of the Yerkes Observatory can be

considered as a long camera with a focal length of about sixty-

four feet. Its field of view embraces a circle in the sky of only

about five minutes of arcin diameter. In photographing groups

and clusters of stars this long focal length makes it possible to

separate stars which would have been run together into one

mass with an instrument of shorter focal length. A means of

counteracting the uncorrected chromatic aberration has been

devised by Mr. Ritchie of the. Yerkes Observatory. He em-

ploys a yellow collodion film in front of the photographic plate

at the eye end of the instrument, by which the blue rays are cut

off. Suitable isochromatic plates suchas can be found in the

market are used. This is a very inexpensive means of using the

telescope for photography. A special form of guiding apparatus

to keep the star image at the same point of the plate has to be

employed. On account of the unavoidable flexure of the large

telescope tube, an auxiliary telescope placed parallel to the

96 RECORDS

telescope tube cannot be used. The image of another star

just outside of the photographic plate is made use of. By means

of a little eye-piece with a fine pair of cross hairs, attached to

the plate holder which is adjustable in two directions at right

angles to each other, the image of the guide star is kept on the

intersection of the cross-hairs during the entire time of exposure.

The photographs taken at the Yerkes Observatory in this man-

ner by Mr. Ritchie are much finer than those taken at Potsdam

with a photographic telescope.

A most important application of photography with this tele-

scope will be the determination of the parallax of stars, which

has not yet deen done to any extent by photographic means.

Photographs of small planetary nebulz taken with this tele-

scope show more than can actually be seen with our eyes, in

some cases for example, a radial structure.

The instrument can also be used to study stellar spectra and

stellar evolution. We can pass by gradations from the types of

hot and white stars like Sirius, to the more developed and colder

ones like our sun, and then to the red stars. There are two

types of red stars and by the aid of their spectra photographed

with this telescope we have detected a relationship between the

two types, through the presence of carbon bands. Even in the

atmosphere of the sun there is a very thin layer of carbon vapor

and above this the gases of the chromosphere. In the red stars

we have this carbon vapor, which is very dense in one of the

types.

Another important line of work is that of measuring the mo-

tion of stars in the line of sight. Professor Frost uses the tita-

nium line for this purpose, and has just had a new spectrograph

constructed for the work.

In photographing the spectrum of Saturn with its rings, we

find a faint band in the red, indicating the presence of a com-

paratively dense absorbing atmosphere on the planet which is

absent from the rings.

With the help of a spectroheliograph, we are able to photo-

graph solar phenomena. These photographs show that the

mottling of the sun’s surface persists throughout the minimum

‘Re

RECORDS ot

period of sun spots as well as through the maximum. Promi-

nences can be photographed nearly as well with it as at times

of total solar eclipse.

Mr. Levison in his note, suggests that there is some emana-

tion, probably Becquerel rays, from the pasteboard of the boxes

in which the plates are packed for the market, which causes

their deterioration. He found that if he cut a star from the

pasteboard of a plate box and laid it on the sensitive side of a

plate, the whole then being enclosed in a box for a week, when

he developed the plate he found an image of the star. This

would explain the deterioration at the edges of plates where

they come nearly in contact with the box, or the deterioration

due to the pasteboard separators at the edges of the plates,

The author’s experiments led him to the suggestion that metal

boxes would be better for the plates than the pasteboard boxes.

Wrapping with paraffine paper might also have the same effect.

Wy. S. Day,

Secretary.

SECTION. OF, BIOLOGY.

FEBRUARY II, IQOI.

Section met at 8:15 P. M., Professor C. L. Bristol presiding.

The minutes of the last meeting of Section were read and

approved.

The following program was then offered :

D. T. MacDougal, THe Criticar PoINTs IN THE RELATION OF

Licut To PLANTs.

A. G. Mayer, THe VariATIONs oF A NEWLY-ARISEN SPECIES

oF MeEpusa.

SUMMARY OF PAPERS.

Dr. MacDougal stated that an examination of all the data at

hand shows no correspondence among the maxima, minima,

and optima of intensities of light with regard to the various in-

fluences exerted upon the plant by light, and that the current

conception of phofotonus is not based upon well-defined gener-

alizations.

Etiolative phenomena of plants are irritable reactions, con-

98 RECORDS

sisting chiefly in the elongation of organs which would carry

the chlorophyl screens and reproductive bodies up into the

light. Light is not necessary to the motility of protoplasm or

to the activity of the motor mechanisms of such plants as JZ-

mosa,; the condition known as darkness-rigor does not exist.

Appearances commonly supposed to be due to rigor of dark-

ness are pathological phenomena occasioned by the disintegra-

tion of chlorophyl and other substances.

Light may exert a direct chemical (disintegrative) effect upon

the constructive material of the cell, but it does not retard

growth ; on the contrary, it accelerates growth among the alge.

Evidence that light exercises a paratonic influence upon plants

is not at hand, and no observations could be found by the

speaker supporting the conclusion that a similar retarding influ-

ence of light upon growth occurs among animals.

In discussion of Dr. MacDougal’s paper, Mr. M. A. Bigelow

called attention to some experiments made by him, under the

direction of Professor C. B. Davenport, to determine the influ-

ence of light upon embryonic development and post-embryonic

growth in Amphibia. Light does not retard, but rather accel-

erates developmental processes, the effective rays being red in

embryonic and blue during post-embryonic stages.

Dr. Mayer stated that in 1898 he had discovered a pentam-

erous Hydromedusa at the Tortugas, Florida, and had named

it Pseudoclytia pentata. In this form there are five radial canals,

five lips, and five gonads 72° apart, instead of four of these

various organs at intervals of go°, as in other Hydromeduse.

In its anatomy it is related to the genus Lpenthesis, being very

close to £. folleata, which also occurs at the Tortugas. It is

probably the descendant of some “penthesis, and seems to be a

newly-arisen species. No studies have as yet been made by

zoologists upon the variations of such forms.

The medusa is highly variable. Out of 1,000 individuals 703

are normal radially symmetrical medusz, with five radial canals

and five lips at intervals of 72°, while 297 are abnormal in some

respect, having 4, 3; 2, or 6, 7, 8 canals or lips. “It is remark

able that fully 50% of the abnormal individuals are radially

RECORDS 99

symmetrical. The greater the departure from the normal form

the smaller is the ratio of radially symmetrical individuals.

Thus only 11.2% of the meduse having five canals are irre-

gular, while 30-33% of those with four or six canals are irre-

gular ; in medusz with seven or three canals 50% are irregular,

while 100% of those with two or eight canals are so. The lips

show a decided tendency to revert to the ancestral number of

four, at intervals of go°, but the canals, on the contrary, incline

toward the higher numbers. We have here a medusa which is

continually producing radially symmetrical sports, and is initiat-

ing, so to speak, what might become new species were con-

ditions favorable.

On comparing the variations of P. pentata with those of &.

folleata or Eucope, one is struck with many remarkable family

likenesses. This is especially true in the former comparison.

Similarity of the variations, the likeness of their abnormalities,

in these closely-related forms, indicates apparently a race kinship.

The abnormal young of P. fenfafa appear to survive fully as

well as normal individuals, and abnormal medusz mature their

gonads quite as commonly.as the normal forms. The former

are not weeded out by natural selection, yet they have not suc-

ceeded in establishing new types of meduse.

In discussion of Dr. Mayer’s paper, Dr. MacDougal spoke of

a sport of Populus tremuloides, discovered by Dr. Britton, in

which the irritability to gravity of the leaves had been reversed

so that they now pointed downwards. The reversal appeared

in the buds. New plants propagated by grafting retained the

positive geotropism of the leaves. It was also stated that the

“ weeping’ varieties of certain trees were usually produced in

this way. Henry E. CRAMPTON,

Secretary.

SECTION OF ANTHROPOLOGY AND PSYCHOLOGY.

FEBRUARY 15, IQOI.

Section met 8:15 P. M., Professor J. McK. Cattell presiding.

The following program was offered :

100 RECORDS

Dr. D. R. Major, PoysicaL AND MENTAL TESTs OF SCHOOL

CHILDREN.

A.E. Spitzka, Tue Brains oF TWO DISTINGUISHED PHYSICIANS,

Dr. EDOUARD SEGUIN AND HIS SON Dr. EDWARD SEGUIN.

SUMMARY OF PAPERS.

The first paper reported the results of physical and mental tests

on school children of high and low class standing, the aim of these

tests being to discover what relation, if any, exists between class

standing and the ability shown in the particular tests used. The

tests were as follows: visual and auditory memory for figures

and words, striking out of A’s, naming 100 words, copying

columns of figures, weight discrimination, perception of size,

sensation -area test as used in the Columbia laboratory, eyesight,

age and talkativeness. The tests were made on 150 New York

City school children, 68 having high class standing, 82 low.

The results of the tests tend to show that the class standing

bears a close relation to the ability to pronounce words, to care-

fulness or accuracy in striking out A’s, to memory for words, to

eyesight, to age (the average of the good pupils being less than

the average age of the class) and to talkativeness (the good

pupils being as a rule talkative). There is apparently little, if

any, relation between class standing and the ability shown in the

other tests mentioned. The study, however, is not completed

and the opinions expressed here are subject to change. In

addition to the use made of the standard psychological tests, an

attempt is being made to devise tests to determine the presence,

nature and quality or worth of apperception activities.

The second paper described with special reference to their

similarities, the brains of two distinguished physicians, Dr.

Edouard Seguin and his son Dr. Edward C. Seguin. The most

striking similarity discoverable in these brains is the unusual

development in the left insula. This similarity was attributed by

the author to heredity, and was held to be the physical basis

for the high type of ability shown by both the Seguins in the

use of language.

CHARLES H. Jupp,

Secretary.

RECORDS 101

SECTION OF GEOLOGY AND MINERALOGY.

FEBRUARY 18, IQOI.

Section met at 8:15 P. M., Dr. A. A. Julien presiding.

The minutes of the last meeting of Section were read and ap-

proved.

The following program was then offered:

George I. Finlay, THE GRANITE OF BARRE, VERMONT.

A. A. Julien, Nore on A SAND FULGURITE FROM POLAND.

SUMMARY OF PAPERS.

Mr. Finlay described the occurrence of the Barre granite as

a single intrusion through the country rock, which is a biotite-

schist, in the southern portion of Barre township. Many inclu-

sions of the schist are found in the granite, and this rock has

almost surrounded other masses of the schist, which remain in

place, with their original dip and strike unchanged. The

speaker employed a series of original lantern views to illustrate

the character of the jointing, the ‘“‘onion structure,’ and the

zones of shearing together with certain large systems of joints,

standing at right angles to each other, resulting from pressure.

Microscopic examination shows that the granite consists of

microcline and orthoclase, plagioclase in very small amounts,

quartz, biotite and muscovite, with occasional crystals of apa-

tite and magnetite and rarely pyrite. Variations in the shade

of the marketable granite, from very light to very dark gray,

are due to the relative amount of biotite which it contains.

The rock is of medium grain and its constituent minerals are

but slightly weathered. Pegmatitic offshoots, traceable directly

to the granite mass, were recorded by Mr. Finlay, and their dy-

namic effects on the enclosing schist were illustrated. The

contact metamorphism of the schist is inconsiderable. It is

chiefly shown in the greater abundance of biotite and quartz in

the immediate vicinity of the granite. Two dikes of augite-

camptonite were found; one in the granite, the other in the

country-rock. They are noticeable for the manner in which

they have weathered. At times sixteen successive shells may

102 RECORDS

be counted which are ready to break away from the main mass of

the dike. Mention was also made, in discussing the glacial geol-

ogy of the region, of sand plains and of two well-developed eskers.

The paper was discussed by Professor Kemp and Doctors

Julien and White.

Doctor Julien exhibited a specimen of fulgurite formed from

sand in Poland, with a series of photo-micrographs which he

had made from the same. Some new features in fulgurites were |

pointed out in this specimen; pustules. of glass on the inner

lumen, glass fibres on the exterior and adhering sand-grains,

two-thirds of which consisted of orthoclase. In the thin cross

section, examination of the minute gas cavities showed the ab-

sence of condensed water-vapor, and this indicated a dilatation

of both lumen and cavities by air, more than by steam. The

radial arrangement of layer cavities, the horn-like projections on

the outside of the tube, and the pustules along the lumen, were

all shown to be connected with relief of intense pressure out-

wardly during the electric discharge, or inwardly, during the

reaction after its passage. This fulgurite is of further interest

in presenting the first instance yet observed of devitrification,

the glass being generally filled with delicate crystallites, appar-

ently of feldspar. All the bubbles, however, are enclosed in

pellicles of homogeneous glass, and some of the larger within

a coating of suddenly chilled glass, which is free from crystal-

lites. The relation of these facts was discussed in reference to

Lagorio’s view as to the difficult saturation of a magma by the

constituents of feldspar.

Other occurrences of fulgurites were discussed by Doctors

Kemp, Levison and White.

THEODORE G. WHITE,

Secretary.

ANNUAL MEETING.

FEBRUARY 25, IQOI.

Academy met for the Annual Meeting at 8:15, President

Woodward in the chair.

Reports of the officers for the past year were called for and

presented in the following order :

RECORDS 103

The accompanying report of the Corresponding Secretary was

read by the Recording Secretary.

The report of the Recording Secretary, herewith filed, was

read.

The accompanying report of the Treasurer was read and re-

ferred to the Finance Committee for auditing.

The accompanying report of the Librarian was read.

The following nominations for Honorary Members, selected

by the Council according to the By-Laws, were read, and the

Secretary was instructed to cast one ballot in each instance,

which was done.

Charles Vernon Boys, F.R.S., 66 Victoria St., S. W., Lon-

don, England.

Emil Fischer, Professor of Chemistry, University of Berlin,

Germany.

Wemhom Ramsay, Pi. D., LL.D., D.Sc.,.F.R.S., F.C.S., Pro-

fessor of Chemistry, University College, London, England.

Same Geitde, 11, Die a FoR:S: (L..& E.),, Murchison

Professor of Geology in the University of Edinburgh, Scotland.

The following list of Fellows, nominated by the Council

according to the By-Laws, was read, and the Secretary was

empowered to cast the affirmative ballot of the Academy there-

for, which was done.

Dr. Henry E. Crampton,

ie. A. Herter,

Dr. Charles Lane Poor,

me . ty Phormadike,

He }..G. Curtis,

Professor Graham Lusk,

ar A. Post,

Dr. R. S. Woodworth.

The President then appointed as tellers Dr. Wiechmann and

Mr. Tufts. Ballots were distributed, votes received and counted,

and the following list of officers elected :

President, Robert S. Woodward.

First Vice-President, Nathaniel L. Britton.

Second Vice-President, J. McKeen Cattell.

104 RECORDS

Corresponding Secretary, Harold Jacoby.

Recording Secretary, Richard E. Dodge.

Treasurer, Charles F. Cox.

Librarian, Livingston Farrand.

Councillors: Franz Boas, Charles H. Judd, Charles A. Dore-

mus, M. I. Pupin, Frederic S. Lee, L. M. Unidetwoed:

Curators:. Harrison G. Dyar, George F. Kunz, Alexis A.

Jahen; Wows ti audy, i.’ G. Love.

Finance Committee: John H.“Hinton, C. A. Post, Cornelius

Van Brunt.

The President then delivered his Annual Address entitled,

‘Observation and Experiment.”

At the close of the address a vote of thanks to the President

was moved by ex-president Osborn, and carried.

Adjourned. RICHARD E. DODGE,

Recording Secretary. .

REPORT OF THE CORRESPONDING: SECRKEAARY.

The number of honorary members now on the Academy lists

is forty-one ; corresponding members, two hundred and six.

There have been five losses by death in the last year, namely

Professors Richard Ackerman, Silas Newcomb, Hugo Geinitz,

P. S. Michie and Sir Joseph Hooker.

Respectfully submitted,

WILLIAM STRATFORD,

Corresponding Secretary.

REPORT- OF RECORDING SECRIT ik.

During the last Academy year the business of the Academy

has progressed in the customary paths. The several sections

have held their usual meetings, with ordinarily the same attend-

ance as in former years. The Councils have held the meetings

prescribed by the By-Laws, and have accomplished several im-

portant objects. On the whole, however, the year cannot be

called a year of progress.

During the last year there have been eight meetings of the

RECORDS 105

Council, eight business meetings, thirty sectional meetings, one

public lecture, and one public reception. At the sectional

meetings there have been seventy-four papers presented, which

may be classified as follows :

Anthropology 4. Paleontology 2.

Astronomy 3. Physics 15.

Botany 2. Physiography 2.

Chemistry 1. Physiology 2.

Geology 15. Psychology 12.

Mineralogy 4. Zoology 9.

Miscellaneous 3.

There are at present a total of 321 Resident Members, and

96 Fellows.

The Annual Reception and Exhibition was held in April at

the American Museum of Natural History, and proved as usual

eminently successful. Owing, however, to financial stringency

on the part of the Academy it has been voted to recommend to

the succeeding Council that no Reception be held in the year

Igol.

The accomplishments of the year leading to increased effi-

ciency in the Academy work are first, the establishment of a

series of publication rules that will make the future work of the

Editor, and the cost of publication, much less than formerly ;

secondly, the vote to establish a budget for the next fiscal year,

within the limits of which each officer will be required to work ;

thirdly, the hiring of the rooms of the Chemists’ Club for the

meetings of the next year, at a greatly reduced rental, with ac-

commodations equal to those which we now enjoy ; and finally,

a vote to send the ANNALS and Memoirs only to those members

of the Academy signifying their desire to receive them.

The publications of the academy have been unfortunately de-

layed during the last year, owing to no fault of the Editor ; but

the current volume will be very shortly completed and issued.

Owing to the expense of the current volume the amount of

publication possible by the Academy during the present year

will be seriously reduced, unless a publication fund can be

established.

106 RECORDS

It should also be recorded that the Council, in June, 1g00,

presented to President Morris K. Jesup, of the American Mu-

seum of Natural History,-a letter of congratulation and good

wishes on the occasion of his seventieth birthday.

RICHARD E. DODGE,

Recording Secretary.

REPORT OF THE TREASURER.

RECEIPTS.

Balance as per last Annual Report..... $2,239.11

Mortgage paid off, account Permanent

PONG Asta) oo. cee ae $1,202:75

< a account Audubon Fund _ 1,797.25 3,000.00

Income, Permanent Waimea c. o8 25) crs 426.38

ce" FMD OM SMG yore sha sarees o extahs 99.04

"Publication sud .-cris.c% «0%. 90.00 Spacey

Life Memberships ees (2 itis ci): sete os 200.00

EnitiatiOm weees fies eerie tare Sac meee Ghee ee 75.00

Annual Dies sO jest nine ee ae eae coe 10.00

u NOOO Raters ashe nee meen ates 30.00

i LSOO cyehesttage emis aioe 170.00

es WOOO Rea gage es ween sete a ase 2395-00

ef S16) Ges aa tent ter hen genes 50.00 (2,655-00

DISBURSEMENTS. $8,784.53

Cost of. Publications): += $2,499.72:

Less Sales "ia seeta sate 30.06 2,469.66

Cost of Publications (paid by

Audubon Fundy. i vce el 309.72

Rent of Roomstesss035.407- 5 10.00

7th Annual Reeeption -2--*. 329.68

Dues to Scientific Alliance .. 32.58

IpeCtures ss, Giet areca edema aes 20.00

Expenses of Recording Secretary...... 291.44

b ROtATIAM 21 Wasa «Pps bee 363.95

“ Weasiueives spat an ord. atts 41.93

General empensedae- (1 arete ace ith eee «Niche 79:37 : hyAd7i33

Balaticewon- hand. Sabet ee ce ee $4,337.20

RECORDS 10 7

BALANCE SHEET.

FEBRUARY 25, IQOI.

Dr. Cr.

eemaaeere Stine? 2. ST eee Su $10,426.43

oD ae SESS ois Oa oe aa 1,823.69

DMG, TUNG. So we eg EE SS 1,897.25

Income, Audubon Fund (unexpended bal-

Meee hs es ee Re 81.90

Investments, Bonds and Mortgages. ©

ime femmancnt: Pind. oon ers Ss 7,200.00

we Publication Fund ..:....... 2%. 1,800.00

General Income Account............. 892.07

Bennie 2 SS IP AGFA7 20

$14,229.27 14.229.27

Examined and found correct.

(Signed)

Joun H. Hinton,

Chairman,

For Finance Committee.

REPORT OF THE LIBRARIAN.

The work of the Library during the past year has been

mainly directed toward keeping the accessions catalogued and

in order. This, it is believed, has been successfully carried out.

The current numbers of the more prominent periodicals are

placed upon accessible shelves and upon the completion of any

volume are arranged permanently with their respective sets. In

this connection it is desirable to call attention to the crying need

of binding many of the accessions of late years. Hundreds of

volumes are stored in their pamphlet form, and much injury and

loss is the result. During the last year the Librarian was able

to have some sixty volumes bound, but financial stringency has

prevented any considerable work in this direction.

By arrangement with the authorities of the New York Bo-

tanical Garden, the bulk of the botanical portion of the library,

which since the removal to Schermerhorn Hall at Columbia

108 RECORDS

University had been stored in boxes, has now been deposited in

the library of the Garden at Bronx Park, and is thus more

available than heretofore for general reference.

The Librarian takes pleasure in reporting a gift to the Acad-

emy from Professor D. S. Martin, of about a hundred volumes

of miscellaneous scientific interest.

The statistics of the Library are at this date approximately as

follows: Volumes (bound and unbound) at Columbia Univer-

sity, 9,000; Pamphlets at Columbia University, 2,000 ; Volumes

and Pamphlets at Columbia University, 350.

Thanks to the activity of Messrs. Van Ingen and White, as-

sisted by Mr. Graham, the files of the Academy’s publications

have been brought from a state of chaos to one of order, the

exchange list has been revised, and the business of correspond-

ence and exchanges is now carried on with promptness and

regularity. The Librarian takes this opportunity to call the

attention of the Academy to the absolute necessity of consider-

ing the disposition of the library in the immediate future. We

have practically reached the limit of accommodations in the

library room, and the department of exchanges is housed in the

Gallery of the Museum of Fossil Plants and Vertebrates, in

Schermerhorn Hall of Columbia University, solely by courtesy

of the Department of Geology, and has already exceeded the

space which that department can conveniently spare. Radical

measures must be adopted in the near future or the library must

close its doors. Respectfully submitted,

LIVINGSTON FARRAND,

Librarian.

BUSINESS MEETING.

MARCH 4, I9QOI.

Academy met at 8:15 P. M., President Woodward presiding.

The minutes of the last business meeting were read and ap-

proved.

The Secretary reported from the Council as follows :

That a budget had been adopted for the ensuing fiscal year ;

that the Academy had voted to subscribe to the 5th Inter-

RECORDS 109

national Congress of Zoodlogists, and to appoint Professor E. B.

Wilson delegate. That the meetings of the next year would be

held at the rooms of the Chemists’ Club, 108 West 55th Street.

That the delegates to the Scientific Alliance would be President

Woodward, ¢2-officio, Mr. Cox, and Professor H. F. Osborn.

RIcHARD E. DOopGE,

Recording Secretary.

SECTION OF ASTRONOMY, PHYSICS AND

CHEMISTRY.

MARCH 4, IQOI.

Section met at 8.25 P. M., Professor J. K. Rees presiding.

The minutes of the last meeting of Section were read and ap-

proved.

The following program was offered:

R. S. Woodward and J. W. Miller, Jr., THe Exastic

PROPERTIES OF HELICAL SPRINGS.

F. L. Tufts, A PHoroGrapHic StuDyY OF THE AIR MOoveE-

MENTS NEAR THE MOUTH OF AN ORGAN PIPE.

Before the program of the evening, an election of officers of

the Section was held, resulting in the election of Prof. William

Hallock as Chairman and Dr. F. L. Tufts as Secretary of the

Section for the ensuing year.

SUMMARY OF PAPERS.

In his paper, Dr. Tufts described preliminary experiments

in which he applied the ‘‘ method of striz’”’ similar to that used

by Toepler, Boys, Wood, and others, to the study of the vibra-

tions within an organ pipe. The pipe used had sides made of

plane parallel glass plates. The tongue of air at the mouth of

the pipe was made visible by using air mixed with alcohol vapor,

which changed its optical density. The vibrations and air cur-

rents within the pipe were made visible by the introduction into

the pipe of small jets of illuminating gas. The intermittent il-

lumination used was the spark between magnesium ribbons

from an induction coil. It was found quite easy to adjust the

110 RECORDS

rate of interruption of the coil so as to produce a stroboscopic

effect, and thus the movements of the tongue of air in the mouth

of the pipe and the vibrations and air currents in the pipe could

be readily followed.

The same method was also applied by the author to study

the behavior of unignited jets of illuminating gas when acted on

by sound waves.

The paper was illustrated by a number of photographs of the

Phenomena observed.

W. S: Day,

Secretary.

SLCMON OF BIOECGY-

MARCH II, IgOl!.

Section met at 8:15 P. M., Professor C. L. Bristol pre-

siding.

The minutes of the last meeting of Section were read and

approved.

The following program was then offered :

H. F. Osborn, Systematic REVISION OF THE AMERICAN EOCENE

PRIMATES AND OF THE RopEenr FamiLy MyxoDEcTID#.

O. P. Hay, THE ComposITION OF THE SHELLS OF TURTLES.

M. A. Bigelow, SomE CoMPARISONS OF THE GERM-LAYERS IN

ENTOMOSTRACA CRUSTACEA.

Prior to the reading of papers, a communication from the

Secretary of the Academy was read, stating that a grant of $100

from the John Strong Newberry Fund had been authorized by

the Scientific Alliance, and as the subjects in which an award

might be made this year were Geology and Paleontology, he

would be pleased to receive a nomination from the Section of

Biology. On motion of Professor Osborn the matter was

referred to a committee consisting of the Chairman and two

additional members. The Chair nominated Professor Osborn

and the Secretary of the Section.

Professor Charles L. Bristol and Dr. Henry E. Crampton

were re-elected Chairman and Secretary respectively.

RECORDS itt

SUMMARY OF PAPERS.

Professor Osborn stated that the only fossil Primates at pres-

ent known are those in the Eocene. The supposed Oligocene

genera described by Marsh and Cope have proved to belong to

the Artiodactyla. Associated throughout with the discovery and

literature of the primates is the family Mixodectide, including

Mixodectes of the basal Eocene or Torrejon beds; Mathew has

suggested that this animal is a rodent. Careful comparison of

this type with the supposed primates Cynodontomys of the Mid-

dle Eocene and Microcyops of the Upper Eocene proves that

these animals also belong probably with the Rodentia; they

represent a primitive stock with strong affinities to the Tillo-

dontia which are thus brought nearer to the ancestral rodents.

This conclusion removes all these animals from the primates

where they have hitherto been placed. This leaves three fami-

lies of monkeys as follows: Hypsodontide including Hypsodus

and Sarcolemur, animals of medium size retaining the typical

series of 44 teeth ; a second family, the Notharctide, including

Pelycodus and Notharctus, animals of larger size, with teeth

reduced to 40 by the loss of 4 incisors, and like the foregoing,

comprising long-jawed types; and the third family, the famous

Anaptomorphide of Cope, short-jawed, very progressive types,

with 36 to 32 teeth, the premolar series being reduced. The

identification of these families with the Eocene Adapidis or with

Necrolemur of Europe is not sustained. The Hypsodontide and

Notharctide are well distinguished by sexituberculate superior

molars.

Dr. Hay called attention to the fact that for a long time

there has been much discussion regarding the origin of the

elements entering into the shell of turtles. As to the bones

known as costal plates, the great majority of anatomists have

held that they have resulted from the union of dermal bones

with the underlying ribs ; the neural plates from the union of

dermal bones with the neural arches. Recently Goette has

studied the development of the costals and neurals of the

young of Chzlone squamata. He finds that the whole cos-

112 RECORDS

tal plate develops continuously from bone which appears be-

neath the perichondrium of the cartilaginous ribs. No part

of either the costal plates or of the neurals arises in the

skin. While accepting Goette’s results as established, the

speaker did not accept his conclusion. Neither did he accept

the other view that the costals and neurals are composed of

dermal bones united with those of the internal skeleton. The

speaker held that there were originally three strata of bones

on the dorsal surface of turtles. One of these was in the skin,

and is represented by the mosaic found in the skin of Dermo-

chelys. Another layer was sub-dermal, and this united with

elements of the third stratum, namely the ribs and neural

arches. The union has become so complete that the bones

arise from the same centres. These three strata of bones on

the dorsal surface correspond to those which are found in the

ventral wall of the Caiman, viz., true ribs, ‘‘ abdominal ribs,”’

and bony dermal scutes.

Mr. M. A. Bigelow compared the germ-layers of various

Crustacea with especial reference to the Cirriped Lepas. It

“was pointed out that in the cleavage leading to the segregation

of the germ-layers there are very many resemblances between

Lepas and other Entomostraca. Lepas resembles most other

Crustacea with respect to the position of the blastopore, and

the extension of the entoblast and mesoblast from that region

asa starting point. In Lepas, as in most other Crustacea, the

mesoblast and entoblast originate from cells which, speaking in

general terms, at first lie in the blastoderm and later migrate

into the cleavage cavity. But among these immigrating mes-

entoblastic cells one can distinguish the individual cells of ento-

blast and two varieties of mesoblast—entomesoblast and ecto-

blast. There are observations indicating that similar conditions

exist in other Crustacea.

HeEnrY E. CRAMPTON,

Secretary.

RECORDS 113

SECTION OF GEOLOGY AND MINERALOGY.

Marcu 18, Igol.

Section met at 8:15 P. M., Dr. A. A. Julien presiding.

The minutes of the last meeting of Section were read and ap-

proved.

Dr. A. A. Julien and Dr. Theodore G. White were re-elected

Chairman and Secretary respectively.

The following program was then offered :

J. F. Kemp, THE CamBro-ORDOVICIAN OUTLIER AT WELLS-

TOWN, HAmILTon County, NEw York.

G. van Ingen, A METHOD oF FACILITATING PHOTOGRAPHY OF

FOssILs.

SUMMARY OF PAPERS,

In introducing the main subject of the paper, Professor Kemp

gave a brief account of the physiographic problems presented in

the Adirondacks and of the significance of the smaller outliers of

Paleozoic strata which occur within the crystalline area. He

then discussed the Wellstown exposure and described it in much

the same way as he has already done in print in the 18th

Annual Report of the State Geologist of New York, page 145.

The general conclusion favored the existence of land areas

of ancient crystalline rocks in the vicinity of Wellstown, and it

seemed to the speaker that the peculiar sediments could not be

explained in any other way. Pebbles as large as one’s fist, of

gneiss similar to that found in the ancient hills, are imbedded

in the Trenton limestone, and much sand is found in the lime-

stones of both the Calciferous and the Trenton. It was ad-

mitted that the present valley is due to faulting, as has been

- previously claimed by Doctor R. Ruedemann, but the shores

of the late Cambrian and early Ordovician could not have been

far from the present outcrops of the Palzozoics at Wellstown.

Mr. van Ingen, and Doctors Levison, Dodge, White and

Julien took part in the discussion of the paper.

Doctor Julien remarked, in regard to the sand found in the

limestones to which Professor Kemp referred, that although the

114 RECORDS

smaller and angular portion of the sand, in which feldspar is

common, and particles of garnet, epidote and menaccanite also

occur, may possibly be residual, derived from decay of gneiss

adjacent to the shores of the ancient basin, the predominant

quartz grains, well-rounded and even perfectly spherical, could

not possibly be of that origin. These Doctor Julien has already

discussed before the Academy and elsewhere, pointing out that

their sculpture indicates prolonged action during ages before

they assumed spherical form and that although found in sedi-

ments, loose or consolidated, of all ages from the quartzites of

the Laurentian down to the sea beaches of the present day,’

along river, lake and ocean, they represent in all cases ancient

materials which have been worked up over and over again from

period to period. Inthe Potsdam of the North American con-

tinent they have been accumulated in an extensive outer-beach

deposit, the result of an enormous resorting of materials through-

out the vast Cambrian time. These ‘‘paleospheres’’ were

doubtless derived from the same Potsdam horizon which has

yielded the oolitic quartz sand of the ‘singing beach”’ on the

shores of Lake Champlain, near Plattsburg, not many miles

from the Wellstown outcrop of the Ordovician limestones.

As to their method of transport, they had certainly not been

swept into this limestone basin by currents, since the absence of

sorting and the parallel disposition of their axes showed that

they had been dropped down from the surface in a continuous

gentle shower. The conditions which have favored this have

been studied abroad as well as along our Atlantic coast and

consist, first, of the coating of sand from the beaches along

sheltered bays, such as Long Island Sound, on every quietly

rising tide, then its seaward transport, often to hundreds of

miles off the coast, commonly caught in the dredges of survey-

ing steamers, as noted by Verrill and others, and its constant

deposition over the bottom, as illustrated by soundings at great

distances off Nantucket. Such a sand transport was plainly in

progress over the quiet embayment occupied by this limestone,

from surrounding beaches supplied from the decay and disin-

tegration of an ancient shore of Potsdam and Calciferous sand-

RECORDS 115

stones. The various sands referred to in these remarks were

illustrated by photomicrographs.

A Method of Facilitating Photography of Fossils was described

by Mr. Gilbert van Ingen. The speaker noted the difficulties

met by all investigators in the illustration of their specimens.

All methods by which the published figure is derived from an

original drawing produced by hand-work are dependent for their

degree of correctness upon the accuracy of eye and skill of hand

of the draughtsman. Such figures contain a variable percent-

age of the personal element which the artist unconsciously in-

corporates into his work. The majority of investigators find it

difficult to. produce a drawing of satisfactory excellence and at

the same time have not at their disposal the means wherewith

to engage the services of a trained artist. Photography, often

employed as affording a correct and cheap method of illustra-

tion, has, up to the present time, yielded results of varying and

uncertain degrees of accuracy. The difficulty of obtaining a

satisfactory negative from the object has caused direct photog-

raphy to be looked upon by disfavor by many palzontologists.

This difficulty is due to the effect upon the photo-plate of the

colors and reflected light emanating from the surface of the

specimen to be photographed. <A method of illuminating these

disturbing elements was sought and, at the suggestion of Pro-

fessor Kemp, the use of ammonium chloride was tried.

A simple apparatus has been devised by which a fossil of any

size can be coated with a thin, opaque, white film which effec-

tually illuminates under the influence of both color and reflected

light. The necessary articles for construction of the apparatus

are: a foot-blower, large wide-mouthed bottle of gallon capacity,

with three-holed rubber stopper, two bottles of quart capacity,

each with two-holed rubber stopper, glass tubing of one-eighth-

inch bore and rubber tubing to fit same (three feet of each), two

U-shaped calcium chloride tubes filled with chloride, strong

ammonia water, strong HCl. To use: Air from the foot-

blower is forced into the large bottle, which equalizes the pres-

sure, and thence through the ammonia water and HCl into the

smaller bottles. The air, mixed with the gases taken up, is

116 RECORDS

passed through the calcium chloride tubes, where the moisture

is extracted, and escapes from the two glass tubes held in the

hands at a short distance from the object to be coated. The

union of the two gases escaping from the tubes forms ammonium

chloride, which settles as an exceedingly fine powder upon the

surface of the specimens. The coating thus obtained, when

deposited slowly, is of a dead white, which effectually hides all

coloration of the surface, and, instead of obliterating the finer

modelling, renders the details of the topography with the utmost

distinctness. Some surfaces take the coating more readily than

others. Fine-grained black limestones and all other rocks that

present a velvety surface, take the coating well. Porous rocks

are difficult to cover. Specimens which have been handled

must be washed with benzene. The coating of the salt is per-

fectly harmless, and may readily be removed by water, gentle

heating, or the use of a soft brush. ~ Photographs of such coated

specimens fulfil more nearly the requirements of the work than

do those taken by the ordinary methods. The coating is also

of great assistance in the elucidation of the details of small

species, as was found to advantage while studying the lobation

of the heads of small trilobites. Since the above described

method had been devised the speaker had learned of a similar

method patented by Professor H. S. Williams. Claim 640,660

(Off. Gaz., 89, p. 2,602) is for ‘‘a photographic process consist-

ing in the deposition by sublimation from vapor of a temporary

film of extreme tenuity on surfaces of the object to be photo-

graphed, the film being of a character which removes itself by

dissipation, or which may be manually removed without injury

to the surface of the object.” On the face of i this patentvis

different from the process described above, although the exact

method employed has been guarded as a secret. The claim is

for a method employing sublimation, which process, as known

to chemists and assayers, does not enter in the least degree into

the method described by the speaker.

The paper was discussed by Professors Stevenson and Kemp

and Doctors Levison, Julien and White.

THEODORE G. WHITE,

Secretary.

RECORDS 117

SECTION OF ANTHROPOLOGY AND

PSYCHOLOGY:

MarcCH 25, IQOI.

Section met at 8:15 P. M., Professor Cattell presiding.

The minutes of the last meeting of Section were read and

approved.

The following program was then offered :

F. H. Giddings, THe Use oF THE TERM “ RACE.”

Stansbury Hager, THE Warps oF Cuzco.

SUMMARY OF PAPERS.

Professor F. H. Giddings presented a paper on the use of

the term “race.” He spoke in part as follows: ‘‘The term

“race’’ as used by many different groups of investigators—

anthropologists, ethnologists, philologists and historians—long

since ceased to have a definite meaning. Efforts to estab-

lish a technical and conventional use of the word have thus

far been unsuccessful. As one more attempt I suggest a

combination of the word ‘race’ with various descriptive ad-

jectives, denoting successive degrees of kinship. The narrow-

est degree of relationship is consanguinity, or the relation-

ship (physiological, psychological and sociological) of father

and mother and children, brothers and sisters, grandparents

and grandchildren, uncles, aunts and cousins. Let us desig-

nate this degree of kinship by A,.: The next degree of kin-

ship, or ‘A, is propinquity. The primary meaning of this word

is ‘nearness in place’ and the secondary meaning is ‘near-

ness in blood.’ The word is thus perfectly descriptive of a

state of facts which we find when a number of families live in

the same neighborhood and, through intermarriage and asso-

ciation, become related (but less closely than the consanguini

of A,) in blood, in type of mind, and in institutions. <, is

‘nationality, that wide degree of kinship (physical, mental and

social) which includes those who speak the same language,

and, for many generations, have dwelt together under the same

political organization. X,, is potential nationality, or the degree

118 RECORDS

of relationship (physical, mental and social) of a heterogeneous

people composed of many nationalities, undergoing assimilation,

or blending, into a new nationality, as in the United States.

Potential nationality includes the familiar census divisions, ‘ native

born of native parents,’ ‘native born of foreign parents,’ and

‘foreign born.’ A, is ethnic-race, a group of closely related

nationalities, speaking closely related languages, and having

well-marked psychological characteristics in common. Examples

are, the Celtic ethnic-race, including the Welsh, the Irish, the

Highland Scotch, some of the Cornish and the Bretons; the

Teutonic ethnic-race, including Germans, Swedes, Norwegians,

Danes and Dutch; and the Latin ethnic-race, including Italians,

Spaniards and Greeks. , is glottic race. This is that very

broad relationship, to a slight extent physical, to a somewhat

greater extent mental and social, of those related ethnic-races

that speak languages derived from a common ancient tongue.

Examples are, the Aryan glottic race, including the Celtic, Teu-

tonic, Latin and other ethnic races ; the Semitic glottic-race, and

the Hamitic glottic-race. A, is chromatic race, that extremely

wide and vague relationship, which includes related glottic-races

marked by the same color. Examples are, the white chromatic-

race, which includes the Aryan, Semitic and Hamitic glottic-

races; the yellow chromatic-race, which includes the various

glottic-races known as Mongolian or Turanian ; the brown, the

red and the black chromatic-races. A, is cephalic-race, or

that widest relationship which includes chromatic-races of like

cephalic index. The distinction about which I feel most doubt

is this between chromatic- and cephalic-race. Ikemembering that,

according to this scheme, variability and multiplicity of specific

characteristics produced by differentiation, should increase as we

proceed backward from A, to A,, I think that probably cephalic

index is rightly placed as A, and color as A, because, in the

organic world in general, coloring seems to be a less stable char-

acteristic than anatomical structure. The compound terms

which I have here introduced are admittedly clumsy, but they

have the advantage of conveying precise meanings. If a

writer speaks of ‘race’ without a qualifying word, his reader

RECORDS 119

must guess at his meaning. If he says ‘cephalic-race,’

‘chromatic-race,’ ‘glottic-race,’ the meaning cannot be mis-

taken.”

In reply to a question Professor Giddings said that the clan

is developed between A‘ and X? and the tribe between A? and

° . Os

The following paper was read by Mr. Stansbury Hager, on

the ‘Wards of Cuzco.’’ The speaker presented a portion of

the evidence collected by him which tends to show that the

twelve so-called wards of Cuzco, the ancient capital of the Inca

Empire, were the terrestial representatives of the signs of the

Peruvian zodiac. The evidence bearing on this hypothesis is

divided into four main classes. In the first place, the system of

‘mamas’ under which the Peruvians regarded every material

object as merely a product of the real spiritual essence, of which

it was the expression, gave rise to an attempt to imitate on earth

the features of the world above as observed in the heavens.

This system, in turn, resulted in the production of an elaborate

ritual, the features of which, each month, corresponded with the

supposed attributes of the mama which governed the corre-

sponding sign through which the sun was passing during that

month. The ideas associated with the ‘mamas’ are shown to

correspond with the names of the Cuzco wards. Again these

names correspond very definitely with the names of the zodiacal

signs upon the native star map of Salcamayhua. And finally

the names of one or two of the wards can be identified directly

with definitely known native constellations situated in the zodiac.

The nature of the evidence thus adduced is such as to indicate

that the native Peruvians had made remarkable advance in as-

tronomical knowledge in times long anterior to the arrival of the

earliest Europeans known to history.

The annual election of Section officers was held, resulting in

the choice of Professor Livingston Farrand as Chairman, and

Dr. R. S. Woodworth as Secretary.

R. S. WoopwortTH,

Secretary.

120 RECORDS

BUSINESS MEETING.

APRIL 1, “1O0F-

Academy met at 8:15 P. M., Professor William Hallock

presiding. .

The minutes of the last business meeting were read and ap-

proved.

The Secretary reported from the Council as follows:

That Mr. Edward D. Adams had qualified as a Life Member.

Letters of thanks were read from Professor James Geikie, and

Mr. C. V. Boys, elected Honorary Members at the Annual

Meeting.

Adjourned.

RicHarD E. DopcE,

Recording Secretary.

SECTION OF ASTRONOMY, PHYSICS AND

CHEMISTRY.

APRIL I, I9OI.

Section met at 8:15 P. M., Professor William Hallock pre-

siding.

The minutes of the last meeting of Section were read and

approved.

The following program was then offered:

H. C. Parker, EXPERIMENTS ON STANDARDS OF HIGH ELEc-

TRICAL RESISTANCES.

J. K. Rees, REMARKS ON TEMPORARY STARS, WITH ESPECIAL

REFERENCE TO THE NEW STAR IN PERSEUS.

J. K. Rees, PHoroGrRAPHS OF NEBULAE TAKEN WITH THE

CROSSLEY REFLECTOR OF THE LICK OBSERVATORY.

SUMMARY OF PAPERS.

The paper by Mr. H. ©. Parker gave an outline of Professor

Rood’s electrometer method of measuring high resistances.

This method has been described by Professor Rood in the

RECORDS . 121

American Journal of Science for October, 1900. Mr. Parker

stated that by this method it seemed possible to measure re-

sistances as great as 1I,000,000,000 megohms while by the

methods at present in common use the practical limit was stated

to be about 100,000 megohms. The author gave the results

of a series of measurements made on a new form of standard

high resistance devised by Professor Rood. This form of

standard consists of oxide of manganese on cobalt glass. It

gives a convenient means for obtaining resistances of from one

to ten thousand megohms. Most of the measurements were

for the purpose of determining the best protective insulating

material with which to coat the above resistances. The author

stated that the work was still in progress.

The first paper by Professor J. K. Rees gave an outline of the

present classification of variable stars and a history of the dis-

covery of the new star in Perseus. A number of the theories

to account for the phenomena was given and commented upon.

In the discussion of the paper, Mr. ©. A. Post inquired con-

cerning the evidently rapid transformations of energy taking

place in the temporary star. Dr. W. 8. Day suggested as a

possible explanation the retransformation of much of the kinetic

energy of the vibrating atoms into gravitational potential energy

by the sudden expansion of the matter after collision.

The second paper by Professor Rees consisted of an exhibi-

tion of some very beautiful photographs of nebulze which the

Columbia Observatory had lately received from Mr. W. Camp-

bell, the director of the Lick Observatory.

The photographs were taken by the late Dr. J. E. Keeler and

an enthusiastic tribute was paid to him for his remarkably suc-

cessful work in this field.

The photographs exhibited were:

1. Orion nebula, taken November 16, 1898; exposure 40

minutes.

2. Orion nebula, taken December 11,1899 ; exposure I hour.

3. 51, M, Cannea Venaticarum, taken May I0, 1899.

4. Dumb-bell nebula in Velpecula taken July 31, 1899; ex-

posure 3 hours.

122 RECORDS

5. Trifid nebula in Sagittarius ; exposure 3 hours.

6. The Pleiades, showing nebulosity.

7. Ring nebula in Lyra.

8. Crab nebula in Taurus.

g. Small nebula in Andromeda.

10. Spiral nebula M, 74, in Pisces.

1A eee Be o in Pegasus.

12 ure gi in Triangulum.

IT en a in Ursa Major.

14. Net-work nebula in Cygnus.

15. M, 13, in Hercules—star cluster.

Reference was made to Keeler’s determination of the radial

velocities of nebulz and to the distances of these masses.

After a brief discussion of the paper, the Section adjourned.

i igs Joes.

Secretary.

SEC TRION-OF , BIOLOGY.

APRIL OY LOOT:

Section met at 8:15 P. M., Mr. M. A. Bigelow presiding.

The minutes of the last meeting of Section were read and ap-

proved.

The following program was then offered :

E. B. Wilson, THe History oF THE CENTROSOMES IN ARTI-

FICIAL PARTHENOGENESIS, AND ITS RELATION TO THE PHENOM-

ENA OF NORMAL FERTILIZATION.

F. 8S. Lee, Some OsBsERVATIONS ON RiIGOR Mortis.

SUMMARY OF PAPERS.

In continuation of his communication given at the December

meeting, Professor E. B. Wilson presented the results of fur-

ther studies on the development of the unfertilized eggs of

Loxopneustes when treated by Loeb’s magnesium chloride

method. The principal points considered were the origin and

history of the centrosomes and the general relation of the phe-

nomena to those occurring in normal fertilization. Evidence

RECORDS 123

was brought forward that the cleavage centrosomes of the pri-

mary division figure arise by the division of a single primary

centrosome that is formed outside, but immediately upon, the

nuclear membrane. As regards the chromatic transformation

of the nucleus, two types of chromosome formation were de-

scribed. In both cases a large nucleolus is formed, which at-

tains a much greater size than in the fertilized eggs. In one

type this nucleolus remains a plasmosome, or true nucleolus,

which fades away at the time of division, the chromosomes aris-

ing nearly in the usual manner from the chromatin network.

In the second type, the entire chromatic content of the nucleus

is gradually accumulated in the nucleolus, which thus forms a

chromatin-nucleolus from which the chromosomes are afterwards

derived nearly in the same manner as in Spirogyra.

In regard to the accessory asters, or cytasters, it was shown

that they contain central bodies often indistinguishable in sections

from the centrosomes of the nuclear figure, though in many

cases less well developed. Sections demonstrate that the divi-

sion of the cytasters is preceded by division of the central body,

which draws out to form a central spindle in a manner similar

to that described by MacFarland in the eggs of gasteropods.

This fact, taken in connection with the physiological activities

of the cytasters seems to remove every doubt regarding the

identification of the central bodies as true centrosomes.

In comparing the phenomena in the magnesium eggs with

those of normal fertilization, it was pointed out that the forma-

tion of accessory asters at the time of fertilization or cell divi-

sion, is a widespread phenomenon. In normal fertilization or

division, the accessory asters are of a very transient character.

In the magnesium eggs they attain a much greater develop-

ment both structurally and functionally, but they are probably

to be regarded as differing only in degree from those which ap-

pear during the normal process. In all cases their disappear-

ance is probably due to a concentration of the protoplasmic activ-

ities about the more active centres, connected with the nucleus,

which alone survive to perform the normal functions of division.

Evidence was adduced that the nuclear transformation occurring

124 RECORDS

in normal fertilization is not primarily due to the union of the

sperm-nucleus, or sperm-centrosome, with the egg-nucleus, but

to a general stimulus of the ovum effected by the entrance of

the spermatozoon. Apart from the different character of the

stimulus, this transformation of the egg-nucleus does not differ

essentially from that taking place in the magnesiumeggs. This

is proved by the fact that in etherized eggs the egg-nucleus

may undergo the karyokinetic transformation zezthout union with

the sperm-nucleus or centrosome—an observation which agrees

with the much earlier results of O. and R. Hertwig on eggs

treated with chloral hydrate. In normal fertilization this activ-

ity of the egg-nucleus is modified through its union with an

active individualized sperm-centrosome, the presence of which

inhibits the formation of an egg-centrosome such as occurs in

the magnesium eggs.

The paper was discussed by Mr. Bigelow, Dr. Calkins, and

Dr. Linville.

Professor F. 8. Lee stated that rigor mortis is characterized by

a shortening of the muscles of the body, accompanied by a

coagulation of the contents of the muscle cells. The nature of

the phenomenon is disputed. Hermann has long insisted that

it is analogous to muscular contraction and is the final vital act

of the dying muscle cell.

In connection with the studies of muscle fatigue, the author,

with Mr. C. C. Harrold, has made some observations on cat’s

muscle, which seem to contradict Hermann’s conclusion. Fast-

ing, which is characterized especially by a diminution of the free

carbohydrates in muscle, hastens the oncoming of rigor mortis.

The administration of the peculiar drug, phlorhizin, which elimi-

nates both the free and the combined carbohydrates, has a

similar but much more pronounced effect. On the other hand,

the ingestion of grape-sugar by a phlorhizinized animal, delays

rigor. Hence the conclusion seems justified that the absence of

carbohydrates is favorable, and their presence unfavorable to the

development of rigor mortis. As regards the ability of the

muscle to contract, carbohydrates have exactly the opposite

effect, their absence being unfavorable and their presence favor-

RECORDS 125

able. Hence, in this respect, contraction and rigor mortis are

not analogous processes.

Henry E. CRAMPTON,

Secretary.

SECTION OF GEOLOGY AND MINERALOGY.

WAPRIL E55 1901.

Section met at 8:15 P. M., Dr. A. A. Julien presiding.

The minutes of the last meeting of Section were read and

approved.

The following program was then offered:

Gilbert van Ingen, THE SILURIAN FAUNA OF BATESVILLE

ARKANSAS.

Heinrich Ries, THe Iron Mines or BIvLsao, SPAIN. _ Illus-

trated.

| THEODORE G. WHITE,

Secretary.

wee ftION OF ANTHROPOLOGY AND PSYCHOLOGY.

APRIL 22, IQOI.

Section met at 8:15 P. M., Professor Livingston Farrand

presiding.

The minutes of last meeting of Section were read and ap-

proved.

The following program was then offered:

A. L. Kroeber, Norres oN THE ARAPAHOE INDIANS.

C. H. Judd, Practice in VISUAL PERCEPTION.

E. L. Thorndike, OriciIn or HuMAN INTELLECT.

R. S. Woodworth, Votunrary CONTROL OF THE FORCE OF

MovEMENT.

Professor Eberhardt Fraas, of Stuttgart, a corresponding

member of the Academy, was introduced by Professor Osborn,

and briefly addressed the meeting.

In Mr. Kroeber’s paper the social and ceremonial organiza-

126 RECORDS

tion of the Arapahoe Indians was compared with that of other

Plains Indians. On superficial examination various tribes ap-

pear to be organized according to identical principles, but fuller

knowledge generally reveals differences among the similarities.

From this it was concluded that such terms as gens, band, age-

fraternity, and dance-society have no stable or exact meaning,

and hence little descriptive value, detailed information being the

great desideratum.

Professor ©. H. Judd reported an experimental study in Prac-

TICE IN VISUAL PERCEPTION. It is a generally recognized fact

that an illusion grows weaker as the observer becomes more

familiar with it. A quantitative determination of the disappear-

ance of the illusion seen in the Muller-Lyer figure was the sub-

ject of the paper. Two series of results were reported, one

from an observer who did not know that the illusion would

disappear, and did not discover that it was disappearing. In

both cases the illusion disappeared in about 1,000 observations.

The curves of practice differ in form and show many details of

effects of pauses. In the case of the first observer the effects

of the practice gained in the first series was easily marked in all

the additional series which were performed with other figures,

and with other positions of the first figure. In the case of the

second observer the effect of the practice was in some cases

positive, but in one case it was so decidedly negative that it ex-

aggerated the illusion and prevented any disappearance of it

through a series of 1,500 observations.

Professor E. L. Thorndike, in a paper discussing the ORIGIN

oF Human INTELLECT, proposed as a working hypothesis that

the development of ideation and rational thinking in the human

species was but an extension of the typical animal form of in-

tellect. He defended this hypothesis by showing that mere in-

crease in the number, delicacy, and complexity of associations

between sense-impressions and impulses might give concepts,

feelings of relationship and association by similarity as second-

ary results, that in the human infant this seems to occur, and

that down through the vertebrate phylum _a clear evolution of

the associative processes along these lines could be traced.

RECORDS 127

The last report of the evening was by Dr. R. 8. Woodworth,

on the VOLUNTARY CONTROL OF THE FORCE OF MOVEMENT. By

recording simultaneously the force of a blow struck by the hand

and the extent of the movement preliminary to the blow, it is

possible to see how far the force is dependent on the extent.

The results showed a certain degree of correlation between the

two, but comparatively a slight degree. The inference was

that the force of the movement was only partially and loosely

dependent on the extent, and that the control and perception

of the force of a movement were in some measure direct and

independent functions.

R. S. WoopwortH,

Secretary.

BUSINESS MEETING.

May 6, Igo!.

Academy met at 8:15 P. M., President Woodward presid-

ing.

The minutes of the last business meeting were read and ap-

proved.

In the absence of the Recording Secretary Dr. F. L. Tufts

was appointed Recording Secretary pro tem.

The Recording Secretary was authorized to cast a favorable

ballot for the Academy in reference to the following recom-

mendation from the Council:

‘““Voted to recommend to the Academy the nen of Franz

von Leydig, of Wurzburg, Germany, as an Honorary Member

of the Academy.”’

Voted, on motion of Professor Wilson, that the Academy

send the following message of congratulation to Professor

Leydig :

“The New York Academy of Sciences extends to Professor

Franz von Leydig many hearty congratulations on the occasion

of his eightieth birthday. In offering to Professor Leydig an

election to Honorary Membership, the members of this Acad-

emy desire to express their appreciation of his long-continued

128 RECORDS

services to science and of the profound and lasting influence

that his memorable researches have exerted on the progress of

zoology. With all best wishes they send him a cordial greet-

ing from America.”

President Woodward presented the accompanying minute re-

specting the death of Professor Henry A. Rowland, which was

adopted and ordered incorporated in the minutes of the Acad-

emy.

Adjourned. Pe forrs.

Recording Secretary,

pro tem.

PrRoFEssSOR Henry A. ROWLAND.

The committee appointed to prepare a minute respecting the

death of Professor Henry A. Rowland, would respectfully sub-

mit the following report :

The last half of the nineteenth century is remarkable as a

period of great discoveries and advances in the mathematico-

physical sciences. It is especially noteworthy for extraordinary

progress in the theories of light, electricity, magnetism and ther-

modynamics. Soon after 1850 the phenomena of these inti-

mately related theories were seen to unify themselves under the

recently established doctrine of energy ; and almost every appli-

cation of this doctrine in the fields of those theories yielded a

rich harvest of results.

Many distinguished names fall in the list of those who con-

tributed to the advances of this period. Naturally, most of the

pioneers, like Helmholtz, Joule, Clausius, Henry and Kirchhoff,

have passed over to the silent majority. But a singular fatality

has attended the most eminent followers of the earlier workers.

Thus, within less than a quarter of a century, science has not

only lost the distinguished Maxwell and his brilliant disciple

Hortz, but is now called upon to deplore the untimely deaths,

within a few weeks of one another, of the equally eminent

physicists Fitzgerald and Rowland.

Professor Henry Augustus Rowland, an Honorary Member

of the New York Academy of Sciences since 1900, was born

at Honesdale; Pa., November 27,1848. His death ocettresm ae

RECORDS 129

Baltimore, Md., April 16, 1901. His early academic studies

were pursued at the Rensselaer Polytechnic Institute, from which

he was graduated with the degree of Civil Engineer in 1870.

After a brief career as a teacher at Wooster College and at

Rensselaer Institute he became connected with the Johns Hop-

kins University. Appointed professor of physics in that institu-

tion in 1876, he devoted the remainder of his life to the work of

instruction and investigation in mathematical physics. In both

lines of work he set and maintained a high standard. His

laboratory speedily came to be recognized as a source of funda-

mental knowledge ; and a number of the researches carried out

therein by him and his pupils are amongst the most noteworthy

of the nineteenth century. Of these, especially important are

his determination of the mechanical equivalent of heat, and _ his

analysis of the solar spectrum by aid of his incomparable con-

cave diffraction gratings. The skill and success with which he

executed these investigations give him rank along with the

ablest experimenters and theorists of his time.

Professor Rowland was devoted to science with rare fidelity

and tenacity of purpose. No baffling obstacles discouraged him

in the pursuit of truth. He was animated by a high ideal.

‘“‘ But for myself,’ he said in one of his addresses, ‘“‘I value in a

scientific mind most of all that love of truth, that care in its

pursuit, and that humility of mind which makes the possibility

of error always present, more than any other quality. This is

the mind which has built up modern science to its present per-

fection. . . . It is the only mind which appreciates the imper-

fections of the human reason and is thus careful to guard against

them. It is the only mind that values truth as it should be

valued and ignores all personal feeling in its pursuit.’”’ These

words explain at once his personal character and his course in

life. With unflagging industry he consecrated his talents

and his strength to the attainment of his ideal of the scientific

mind.

R. S. Woopwarp,

Chairman.

130 RECORDS

SECTION OF ASTRONOMY, “BEY Sigs ee

CH ENITSAIRY:

Mav’ 6; 702

Section met at 8:15 P. M., Professor William Hallock pre-

siding.

The minutes of the last meeting of Section were read and

approved.

The following program was then offered :

C. B. Warring, WHat THEOLOGY Owes TO MODERN SCIENCE.

C. C. Trowbridge, A DirrERENTIAL AsTATIC MAGNETOME-

TER SUGGESTED BY PROFESSOR ROOD.

SUMMARY OF PAPERS.

The paper by Mr. ©. B. Warring was a very interesting in-

terpretation of the story of the creation, as found in Genesis,

in the light of modern scientific theories. The author defended

the thesis that the order of events given in the first chapter of

Genesis did not necessarily contradict the order assumed by

modern science.

The paper was followed by a very interesting discussion.

The essential part of the magnetometer described by Dr. ©.

C. Trowbridge, is the suspension system, which consists of

two groups of small magnets set 23 cm. apart, and rigidly con-

nected by a fine glass fibre. The system is suspended by a

single raw silk fibre 10 cm. long. By making the polarity of

the two groups of magnets opposite, a system that is approxi-

mately astatic is obtained. .

The object of the arrangement employed is partly to annul

the effects of distant magnetic disturbing influences, such as

those that arise from trolley-car motors, etc., and partly to ob-

tain a sensitive system, acting on the differential principle.

A magnet placed within a meter of the instrument and out-

side the neutral plane between the two groups of magnets acts

strongly on the nearest group, producing a deflection of the

system. The instrument was used in relative determinations of

magnetic movements.

RECORDS 131

Mr. Trowbridge also gave a preliminary note on some ex-

periments conducted by him on the influence of liquid air tem-

peratures on the magnetization of steel and iron.

Adjourned.

Po. Lorrs,

Secretary.

SEC PION OF BIOLOGY.

May 13, 1901.

Section met at 8:15 P. M., Professor C. L. Bristol. presiding.

The minutes of the last meeting of Section were read and

approved.

The following program was then offered:

R. Weil, A ConrTRIBUTION TO THE PROBLEM OF THE EAR-

Bones.

A. G. Mayer, ON THE VARIATION OF SNAILS OF THE GENuS

Partula IN THE VALLEYS OF TAHITI.

O. S. Strong and C. E. Doran, A CAsE oF UNILATERAL

ATROPHY OF THE CEREBELLUM.

SUMMARY OF PAPERS.

Dr. Weil’s paper was a critical discussion of the theory of

the ear-bones, as embodied in the recent articles of Gaupp and

Kingsley. Two main contentions were considered: First, that

the malleus and incus of mammalia were homologous with the

quadrate and articular of lower forms, while the temporo-max-

illary articulation is a new formation ; second, that the ossicles

of mammalia cannot possibly have descended from those of

Sauropsida. The first contention is based upon the embryonic

connection of malleus and incus with the Meckelian bar, upon

the embryonic situation of the last anterior to the Eustachian

tube, and upon the innervation of the muscle of the malleus by

a branch of the trigeminus. Embryonically, however, the mal-

leo-incudal complex, in addition to its continuity with the Meck-

elian bar, arises from the auditory capsule, which contributes to

both malleus and incus, the stroma of the tympanic cavity, con-

132 RECORDS

tributing to the manubrium mallei, and a membrane bone which

forms the Fallopian process. Furthermore, as Gegenbaur points

out, the continuity of malleus and incus, if they be the quadrate

and articular, is itself in contradiction to the independent embry-

onic origin of these elements in the lower forms. The pretre-

matic origin of the ossicles in the pig, as described by Kingsley,

is contrasted with their postrematic, or hyoidean, origin in lower

forms. Dr. Weil stated that his studies of a full series of pig

and opossum embryos did not enable him to decide whether the

malleus, and still more, the incus, lay primarily in front or behind

the tube. The bones cross the anlage of the tube in a trans-

verse direction, lying above it ; by the gradual absorption of the

intervening stroma they come to occupy the cavity of the tym-

panum. Finally, the innervation of the tensor tympani muscle

of the malleus by a branch from the otic ganglion of the trigem-

inus is taken to indicate the relation of the malleus to the man-

dibular arch. But lesions of the trigeminus at its root do not

involve hearing, while the contrary is true of lesions of the facial.

This fact would point to the origin of the above-mentioned

nerve from the seventh nerve, and would make the malleus a

part of the second arch. The second contention is supported,

first, by the difference in the embryonic relations of the bones to

the Eustachian canal, an argument already considered, and second,

by the differences in the relations of the chorda tympani nerve,

which in Sauropsida crosses adove the chain, and in mammalia

below it. The speaker showed that the pathologists, from a

comparison of a large number of lesions of the trigeminus and

of the facial at the base of the brain, had demonstrated the exit

of the chorda tympani in man with the roots of the former. But

since it leaves the brain in lower forms with the seventh, its re-

lations to bony structures are evidently not sufficiently constant

to constitute a criterion of homologies. From these facts, it

would appear that the homology of malleus and incus with the

quadrate and articular has not yet been demonstrated.

Dr. Mayer showed that the snails in question are subjected

to conditions of isolation very similar to those affecting the

Achatinellide of Oahu in the Hawaiian Islands, occurring in

RECORDS 133

valleys which are separated by comparatively barren ridges.

The farther apart the valleys, the less intimate is the relation-

ship beneath their snails. Although geographical isolation is

probably the chief factor in determining the establishment of

definite varieties, yet the differing environmental conditions ob-

taining in each valley may exert considerable influence.

Dr. Strong presented a preliminary report, illustrated by lan-

tern slides, upon a case of unilateral atrophy of the cerebellum

in a child which lived to the age of three years and four

months. The principal external anomalies noted were the fol-

lowing : the left hemisphere of the cerebellum was almost en-

tirely absent ; the right olive was wanting and the transverse

pontile fibres on the left side were deficient ; the left half of the

pons protruded more than the right ; the right crus cerebri was

much narrower than the left; the left restiform body was

smaller than the right, and the superior cerebellar peduncle

of the left side was deficient ; the posterior corpora quadrigem-

ina were asymmetrical, while the left anterior corpus quadri-

geminum was apparently lacking; the median line of the fourth

ventricle was curved with its convexity toward the left, and such

structures of the medulla as the clava, cuneus, ala cinerea, and

eminentia teres were located or extended further cephalad on

the left side than on the right. Preliminary transverse sections

cut at various levels through the medulla, pons, isthmus, and

posterior corpus quadrigeminum showed the following points :

only small parts of the right olive and left corpus restiforme

were present, and there was a corresponding deficiency of the

cerebello-olivary fibres ; the transverse pontile fibres on the left

side were reduced, but the nuclei pontis were larger on the left

side ; the longitudinal pontile fibres were deficient on the right, as

shown by the smaller orus cerebri of this side; the left lemiscus

was the smaller, and the left superior cerebellar peduncle was

reduced. Other deficiencies were noted, which, however, re-

quire further study. Full discussion of the case was postponed,

as the research is as yet uncompleted.

Henry E. CRAMPTON,

Secretary.

134 RECORDS

SECTION OF GEOLOGY AND, MINERALOGY.

May 20, IgOl.

section met at 8:15 P. M., Dr. A. A. Julien presiding.

The minutes of the last meeting of Section were read and

approved.

The following program was then offered :

William D. Matthew, Conpitrions or DEPOSITION OF THE

Foss1t MAMMAL BEDs OF THE WEST.

Richard BE. Dodge, THE Toroweap VALLEY IN ARIZONA.

THEODORE G. WHITE,

Secretary.

BUSINESS MEETING:

OCTOBER 7, IQOI.

Academy met at 8:25 P. M., President Woodward presiding.

The minutes of the last business meeting were read and

approved.

The President, in welcoming the Academy to its new quarters,

and its new year’s work, emphasized particularly the necessity

of increasing the number of our members, and suggested the

possibility of holding joint meetings of the several sections occa-

sionally, for the purposes of discussing subjects of mutual interest.

The Secretary reported from the Council that a letter of con-

gratulation had been sent to Professor Rudolf Virchow, of Ber-

lin, on the occasion of his eightieth birthday.

Adjourned. RICHARD E. DopGeE,

Recording Secretary.

SECTION OF ASTRONOMY, PHYSICS AND

GHEMISTRY.

OcTOBER 7, IQOI.

Section met at 8:15 P. M., Professor William Hallock presid-

ing.

The minutes of the last meeting of Section were read and

approved.

RECORDS 135

The meeting was devoted to the presentation of reports of

summer work by members.

SUMMARY OF PAPERS.

Professor William Hallock reported that he had tried and

failed to secure permission of the Calumet and Hecla Company

to make measurements of underground temperatures in their

shaft at Keweenaw Point. He gavea brief review of the report

upon underground temperatures rendered to the British Associ-

ation at their Glasgow meeting (1901).

Professor Hallock also described a new and very simple form of

wired musical instrument which he found on sale at the Buffalo

Exposition. The instrument was operated by blowing through

the nose, and the mouth cavity of the operator acted as the

resonance chamber. The tone quality of the instrument was

very similar to that of a flute. One of the instruments was

exhibited before the Section.

Professor J. K. Rees reported that the Astronomical Depart-

ment of Columbia University had recently received from the

Lick Observatory a number of star photographs which were to

be measured for the determination of parallax.

Professor Harold Jacoby reported upon some photographs of

stars near the celestial poles, which had been received by the

Astronomical Department of Columbia.

Professor R. 8. Woodward reported the results of an inves-

tigation he had carried on upon the effects of secular cooling

and meteoric dust on the length of the terrestrial day. His

investigation showed that, due to secular cooling, the length of

the day will not change or has not changed as the case may be,

by so much as a half second in the first ten million years after

the initial epoch, and that the total effect from secular cooling

will accrue before the effect from meteoric dust will begin to be

appreciable.

Professor Doremus gave a brief account of the research lab-

oratory in chemistry which had been lately established at Sche-

nectady, N. Y. Po Pees

Adjourned. Spaary.

136 RECORDS

SECTION ‘OF BIOLOGY.

OCTOBER 14, IQOI.

Section met at 8:15 P. M., Professor @. lL. Bnstol presidma:

The minutes of the last meeting of Section was read and ap-

proved.

The evening was devoted to the presentation of reports on

summer work by members.

SUMMARY OF PAPERS.

Professor E. B. Wilson described his work carried during the

early part of the summer at Beaufort, N. C., where he had been

successful in making further observations upon the fertilization

phenomena in living sea-urchin eggs treated with various chemi-

cals. Professor Wilson spoke also of the meeting of the Inter-

national Congress of Zoologists at Berlin, which he had at-

tended as a representative of the Academy, and where he had

acted as Chairman of the Section on Experimental Biology. It

was before this section that papers of the greatest interest were

presented by Driesch, Biitschli, Roux, Ziegler, and many others.

Professor Bashford Dean told of some of the results he had

obtained during his work in Japan of more than a year. Special

endeavors were made to obtain embryological material of the

important shark-types Cestracion, and Chlamydoselachus. In

eggs of the former, there appeared to be a series of cleavage

planes in the yolk, extending out from the blastoderm proper.

Some Chlamydoselachus material was obtained. A new hag-

fish, intermediate in gill-characters between Sdellostoma and

Myxine, together with a new Chiunera, was found in deep

water.

Professor F. 8. Lee reported briefly upon a research recently

made in his laboratory by Dr. William Salant upon the action

of alcohol on muscle. The details of this work will be com-

municated by the Academy later. Professor Lee then gave an

account of the Fifth International Physiological Congress which

was held at Turin in September.

Dr. H. R. Linville described the location and work during the

RECORDS 137

summer of the Dominion of Canada laboratory at Cansa, Nova

“Scotia, which is under the direction of Professor Prince. Many

investigators were in attendance, among them Professor Ramsay

Wright, of Toronto. Dr. Linville’s work, upon the natural his-

tory of annelids, was continued later at Woods Holl.

Dr. G. N. Calkins reported upon the work at the Woods

Holl station of the United States Fish Commission, in charge of

the Scientific Director, Dr. Hugh M. Smith. Dr. Calkins’

work consisted of a survey of the protozoa of the waters of the

station, and also included a continuation of his experiments

upon senile degeneration in Paramecium. A paper on this

subject will be presented at an early date.

Professor F. E. Lloyd spoke of his cytological studies carried

on during the spring in Strasburger’s laboratory at Bonn. A

series of botanizing trips in Germany and Switzerland was also

described, as well as the meeting of the International Congress

of Botanists at Geneva.

Mr. J. ©. Torrey, who spent the summer at the Beaufort, N.

C., station of the U. S. Fish Commission, reported a successful

season. He obtained a further series of the eggs of 7halassema,

enabling him to carry forward his work upon the cytogeny of

this form.

Dr. A. @. Mayer described the results of dredgings in the

waters of Massachusetts Bay, carried on by him, with Dr.

Gerould of Dartmouth. Besides collecting considerable mu-

seum material for the Brooklyn Institute, he obtained extensive

data bearing upon variation in star fishes.

Mr. W. E. Kellicott spoke of the summer’s work at the Cold

Spring Harbor laboratory, where he had been a John D. Jones

scholar. A good attendance was reported.

Professor C. L. Bristol, who had again conducted the work

of the N. Y. University Laboratory at Bermuda, described an

interesting change in the distribution of many species as the re-

sult of a protracted winter’s storm. Forms previously scarce

or absent from the shores of the bay near the laboratory ap-

peared this summer in profusion, while large areas of the ex-

posed reefs, or “ flats’’ were swept bare.

Leo . RECORDS

Professor Crampton reported a good season at the Marine

Biological Laboratory at Woods Holl. The classes were well

attended, and a goodly number of investigators were present.

A brief statement was made regarding the survey of the inverte-

brate fauna of Long Island, carried on during the spring and

summer by the Columbia Department of Zoology, with funds

given by an anonymous donor for the purpose. A station was

established at Bay Shore, favorably situated on Great South

Bay opposite the Fire Island Inlet from the open ocean.

Among the numerous forms obtained, a large Lalanoglossus and

a fine Clymenellid were of special note.

Mr. C. W. Beebe described his attempts to rear various birds

at the Bronx Zoological Garden. Many interesting observa-

tions were made on the length of time which might elapse after

egg-laying without rendering the eggs incapable of incubation,

with a view to the possible importation of eggs of rare foreign

birds. Henry E. CRAMPTON,

Secretary.

SECTION, OF GEOLOGY AND - MINERALOGY:

OCTOBER 21, IQOI.

Section met at $:15° 7. My Di Area julien presiding:

The minutes of the last meeting of Section were read and

approved. The names of two candidates for resident member-

ship were read and referred to the Council according to the

By-Laws.

In calling the meeting to order the Chairman spoke of the

sudden death during the summer of Dr. T. G. White, Secretary >

of the Section, and of the death of Professor Joseph LeConte,

Corresponding Member of the Academy.

Dr. E. QO. Hovey was elected Secretary of the Section sand

Professor R. E. Dodge, Secretary pro tem., owing to the absence

of Dr. Hovey.

A committee consisting of Professor Stevenson and Professor

Kemp was appointed to draw up suitable minutes in reference

to the deaths of Dr. White and Professor LeConte.

RECORDS 139

PROGRAM.

A. W. Grabau, RECENT CONTRIBUTIONS TO THE PROBLEM OF

NraGara. _ Illustrated.

J. F. Kemp, A New Aspesros REGION IN NORTHERN VER-

MONT. NOTES ON THE PHYSIOGRAPHY OF LAKE GEORGE.

SUMMARY OF PAPERS.

Mr. Grabau said that Davis has shown that the topography

of the Niagara region conforms to the type generally found in

ancient coastal plains, the original features of which have been

more or less modified by subsequent warpings, and by glacial

erosion and deposition.

The Niagara escarpment is the inface of the Niagara cuesta,

traceable through the Indian peninsula and Grand Manitoulin

Island. The Ontario lowland is continued in the Georgian Bay

lowland. A second cuesta—the Onondaga—has its inface

slightly developed north of Buffalo, but becomes prominent in

the Lake Huron valley, where its inner lowland forms the

deeper part of the lake. The third cuesta and lowland (the

Erie) occurs north of the second.

The Tertiary drainage is supposed to have been to the south-

west, instead of the northeast, as Spencer holds. The principal

streams of that time are supposed to have been (1) the Saginaw

—whose path is indicated in part by Saginaw Bay and the deep

channel between the Indian peninsula and Grand Manitoulin

Island ; (2) the Dundas, breaching the Niagara cuesta at Ham-

ilton, Ont., and crossing the Erie lowland near Fort Stanley,

and (3) for a time, at least, the Genesee, though this may later

have had a northward course. The subsequent streams trib-

utary to these consequents carved the various lowlands. St.

David's Channel is regarded as an obsequent stream, which

was accidentally discovered by the Niagara. The whirlpool

gorge was probably, in part, the southward continuation of this

stream, and not wholly postglacial.

Mr. Grabau’s paper was discussed by Professor Dodge and

Dr. Julien.

140 RECORDS

In speaking of the new asbestos region in northern Vermont,'

Professor Kemp said that asbestos had recently opened up on

a commercial scale in the towns of Eden, Lamoille county,

and Lowell, Orleans county, Vt. The towns are adjacent,

though in different counties. The asbestos lies from 15 to 25

miles north of Hyde Park, a station on the St. Johnsbury and

Lake Champlain R. R. As is quite invariably the case, it oc-

curs in serpentine, either in veins, or in matted aggregates along

slickensided blocks. The serpentine where the best fibre is

found lies on the south shoulder of Belvedere mountain, and

forms an east and west belt. It is bounded on the north and

west by hornblende schist, which forms the summit of the

mountain. The contact on the west is a visibly faulted one,

and that on the north is probably also of the same sort, because

the hornblende-schist rises in a steep escarpment.

The serpentine seems to have been derived from enstatite,

since unaltered nuclei of this mineral are found in it. The vein

of asbestos ranges froma fibre of microscopic length up to 34 of

an inch as thus far exposed. It is fine and silky and of excel-

lent grade. It would, however, be classed as second grade ac-

cording to the Canadian practice, which makes a first grade of

fibre above 34 of an inch (about 21% in. being the maximum),

and a second grade of 3@ in. to 34 in. All below this and all

fibre not vein-fibre goes to the mill and is mechanically sepa-

rated, as the third grade. In the Vermont localities the slip

fibre is exposed on the property of the New England Co., and

of its neighbor the American Co. The vein fibre is limited, so

far as yet opened up, to the property of Mr. M. E. Tucker and

associates.

It is difficult with the data in hand, which were gathered

under the direction of Dr. 'C. W. Hayes; of the U.S. 'Geolorieal

Survey, to trace the geological history of the serpentine, but it

must have been originally either an igneous pyroxenite, or a

richly magnesian siliceous limestone. There are such slight

traces of calcium-bearing minerals, however, that the former

supposition has the greater weight. The hornblende schist con-

‘Communicated by permission of the Director of the U. S. Geological Survey.

RECORDS 141

sists of common green hornblende and of an unusual amount

of titanite, there being little less than those two present.

Phystography of Lake George.—Observations extending over

several years have suggested the following conclusions. Lake

George occupies a submerged valley very similar to many others

in the Adirondacks, which are not submerged. The valley has

been largely produced by faulting, and the fault-scarps still re-

main in precipitous cliffs, whose sharpness has not been much

affected by weathering and erosion. Before the Pleistocene, the

valley was probably a low pass with both a north and a south

discharge. The portion rich in islands near Pearl Point, and the

Hundred Island House, was probably the divide, and the islands

represent the old hillocks near the top of the divide. At the

south the water is backed up by sands and morainal matter in

the valleys on each side of French Mountain, viz., at the head

of Kattskill Bay, and at Caldwell. On the north they are held

in by Champlain clays and syenitic gneiss at the Ticonderoga

outlet, and probably by morainal material at the low pass just

south of Rogers Rock and leading out to the very depressed

Trout brook valley, just west of Rogers Rock and Cook Moun-

tains. Trout brook is now as muchas a hundred feet lower than

Lake George at points south of the Ticonderoga barrier. The

northern barrier is rock because the Ticonderoga river passes

through a narrow and shallow channel in the exposed ledges a

mile -south of its actual first waterfall. There is a broad flat

valley buried in clays, however, beneath which an old channel

may lie submerged. At the same time, the marked depth of

the Trout brook valley to the west makes this the natural out-

let and there is reason to believe from the general topography

that the discharge passed north into the Champlain valley near

the south boundary of Crown Point. It is also not to be over-

looked that a valley with much drift leads eastward to Lake

Champlain, from the head of Mason’s Bay.

A curious feature that is common to both shores of the lake

north of Sabbath Day point (and perhaps also south of it), is

the presence of pot holes of great perfection and as high at times

as 30 feet above the present level of the lake. These are best

142 RECORDS

developed on Indian Kettles point, about two miles north of

Hague. They were doubtless excavated by lateral or subgla-

cial streams when the ice filled the lake valley, because in no

other conceivable way could flowing water be forced into such

unnatural situations.

There is great need of a good hydrographic survey of the

lake, and of detailed pilot charts, with soundings. They would

be of great service, not alone to navigators, but to science as

well. So far as could be learned from local fishermen, whose

deep trolling for lake trout gives them familiarity with the bot-

tom, there appear to be channels whose general trend is parallel

with the long dimension of the lake, and which have precipitous

sides, precisely like the valleys and gulches now visible. The

lake is relatively shallow as compared with Lake Champlain.

In Lake George the greatest depth is believed to be near An-

thony’s Nose, and to reach 190 feet. Elsewhere the deep parts

are placed at about 100 feet, more or less. All this, however,

requires confirmation by soundings and with regard to the

physiography one cannot say to what extent the bottom of the

valley has been filled by drift, but the islands to which physio-

graphic importance has been given by the speaker are rock.

Professor Kemp’s first paper was discussed by Dr. Julien

and Dr. Martin; the second by Dr. W. P. Northrup, Professor

Dodge and Dr. Julien.

Adjourned. RICHARD E. DongGE,

Secretary, pro tem.

SECTION OF; ANTHROPOLOGY AND. PSYCHOLGGH

OCTOBER, 26, 1001.

Section met at 8:25 P. M., Professor Livingston Farrand

presiding.

The minutes of the last meeting of Section were read and ap-

proved. The names of:two candidates for resident membership

were read and referred to the Council according to the By-

Laws.

RECORDS 143

The following program was then offered :

J. McK. Cattell, Psycnotocy aT THE DENVER MEETING.

G. G. McCurdy (Yale), ANTHROPOLOGY AT THE DENVER

MEETING.

Franz Boas, ANTHROPOLOGY IN BERLIN.

H. H. St. Clair, 2nd, Report oF FIELD WorK IN WyYoMING

AND OREGON.

William Jones, Report oF FIELD WorK IN IOWA AND

OKLAHOMA.

SUMMARY OF PAPERS.

Professor J. McK. Cattell made a brief report regarding psy-

chology at the Denver meeting of the A. A. A. S.

Professor G. G@. MacCurdy, of Yale University, reported on

anthropology at that meeting, and in addition described the ex-

plorations that are being carried on in the Mesa Verde of south-

western Colorado by the Colorado Cliff Dwellings Association.

Professor Franz Boas described the facilities for anthropo-

Jogical study in Berlin, as observed by him in a recent visit.

Within the last 20 or 30 years, the anthropological equipment

of Berlin has progressed enormously. The museum now con-

tains better East Indian collections than can be found in Eng-

land ; and it is strong in nearly all departments, notably so in

American and especially South and Central American anthro-

pology. Fifty scientific workers are engaged on these collec-

tions, and 16 of these are at work on American subjects. Be-

sides the museum, there are several other institutions in Berlin,

such as the Anatomical Institute of Waldeyer and the Patho-

logical Institute of Virchow, in which anthropological work is

done.

The leader of German anthropology is Virchow. He dis-

believes in the study of the variation of the whole body, and

insists that only the study of the variation in the individual cells

of the body can lead to fruitful results.

H. H. St. Clair, 2d, reported observations made last summer

among certain Indian tribes in Wyoming and Oregon.

William Jones also reported observations made during the

past summer. The work of Mr. Jones was carried on among

144 RECORDS

the Sauks and Foxes, a people of Algonquin stock. One band

of this people is located in central Iowa, and another in Oklahoma.

Both bands practice similar customs, live in much the same way,

wear the same kind of dress, show similar physical types, and,

with the exception of certain differences in idiom, and with the

exception that the Iowa band have a slower, more deliberate

pronunciation, they speak the same tongue. The Iowa band is

the more conservative, and among them the law of the clans

still holds. The education of the children is accomplished not °

by instruction but by imitation. The older boys imitate the

men, and the younger boys imitate the older ones ; and simi-

larly with the girls. The life of the children is but a smaller

edition of the life of the older people.

Adjourned.

R. S. WoopwortTH,

Secretary.

BUSINESS MEETING;

NOVEMBER 4, IQOI.

Academy met at 8:15 P. M., Professor William Hallock pre-

siding.

The minutes of the last business meeting were read and ap-

proved.

Dr. F. L. Tutts was elected Secretary pro 7e7.

The Secretary reported from the Council as follows:

1. That inaccordance with the Constitution, notice is given that

at the December meeting there will be an election of a Council-

lor to fill the vacancy caused by the resignation of Professor

Judd.

2. That the Council had voted to cooperate with the

Ethnological Society in extending a cordial invitation to Pro-

fessor A. C. Haddon, of Cambridge University, England, to de-

liver a lecture before the Academy and the Ethnological Society

at some early date in December.

3. That Professor Franz Boas has been appointed repre-

sentative of the Academy on the general committee for the 13th

International Congress of Americanists.

RECORDS 145

The following candidates for resident membership, approved

by the Council, were duly elected :

Amadeus W. Grabau, Ph.D., Columbia University.

Charles Holt, 255 West 45th Street.

Professor E. A. Lough, School of Pedagogy, N. Y. University.

Professor Robert MacDougal, School of Pedagogy, N. Y.

University.

The name of one candidate for resident membership was re-

ferred to the Council according to the by-laws.

Hk. or rs:

Recording Secretary,

pro tem.

seein re rot RONOMY, PHYSICS AND

CHEMISTRY.

NOVEMBER 4, IQOI.

Section mets at 8:15 P. M., Professor William Hallock pre-

siding.

The minutes of the last meeting of Section were read and ap-

proved.

The following program was then offered :

S. A. Mitchell, Report of THE RECENT EcLipsE EXPEDITION

TO SUMATRA.

William Hallock, A Review or THE REPORT OF THE Brir-

IsH ASSOCIATION COMMITTEE ON UNDERGROUND TEMPERATURES.

L. Boroschek and F. L. Tufts, A Srupy oF THE ABSORPTION

oF Licnt BY DyYEs OF THE FLUORESCEIN GROUP.

SUMMARY OF PAPERS.

The account of the Eclipse Expedition to Sumatra was illus-

trated by lantern slides showing the arrangement of apparatus at

the several stations. The paper is published in full in a current

number of Sczence.

Professor Hallock gave an account of some of the recent

determinations of underground temperatures. This paper is

also published in full in Sczence.

146 RECORDS

Dr. L. Boroschek gave an account of some work he had

undertaken in connection with Dr. Tufts on the absorption of

light by some dyes‘of the fluorescein group. The dyes studied

were fluorescein and a number of its nitro-derivatives.

It was stated that Hewitt and Perkins ( /ournal Chem. Soc.,

1900, page 1324) claim that a double symmetrical tautomerism

furnishes a satisfactory explanation for the fluoresence of Fluor-

escein, and thatin the case of dinitro and tetranitro fluorescein

this tautomerism is inhibited by a secondary tautomerism be-

tween the nitro and hydroxyl groups when in ortho position to

each other. It was found that the mono-nitro-fluoresceins, ob-

tained by us by condensing the 3-nitro and the 4-nitro-phthalic

anhydrides with resorcin, in which the nitro group is on a dif-

ferent benzol nucleus from the hydroxy] groups show no fluor-

escence in alkaline solutions. According to the theory of

Hewitt and Perkins alkaline solutions of such dyes should

fluoresce.

Photographs of the absorption spectra of alkaline solutions

of the dyes were taken and it was found that the substitution of

nitro groups displaces the prominent absorption band of fluores-

cein toward the red end of the spectrum and increases the

absorption in the ultra violet.

The absorption of light in the visible spectrum was studied by

means of the flicker photometer. The amount of light trans-

mitted by equal thicknesses of solutions of different concentra-

tions was measured for the various dyes. A relation was thus

obtained between the absorption of light and the concentration

of the dye. The work is still in progress.

POL Por.

Secretary.

SECTION OF BIOLOGY?

NOVEMBER II, IQOI.

Section met at 8.15 P. M., Professor C. L. Bristol presiding.

The minutes of the last meeting of Section were read and

approved.

RECORDS 147

The foliowing program was then offered :

H. F. Osborn, DoLicHOCEPHALY AND BRACHYCEPHALY AS

DoMINANT FACTORS IN THE SKULLS OF MAMMALS.

F. E. Lloyd, TETRAD-FORMATION IN THE RUBIACEAE.

SUMMARY OF PAPERS.

Professor Osborn stated that the proportions of the skull in

the lower mammals are no less distinctive than in the races of

men. Although confined to the cranium in anthropology, the

principles of dolichocephaly, mesaticephaly, and brachycephaly

could be applied to the skull (z. ¢., cranium plus face), and are

found to illuminate the whole morphology of the skull and teeth,

and in many cases the correlation with other parts of the skel-

eton. Dolichopodal and dolichocephalic, brachypodal and

brachycephalic types are frequently but not invariably corre-

lated, the numerous instances of non-correlation being due to

exceptional adaptations in feeding. Apart from its relation to

foot structure, skull proportion is, in evolution, progressively in

one direction or the other, and is the underlying cause of hun-

dreds of cranial and dental characters which have hitherto been

described by comparative anatomists without appreciation of

their true significance. The generalization was first made by

the speaker among the rhinoceroses, was subsequently found to

apply with equal force to the Titanotheres, and many other un-

gulates, unguiculates, and primates.

Professor Lloyd gave an account of the so-called tetrad divi-

sions of the mother cells of the pollen and embryo-sac, in Cru-

clanella (2 species), and Asperula (1 species). Briefly stated,

these divisions are heterotypic and homotypic in the sense of

Flemming and Strasburger. The pollen and embryo-sac di-

visions are homologous. In Cructanella all the megaspores

undergo the first embryo-sac mitosis.

Henry E. CRAMPTON,

Secretary.

148 RECORDS

SECTION OF GEOLOGY AND. MINERALOGY

NOVEMBER 18, IQOI.

Section met at 8:15 P. M., Dr. A. A. Julien presiding.

The following program was offered :

J. F. Kemp, THeopore G. Wuire (Obituary).

J. J. Stevenson, JosepH Le Contre (Obituary).

KE. 0. Hovey, NorEs oN THE TRIASSIC AND JURASSIC STRATA

OF THE Brack HILLs oF SoutH Dakota AND WYOMING.

A. A. Julien, Erosion spy Fiyinc SAND ON THE BEACHES OF

Cape Cop.

On motion it was unanimously voted by the Section that the

obituary notices of Messrs. White and LeConte be referred to

the Council for printing in the Records of the Academy.

SUMMARY OF PAPERS.

Theodore Greeley White, Secretary of the Section of Geology

and Mineralogy, in this Academy, passed away after a brief ill-

ness on the seventh of July, 1901. The announcement that one

who was just entering upon the full exercise of his powers had

fallen came to his friends with all the shock of a sudden bereave-

ment. It is difficult to realize, even at this day, that one who

had long been a faithful worker in this Academy is no more.

Mr. White was born in New York, August 6, 1872, and

therefore lacked just a month of completing his twenty-ninth

year. He was the only child of his parents, both of whom he

had but recently lost. He fitted for college at the Columbia

Grammar School, entered the School of Mines in the course in

geology and paleontology in October, 1890, and received his

degree of Ph.B. in June, 1894. He immediately registered for

graduate work at Columbia, as a candidate for M.A., and re-

ceived the degree in 1895. He continued his studies for Ph.D.,

and obtained it in 1898. He was appointed assistant in the

Department of Physics in 1896, and held the position until

1900, being especially in charge of the experimental work in

RECORDS 149

optics. The organization of this particular laboratory at the

new site of Columbia largely fell to him, and in the work he

displayed administrative abilities which won for him the warm

commendation of his superiors.

Asa boy Dr. White early manifested a special interest in natural

science, and was an earnest worker in a chapter of the Agassiz

society, which made its headquarters in the parish house of Dr.

Mottet’s church, and from which have been recruited several of

our vigorous younger workers in science. While an under-

graduate, he began investigations both geologial and botanical.

His Ph.B. thesis was a description of the geology of Essex and

Willsboro, towns on Lake Champlain, and was published in our

Transactions, XII1., p. 214. His work led him to take up the

study of the faunas of the Trenton in the Champlain valley for

his doctorate. In the end he studied them not alone in this

district, but all around the Adirondack crystalline area. He

also carried on work for the State Museum under the direc-

tion of Dr. F. J. H. Merrill. In association with Professor

Crosby, of the Massachusetts Institute of Technology, he de-

scribed the petrographical characters of the Quincy granite.

His complete work upon the Trenton remains to be issued as a

posthumous paper.

Dr. White was a man of indefatigable industry and of great per-

severance. Besides his efforts in geology, he had a number of

additional undertakings in hand. He was especially interested

in the parish work of the church with which he was connected

(Church of the Holy Communion, Rev. Dr. Mottet, Rector,

6th Avenue and 2oth St.), and the past spring he made up his

mind to devote himself to a life-work among its young men.

He was largely instrumental in founding Gordon House, a club .

house and centre of interest for them, and to it he has bequeathed

his estate. Indeed, during an excursion to the neighboring sea-

shore with his young men friends in the club, he became exhausted

while bathing in the salt water, and took a cold, which devel-

oped into pneumonia, and caused his death after a brief illness.

He has left a large circle of sincere and devoted friends, who can

with difficulty reconcile themselves to his loss.

150 RECORDS

Joseph LeConte was born in Liberty County, Georgia, Feb-

ruary 26, 1823, and died in Yosemite Valley, California, June

6, 1901. He was descended from Guilleaume LeConte, a

Huguenot, who left Rouen, France, in 1685, and settled near

New York City. Louis LeConte was a distinguished naturalist

who was graduated from Columbia College, New York, in 1800,

and soon afterward went to Georgia to take charge of a planta-

tion inherited from his father. There he married. Of his seven

children, John was the fourth and Joseph the youngest. The

latter, after graduating at the University of Georgia, came to

New York and studied medicine, receiving his degree in 1845.

He practiced medicine for only three or four years, and then

went to Harvard as a special student in zoology and geology,

receiving in 1851 the degree of B.S.

His original purpose was to become a zoologist, but in 1850

he accompanied Professors Hall and Agassiz on a geological

excursion through the Helderberg mountains of New York. In

his own words, ‘‘ It was my first lesson in field-geology. The

intense interest developed in my mind by the rambles, the ob-

servations, and especially the discussions between these two men,

definitely determined my chief scientific work in the field of ge-

ology rather than zoology.”

After graduating at Harvard, Professor LeConte accompanied

Professor Agassiz during the 1851 study of the Florida reefs,

and upon his return was chosen Professor of Natural Science in

Oglethorpe University, Georgia. From 1852 to 1856 he was

Professor of Geology and Natural History in Franklin College,

and from 1857 to 1869, of Geology and Chemistry in South

Carolina College. During the Civil War he was chemist of the

Confederate Medical Laboratory at Columbia, S. C., as well as

of the Nitre and Mining Bureau. In 1869 he was called to the

chair of Geology in the University of California, which he re-

tained until his death. A singular proof of his reputation

throughout the South at the close of the war, was the outburst

of a Charleston journal in 1869, asserting that the election of

the LeConte brothers to positions in the University of California

was proof of the suspected conspiracy to cripple the South in-

tellectually as it had been crippled materially.

RECORDS 151

Professor LeConte loved nature, he loved to wander where

civilization had not destroyed its charms. In 1844, with his

cousin, John L. LeConte, the entomologist, he journeyed in the

northwest, travelling along the upper Mississippi more than one

thousand miles in a birchbark canoe, and afterwards visited

Lake Superior, piercing a region inhabited then almost wholly

by Indians. In later years he spent his vacations in the Sierras,

camping where he might make studies of structure. His life

closed amid the scenes which had been so dear to him for more

than thirty years.

Professor LeConte was a prolific writer. His early training,

both as a student and as teacher, had given him a breadth of cul-

ture, which in this day of specialization is becoming too rare.

He wrote upon physics, geology and psychology, making to

each of these sciences contributions of capital importance. A

vein of poetry runs through his papers, making his style almost

unique in the scientific literature of our time. The excellence

of his work was recognized at an early date, and he was elected

to the American Philosophical Society before the Civil War.

He was made member of the National Academy of Sciences

shortly after the close of that war. He was president of the

American Association for the Advancement of Science in 1892,

and of the Geological Society of America in 1896.

Professor LeConte was a man of positive convictions, which

were always expressed in clear-cut language, admitting of no

misunderstanding. But there is reason to believe that he had

not a personal enemy in the world. Of singular sweetness of

disposition, unfailingly courteous in his manner, he was a wel-

come and honored guest wherever he went. His wholesome

integrity, his conscientious devotion to accuracy, his keenness

as an observer always gained for hima more than respectful

hearing in discussion, even from those who remained unwilling

to accept his conclusions. He is dead ; but his memory will be

cherished affectionately by those who were his associates in

science—still more by the students of fifty graduating classes,

who were privileged to listen to his lectures, and to find in him

one who cared for them as for his own children.

152 RECORDS

Dr. BE. O. Hovey gave a brief summary of the chief facts

known in regard to the formation of the Black Hills, describing

first the most striking features of the great Red valley, which

has been formed by the comparatively rapid erosion of the Tri-

assic beds, which are softer than the Permian limestone on the

one side, and the Jurassic sandstones on the other. The Tri-

assic beds are very variable in texture, consisting of clay-,

sand- and gravel-rock; they show much strong cross-bedding,

being evidently a shore deposit. They seem to have suffered

much from local slipping, making a close estimate of their

thickness hard to give. They are entirely destitute of animal

remains. The Jurassic beds are separated from the Red beds

by an unconformity due to erosion. They consist of argilla-

ceous and calcareous shales, limestones and sandstones, but they

are very variable in composition. Some of the layers contain

abundant fossils, forty-six species having been reported from

the formation. Apparently there are ten or twelve new species

in the material collected by the author for the American Mu-

seum last summer (1901). The upper boundary of the Jurassic

is still a mooted question, the beds running conformably up into

undoubtedly Cretaceous, with no invertebrate fossils for hun-

dreds of feet. The paper was discussed by Professors Steven-

son and Dodge and Dr. Grabau.

Dr. Julien, in his paper on Erosion sy FLyinG SAND ON THE

BEACHES OF CaPE Cop, described the physical characteristics of

the beach sand of Cape Cod, and showed them to be in gen-

eral derived from the Tertiary formation and from the glacial

sands and gravels. The motion of the sands is from the west

along the south shore, and from the north down the east and

west sides of the “forearm” of the cape. The sand movement

under the influence of the wind is extensive, and many results

of erosion by moving sand are seen in the wearing of cliffs and

in the pitted surfaces of the pebbles on the beaches.

The author showed also that the sand grains suspended in the

air are subjected to rapid erosion from mutual impact, and thus

that sand particles too small to be eroded in water are much

comminuted when dry, and set in motion in the air. The fine

RECORDS 153

resulting silt is carried and deposited as fine mud. This paper

was discussed by Dr. Grabau.

Dr. W. 8S. Yeates, State Geologist of Georgia, being present

as a visitor, the chair called upon him for remarks. In response

he gave a brief outline of the State Geological Surveys of Geor-

gia, and made a short statement of the work now in hand. Re-

marks appreciative of the difficulties under which state geolog-

ical surveyors often labor were made by Professors Stevenson

and Kemp, and Mr. G. F. Kunz.

The Section adjourned at 9:30 o'clock.

EpMuND O. Hovey,

Secretary.

eee ION OF ANTHROPOLOGY AND PSYCHOLOGY.

NOVEMBER 25, IQOI.

Section met at 8:20 P. M., Professor Livingston Farrand

presiding.

The minutes of the last meeting of Section were read and

approved.

The following program was then offered :

Robert. MacDougal, CompinaTION oF SIMPLE RHYTHM

Groups IN HIGHER SYNTHESES, AND THEIR EQUIVALENCES.

E. L. Thorndike, THE CorreELATION oF MENTAL ABILITIES.

J. Franklin Messenger, AN ExpERIMENTAL Stupy oF Num-

BER PERCEPTION.

SUMMARY OF PAPERS.

Professor MacDougal has found that the simplest rhythmic

units are always combined into larger groups, provided only the

units succeed each other with sufficient rapidity. And these

larger groups may be combined into others still larger—a pro-

cess to which no definite limits can be set. The simplest group

of rhythmic units is the pair or dipody, which appears in every

rhythmic series that admits of such grouping. The means by

which this coupling of the units is accomplished in poetry are :

Subordination of the accent of one unit to the accent of the.

154 RECORDS

other, differentiation in the intervals, introduction of mid-line

and final pauses, catalexis and rhyme. In any sort of rhythm

that is objectively expressed, the first unit of a dipody receives

the major accent, and also occupies more time than the second

unit. Even in a long rhythmic series there is properly no mere

reduplication of units, but each unit fulfils a unique function in

the series, in virtue of which it is differentiated from all the other

units, in emphasis and duration and also in its internal configu-

ration.

Professor Edward L. Thorndike spoke of some general as-

pects of the investigation which he is at present carrying on

in the correlations amongst mental abilities. He found that

regular correlation, where each degree of one function involves

a similar degree of the other, is by no means the rule in the

case of mental abilities. The relationships are often extremely

irregular. For instance a high degree of one ability may go

with a high degree of another but all other grades may involve

no similarity in the other. A single coefficient of correlation in

such cases is of course an absurdity. Correlations seem more

marked between complex than between simple abilities. <A

variation of the Pearson method was outlined, which is well

adapted to work with mental correlations and especially with

studies involving few cases.

As samples of his results, Dr. Thorndike demonstrated the

absence of correlation between certain motor and mental tests,

the pronounced correlation between ability to spell and ability

to notice the structure of words, the pronounced correlations be-

tween school marks in different subjects and the lesser degrees

of correlation in the case of objective tests in the same subjects.

Mr. J. Franklin Messenger outlined an EXPERIMENTAL

Stupy OF NUMBER PERCEPTION. His experiments had reference

to the so-called space threshold in tactile sensations, to the

fusion of touch sensations, and to the perception of number

through touch. The validity of a threshold determined only

by the distance apart of the two points applied to the skin was

denied, because distance is only one of the elements on which

the perception is based, and often not the most important ele-

RECORDS 155

ment. The fusion of two tactile sensations was also denied be-

cause of such facts as the following, that two points, ove on each

hand, may be perceived as one point when the hands are close

together.

The speaker offered a theory of the tactile perception of num-

ber. Number is not directly sensed by touch, but is inferred

from various peculiarities of the tactile sensations, such as the

geometrical arrangement of the stimulating objects, the distance

apart of these objects, the contour of the surface stimulated—

and also from the preceding sensation and the attitude of the

subject.

R. S. Woopworts,

Secretary.

‘BUSINESS MEETING.

DECEMBER 2, IQOI.

Academy met at 8:15 P. M., President Woodward presiding.

The minutes of the last business meeting were read and ap-

proved.

The Secretary reported from the Council as follows:

The nomination of Dr. Henry E. Crampton as Councillor, to

fill in the unexpired term of Professor Judd, resigned. It was

voted that the Secretary be authorized to cast the ballot of the

Academy for Dr. Crampton as Councillor, which was duly

done.

The following candidate for resident membership, approved

by the Council, was duly elected :

Mrs. Alfred Pell, Pellwood, Highland Falls, Orange Co.,

New York.

Adjourned,

RICHARD E. DODGE,

Recording Secretary.

156 ECORDS

SECTION. .OF ASTRONOMY| PH ¥SICSeoAND

CHEMISERY:

DECEMBER 2, 1901.

Section met at 8:15 P. M., Prof. William Hallock presiding.

The minutes of the last meeting of Section were read and ap-

proved.

The following program was then offered :

Prof. M. I. Pupin, Enercy Dissipation in A WEAK Mac-

NETIC FIELD.

Prof. J. K. Rees and C. A. Post, OpsERVATIONS OF LEONIDS

MADE AT Bayport L. I., from Nov. 13th to 16th inclusive.

SUMMARY OF PAPERS.

Prof. Pupin described an experimental investigation of the

dissipation of energy in a weak magnetic field. The substance

experimented on was a toroid of square cross section made up

of iron plates .o1o of aninch thick. The magnetizing force

was supplied by a helix uniformly distributed over the core.

The force applied was a simple harmonic of 1800 periods per

second and its amplitude could be varied from 0 to .1 C. G. S.

units. The inductance and resistance of the helix was deter-

mined in a Wheatstone bridge. The results were compared

with the theory worked out by the author.

It was found that up to about .o5 C. G. S. units of the mag-

netizing force the permeability of the iron was constant and equal

to about 80, in the samples of iron employed: there was no

hysteresis and the theory agreed very well with experiment.

Beyond the above limit both the inductance (Z) and the Foucault

resistance (J) increased. The increase of was very rapid on

account of hysteresis.

When the core was magnetized by a steady force, and after the

removal of the force 2 and R were measured, it was found that

both were changed on account of the change of permeability,

but within the above limits their values still agreed with the

theory. Hence weak magnetizations are not accompanied by

RECORDS 157

hysteresis both when the iron is neutral and when it is already,

even strongly, magnetized.

It was found that an increase in the permanent magnetization

diminished the permeability and vice versa. The maximum

change in permeability thus obtained was 22 per cent.

The observations of Leonids were made at Mr. Post’s obser-

vatory. For the purpose of photographing meteor trails four

cameras were fastened to the equatorial. Exposures for known

times were made on identical parts of the sky. The results

showed meteor trails on the plates taken between midnight and

sunrise of November 15th. A photograph was obtained of

quite a remarkable meteor which appeared at 3:58 A. M. near

the radiant point and exhibited a fine head and trail which

remained visible for a minute or more. A lantern slide of this

meteor was thrown on the screen and attention called to the

peculiar details of the head and trail.

During the night of November 14th and 15th an attempt was

made to count the meteors. Miss Edith Post and Miss Gre-

nough watched the northeastern and southeastern sky; 418

meteors, of which all but a very few were well-defined Leonids

were counted. Of these the greatest number was seen between

4:30 and 5:30 A. M., on November 15th, when 273 were

counted.

The notes on individual meteors show that many bright Leo-

nids fell showing trails which lasted many seconds, and extended

10 to 20 degrees.

Section adjourned,

| Po AA UETS,

Secretary.

SEGTION OF BIOLOGY.

DECEMBER Q, IQOI.

Section met at 8:15 P. M., Professor Bashford Dean presiding.

The minutes of the last meeting of Section were read and

approved.

158 . RECORDS

The following program was then offered :

F.S. Lee and W. Salant, THe Action or ALCOHOL ON

MUSCLE.

A. G. Mayer, Instincts oF LEPIDOPTERA.

H. R. Linville, THe Natura History oF Some TusBE-ForM-

ING ANNELIDS.

SUMMARY OF PAPERS.

The first paper was presented by Professor Lee, and con-

sisted of an account of an investigation by the two authors

jointly. The study had been carried on by very exact methods,

pure ethyl alcohol being used, and isolated muscles of the

frog in the normal and in the alcoholized condition being com-

pared. It is found that the muscle which has absorbed a mod-

erate quantity of pure alcohol will contract more quickly, re-

lax more slowly, perform a greater number of contractions in a

given time, and become fatigued more slowly than a muscle

without alcohol. The effect is most pronounced in from one-

half to three quarters of an hour after the liquid has begun to

be absorbed, and later diminishes. Whether the alcohol exerts

this beneficial action on the muscle substance itself, or on the

nerves within the muscle is not yet certain. The results allow

no conclusion regarding the question whether the alcohol acts

as a food or in some other manner. In larger quantities its

presence is detrimental, diminishing the whole number of con-

tractions, inducing early fatigue, and diminishing the total

amount of work that the muscle is capable of performing, even

to the extent of abolishing the contractile power entirely. In

such quantities the action is distinctly poisonous. The after-

effects of either small or large doses have not yet been studied.

Dr. Mayer reported upon a number of experiments designed

to determine the nature and duration of associative memory in

lepidopterous larve. In one series the larve were placed ina

wooden box divided into two compartments by means of a cen-

tral partition which was pierced by a small opening. On one

side of the partition was placed moist earth containing growing

food plants, while on the other side of the partition there was a

RECORDS 159

barren chamber. The larve were placed in the latter and

found their way through the opening to the food-chamber.

Apparently they never learned the path to the food, but always

wandered aimlessly about and never shortened their paths to

the food. When the food was removed, however, they rarely

entered this side of the box, showing that it was the presence

of food which attracted them. Individual temperament is very

well shown by the larve, for some quickly find the food, while

others are much slower. This quickness is not due to superior

intelligence, however, but is owing to the fact that these larve

remain quiet for shorter periods of time than the slower ones.

A number of experiments was made upon larve which devour

only certain special kinds of leaves. These larve can be in-

duced to eat sparingly of previously uneatable food, however,

if the sap of their proper food plant be rubbed into the pre-

viously distasteful leaves. Similarly they can be prevented

from devouring their proper food plant if the juices of uneatable

plants be rubbed into the substance of the leaves. However,

they can always be induced to bite at or devour any foreign

substance if one allows the larva to commence eating its proper

food plant and then slides up in front of it a distasteful leaf,

sheet of paper, tinfoil, etc. The larva will take a few bites of

the foreign substance but will soon draw back its head, snapping

its mandibles with apparent disgust or aversion. Very soon,

however, it recommences to devour its proper food in a normal

manner. If the foreign substance or distasteful leaf be presented

to the larva at intervals of one and one-half minutes or more,

about the same nurmber of bites is taken at each presentation,

thus showing that the larva does not remember its disagreeable

experience for the interval. If, however, the interval be about

thirty seconds the larve will take fewer and fewer bites of the

disagreeable leaf, and will soon refuse it altogether. Individual

temperament is very apparent in the reaction of larve in these

respects. Also when spinning their cocoons the larve of Samza

cynthia and C. promethea are geotropic, for if the cocoon be

turned upside down soon after the completion of the outer en-

velope, the pupz are sometimes found reversed also, and may

160 RECORDS

thus be imprisoned in the cocoon; for the densely woven

(normally lower) end of the cocoon is probably impenetrable to

the issuing moth. A series of experiments are now being tried

to determine whether the peculiar coloration of male moths in

dimorphic species is due to sexual selection on the part of the

female. In the case of Callosamia promethea there appears to

be none, for males are accepted even when female wings are

pasted upon them, or when their wings or scales are entirely

removed. In the case of O. dispar, however, there is a decided

selection against males whose wings have been cut off; 57 per

cent. of the perfect males succeed in mating with the females,

whereas only Ig per cent. of the wingless males are successful.

The peculiar coloration of the males in these cases has probably

not been brought about through the agency of sexual selection

on the part of the female, but may be due to race tendency

toward variation in a definite direction unchecked by natural

selection.

This paper was discussed by Professors Dean, Crampton, and

others.

Dr. Linville, in his paper, showed that the investigation of

the habits of Amphitrite ornata and Diopatra cuprea brings to

light many interesting adaptations. The first named lives in

U-shaped tubes in sand and mud, access to water and food be-

ing possible at either end. Additions to the tube are made at

the ends by the tentacles, which are continually drawing in

small masses of sand. However, there is every indication that

in this animal, where no occasion exists for a protecting tube,

continued tube-building is merely incidental to food getting.

Food is brought to the mouth, which is always concealed, in

the masses of sand and in water currents created by the inward

lashing cilia which thickly covers the tentacles.

Diopatra lives in a tough, mucus-covered lined tube, with

its deeper end bare, and serving as an anchor, while its outer

free end is studded with bits of shell and gravel. The animal

may expose its anterior portion while searching for food and

for suitable material to add to its tube. Observations made in

the laboratory indicate that the animal chooses these materials

RECORDS 161

by tactile sense organs in the cephalic cirri. The particle is

grasped between the palps or by the mandibles, or by both, and

is then conveyed with a fair degree of precision to a place at

the edge of the tube. During the construction Diopatra peri-

odically ceases to build in order to ‘‘glue”’ the gravel and shell

together. The mucous-secreting organs are pads upon the

ventral surface near the head. These organs are brought in

contact with the inner surface of the tube by long and vigorous

contractions and expansions of the trunk-segments. All or

nearly all of the newly-constructed portions are gone over in

this way before the animal renews its search for bits of gravel

and shell.

Henry E. CRAMPTON,

Secretary.

SECTION OF GEOLOGY AND MINERALOGY.

DECEMBER 16, IQOI.

Section met at 8:15 P. M., Dr. A. A. Julien presiding.

The minutes of the last meeting of Section were read and

approved.

The following program was then offered:

D. W. Johnson, NotTes ON THE GEOLOGY OF THE SALINE

BASINS OF CENTRAL NEw Mexico. Illustrated by diagrams.

D.S. Martin, GeotocicaL Notes ON THE NEIGHBORHOOD OF

BUFFALO.

A. J. Queneau, THE GRAIN oF IGNEous Rocks.

On motion, Professor Richard E. Dodge was made Secretary

pro tem., owing to the necessary absence of Dr. Hovey.

SUMMARY OF PAPERS.

In the Antonio Sandoval Grant, near the centre of the Terri-

tory of New Mexico, are noted saline deposits which have

served as important sources of a very pure salt in past years.

The character of these basins was discussed in some detail, and

points concerning their historical interest briefly touched upon.

162 RECORDS

The general geology of the central portion of the Territory was

then briefly reviewed, while the local geology of the Antonio

Sandoval Grant was presented more in detail. It was shown

that the saline lakes occur in the Red Beds of Jura-triassic or

Permian age. These Beds are separable, on lithological

grounds, into three divisions, designated as the Red Series, the

Chocolate Series, and the Vermilion Series. Lenticular de-

posits of salt and gypsum are frequently found at the top of the

lower or Red Series, and evidence was produced to show that

the Saline Basins under consideration occur at this horizon.

The facts were noted that Triassic types have been described

from some part of the Red Beds (presumably the upper), while

a characteristic Permian fauna has been recently found near the

base of the Red Series. In view of these facts, and since no

horizon of marked transition other than the salt and gypsum

deposits occurs, it was suggested that these deposits might

possibly mark the boundary line between the Jura-triassic and

Permian in central New Mexico. This paper was discussed by

Professor Kemp and Dr. Grabau.

Dr. Martin, in his paper, presented some geological notes on

the neighborhood of Buffalo, N. Y., in the summer of IgoI.

He did not claim any special novelty for the data presented,

but judged that they might be of interest to any members not

acquainted with that region. Dr. Martin first outlined roughly

the distribution of the series from the Medina to the Corniferous

Limestone, and then mentioned in detail certain special features.

He particularly noted certain joint seams in the Niagara Lime-

stone near Lockport, New York, which have been much eroded

and decomposed, and which are now filled with a dark brown

clay-like material containing numbers of half-decayed modern

land shells, such as Helzx albolabris. He then described the

series of rocks exposed in the quarries found on N. Main Street,

Buffalo, which are the source of the famous Eurypferus speci-

mens. This series extends from the Corniferous Limestone to

the Saline series, and is divisible into five members, known as

the Corniferous Limestone, the Blue Limestone, the Bullhead

Rock, the Water Limestone and the Salina. Dr. Martin par-

RECORDS 163

ticularly emphasized the contact between the Bullhead Rock

and the overlying Blue Limestone, and noted the occurrence of

a sandstone dike extending to the top of the Bullhead series.

The paper was discussed by Dr. Julien.

Mr. Queneau in his paper said that a general observation

might be made in regard to intrusive dikes. Near the margin

the rock is dense, often glassy, without any appreciable grain,

whereas the grain begins to grow coarse according to some defi-

nite law, progressively as the distance from the wall increases.

The present paper is based on the study of the laws governing

such increase. It appears that the loss of heat is of paramount

importance.' The problem taken up is very analogous to the

one presented by the cooling of a slab of finite thickness and of

great length and depth with respect to the first dimension, viz.,

the thickness. The method followed rests on the Théorie de la

Chaleur, of Fourrer, and on the general theory of cooling by

Professor R. S. Woodward.” The following laws have been

deducted : (1) The zone of varying grain will vary indirectly as

the initial temperature. From this follows that: (@) Plutonic

rocks very deeply seated will not present a zone of varying grain

to any extent. (2) Rocks which come to rest at a temperature

nearing their consolidation point will present a wide zone of

varying grain. (2) The time of cooling, other conditions being

the same, varies as the square of the thickness of the dike.’

From this last law it is assumed that the size of the crystals

vary as the square of their distances from the nearest margin ;

then the square root of their area which can be measured varies

directly as the distances from the margin. Thus we have a sim-

ple law of easy application.

The paper was discussed by Professors Kemp and Dodge,

and Dr. Julien.

Adjourned.

RICHARD E. DOonGE,

Secretary pro tem.

1 Alfred C. Lane, Geol. Surv. of Michigan, Vol. VI.

2 Annals of Mathematics, Vol. III.

*Riemann, ‘‘ Partielle Differentiel Gleichungen.’’

af,

s*)

“\

“=

: °

ann |

s mh

~— ©

Pi ug ry

f oh fr a Soe e |

- Py Ps

‘ 7 7 . *

he Aw) -_

_ , F . i

2 Pers rer? i

‘

i 4

‘

i &

‘ j Pie? Me

Le ~ .

‘Soe

; é

c ze : Pin:

; .

Ls 7 ,

* - ad

“a ane a ; bd

. +

ia , :

rw S

- “s € a

. ;

x odie

-— os ,

‘

eae, arts Sif ay i

al ; tet ait a mY A és

or! ay ee me by oe

2 Seales “al

. o , i

sumac Gh ah! Be sh mp a

= .

. ona aan

i shee =

aba

Ree.

PUBLICATIONS

NEW YORK ACADEMY OF SCIENCES

[Lyceum or NaturaL History 1818-1876]

The publications of the Academy consist of two series, viz :—

(1) The Annals (octavo series), established in 1823, contain

the scientific contributions and reports of researches, together

with the records of meetings, annual exhibitions, etc.

Publication of the Transactions of the Academy was discon

tinued with the issue of Volume XVI, 1898, and merged in the

Annals. A volume of the Annals will hereafter coincide with

the calendar year and will be distributed in three parts, during

the year. The price of current issues is one dollar per part or

three dollars per volume. Authors’ reprints are issued as soon

as the separate papers are printed, the dates appearing above the

title of each paper.

(2) The Memoirs (quarto series), established in 1895, are is-

sued at irregular intervals. It is intended that each volume shall

be devoted to monographs relating to some particular depart-

ment of science. Volume I is devoted to Astronomical Mem-

oirs, Volume II, to Zoological Memoirs, etc. The price is one

dollar per part, as issued.

All publications will hereafter be sent free to fellows and

members who desire to receive them, but other fellows and

members will only receive the Records, issued as a separate

from the Annals. The Annals will be sent, as before, to

honorary and corresponding members desiring them.

Subscriptions and inquiries concerning current and back

numbers of any of the publications of the Academy should be

addressed to THE LisrariaAN

New York Academy of Sciences

Columbia University

New York City.

PRICES OF PUBLICATIONS

Annals of the Lyceum (Vols. I-XI), . . . per Vol., $5.00

Proceedings “‘ Rea ewe te eee rtyet $f ER GG

Trans. of the Academy (Vols. I-XVI), ~ . “ “ 5.00

Annals ‘“ ‘ (Vols. I-X), SIRE Sa Ses Mk eis cs Oe

Annals “ 43 (Vol. XI e¢ seg. 2. — 3.00

Memoirs “ § we Prt: Vol. LH; Pts, I, II, MD),

pet Party Fak 1.00

CON TENTS (OF MOlieo

ie ae

| a Re

Dodge, Richard E. ; Recording Secretary, Record of Oy

eh Meetings of the New York Academy of Sciences, : - »

ea ee ae - January, 1901, to December, Teen, eae thc

VoL. XIV PART III

ANNALS

OF THE

NEW YORK

ACADEMY OF SCIENCES

Editor:

CHARLES LANE POOR

The New Era Printing Company

Lancaster, Pa.

NEW YORK ACADEMY: OF SCIENCES

OFFICERS, IQOI—I902

President—J. McKeen CaTTELyt, Columbia University.

Recording Secretary—HENRY E. Crampton, Barnard College.

Corresponding Secretary——-BASHFORD DEAN, Columbia University.

Treasurey—CHARLES F. Cox, Grand Central Depot.

Librartan—LIvVINGSTON FARRAND, Columbia University.

Editor—CHARLES LANE Poor, 4 East 48th Street.

SECTION OF ASTRONOMY, PHYSICS, AND CHEMISTRY

Chairman—CHARLES LANE Poor, 4 East 48th Street.

S. ALFRED MITCHELL, Columbia University.

Secretary

SECTION OF BIOLOGY

Chairman—Cuas. L. Bristot, New York University.

Secretary —HEnrRY E. Crampton, Barnard College.

SECTION OF GEOLOGY AND MINERALOGY

Chairman—Atexis A. JuLieN, Columbia University.

Secretary—EpmuND O. Hovey, American Museum of Natural

History.

SECTION OF ANTHROPOLOGY AND PSYCHOLOGY

Chairman—LAVINGSTON FARRAND, Columbia University.

Secretary—R. S. Woopvworth, N. Y. Univ. Med. Coll., Belle-

vue Hospital.

SESSION, 1903-1904

The Academy will meet on Monday evenings at 8.15 o'clock,

from October to May, in the American Museum of Natural

History, 77th Street and Central Park, West.

Gr 7 _ =

[Annals N. Y. Acap. Sci., Vol. XIV, No. 3, pp. 165-246, Oct. 31, 1903. ]

fe BARLY EMBRYOLOGY OF THALASSEMA

MELLITA (CONN).'

JOHN CUTLER TORREY.

CONTENTS. shen

RE ERR es hI KUUEST oo ass Te oad Pada s enw etb Toa nc bbs V deve ccs ceak a dacwenseees conde 166

PE EN WAGE TO! GASTRULATION, 065.0 cniered vith ccecsestnccdeeseccesd sosvevtcoees 169

ot Eee ete ere aKe riepcidiw,Scinay Jdlcniesaseecsevespopsecces 170

2. Further Divisions of the Quartets. .......... hada Bde MPRA bi ween cee 179

eA mest O DIAM Citar, ceed cent cattinads REAL G6 au aied deereethat eGo an dete soe sicee oles 179

eee ST Boo Sia ctaw suet wene dieses oe (nes te ABMS POMPE cece + 5'osaad vous 181

NO a ae eM eit ea ntti cc de cdint oivc'es vecatansvavevachebersas weese 183

em rawr dad PRC h OUaeee .. Aili ceed eke RS eee oe ae ceun sees 184

Peaee ied Got SHAG ratiOniss soda faetise ss chica) cbs bbess deccials ducts ste’ ob desosachove’s 185

ANN ie hee Me ete ee cio 8 cabs cuca devs stwdasnasdscbans cadeeecedede sonst 185

NESTLE SM CORO Min sais caate rt abeasysrs denecdcsccsesederedsceseea vovben 190

Gmagene ard Urtequtan Cleawaee tics. tice bie gevetieee oactsetevesvecceecteASeees 192

Pe ore ORATION TO” FROCHOPHOR By. 25155 i0.c05 veeteel owssclsleecbeb bet cecvileves ee 195

ERI ss ieee cae seat. Fp chG Ola ids sie k opt Orcee'c cacbesad coasecssecedesssns 195

I MEENES TENURE PTERSOMOLE iaecanc gc) oven ce sicpanaecee.s + oe sveastSegcnsdpecadsccecs 195

3. History of the Dorsal Gap in the Prototroch aud of the Shifting of Em-

POR RIS PERCMER FAREED ee tate Ss ald ats tnd sch an asa de hides duclechedendvseetes 199

ePonmation.of Enteron .......<6...00.0+s+<0+0 Mice Seat cae Reuss mun gvhics aes 204

5. Soe ete CASO ARIES Se ecm re Se AAS Stas SAME oils do chetec ale Behiews b 207

Ge Lumerentiations: off the: Metoderitty 2 .csccicciwe. ieveak vale Coe vec'e ctv'ens ove cctact 209

Ree SULLY OBVELOPED: TR OCHOPHORE),.(.cvscccticcedsvilse vec ccevesecshes obilececleceds 211

His FONE IAT ORG LG), A/G Vdd od sidled woh We bhlWe ELM dulce BT stat aleeedlelde Wak redeceaedeahs 211

PC MNBOB 206i colts eevne chiens 03 ee pe R i cA ER EiTN. Aes oi Pohinlede ahs gael ESa 212

ee mene SETPLR ne er 2. yk wt ote kha ts a Weel -teded oded advent rikdess 213

Se NOTARIES See Ente neki SANISLE bd. Saah-ch Me Vek BL Dkh di idbcks ain CSGNG ecb ivcalesccsad'vesects 213

PE DPI SERN air). Ch io Dat tau NMA de UVR Wials Wines cb bins views dla nein we've e'ea eas 216

7 RMU, Sse ded eee isle: Less ees: aparece ed betta Vardi s a3 side s0ahtX 216

2A Sa IOC STB oa RR PR On ay ORG See ee ee ae 218

ge eA SEA A hee tec ches aa eR eats wind ah abide eloa oleate vhs obewiess cca hideebe 218

eS TAC USSG DOG IS A cos le Re et Mc We ge NON TUW ENON cls cecicb ees esdhwesmundece oat 223

ee no EIU TIA VY CTE Oe Ea siecatta Pat baibCeeludsa <UTu asia's ones sans ev'eleaeaeleaW eas 231

1 Submitted in partial fulfilment of the requirements for’ the Degree of Doctor

of Philosophy, in the faculty of Pure Science, Columbia University.

165

166 TORREY

INTRODUCTION.

Ir has been the primary object of this investigation to trace

as fully as possible the history of the mesoblast, and especially

of the ectomesoblast ' (often called ‘‘ mesenchyme’’) in Zha/as-

sema,” of which I have endeavored to determine not only the

origin, but also the fate of every constituent cell. In some ways

this form has proved extremely favorable for such a research,

since the cleavage-cavity is from the first large, the ectomeso-

blast abundant, and the ccelomesoblast very late in developing.

As has been indicated recently by Ray Lankester,* the study

of cell lineage has proved and will continue to prove an effi-

cient aid inthe solution of the mesoblast question. Not alone

in this problem, but in general, I believe, one of the principal

values of this method of study lies in the fact that it supplies

the firmest possible foundation for the investigation of all later

morphogenic processes, whether normal or experimentally

modified. If so much had not been taken for granted regard-

ing the cleavage stages, many embryological blunders might

have been avoided. But it is equally true that if many of the

earlier embryologists began their studies at too late a period in

the development, a number of the later students of cell-lineage

have stopped too soon and have failed to connect definitely the

various cell regions that they have so carefully described, with

1 Throughout the paper the term ‘‘ ectomesoblast’’ (Wilson, ’98) is used in

preference to the term ‘‘ larval mesenchyme’’ (which has been employed by the

majority of the students of cell-lineage), or the term ‘‘ peedomesoblast”’ (Eisig,

’98). I think this preference is warranted, first, by its origin in Annelids and

Molluscs from cells of the ectoblastic quartets, and second, by Meyer’s discovery

that a large part of this mesoblast persists in the adult in the form of circular

muscles, gut-muscles, etc. This is also in all probability the case in 7halassema.

The term ‘‘ ccelomesoblast’’ (Eisig) is employed to designate the mesoblast which

arises from the posterior member of the fourth quartet (4@) and produces the sec-

ondary body cavity (‘* entomesoblast ’’ of Wilson).

2 The only existing account of the development of this genus (with the exception

of a brief communication by Kowalevsky, ’72) is the one given by Conn in 1886.

This account covers the entire history, but, as might be expected in so early a paper,

the early stages are treated very superficially and many of his descriptions are radi-

cally wrong.

3 Lankester, E. Ray, ‘‘ Treatise on Zodlogy,” Vol. 2, Introduction.

EMBRYOLOGY OF THALASSEMA MELLITA 167

the organs of the adult or even of the larva. This is especially

true of the so-called “larval mesenchyme ”’ (ectomesoblast).

The cytogeny of a number of annelids and molluscs has shown

that the mesenchyme arises by the insinking or delamination of

ectomeres from either the second or third quartet, but never

from more than one. In Zzalassema, however, not only does

functional ‘“‘mesenchyme”’ arise from the same cells in the third

quartet as in Podarke (Treadwell, ’o1), but also from a number

of cells in the first quartet. Under the category of ectomeso-

blast I think may also be placed certain cells from the second

and first quartets, which appear to have completely lost their

function. These rudimentary cells sink into the segmentation-

cavity, and are finally ingested and completely absorbed by the

entoblast cells. It is a significant fact that these cells, with but

two exceptions, have a radial arrangement and these two excep-

tions are found where the bilaterality of the embryo is first fore-

shadowed, z. ¢., in the posterior arms of the pretrochal group

of cells forming the structure designated by cytogenists as the

“cross.’’ A very probable explanation of such cells seems to

be that they are vestigial structures, ancestrally reminiscent of

certain radial and probably mesenchymatous organs in the

ancestor of the annelids. All these facts tend to sustain the

view that the mesoblast had primitively a radial origin (Conklin,

97); and also that premitively the mesenchyme arose from all

three ectodermal quartets (Wilson, ’97).

One of the most interesting questions in regard to the meso-

blast, on which these observations bear, is whether we may, or

may not, regard it as a morphological unit. Possibly the in-

vestigation has not been carried far enough in 7halassema to

decide the question definitely for this form, but it is evident that

in origin, at least, and I think without doubt in fate also, we

are dealing with two distinct forms of mesoblast ; the one aris-

ing from the posterior member of the fourth quartet and pro-

ducing the secondary body-cavity, and the other by the insink-

ing of certain ectomeres and not only producing all the mesen-

chyme of the larva, but also contributing to the mesoblast of

the adult.

168 TORREY

Finally, I would direct especial attention to the complete re-

versions to spiral cleavage which occur with surprising fre-

quency. About nine per cent. of the eggs continue to divide

radially up to avery late period and, I believe, never develop

into trochophores. This seems to me an extraordinary case of

the persistence in ontogeny of a primitive phylogenetic stage.

In order to facilitate comparison I have made use of the

system of nomenclature adopted by Treadwell (’o1) (a slight

modification of that earlier employed by Wilson, ’92, Mead, ’g7,

and Conklin, ’97) in his paper on the “ Cytogeny of Podarke,”

where a full explanation will be found. In brief, the ‘four

macromeres’”’ are designated by the capital letters, A, B, C, D.

The micromeres are indicated by small letters. Each has a

coefficient, which indicates the generation; and a subscript,

which indicates its relation to the other cells of the same gener-

ation. The terms “ dexiotropic’”’ (clockwise) and “ leiotropic”’

(anti-clockwise) indicate the direction of the spiral cleavage.

The product of a spiral cleavage lying to the right, when viewed

from the anima! pole, is the dextral cell; that to the left, the

sinistral cell. This permits the use of the terms “right” and

‘“‘left’’ to designate the sides of the bilaterally symmetrical body. |

It is with pleasure that I acknowledge my great indebtedness

to Professor E. B. Wilson for advice and criticism during the

progress of this research. I also wish to express my thanks to

Professor H. V. Wilson, Director of the U. S. F. C. Laboratory

at Beaufort for the facilities for collecting and preserving the

material that he placed at my disposal.

Material, Methods. — The material for the following paper, was ob-

tained at Beaufort during the summers of Ig00 and 1go1. ‘The species

was first described in 1886 by Conn, who gave it the specific name

‘‘mellita’’ from the fact that, almost without exception, it is found

in empty sand-dollar tests. Unfortunately, with the facilities at

hand, the animals could not be raised beyond the trochophore stage.

This is, in fact, a natural chapter in the life history, for the meta-

morphosis into the adult takes place only after an almost stationary,

free-swimming larval stage of long duration. —

Artificial fertilization is easily effected, although some care must

be exercised to prevent polyspermy. After a little experience one

EMBRYOLOGY OF THALASSEMA MELLITA 169

has no difficulty in distinguishing the sexes by the difference in color

of the sexual products which show through the semi-transparent body-

wall. The eggs were preserved at intervals of 15 minutes during the

early cleavage stages and then every half hour until the trochophore

stage was reached. ‘The most satisfactory killing agent proved to be

picro-acetic (with 1 to 2 per cent. acetic). Kleinenberg’s picro-

sulphuric (dilute) was also of value, but Flemming’s fluid was quite

useless, except for the preservation of cilia, even for sections. After

consid-rable experimentation, the best stain for total mounts was

found to be that first described by Conklin (’97), ¢. e., a weak solu-

tion of Delafield’s hematoxylin slightly acidulated by a few drops

of Kleinenberg’s picro-sulphuric solution. In general, the method

given by Child (’00) was followed in staining and mounting the

eggs. All the essential points determined in optical sections have

been confirmed by actual sections. These latter were stained with

iron hzmatoxylin with a Bordeaux or Congo red counter stain. The

figures are all from camera drawings.

I. CELL LINEAGE TO GASTRULATION.

General Sketch.— The following is the first description of the

cleavage in the Armata, considered from the cell-lineage stand-

point, and, as is naturally to be expected, it conforms closely to

the determinate type that has been described by Wilson (’92),

Mead (97), Child (’00), Treadwell (01) and others to be the

case in a number of other annelids. The cleavage, however, is

equal and so closely resembles that of Podarke (Treadwell, ’01)

that the latter may be taken as a basis of comparison. Of other

representatives of this type the best known are Lefidonotus

(Mead, ’97), Hydroides (Wilson, ’91), Eupomatus (Hatschek,

’85), Sadella and Pomatoceros (von Drasche, ’84).

In accordance with the general rule, the first quartet of mi-

‘cromeres is formed at the third cleavage by a right-hand spiral

(dexiotropic) division of the four subequal ‘‘ macromeres.”

Then follow a second quartet by a left-handed (leiotropic) spiral

and a third quartet by a right-handed spiral cleavage. These

three quartets give rise to all of the ectoblast and also to all the

ectomesoblast. The fourth quartet arises leiotropically and the

1 Spengel’s (’79) figures indicate that the same is the case in Bonellia.

70 TORREY

fifth quartet, in turn, dexiotropically. The posterior member of

the fourth quartet (47) produces the ccelomesoblast, but the

other members of this quartet as well as the fifth quartet and

the macromeres give rise only to entoblast.

1. L002. Cals.

I will pass over the maturation and fertilization of the egg with

little comment, as Conn has described these phenomena in the living

egg and Griffin with great detail in sections. When the eggs are first

discharged from the segmental organs they are pressed out of shape

and, only after the entrance of the sperm, become spherical. The

small size of the eggs (about 70-80 » in diameter) adds considerable

difficulty to their study. During and atter fertilization what at first.

sight appear to be spinning activities take place at the surface of the

egg. Soon after the entrance of the sperm the egg membrane

(chorion) begins to draw away from the egg itself and soon is com-

pletely detached. Ifthe space that thus results between the mem-

brane and the egg is now examined with a high power, fine proto-

plasmic strands may be seen running from the one to the other.

These threads may vary from time to time in thickness and-constitu-

tion and often contain granules. ‘They remind one forcibly of the

pseudopodia of Gvomza. Ihave found them persisting during the

early cleavage stages. The polar bodies lie suspended in the space

between the egg and the membrane and are held at one place by

these protoplasmic threads as guy-ropes. I would explain the for-

mation of these threads by the fact that, when the membrane sepa-

rates from the egg, the protoplasm sticks to the corrugations on the

inner side of the membrane and, because of its viscid nature, is

drawn out intothreads. Similar phenomena have been described in

the egg of Petromyzon (Calberla, ’78). Conn recognized certain

striations in the space between the membrane and the egg, but did

not suggest their protoplasmic nature.

As has been described in many other forms, the first cleavage

begins at the upper pole and cuts in somewhat more rapidly

here than at the lower,’ resulting typically in the formation of

two equal blastomeres (Text-Fig. 1, A). Their nuclei imme-

diately move slightly toward the left in preparation for the sec-

1In Lepidonotus, however, where the yolk has a more uniform distribution, the

cleavage plane cuts at the same rate all the way around the egg (Mead, ’97).

EMBRYOLOGY OF THALASSEMA MELLITA 171

ond cleavage. At this time one of the polar bodies begins to

sink in between the blastomeres and later passes into the

cleavage space. At the second cleavage the spindles are not

parallel, but are so placed that, when the cleavage is completed

the & and PY quadrants meet at the lower pole, and the 4 and

C quadrants at the upper, forming two polar furrows which are

at right angles to each other (Text-Fig. 1, 4). They are, also,

typically equal in length, as might be expected in an egg with

scanty and evenly distributed yolk (Wilson, ’92, Conklin, ’97).

In Podarke the shorter furrow is always at the upper pole, but

in Thalassema we find every variation, even to its complete ob-

literation. As a rule the A and C blastomeres do not quite

touch at the upper pole, and through this space one of the

polar bodies has already slipped. All these four blastomeres

are exactly the same size and, although it is possible by means

of the polar furrow to distinguish the first cleavage plane from

the second (Conklin, ’97), there is no way of telling the anterior

macromere, 5, from the posterior, D (Treadwell, ’o1). As in

Podarke, the polar furrow remains constant until other means

of orientation appear. In TZhalassema it is nearly at right

angles to the future sagittal plane as in Avenicola (Child, 00).

The various quartets and the first and second cleavage planes

bear the same relation to the future axes of the adult as in

Amplutrite, Arenicola and Podarke. An adequate discussion

of this point is given by Treadwell (’o1).

The first quartet of micromeres' arise simultaneously and

are only slightly smaller than the ‘“‘ macromeres”’ (Text-Fig. 1,

Cand DP). At this stage there seems to be no tendency for one

quadrant to divide before the others. The small lenticular

cleavage space, which appeared as early as the two-cell stage, in-

creases rapidly in size as the development progresses. At the

transition from 8 to 16 cells the second quartet of micromeres

are formed by an equal leiotropic division of the macromeres

and the primary trochoblasts by a somewhat unequal leiotropic

1The cleavages take place at intervals of about fifteen minutes, but, as in so

many other cases, are greatly accelerated by heat and retarded by cold. In the liv-

ing egg it is well-nigh impossible to follow the cleavages very far on account of the

great flattening out of the blastomeres during the resting periods.

172 TORREY

TEXT-FIGURE 1.

A, 2-cell stage from above; &, 4-cell stage from above, Ag., polar globules ;

C, 8-cell stage from above; YL, 8-cell stage from the side; , 16, forming 24 cells;

f, 24, forming 32 cells, division of second quartet and primary trochoblasts. The

boundaries of the four quadrants, JY, posterior; A and C, lateral; and #4, an-

terior; are indicated by heavy lines.

EMBRYOLOGY OF THALASSEMA MELLITA 173

174 TORREY

division of the first quartet (Text-Fig. 1, £). These four cells

divide twice, as in /Podarke, and form the primary protroch.

The first somatoblast is not indicated by any difference in size

at this stage. The 24-cell stage (Text-Fig. 1, /) is brought

about by the formation of the intergirdle cells and the third

quartet of micromeres by dexiotropic cleavages after which the

egg enters upon a resting period. The former divisions are

slightly earlier than the latter and mark the beginning of an ac-

celeration of divisions in the first quartet. Evidently here the

presence of yolk has nothing to do with the rapidity of cleavages,

as has been maintained by Kofoid (’95), but their rate is corre-

lated with the large size and early differentiation of the przetro-

chal region (Lillie, ’95; Conklin, ’98). As in Podarke, the

cells of the third quartet are slightly smaller than those of the

second.

The 32-cell stage (Text-Fig. 2, A) is attained by the nearly

simultaneous dexiotropic and equal division of the four cells of

the second quartet and the four primary trochoblasts (Text-

Fig. 2, DY). The arrangement of the blastomeres conforms now

exactly to what one would expect in the ideal ovum, as is also

the case in Podarke and Lepidonotus, namely :

First (quantet. 5ch oe wee esc eres e nee ce can ecoee Meese eke 16 cells,

Second \qtiartet. cc caaacsessac ceases see t eos ets cn ee eneee mae ope

“Ehitd) quantet, J ivJeseoteeveeeoeeonee coat en case ome ae ee eee Ae

MAcrOmenes m.c. 5 tare davies oe nicks concise alc ccreonodoat tes eaneaeer A

32) 6<

The cells of the fourth quartet next arise leiotropically and

practically simultaneously (Text-Fig 2, d and #4). There is

nothing in size (Text-Fig. 2, C) or time of formation to dis-

tinguish the second somatoblast or J7 cell (472) from the others.’

During these cleavages there has been a steady shifting to the

right of the upper part of the embryo on the lower (Text-Fig.

2, 4), so that the polar furrows are now almost parallel instead

of at right angles (Text-Fig. 2, C). Immediately after the

1Jn some forms the J7/ cell arises still earlier (in Crepidudla at the 25-cell stage),

but its formation may also be greatly delayed as in /schnochiton (Heath, ’99),

where it does not arise until the 72-cell stage, and then after the other three mem-

bers of the quartet have been budded off.

EMBRYOLOGY OF THALASSEMA MELLITA 175

formation of the fourth quartet, mitotic figures appear in the

four cells at the upper pole (1@,,,, etc.) and the apical rosette

is budded off leiotropically (Text-Fig. 2, £). These cells lie

entirely on the surface at first and are much larger than in

Podarke. Although in later stages they occupy a smaller space

at the surface, they never sink in to the extent that they do in

Podarke and Lepidonotus. At this stage two of the polar bodies

are very commonly seen imbedded in the stem-cells of the

cross (Pl. I, Fig. 2) or in the rosette, but they interfere in no

way with the division of these cells. This sinking in of the polar

bodies is of very general occurrence in annelids and molluscs

(Treadwell, ’01).

The next divisions take place in the third quartet. They are

leiotropic and somewhat unequal (Pl. I, Fig. 8). From the

lower cells in the a, c and d quadrants will later arise part of

the mesenchyme. The prototrochal cells divide equally and

leiotropically and at the same time the intergirdle cells divide in

the same direction and unequally (Pl. I, Fig. 1). The smaller

moieties lie in the spaces between the four groups of cells which

constitute the primary prototroch and later form a part of the

secondary prototroch as in Podarke (Pl. 1, Fig. 6). The embryo

now consists of fifty-six cells and is perfectly radially symmetri-

car (PI: I, Fig. 2).

This stage marks the end of the purely radial cleavages, as in

Podarke, and from now on bilateral or morphogenic cleavages

take place in increasing numbers. The first of these initiates

the formation of the cross. The posterior stem cells (1d,., 5

and Ic, 2) divide bilaterally, while the anterior divide spirally

and leiotropically (PI. I, Figs. 2 and 3). This cleavage, however,

is subject to a number of variations as will be indicated later

(see p. 187). From now on in the pretrochal region she posterior

guadrants (c and @) always divide before the anterior, whereas in

Podarke the reverse seems to be the case. As Child (’00) has

indicated there are in annelids two types in regard to the forma-

tion of the cross. In Nerezs, Polymnia, Spio, Aricia, Amphitrite,

Clymenella, Sternaspis and Arenicola the spindles lie meridion-

ally, whereas in Podarke, Lepidonotus and Chetopterus spirally

176 TORREY:

TEXT—-FIGURE 2.

A, 32, forming 36 cells, formation of the fourth quartet; 4, 36-cell stage from

the side, 4a or J7/, ccelomesoblast cell; C, same stage from lower pole; LD, 24,

forming 32 cells from the upper pole; Z, 36, forming 40 cells, formation of apical

rosette.

178 TORREY

and leiotropically, so much so in the last-named annelid that

no cross is formed. TZhalassema seems to be intermediate; the

posterior arms conforming to the first type, and the anterior to

the second. In this division, too, as Treadwell (’o1) has pointed

out, we have a clear foreshadowing of the bilaterality of the

embryo: for the posterior cells divide typically equally, whereas

the anterior cells bud off smaller cells toward the rosette. This

difference is quite common in annelids, occurring as it does in

Nereis, Amphitrite, Clymenella, Arenicola and Podarke. At the

same time with the formation of the cross the lower sinistral

cells (2a,, etc.) in the second quartet divide unequally (PI. I,

Figs. 10 and 11). Inthe @, 6 and c quadrant the smaller cell

is budded off upward toward the prototroch (Pl. I, Fig. 10),

but in the d quadrant downward and lies over the J/ cell (PI.

I, Fig. 11). An exactly similar division occurs in Podarke ;

and, as there, this cell will be designated 1, ,. Treadwell (99,

’o1) in his discussion of cell-homologies, calls attention to the

fact that this cell has the same origin in all the forms of an-

nelids and molluscs that have been studied. This, perhaps,

cannot be said in regard to its fate, for in Amphitrite and Podarke

it forms a part of the proctodzal wall, but in 7halassema, in all

probability, that of the stomodzum. The posterior quadrant

is now very effectively marked out by the cross and this cell.

A cross-section of this stage (Text-Fig. 10, A) shows a peculiar

arrangement of the blastomeres. The prototrochal cells are

entirely superficial and lie over the second quartet cells, which

in turn abut against the cross and intergirdle cells. The lower

members’ of the third quartet, too, extend inwards and upwards

for a considerable distance. It will be noticed in the following

table that the 64-cell stage in 7alassema does not quite con-

form to the ideal, as it does in Lepidonotus and Podarke. This

is due to the precocious formation of the cross and the failure

of the upper dextral cells in the second quartet to divide.

Up to this stage in all annelids with equal cleavage the ar-

rangement of the blastomeres is practically identical. As a

matter of convenience the later divisions of each quartet will be

described separately.

EMBRYOLOGY OF THALASSEMA MELLITA 179

Thalassema. Podarke.

( RP ee Sr aap schad cae alan cate wesnbestass 4 4

; APIGOR PS Coie dude sue vata tsadoascdeascss 8 4

en Mase oes 2s se po mhovd wenhee anew’ 8 8

Eee BERN ase Fe een cadh iwasad's 16 16

36 32

SAREE IEEE «oa 9 OES ete tase nsatccwaav bh scnhinuseravbobds cioncs 12 16

PeRmPERTCRMSTH EE ope pa age ere ee aoe h aeiha ana snk dig din own sere od aye’ 8 8

CER CRUE ee aa woes Shen cdc tovanideaeekasndesnsieqedee 4 4

PSI ite ret UUs ccen the vewaiet caxcedues 4 4

28 32

64 4

2. Further Divisions of the Quartets.

a. First Quartet.— From the first quartet subsequently

arises a considerable part of the ectomesoblast, but, as it is not

formed until after gastrulation, a description of the process is

reserved for another section. The following section deals largely

with the further divisions and fate of the cross and intergirdle

cells, which are of interest from a comparative standpoint.

The Intergirdle Cells. — After the completion of the 64-cell

stage, the first division in the first quartet is an extremely un-

equal and dexiotropic one of the intergirdle cells in the a, 6

and ¢ quadrants (1@,,,, etc.). Three minute and entirely

superficial cells (1a, ;.,, etc.) with dark staining nuclei are

budded off toward the prototroch (Pl. I, Fig. 4). As will be

shown later, these cells are rudimentary and in the end completely

disappear. In the @ quadrant, on the other hand, the corre-

sponding division is nearly equal, with the spindle inclined very

slightly dexiotropically (Pl. I, Fig. 4). The lower cell (1d

1.2.1.2.) soon divides bilaterally (Pl. I, Figs. 6 and 7) and gives

rise to two cells, which lead the subsequent backward migra-

tion through the dorsal gap in the prototroch and into the

post-trochal region. Although these cells are not ‘‘ homoblas-

tic’’ with, yet they appear to be ‘“‘equivalent’’’* to the cells

1 These terms have been recently suggested by E. B. Wilson (see Sczence, April

4, 1902.) ‘* For practical purposes cells of like prospective value, giving rise to

homologous structures, may, irrespective of their origin, be called eguzvalent; those

of like ontogenetic origin and position, may, irrespective of their fate, be called

homoblastic ; but neither equivalent or homoblastic cells are necessarily homologous.’’

180 TORREY

which lead the van in Amphitrite, Arenicola and Podarke. I

have decided, accordingly, to follow Mead’s (’97) nomenclature

and designate them as /4 and 4. The upper cell (1¢,.,;,)

divides several times and its progeny also finally passes down-

ward and through the dorsal gap. By a dexiotropic cleavage

the intergirdle-cell, 1¢,,.'.. (the “7” of Mead): gives tise to a

rudimentary cell (Pl. I], Fig. 14). The subsequent fate of the

former I have not definitely established, but it probably takes

part in the post-trochal migration. The only further divisions

of interest in the a, 4 and c intergirdle regions are those of the

cells concerned in the formation of the prototroch (1a... ,

etc., see Pl. Iy*Pie.06);. The cells: tang. ead 10557 dmide

dexiotropically and nearly equally. The lower products (1a

1.2059 ANd. 1Cy'5:5 9.) later forma, part: of the prototroch= ike

cell 14,5. divides in the same direction, but buds off a rudi-

mentary cell (14,..,). The larger cell (14, 4 ,). finally en-

ters the prototroch as in the other quadrants (Pl. I, Fig. 7).

The Cross. — The distal cell in each of the posterior arms of

the cross buds off a very minute cell upward and toward the

median dorsal line (Pl. I, Fig. 4). (Exactly similar cells are

formed in Podarke.) They later degenerate completely. The

subsequent divisions in the posterior arms of the cross are all

directed toward the median dorsal line, so that, finally, the arms

come in contact along this line and thereby shove the adjacent

intergirdle cells through the dorsal gap in the prototroch (Pl. I,

Figs. 5,6 and 7). At the 64-cell stage each of the anterior

arms of the cross consisted of two cells (Pl. I, Fig. 3). Equal,

radial divisions of the distal or ‘“‘stem”’ cells next take place

(Pl. I, Fig. 4). By a series of bilateral divisions each arm be-

comes split throughout its entire extent (Pl. I, Figs. 6 and 7).

A continuation of the lateral spreading of the arms, initiated by

these cleavages, results in the formation from the descendants of

the proximal cross cells of almost the entire upper part of the

umbrella of the trochophore. The lower part of the prae-trochal

region arises from an alternation of the intergirdle and distal

cross cells, except’in the dorsal region, which is almost wholly

occupied by the cross cells. A detailed description of all these

EMBRYOLOGY OF THALASSEMA MELLITA 181

later cleavages has been omitted, as they are not of general in-

terest. They may, however, be followed in the figures (PI. I,

Figs. 5, 6, 7). The rosette cells divide once certainly, leio-

tropically in the a, 6 and c quadrants and bilaterally in the d

(Pl. I, Figs. 6 and 7). Some of them have been observed to

divide again. Al of these divisions take place after the cells have

developed cilia. From the rosette cells, I think, is developed

the entire apical plate.

6b. Second Quartet. — The second quartet claims our interest

from the fact that the posterior member (2d) has been found to

produce in anumber of annelids and molluscs, almost the entire

post-trochal ectoderm and consequently that of the trunk of the

adult. In the unequal types of cleavage this protoblast is often

the largest cell in the egg (Vereis, Amphitrite, Arenicola, etc.).

Its origin and subsequent history were first accurately deter-

_mined by Wilson (’92) in JVerets, who designated it by the letter

X. Treadwell (’01) has recently discovered that in an annelid

with ‘“‘equal” cleavage (Podarke), although 2d is no larger

than the other three members of the quartet, yet it divides more

rapidly and its progeny increase in number and size to such an

extent as to give rise to a considerable part of the post-trochal

ectoderm and to the “ growing point.’”’ As will be seen later

the same is still more markedly the case in 7halassema. The

cell may accordingly be said to be homoblastic and, to a large

extent, equivalent in both types of cleavage. I will first describe

its divisions, following Treadwell’s nomenclature.

A-Group.— As stated above, at the 64-cell stage, the sinis-

tral cell in the @ quadrant of the second quartet divides off a

small cell downward and over the protoblast of the ccelomeso-

bast -{4@) (PL I, Fig. 11). The dextral cell next. divides

somewhat unequally (Pl. I, Fig. 12). The upper smaller prod-

uct of this division is X, and the lower X,. There follows a

leiotropic division of X,, (Pl. II, Fig. 17). The upper and

somewhat smaller cell corresponds to the entirely degenerate

cells divided off earlier in the other quadrants (2a, ,, etc.)

X,.1,2 very soon divides again and in the same direction (PI. II,

Figs. 17 and 18). 4, has increased, in the meantime, con-

182 TORREY

siderably in size. X, and X, next divide at about the same time,

unequally and dexiotropically (Pl. I], 18 and 1g). The smaller

product lies nearer the prototroch in each case. It is a signifi-

cant fact that the divisions in this quadrant have considerably out-

stripped those in the other quadrants, but are almost identical

with the ones that will occur in them later. This is the first in-

dication that the subsequent posterior growth will be due to the

multiplication and increase in size of the cells of this region.

The radial symmetry of the earlier stages, on the other hand,

persists very tenaciously in this form as in all annelids with equal

cleavage.. | The icell X,, enlarges somewhat (PIV ll, Fieazo),

but not nearly so much as in Podarke. ‘The group now has

assumed the shape of an open fan and retains it to a late

period (Text-Fig; 3,°C and 2). The cells Xo and AX, 3 divide

at» the same time dexiotropically (Pll, Fies. 20¢ande2u):

Inothe \divisionwof 24 4)5,5° the: spindle” lies, toward-2i6,p at Ea

II, Fig. 20, shows result of division). The upper prod-

uct ‘of this: division, XG 4/5), later. increases ‘consideralsly— im

size and becomes by far the largest cell in the group (PI. II,

Fig: 24). X, >, buds off toward the prototrochawenismall

cell (X44 oa, Pls 1kies.420 -and)21) which very sconrsinies

into the cleavage-cavity. By this time gastrulation has begun,

accordingly the subsequent fate of these cells will be described

in a following section.

a,b and c quadrants. — The cleavages in the other three

quadrants may be passed over very briefly. The small cells

budded off toward the prototroch (2a,, ,, etc., Pl. II, Fig. 15), I

have never seen divide again, and I am sure that they later de-

generate and sink into the cleavage-cavity. Because of the

peculiar shingle-like arrangement of the post-trochal blasto-

meres, the cells budded off upwards from the second quartet lie

almost entirely under the primary prototroch (Pl. II, Fig. 13;

Text-Fig. 10, A). In the later stages, however, in conse-

quence of the thinning and stretching out of the body wall, this

condition to a large extent disappears (Text-Fig. 10, C). The

dextral cell in each of these quadrants (2a, etc.) now divides

nearly equally and leiotropically (Pl. II, Figs. 16 and 17).

EMBRYOLOGY OF THALASSEMA MELLITA 183

Soon after, the lower sinistral cell (2@,,,, etc.) buds off, with the

spindle lying in the same direction, a small cell (2a, 5, etc.)

toward the fourth quartet (PI. II, Figs. 16 and 18). Accord-

ingly, at this stage {about 80 cells) there are five cells in each

quadrant with exactly the same arrangement, and this radial

symmetry is retained, almost perfectly, until the beginning of

gastrulation. The divisions of the sinistral cells may be fol-

lowed in the figures (PI. II, Figs. 18, 19, 20, 21). The upper

dextral cell in each quadrant (2a,,,, etc.) soon divides dexio-

tropically and is followed after a time by the lower dextral

(2a, 5, etc.) in the same direction (Pl. II, Figs. 18 and 21). The

three upper cells in each quadrant (24, , 1, 2@,1,2, 2@,2,2) later

become ciliated and forma part of the secondary prototroch (PI.

II, Fig. 24). The lower cells in the a and ¢ quadrants (2a, » »,

2¢, 22) give rise to a part of the lateral post-trochal ectoderm

and in the 4 quadrant (20, , 5) toa part of the stomodeum. The

origin and fate of the ‘‘ cesophagoblasts’”’ (Eisig, ’98) will be

described in the next section.

c. Tfird Quartet.— Especial interest attaches to the third

quartet in 7halassema, since from it arises the greater part of

the functional ectomesoblast. At the 64-cell stage each member

of the third quartet had divided once leiotropically and un-

equally (PI. I, Figs. 10 and 11). The lower larger cell (3a,,

etc.) next divides dexiotropically and unequally in each quad-

rant (PI. II, Figs. 13, 16 and 17). The smaller product of this

division is dextral in the a, 6 and d@ quadrants, but in the c

quadrant is sinistral. Accordingly, in the ¢ and d@ quadrants

the larger cells lie on each side of 4d and the smaller cells lat-

erally (Pl. II, Fig. 13). These, as in Podarke, are the first bi-

lateral divisions in the post-trochal region. The two larger

cells, 3c, , and 3d, , show a marked tendency to sink in (Pl. II,

Fig. 18), but come to the surface to bud off two more small

cells (Pl. II, Figs. 19 and 20). When the embryo consists of

about 130 cells they are seen lying in the cleavage-cavity en-

tirely below the surface (Pl. II, Fig. 21). Their cell-lineage ac-

cordingly is 3c, , 5, and 3d¢,,..,. The remarkable similarity in

the origin of this part of the ectomesoblast with that of Podarke

is discussed beyond.

184 TORREY

The rapidity with which the divisions have taken place in

these cells illustrates Lillie’s ('95) principle that the rate of the

cleavages in the protoblast of an organ is directly correlated

with the time that the organ becomes functional. The cell

3a, after two divisions, also gives rise to mesenchyme. ‘ The

first division has already been described. In the second the

spindle first lies meridionally in both the @ and @ quadrants (PI.

II, Fig. 18), as in Podarke but later rotates to a dexiotropic po-

sition. The ectomesoblast cell, 3a, 5, divides equally as it sinks

in (Pl. II, Figs. 22 and 23). For a description of the later his-

tory of all these cells the reader is referred to the section deal-

ing with the mesoblast. The corresponding cell in the 6 quad-

rant plays a prominent 7do/e in the formation of the cesophagus.

The upper sinistral cells (3¢,, etc.), have all been seen to divide

dexiotropically (Pl. II, Fig. 18).

ad. 4th and 5th Quartets.—The posterior member of the

fourth quartet (4d) is first to divide (Pl. II, Figs. 14 and 19).

This is the first true bilateral cleavage in the egg and does not

take place until the embryo consists of over a hundred cells.

The right product of this division is slightly larger than the left.

Soon after their formation the nuclei of the two cells (J/, J7)

become shoved up near the surface by the pressure of the in-

vaginating entomeres (PI. II, Fig. 20). From them are ulti-

mately formed the right and left ccelomesoblast bands. They

sink in immediately after the entoblast-plate and bud off two

small cells toward the blastopore (Pl. II, Figs. 23 and 24;

Text-Fig. 8, &). The other members of the quartet have al-

most invaginated (PI. H, Fig. 18), but return to the surface to

divide (PI. II, Fig. 21). Child (01) explains such a return by

the turgor of the cells and their adhesion to the connecting cells

of the surface layer. Just before sinking in, that part of the cell

at the surface becomes swollen and is connected with a nucle-

ated swollen part within the cleavage cavity by a narrow bridge

(Pl. II, Fig. 22). The cells are thus dumb-bell-shaped. They

later form a part of the entoblast.

The fifth quartet is formed when the embryo consists of about

86 cells (Pl. II, Figs. 17 and 18). The cells are somewhat

EMBRYOLOGY OF THALASSEMA MELLITA 185

smaller than the macromeres and, as usual, are all entomeres.

The entoblast-plate, therefore, consists of 11 cells, namely, the

four macromeres, the fifth quartet, and the anterior and lateral

members of the fourth quartet (Text-Fig. 4, A). Gastrulation

begins when the embryo contains about 150 cells.

3. SPECIAL CONSIDERATIONS.

a. The Prototroch.—The primary prototroch in 7halassema

agrees in origin, cell by cell, with that of Amphitrite, Arenicola,

Podarke and several other annelids ; each of the four primary

trochoblasts divides twice, the remaining cells forming a more

or less complete girdle of 16 cells about the embryo. The

completed prototroch, however, differs from that of Amphitrite

and Arenicola and agrees with that of Podarke, in that, in three

quadrants an intergirdle cell is also incorporated in it. In

Thalassema, again, the second quartet in each of the a, 6 and c

quadrants contributes three prototrochal cells as in Amphitrite

and Arenicola, whereas in Podarke only two are contributed.

The primary prototroch is completely formed at the 56-cell

stage (Pl. I, Fig. 9). The 16 cells soon begin to swell and

elongate to such an extent that at the 64-cell stage the four

groups come in contact and form a complete and continuous

band around the embryo (Pl. I, Fig. 11). There is, accord-

ingly, no dorsal gap at this stage, but it subsequently arises by

the actual shoving apart of the cells at the juncture of the c and

‘ @ groups at the time of the migration of cells from the first

quartet. This formation of an unbroken ring by the primary

prototrochal cells is made possible by their superficial position

(Text-Fig. 10, A). Inthe great majority of annelids, where the

prototroch has been accurately determined, the four groups are

wedged apart by the dextral cells of the second quartet. An

apparent exception has been described for Hydrotdes and Poly-

gordius (Wilson, ’91), where the protrochal protoblasts divide

only once and form a complete band of 8 cells around the

embryo ; and also in WVerezs (Wilson, ’92), where the proto-

blasts divide twice, but four of the resulting cells are shoved out

and the complete prototroch consists, accordingly, of a ring of

186 TORREY

12 cells. Child (’00) ascribes the flattening and lengthening of

the prototroch cells in Avenicola to their being pushed down

posteriorly by the praetrochal divisions. This is, no doubt, in

a measure true in 7halassema.

The prototroch of the trochophore is completed (Text-Fig.

3, £) by the addition of three more cells from the first quartet

(PL. I, Figs. 6,and 7) and nine from the*second' (Plo i Figs 24):

As has already been shown, the three cells from the first quartet

arise from two divisions of the a, 6 and ¢ intergirdle cells (1a

120) IO p50) 16,929) | These samen cells valsoentersrae

prototroch in Podarke. In Lschnochiton (Heath, 99) both prod-

ucts of the last division enter the prototroch. It is interesting

to note that the dextral cell, which is the smaller in /chuo-

chiton, is entirely rudimentary inthe 4 quadrant in 7halassema,

and also in Amp/itrite. Mead (’98) has called attention to the

interest in the intergirdle cell that has subsequently been found

to enter the prototroch in Podarke, and ‘‘ recommends the in-

vestigation of its destiny . . . in Annelids as a fruitful problem

in cell-lineage.”’

The cells which later enter the prototroch from the second

quartet are the same as in Amp/utrite, Clymenella and Arenicola

(244.4; 24.12) 2@o4, ete) In Poderke theruppercellsmer

these three groups (22; 14, 20.415 24.4.4 ) "ate smallmandsar

said to be pushed later entirely out of the prototrochal ring.

Although in 7Thalassema this cell is smaller than the other

two, there is no doubt that it here contributes to the pro-

totroch. All of these cells are added to the prototroch and

become ciliated very late in the development, as is also the

case in Podarke.

To sum up: The complete prototroch in Thalassema consists

of 28 cells as against the usual number, 25; the primary proto-

troch ts “completed” by four cells from each of the ab and c

guadrants, of which one ts contributed from the first quartet and

three from the second.’

1Conn (’86) manifestly influenced by Hatschek’s earlier descriptions, has erro-

neously described the prototroch in 7a/assema as consisting of a prze-oral and post-

oral row of ‘‘high prismatic cells.”’ The yellow color of the prototroch cells in

EMBRYOLOGY OF THALASSEMA MELLITA 187

It may not be out of place to direct attention once more to

the striking similarities in the formation of the prototroch in the

larve of annelids and molluscs. So detailed and precise are

these resemblances that the homology of this highly characteris-

tic larval organ seems to be quite as complete as is that of any

adult structure. Mead (’98) has stated this conclusion con-

cisely in the following sentence, taken from a Wood’s Holl lec-

tere, “. ~ . The component cells of the prototroch are as

homologous in the various types studied in the same sense as

are the component bones in the skeleton of the vertebrate limb.”’

With this conclusion the cytogeny of the prototroch in 7ha/as-

sema falls in line. Judging by what we know of the variations

that the vertebrate limb may undergo, Mead’s comparison is

strengthened rather than weakened, I think, by the fact that in

some cases cells are added to, and in other cases what seem

typical cells are entirely absent from the prototroch.

Cilia first appear with great regularity at four and one half

hours after fertilization and simultaneously on the prototroch and

rosette (Text-Fig. 3, d). Those on the former constitute a

complete band and are first short and delicate but gradually in-

crease in size and strength. On the rosette, however, they grow

very rapidly and soon are more than half as long as the embryo

itself. The cilia do not arise until about an hour after the forma-

tion of the primary prototroch and the rosette, but zzmediately

the after differentiation of the cross. Up tothis time the embryo

is entirely separated from the egg membrane, just as in Cerebra-

tulus (C. B. Wilson, ’00), but by the practically bilateral divisions

of protoblasts of the cross a very marked prominence arises at the

center of the upper hemisphere, as in Verezs. The rosette and

primary prototroch, accordingly, become pressed against the

egg membrane and thus permit its being punctured by the

the older stages of Avenicola is ascribed by Child (’00) to the presence of yellow

granules. In 7halassema, however, this color seems to be due to the fact that the

protoplasm of these cells holds the picric stain with tenacity. The prototroch,

wide at first, becomes narrower as the development proceeds and in the completely

differentiated trochophore consists of three rows of greatly elongated celis. The

first row consists of I1 cells, the second of 11 cells and the third (incomplete in the

dorsal region) of 6 cells.

188 TORREY

TEXT-FIGURE 3.

A, Somewhat diagrammatic sketch of a four and one-half-hour living embryo

to show the ciliation ; af, apical flagellee ; #, egg membrane ; Z”, prototrochal cilia.

B, view showing the arrangement of the prototrochal cells; 47, prototroch; 07,

blastopore. ,

Variations in cleavage. C, view from upper pole of an embryo of about 72 cells

showing the normal type of cleavage; D, same stage in another embryo showing a

reversion to a purely radial type of cleavage; £, an embryo in which the cleavage

is almost purely dz/atera/. In each the cross is bounded by heavy lines.

189

EMBRYOLOGY OF THALASSEMA MELLITA

Fic. 3.

190 TORREY

cilia. The prominence that is formed at this time persists un-

til the time of gastrulation, when the embryo becomes spher-

ical again.

At first the cilia on the prototroch are uniform in size, but,

during the differentiation of the trochophore, there appear two

bands of longer cilia — one at the upper edge which beat actively,

and a narrower one on the lower edge which hang down and

move slowly and indefinitely (Text-Fig. 8, 4d). Between these

two rows the shorter cilia’ are retained. The long flagella,

borne entirely by the rosette, are about 20 in number and when

the embryo is actively swimming are carried stretched out in

front, and bunched closely together, quite as in a pilidium larva.

When the animal is at rest the flagella wave about slowly. In

the trochophore of about twenty-two hours they are replaced

by very short inactive cilia (Text-Fig. 8, 4d). These long apical

flagella occur frequently in annelids and lamellibranchs and per-

haps may be regarded as a primitive feature. They have been

described in Mucula, Yoldia (Drew,’99) and Dreissensia (Meisen-

heimer, ’o1) and in Lupomatus, Nereis and Amphitrite.

b. Variations in Cleavage. — Of great interest in the cytogeny

of Thalassema are certain variations in cleavage which occur

with surprising frequency. As has already been indicated, the

bilaterality of the trochophore is normally first foreshadowed

by the formation of the cross, the posterior protoblasts dividing

equally and bilaterally, while the anterior divide unequally and

spirally —the smaller product lying next to the rosette (PI. I,

Fig. 3). The normal bilateral cleavage in the posterior cells is

caused by a slight reversal in the direction of the spindle in the

@ quadrant which lies leiotropically (Pl. I, Fig. 2) instead of

dexiotropically, as inthe other quadrants. However, ina certain

number of embryos this bilateral division does not take place

and we find a complete reversal to a radial type (Text-Fig. 3, D).

Furthermore, the posterior cells divide unequally exactly like

the anterior. The intergirdle cells, too, bud off rudimentary

1Conn (’86) thought that the broad band entirely disappeared and was replaced

by a single row of pree-oral and post-oral cilia. A careful examination of living and

preserved material, however, has failed to show any evidence that this is the case.

EMBRYOLOGY OF THALASSEMA MELLITA 191

cells in every quadrant (Text-Fig. 3, D) instead of only in the

anterior and lateral, as in the normal type (Text-Fig. 3, C). In

the next division of the cross the stem cells normally divide

equally in the anterior, but extremely unequally in the posterior

arms. Yet, here again, in the radial type we have an equal and

strongly marked leiotropic division in every arm (Text-Fig. 3, D).

In this type, too, we have a retention of radial division of the

post-trochal region. No X,. cell is formed and the second

division of the third quartet is exactly alike in every quadrant.

_ Accordingly, at 72 cells we find a complete reversal to radial

cleavage. I have been able to follow this radial type to over

130 cells and, although certain bilateral features, in varying

degree, creep in, the great majority of the divisions are purely

radial. There is, also, strong reason for believing that this type

never develops into an adult ; for I found a few gastrula stages

in which no X group, no M/ cells, no larval mesenchyme cells

from the third quartet and no large anterior cesophagoblast

(26, ,.) could be distinguished. It is significant to note, how-

ever, that certain cells (mesenchymatous) were sinking in from

the first quartet.

These two types, the purely radial (Text-Fig. 3, D) and the

normal bilateral (Text-Fig. 3, C), are connected by numerous

transitions. The X,, cell may be formed in embryos where the

pretrochal region continues radial and the second division of

the third quartet is also radial, or bilaterality may be alone ex-

pressed by the division of the posterior intergirdle cell.

There is another distinct, but very rare, type which seems to

be a step toward a purely bilateral cleavage (Text-Fig. 3, £).

In this case the cross is formed by equal and bilateral divisions

in every quadrant, the rudimentary cells are formed as usual at

the second cleavage in the posterior arms of the cross and the

cells next to the rosette all divide toward the median line. The

second division of the anterior and posterior intergirdle cells is

nearly equal, but the rudimentary cells are budded off as usual

in the lateral.

Treadwell has studied a few (only three cases) similar varia-

tions in Podarke. He calls attention to the fact that here “the

192 TORREY

reversion is always to the radial from the bilateral (from the

type of the posterior to that of the anterior arms of the cross)

and not in the opposite direction.”

In Zhalassema, however, as we have seen, the step (hardly here

a reversion) may be from the type of the anterior to that of the

posterior. It seems reasonable to suppose that the radial types

are cases in which the primitive radial cleavage has been re-

tained and which have not been affected by the “reflection” of

the bilateral character of the trochophore. That sucha reflec-

tion has really taken place (Wilson, ’92; Conklin, ’97; Tread-

well, ’o1) and that the radial and bilateral types of cleavage are

distinct in origin seems to be clearly indicated by the retention

in some cases of the purely radial (for a fuller discussion see

beyond). An examination of a hundred embryos shows that

89 conform to the normal type, 9 to the radial, and 2 to the

bilateral.

c. Equal and Unequal Cleavage.— As a result of his investi-

gation of the development of Unio, Lillie (95) came to the con-

clusion that ‘the relative size of the cells in early cleavages is

adapted to the size and time of development of the larval organs.

Using this idea as a working basis, Treadwell (’99, ’01) has

given, recently, an interesting discussion of the relations of

equal to unequal cleavage. The conclusions to which a study

of the cytogeny of Podarke l\ed him, are fully sustained by that

of Zhalassema. We find indications of differentiation appearing

just as early and in exactly the same way in both. Indeed,

this almost identical cleavage in these two forms and also in all

other representatives of the so-called ‘‘equal”’ type calls for

more than a passing notice. On the one hand it seems evident

that such widely separated forms as Hydroides, Lepidonotus,

Podarke and Thalassema have a practically identical equal

cleavage because of their similarities in the trochophore stage.

Again, the trochophore stages are similar because all are

adapted to a free-swimming life of considerable duration. Such

a condition involves a retardation of the trunk-forming region

and hence the D blastomere is the same size as the others.

Yet it does call for an equatorial prototroch and a highly de-

EMBRYOLOGY OF THALASSEMA MELLITA 193

veloped prztrochal region in every case, and hence the blasto-

meres at the 8-cell stage are subequal in size. The above

agrees essentially with the explanations that have been given

by Lillie (95), Conklin (’97), Treadwell (’o1) and others and

without doubt the principles of precocious segregation of forma-

tive matter, is an important factor in determining inequality or

equality in cleavage.

Nevertheless, the cleavage of 7halassema seems to show that

another and possibly more fundamental factor must be taken

into consideration, and that is the tenacity with which the primi-

tive radial cleavage and symmetry of the ancestral prototype of

the annelids has persisted. In 7halassema and in Podarke the

bilaterality of the adult is not expressed early in the ontogeny

by bilateral cleavages, as in many annelids with unequal cleavage,

but is first indicated by modifications in the size relations of

the radial cleavages, either directly as a result of a cleavage or

by a subsequent increase in size of certain cells or regions. A

good example of the first is the fact that in the second division of

the third quartet the larger products of both the c and d quad-

rants lie on each side of the mid-dorsal line (PI. II, Fig. 13).

Of the second, that the anterior cesophagoblast (24, . ;.5), shortly

after gastrulation is completed, is the largest cell in the embryo

(Pl. II, Figs. 23 and 24; Text-Fig. 4, C); yet, up to the begin-

ning of gastrulation this cell remained of equal size with the

corresponding cells in the a and c quadrants. The last point,

z. é., the foreshadowing of the bilaterality of the adult by a rapid

increase in size of certain regions, is clearly illustrated in the

development of the X group (PI. II, Figs. 15, 17 to 24; Text-

Fig. 4, C and DY). The protoblast of this group, when first

formed, is not larger than the other members of the second

quartet, nor does it divide much more rapidly than they, until

the beginning of gastrulation. At this point in the ontogeny,

the whole group increases rapidly in size, not only by cell di-

visions, but by the growth of the cells themselves, and in the

-end forms almost as much of the post-trochal ectoderm (Text-

Fig. 5, /) as does the great “‘somatoblast”’ of Merezs. The

important point to bear in mind is, I think, that even in deter-

194 TORREY

minate cleavage there is more than one method of procedure

by which a practically identical result may be attained.

Finally, I would call attention again to the frequency of the

cases in which radial cleavage and symmetry is retained after

bilateral symmetry should have expressed itself. Bearing this

in mind it would seem that Heath (’99) is correct in his criti-

cism of Conklin’s (’97) conclusion that “radial structures in

the developing egg are a foreshadowing of larval characters,

just as bilateral cleavages are usually attributed to a precocious

development of adult characters.”’. In reference to this state-

ment Heath says: ‘“ The reflection of larval stages on early

cleavage stages does not produce radial symmetry but tends to

destroy it.” ‘These early radial characteristics may be better ex-

plained, as Heath further points out, by considering them as

having been inherited from the radially symmetrical ancestors.

of the 7Zurbellaria, annelids and molluscs. The transition from

the equal to the unequal type of cleavage has been, without

doubt, very gradual. With the shortening of the larval exist-.

ence the posterior macromere has gained in importance until

finally we reach the direct teloblastic development of oligo-

cheetes and leeches.

EMBRYOLOGY OF THALASSEMA MELLITA 195

II. GASTRULATION TO TROCHOPHORE.

1. Gastrulation.

The process of gastrulation begins as a rule about seven

hours after fertilization (Pl. II, Fig. 21). I[t is a modified

embolic type and consists merely of the insinking of the ento-

blastic plate (Text-Fig. 4, d and 4). I could not discover any

infolding of cells such as Conn (’86) describes. The entoblastic

plate consists, as has already been indicated, of eleven cells, just

as is the case in Arica, Amphitrite, Clymenella, Arenicola and

Podarke. Although, in 7halassema, the order in which the

cells leave the surface is subject to variations, the macromeres

generally sink in first, next the fifth quartet and finally the fourth

quartet (Pl. II, Figs. 21 to 24). As gastrulation proceeds there

is a flattening at the lower pole and a rounding out of the wall

of the pretrochal region (Text-Fig. 10, D). All of the ento-

blast cells become greatly elongated and the nuclei lie in their

swollen inner ends. ‘These cells sink inso far that some of them

come in contact with the rosette region and the lateral ecto-

blastic wall. A little later the endoblastic mass rounds out and

withdraws from the body wall, but the points of contact are still

preserved by protoplasmic strands (Text-Fig. 8, /’) which, owing

to the viscid nature of the protoplasm, are drawn out. These

threads are, accordingly, of the same nature as those occurring

at the surface of the egg immediately after fertilization and are

not due to spinning phenomena. It seems probable that a simi-

lar explanation may be given for the strands described by Tread-

well (’Or).

2. Closure of the Blastopore.

The blastopore, when first marked out, lies exactly at the

lower pole of the egg, but it soon shifts slightly toward the

future ventral side (Text-Fig. 4, C). It is bounded at the pos-

terior end by the apex of the Y group, at the sides posteriorly by

small cells of the third quartet, c and d quadrants, and anteri-

orly by cells from the second quartet c, a and 6 quadrants (PI.

II, Fig. 23). Later the sides of the blastopore become lined

196 TORKEY

TEXT-—-FIGURE 4.

A, the invaginating plate. £&, actual section of a gastrulation stage. C, an

early gastrulation stage; the group, ventral plate, is bounded by heavy lines ;

6/, blastopore ; ¢, cells migrating from the prztrochal region; @s.#., cesophago-

blast median. JZ, a later stage showing the shifting of the blastopore toward the

prototroch on the ventral side and the further migration of cells, 7, from the pree-

trochal region.

EMBRYOLOGY OF THALASSEMA MELLITA 197

entirely by the cells of the third quartet (Pl. II, Fig. 24), which

have shoved aside or inwards those of the second. This

phenomenon is due to the more rapid cell divisions and growth

BESO

OS) SERS

LRG:

Cee

ee D

Fic. 4.

at the posterior end of the embryo, especially of the X group,

which, thereby, push all the cells anterior to it toward the future

ventral side (Text-Fig. 4, D). As will be pointed out directly,

198 TORREY

this movement lies in the closest association with the formation

of the cesophagus. The cells, accordingly, which finally line

the blastopore are the following: at the posterior end +,,, on

the right side the ‘progeny of 24, 5, 34.4053. a OMunemet

side that of°3d54; 30> >> 5) 6@..5 45 and at the Toundeasante.

rior end that-of 2c, » 5, 3026, 20. 45 and theslarce wesophace.

blast 22... In Aventcola the cells of the second quartet are

shoved away in a similar manner from the sides of the blasto-

pore by cells from the ¢c and d quadrants of the third quartet.

The blastopore, when fully formed in 7halassema, is an elon-

gated slit with an enlargement at the anterior end (Text-Fig. 4,

C). This latter part never closes, but after the formation of the

wsophagus becomes the mouth. The subsequent movement of

the blastopore toward the future ventral side is brought about,

on the one hand, by the forward movement of the ventral plate

(X group), which in turn is caused by the migration of cells

from the pre-trochal region through the dorsal gap. On the

other hand an equally important factor in the shifting of the

blastopore is the simultaneous insinking under the prototroch

of the large anterior cesophagoblast (20... 5, Pl. II, Fig. 24).

The posterior part of the blastopore finally becomes closed by

the approximation of the sides. The closure seems’ to be

brought about, not so much by active cell divisions as by the

fact that the post-trochal region becomes greatly flattened as a

consequence of the insinking of the entoblasts, the J7 cells, and

the ectomesoblasts from the third quartet. This flattening

would naturally tend to bring the edges of the elongated blasto-

pore together. The open anterior end at length comes to lie

just under the prototroch (Text-Fig. 4, D)—the position of the

future mouth. The closure of the blastopore from the sides

reminds one in some degree of the process in Lumdyvicus (Wilson,

°89). In cases where the macromeres are very large and fill

the cleavage cavity, as in Nereis and Amp/itrite, the closure

takes place at the lower pole by the convergence of the cells

from all sides. In Capitella (Eisig, ’98) the blastopore is said

to close completely, and this is probably the case in the ma-

jority of annelids.

EMBRYOLOGY OF THALASSEMA MELLITA 199

3. fistory of the Dorsal Gap in the Prototroch and of the Shift-

ing of Embryonic Areas.

Dorsal Gap. — A number of the early observers of the early

development of annelids and molluscs have noted the dorsal in-

terruption or gap in the prototroch. Among the first of these

was Hatschek (’78). Until recent years, however, the cause of

this phenomenon has not been known. There are two fac-

tors, I think, which we must now taken into consideration. In

Amphitrite and Clymenella, as Mead (97) has shown, the dorsal

gap is due to the fact that the cells in the @ quadrant of the

second quartet, which corresponds to the secondary protochal

cells of the other three quadrants, fail to develop cilia. This

explanation seems to suffice, also, fora good many other forms,

but in 7ha/assema, as will be shown below, the dorsal inter-

ruption in the prototroch is caused entirely by the migration of

cells from the prze-trochal into the post-trochal region.

In all other types of annelids, whose cell-lineage has been

determined, the dorsal gap is present from the beginning. In

Thalassema, on the other hand, it does not arise until about the

eighth hour (Pl. II, Fig. 22). It is caused, in this case, by the

divisions and spreading out of the posterior arms of the cross

(Pl. I, Fig. 7), which, thereby, push the posterior intergirdle

cells down along the mid-dorsal line. At the appropriate time

(during gastrulation) the prototrochal cells at the juncture

of the ¢ and d quadrants are shoved apart (PI. II, Fig. 24).

Before they come together again, two large cells and at least

eight smaller ones, with dark staining nuclei, are pushed through

the gap and finally lie between the X group and the prototroch

Memrie 4 C and 2). The large cells, 14,54 .'; and

E@;s4->4 (ll. Il, Figs. 14 and 24) are designated by the letter

“7” although as has already been indicated, they have not quite

the same cell lineage as the “7” cells in Amphitrite, Arenicola

and Podarke. The smaller cells probably represent all of the

intergirdle cell Id, ,,, and itis also possible that some products

of the posterior arms of the cross pass through the break. In

Arenicola four descendants of the posterior intergirdle cell

(1d,,.) migrate into the post-trochal region, but in this form and

200 TORREY

TEXT-FIGURE 5.

Diagrams to indicate the direction of the shifting of the embryonic areas. Line

ach, egg axis; line acf, anterior posterior axis of the trochophore ; 4/, blastopore ;

Z, area migrating from the pre-trochal region through the dorsal gap in the proto-

troch ; JZ, ccelomesoblast ; £7, prototroch ; x, ventral plate ; v/, ventro-lateralregion.

EMBRYOLOGY OF THALASSEMA MELLITA 201

in Amphitrite the migration is not so extensive as it is in 7ha/as-

sema and Podarke. The gap does not close in 7halassema un-

til about the thirteenth hour.

The cells, that have thus migrated, increase rapidly in num-

ber and in the trochopore constitute a considerable area in the

ventral

micas

Mes

ty)

Fic. 5.

mid-dorsal region immediately below the prototroch (Text-Fig.

5). As most of the cells are small and thin and have dark

staining nuclei (Text-Fig. 6), their fate may be followed to a

late stage. In Podarke the migration of cells from the pre-

202 TORREY

trochal region seems to be much greater than it is in 7ha/as-

sema and the ‘7’ cells become very much larger in the for-

mer than in the latter. In Zhalassema any extensive lateral

spreading of these cells is prevented by the fact that the

group reaches the prototroch on each side (PI. II, Fig. 24).

Shifting of Areas (Yext-Fig. 5).— The divisions of the

group to the beginning of gastrulation have already been de-

scribed. The spreading of the group now continues rapidly,

not only by cell division, but also by a swelling of the cells

near the prototroch. These processes are all clearly morpho-

genic. Soon after the closure of the posterior end of the blas-

topore, the cells anterior to it become shoved around the open

anterior end by the movement of the ventral plate toward

the future ventral “side: (VI 11. Vie?-2a), dext-Big sara

At length some of the larger cells on the mid-ventral line sink

into the opening and late: take part in the formation of the

posterior wall of the cesophagus (Text-Fig. 6, B, C and J).

Owing to this forward migration, and in consequence of the

great flattening and diminution in area of the post-trochal re-

gion, the ventral plate now extends to the stomodzal opening

(Text-Fig. 5, ). A still further shifting of this plate is brought

about both by the growth of the cell group which has migrated

from the prz-trochal region, and by the elongation of the body

along the future antero-posterior axis (Text-Fig. 5, £ and /).

The X group gives rise to by far the greater part of the post-

trochal ectoderm of the trochopore. A small ventrolateral re-

gion (Text-Fig. 5, /’) is formed by the cells which do not enter

into the differentiation of the cesophagus. They are certainly

2a, » , and 2¢)>, and’ possibly also’37;-and 37) y-

The behavior of the ventral plate in 7Za/assema is different from

anything that has hitherto been described in annelids. There

is no concrescence of the lateral edges on the ventral side, as is

the case in Nereis, Amplutrite, Arenicola and Podarke. In the

first three cases two factors may be said to cause this phenom-

enon. The first is the rapid development of the somatic plate

before the closure of the blastopore, which necessitates its spread-

ing laterally only. The second is the formation of a terminal

EMBRYOLOGY OF THALASSEMA MELLITA 203

proctodzal area at the same time with the closure of the blas-

topore, which causes a continuance of the lateral movement

and ends finally in the meeting of the edges on the ventral

side. In Podarke, on the other hand, the initiative of the lateral

spreading is the fact that the posterior end of the blastopore

does not close at all, but is directly transformed into the proc-

todeum. None of these factors are present in 7/alassema and,

as has already been shown, there is nothing to prevent and

everything to cause the somatic plate to reach its definite posi-

tion very early and by a direct forward shifting.

The final disposition of the plate is similar to that of JVerezs.

The side which was at first next to the prototroch in the end

reaches a position corresponding to that at which the teloblasts

could be last distinguished in Verezs. Wilson (’92) thought it

possible that there is a still further shifting until the teloblasts

lie at the extreme posterior end of the embryo and form the

growing point. It is impossible to determine whether this is

the case in Zhalassema, since there are no large teloblasts.

This fact, of course, is correlated with the long free-swimming

trochophore stage. It is very evident, nevertheless, that before

gastrulation the future anal region lies near the prototroch and

shifts down during the metamorphosis until it comes in line

with the former egg axis, and this involves an evident shifting

of the antero-posterior axis (see Text-Fig. 5). This is a simi-

lar process to that at work in /Verezs, but is much simpler and

possibly more primitive.

Conn (’86) likewise studied and figured this shifting in 7/a/-

assema, but did not seem clearly to recognize the fact that the

final antero-posterior axis coincides with the former egg axis,

as has recently been found to be the case in a number of anne-

lids, and that the shifting of areas is due to the very rapid

growth of the dorsal (posterior) side. The distance of the

apical plate from the prototroch, on the ventral (anterior) side,

on the other hand, undergoes little change.

It is a difficult matter even to attempt to bring into line the

divergent accounts of the axial relations in the development of

the trochophore in polychztes that have been given in late years

204 TORREY

by Wilson (92), Mead (’97), Treadwell (01) and others. I

think it possible, however, that in the last analysis it will be

found that, in all cases where there is a trochophore stage, the

cells which will later form the growing point have shifted down-

ward from a position immediately below the prototroch on the

dorsal side toward the anal region and that the mechanical cause

of this shifting is the migration of cells from the prz-trochal

region through the dorsal gap and into the post-trochal region.

In the majority of forms this is not as clearly the case as it is

in Zhalassema, since the process may become modified by the

early formation of the anus or anal region. Although Wilson

did not describe any migration of cells from the prz-trochal

region, it seems quite probable that the dorsal triangular space,

covered with small transparent cells, originated in this way and

that the growth of this area forces the teloblasts toward the

lower pole. In Amphitrite it is possible that Mead has not

given the migrating cells credit for forming as much of the

dorsal region as they deserve. In this case, too, the shifting of

areas is not readily recognized, because of the absence of telo-

blasts. This possibility also applies to Arenicola. In Podarke,

with the exception of the concrescence of the ventral plate the

shifting is exactly similar to that in 7alassema and the grow-

ing point arises from the same cell region,

These processes in 7halassema are very closely paralleled by

those commonly occurring in molluscs. In C/zton (Metcalf,

93) and /schnochiton (Heath, ’99) there is the same shifting of

the blastopore to the ventral side to form the stomodzeum, and

the anus also arises very late. In TZeredo (Hatschek, ’81) the

blastopore closes on the ventral side in the region of the future

mouth. In Ostrea (Brooks, ’80), Dentalium (Kowalevsky, ’83)

and Patella (Patten, ’86) the blastopore shifts toward the ventral

side and stands in the closest relation to the stomodzum, but

not to the proctodzum.

4. formation of the Enteron.

After sinking in, the entomeres- become rounded and divide

rapidly in such a way that a very thick epithelium is formed

surrounding a small lenticular shaped cavity (Text-Fig. 6, A).

EMBRYOLOGY OF THALASSEMA MELLITA 205

By further divisions the cavity is increased in size and its wall

becomes composed of columnar cells filled with yolk granules

(Text-Fig. 6, £). According to Conn (’86), “the central

Cavity arises by an absorption of the digestive mass.’ This is

certainly not the case, for sections show plainly that it is en-

tirely due to the nature of the cell divisions. The macromeres

give rise to the dorsal and dorso-lateral part of the stomach

and intestine wall, while the progeny of the fifth and the a, 0

and ¢ quadrants of the fourth quartet produce the ventral and

ventro-lateral regions. The enteric cavity is secondarily divided

into stomach and intéstine by a shelf which grows out from the

dorsal wall (Text-Fig. 6, 5, C and J). Its origin is first in-

dicated by the projection of a single row of cells, but this is

immediately followed by a double row. In cross-section it

is accordingly, wedge-shaped. This shelf, finally, completely

divides the stomach from the intestine except on the ventral

side where a circular opening is left. A similar description is

given by Conn for this form and also by Treadwell for Podarke.

The partition becomes attached much nearer the cesophagus

on the right side than on the left, so that in the completely

differentiated trochophore the greater part of the stomach lies

on the left side of the body and the intestine on the right (Text-

Fig. 7, &). There is no proctodaeum, such as we find in Am-

phitrite and Podarke. The anus,’ itself breaks through very

late, even after the trochophore has begun to feed. This seems

to be the case also in Lupomatus (Hatschek, ’85).

5. Formation of the esophagus.

The cesophagus is formed after gastrulation by the invagina-

tion of the greater part of the progeny of the second and third

1Conn has made several statements in this connection which seem to be founded

on errors in observations. He implies that the anus is formed at a point which

corresponds to one end of an elongated blastopore. ‘This is true only in the most

general sense. Again, he says that the alimentary tract is complete in 12 hours. In

all the embryos that I have examined this is never the case until at least the eighteenth

hour. But the most radical error lies in the assertion that the cavity in the entoderm

opens directly to the exterior by the blastopore. The enteron during its formation

is, in reality, a closed sac and does not open to the exterior until it comes second-

arily into connection with the ectodermal cesophagus. ‘This is also the case in

Cyclas (Ziegler, 85), Pistdiwm (Lankester, ’75) and the Unionide (Lillie, ’95).

206 TORREY

TEXT-FIGURE 6.

Optical sections of the successive stages in the formation of the alimentary

tract. oes., oes.r, oes.d, median, right, left cesophagoblasts ; g/, ectodermal gland ;

in, intestine ; s¢, stomach. Other letters as before. The ectomesoblast cells are

stippled lightly ; the ectodermal glands, heavily.

EMBRYOLOGY OF THALASSEMA MELLITA 207

quartets of the anterior and lateral quadrants. Before the

posterior portion of the blastopore has closed three cells

(24, 5.1.2.1 4» 20,9, 1.2» 3%2,1,1) become prominent because of their

greater size (Pl. II, Fig. 24). These cells have already been

BIG. 6:

designated as cesophagoblasts. The anterior one attains a very

great size (Text-Fig. 6, A) and at the end of gastrulation is the

only cell that separates the anterior end of the blastopore from

the prototroch (PI. II, Fig. 24). By the continued insinking of

208 TORREY

this cell toward the apical plate the open anterior end of the

blastopore approaches the prototroch and, finally, the position

of the adult mouth. The three cesophagoblasts become grouped

about this opening and sink in nearly simultaneously. The one

on the right (34, ,,,) divides once and nearly equally just before

sinking in, but the others do not divide again. The first, which

possibly represents the larval mesoblast from the 6 quadrant,

takes the place of the stomatoblast that as a rule arises from the

second quartet on that side (2c, ,,). The cesophagoblast on the

left (2@,, 5 1,9,14.) meeting with less obstruction, sinks in faster

than the anterior and that in turn more rapidly than the one on

the right. Accordingly, they finally become arranged in a row

extending dorso-ventrally (Text-Fig. 6, 6 and C). When the

cesophagus has become differentiated, the one at the inner end

of this row (2a, 19,1.) Surrounds in large part the opening into

the stomach, the median (20,,,,) forms the antero-dorsal

wall, and the one at the outer end (34, ,,) a part of the wall on

the right side (Text-Fig: 6, Cand D). The posterior wall is

formed entirely by the infolding of the columnar cells which lie

along the mid-ventral line. There is no doubt that a consider-

able number of cells of the ventral plate take part in this

process.

Conn failed to note this invagination of ectoderm cells and

so has described the cesophagus as endodermal and as resulting

from a division of the digestive tract. Hatschek (85), however,

in Lapomatus, has recognized the fact that the entire cesophagus

arises from the ectoderm. In this form the cesophagus and

archenteron are described as being continuous from the first and

as not coming secondarily into connection with one another as in

Thalassema. The intestine, too, arises in this case as a later

proliferation of cells from the posterior dorsal wall of the en-

teron. The same is the case in Pomatoceros (Von Drache, ’84).

In annelids the stomatoblasts seem to arise, as a rule, from

the second quartet, anterior and lateral quadrants (JVerezs, Capt-

tella, Podarke), but in Arenicola, according to Child (01), they

take their origin from the same quadrants of the third quartet.

In these forms, also, practically all of the rest of the progeny of

EMBRYOLOGY OF THALASSEMA MELLITA 209

the second and third quartets of these quadrants enter into the

formation of the stomodzum.

6. Differentiations of the Ectoderm.

About twelve hours after fertilization, glands and green pig-

ment (Text-Fig. 8, 4) begin to appear in the ectoderm. The

pigment is first noticeable just above the prototroch, arising in

the cytoplasm of the cells in close proximity to the nucleus.

The glands, on the other hand, first appear in the larger cells

between the apical plate and the mouth (Text-Fig. 6, 4). A

homogeneous liquid substance is deposited in the outer part of

the cell which rapidly increases in amount until it almost en-

tirely fills the cell and shoves the nucleus to one side (Text-

Fig..6, C). This substance does not stain in preserved material

in hematoxylin as do mucous glands in general (Amphitrite),

but it does stain brilliantly with Bordeaux red. It would seem,

accordingly, that these glands may be of the same nature as the

problematic bodies in Amphitrite. In the living trochophore a -

chemical stimulus causes a discharge of a gelatinous substance,

as has been noted by Conn. MHatschek (’81) describes similar

glands in Achiurus and says that they arise from vacuoles in

single cells. Eisig (’98) thinks that they may be excretory

and take the place of primary nephridia. This is probably not

the case in 7halassema.

The cells which constitute the ventral neural ciliated region

are differentiated early (about fourteen hours) and separately.

Later they elongate somewhat and dovetail with one another

(Text-Fig. 7, A), so that in the fully formed trochophore there

are two rows of these cells. They are from the first easily dis-

tinguishable by their clear refractive protoplasm and larger

size. Just below the mouth region these two rows separate

and extend on each side of the oral opening to the prototroch.

Their method of origin explains the fact that the neural cilia

arise in separated bunches and also the manner by which these

cilia become connected with those of the prototroch. The

apical plate is, in all probability, formed entirely by the rosette

cells which, in the trochophore, become elongated and columnar,

210 TORREY

TEXT-FIGURE 7.

A, a stage which shows the development of the ventral neural ciliated region.

ve, ventral ciliated cells ; mo, mouth. J, an optical longitudinal section from the

ventral side of a young trochophore, twenty-four hours.

EMBRYOLOGY OF THALASSEMA MELLITA 211

Fic. 7.

III]. Futty DEVELOPED TROCHOPHORE.

Between the twenty-fifth and thirtieth hours there is a rapid

increase in size of the trochophore, brought about by the

stretching and consequent thinning out of all the tissues. Conn

has described a similar swelling at the transition of the larva

into the adult, as has also Spengel (’79) in Bonellia. Conn (’86)

thinks that this is due to the absorption of water through the

anal vesicles as it takes place immediately after their formation.

a. Ectoderm.—Since the difterentiations of the ectoderm have

been described in detail by Conn, they may be passed over

without extended comment. When the trochophores are

stained zutra vitam with methyl blue or neutral red, certain

loosely arranged groups of granules (Text-Fig. 8, 4) stain with

great intensity. These granules are present not only in the

body wall, but also in that of the gut and in some mesenchyme

muscles. It is questionable whether, as Conn (’86) maintains,

the absence of green granules is correlated with a lack of nutri-

ment. Hatschek (’81) concludes that the opposite is true, since,

212 TORREY

in Echiurus a lack of food and poor environment seem to in-

crease the amount of pigment and decrease the number of S-

shaped glands. In Zhalassema, I believe, the differences are

due merely to individual variations and are quite independent

of the presence or absence of food, for the variations appear

before the animals have begun to take in nutriment. Spengel

(97) figures an abundance of green pigment in the larva of

Bonellia. A very careful search was made for ectodermal mus-

cles, which, according to both Hatschek and Conn, lie in the

body wall. I think that it may be stated, with absolute cer-

tainty, that no such muscles are present in the trochophore of

Thalassema. The wrinkles in the outer cuticle simulate quite

closely muscle fibers and might easily have been mistaken for

them.

b. Ciliation. — The fact that the prz-trochal region is pro-

vided with scattered patches of cilia (Text-Fig. 8, 4) seems to

be in accordance with the widely accepted theory that at an

earlier stage of its evolution the trochophore was entirely cov-

ered with cilia, as is the case to-day in the young Pidium larva

and the young trochophores of Teredo, Dentalium, Nucula,

Yoldia and Chetopterus. In most forms, however, the cilia

have become restricted to certain definite regions. The para-

troch in Zhalassema appears very late, after 36 hours, and is

formed without doubt from cells of the somatic plate which

were originally in close proximity to the prototroch. These

cells, it will be observed, are different from those which enter

into the formation of the paratroch in Amp/fitrite and Arenicola.

The cesophagus develops strong cilia even before its complete

differentiation. At the opening of the cesophagus into the

stomach a circle of long cilia hang down into the latter (see

Text-Fig. 8, A). The stomach wall, itself, is covered uni-

formly with fine cilia, but these seem later to be restricted to

certain swollen regions presently to be described. The wall of

the intestine is also ciliated. A very curious ciliated groove or

ridge (it was impossible to determine with certainty which) runs

from the stomach into the intestine, a little to the right of the

ventral side. At its stomach end it is bent in a half spiral and

EMBRYOLOGY OF THALASSEMA MELLITA 213

throughout its course bears a row of powerful, active cilia.

Conn considered it to be the Anlage of the ciliated groove or

the collateral intestine of the adult. Hatschek described the

same organ in the form of Achzurus that he studied ; as has also

Salensky (76) in the Naples larva. The latter ascribed to it a

respiratory function. Without doubt in the larva of 7halassema

it functions merely as a conductor of food from the stomach to

the intestine.

c. Alimentary Tract.—The wall of the cesophagus, which is

very thick, secretes a cuticle. In Aupomatus both the ceso-

phagus and anal end of the intestine are lined in the same way.

Conn has described a glandular region in the stomach wall im-

mediately under the cesophagus, and there seems to be some

evidence, especially in sections of the younger trochophores,

that the cells here have such a function. It is equally prob-

able, however, that the swellings occurring at regular intervals

in the stomach-wall of older trochophores (Text-Fig. 8, 4) may

be concerned in digestion. Each of these contains a clear re-

fractive drop and also a few pigment granules (Text-Fig. 8, C

and D).

ad. Mesoblast.— A detailed description of the development of

the mesoblast is reserved for a separate section and only its dif-

ferentiation in the trochophore will be indicated here. The

ccelomesoblast is present in the form of two bands, each con-

sisting. of only five subequal cells. These are closely applied

to the body-wall and lie in the usual position on each side of

the neural row of cilia, but are more widely separated than in

many annelids. The mesenchyme, on the contrary, is present

in great abundance and has attained a considerable degree of

differentiation (Text-Fig. 9, 4), many of the cells having now

been converted into muscles. The latter vary somewhat in

number and position in different individuals, but there are cer-

tain typical ones which are always present. Two or three ex-

tend from the apical plate to the cesophagus. These, with sim-

ilar muscles along the median line, running from the apical

plate to the mouth, widen the cavity of the cesophagus and

permit the passage of the larger particles of food. A group of

214 TORREY

TEXT-FIGURE 8.

A, optical section of a living three-day trochophore. a, apical plate; c¢, cili-

ated tract between the stomach and the intestine; ex, excretory cells; fa, para-

troch ; 47, prototroch ; vc, ventral ciliated region. 2B, view of the body wall of

a living trochophore. gf, green pigment; g/, glands; gr, granules. C, surface

view of the stomach wall (living), greatly magnified. Z, section of the same. £,

optical transverse section of a stage of over 140 cells. The ccelomesoblast cells, JZ,

are about to bud off two small entoblast cells. In this and the following figure the

ectomesoblast cells are stippled and the ccelomesoblast cells are outlined with heavy

lines. em, ectomesoblast right, arising from the ¢ quadrant; ev/, ectomesoblast

left, arising from the d quadrant ; em, ectomesoblast median, arising from the @

quadrant. £, optical section from dorsal side and at right angles to the prototroch

of a slightly older stage. ¢, entoblast cells budded off .from the ccelomesoblasts,

M =, le, \ateral ectomesoblast cell ; #.s¢, protoplasmic strand running from the ento-

blast to the ectoblast. The prototrochal cells are indicated by diagonal lines.

EMBRYOLOGY OF THALASSEMA MELLITA 215

elongated muscles runs from the apical plate and the anterior

part of the umbrella region to the body-wall beside the mouth,

and is continued by muscles which extend along the mid-ven-

etpew

tral line. In Achiurus and Eupomatus the ventral longitudinal

muscle is, in like manner, divided into a preoral and postoral

216 TORREY

part. A very constant muscle-cell is one that runs from the

cesophagus to the stomach on the dorsal side. Muscles also

run from the body-wall to the alimentary tract along its entire

course. These muscles are, for the most part, mere threads

with a central swollen nucleated part, but the latter seems some-

times to be entirely absent. Asa rule the contractile thread-

like part branches extensively and at both ends. I could not

find “the broad ioose bands of muscles connecting the apical

plate with the /ateral ciliated band”’ figured and described by

Conn. It is probable that these were confused with the ventro-

cesophageal bands. Besides these muscles there are a great

many of what are apparently undifferentiated mesenchyme-cells,

which, as Conn has noted, form an almost continuous layer on

the inner side of the body-wall. This is also the case in Achz-

urus, the trochophore of which is in many respects closely sim-

ilar to that of Zhalassema.

e. Lxcretory Cells. — A careful search in living and preserved

material has confirmed Conn’s assertion that there are no pri-

mary nephridia in 7halassema. The excretory function seems

to be relegated to a number of globular mesenchymatous cells,

which are either loosely attached to the body-wall and muscles

or float freely in the primary body-cavity (see Text-Fig. 8, A).

These are especially prominent in the three- or four-day trocho-

phore. They soon become stained a yellowish-brown color

and in the oldest trochophores contain refractive granules. In

several gastropod larve excretory cells have been described,

and they are in every case of ectodermal origin. They are often

found closely associated with the velum, ec. ¢., Aythinia (Sarasin,

°82), Ochidium (Joyaux-Laffine, ’82), Nerdtenia (Blochmann, ©

°82), Crepidula (Conklin, 97). Of greater interest in this con-

nection, however, is the fact that in certain adult tunicates, ¢. ¢.,

Lotryllus, Polycyclus, Ciona and Salpa, the excretory organ, ac-

cording to Dahlgrin (oI), is represented by a small number of

unmodified mesenchyme-cells in the protoplasm of which the

excretory products form dark granules.

J. Hlabits. — The trochophore swims in the usual way with

the apical plate directed forward and revolving spirally on its

Lard

EMBRYOLOGY OF THALASSEMA MELLITA 217

long axis. When it first acquires cilia (four and one half

hours) it seems indifferent to light, but at about nine hours it

shows a slight positive heliotropism. During gastrulation the

great majority of the larve sink to the bottom and do not begin

to swim actively until the transition into the trochophore is

completed (about eighteen hours). During this time all the

energy of the embryo seems to be directed toward the comple-

tion of the morphogenic processes. From this time to the

seventh or eighth day the trochophores are very decidedly

negatively phototactic, but after this they again become indiffer-

ent. Strange as it may seem, Mead finds that the embryos of

Lepidonotus are affected by light in just the opposite way.

When they first begin to swim they are positive, at fourteen

hours negative, from twenty to twenty-four hours indifferent

and from two to three days strongly positive. Eisig describes

the seven-day embryos of Capfitella as positively heliotropic,

but older larve as indifferent.

As has already been indicated, the larve of 7halassema be-

gin to feed as soon as the digestive tract is differentiated and

even before the anus has formed. By a gradual loss of cilia,

the trochophore sinks to the bottom and undergoes there the

metamorphosis into the adult.

Considered as a whole this trochophore is a very simple and

possibly a primitive one. There are no ring-muscles, no nerve-

rings and no primary nephridia. Among its positive primitive

characters may be reckoned the meager development of the

coelomesoblast, the formation of ectomesoblast from the first

quartet, the presence of excretory cells, and the late formation

of the anus.

218 TORREY

IV. Tar MEsosrasr.

1. Ce@lomesoblast.

The two ccelomesoblast cells (JZ, 17) are the last to sink in

(Pl. II, Fig. 23) at gastrulation instead of the first, as is the case

where the development is more direct (eres, Amphitrite).

The right cell is at this time somewhat larger than the left.

Immediately after invagination each buds off a small but func-

tional cell toward the blastopore (Text-Fig. 8, #; Pl. II, Fig.

24). The right one being perceptibly larger than the left, the

two pole-cells of the ccelomesoblast bands are thus rendered

equal in size. Disregarding the latter for the moment, let us

follow the fate of the small cells (e, 2). Soon after their forma-

tion they migrate upwards and away from the blastopore (Text-

Figs. 8, /, and 9g, A, B, C), become entirely surrounded by the

entoblast (Text-Fig. 6, A) and are thus separated from the two

cvelomesoblast cells, ‘The close association of these small cells with

the entoblast (Text-Fig. 6, 6 and C) continues during the trans-

formation of the latter into the enteron and when last distin-

guishable from their neighbors (about 18 hours), because of their

small size, lighter stain and comparative freedom from yolk

granules, they are incorporated in the wall of the intestine very

close to the anal region (Text-Fig. 9, D). It seems therefore,

beyond all doubt, that they are entoblastic in this case and take

part in the formation of the same region of the intestine as do

the corresponding cells in Crepidula.

Similar cells have been described as being budded off from

the J7’s in at least 16 species of annelids and molluscs and

most diverse accounts of their fate have been given by differcnt

observers. In four forms they seem to be certainly entoblastic

(Crepidula, Nereis, Podarke and Thalassema) and probably also

in Dreissensia, Patella, Serpulorbis, Cyclas and Aricia. On the

other hand, in at least four forms corresponding (homoblastic)

small cells are said to contribute entirely to the mesoblast

(Amphitrite, Aremcola, Umbrella and Planorbis) and possibly

also in Unio and Physa. Between these two groups, the con-

EMBRYOLOGY OF THALASSEMA MELLITA 219

dition of affairs in Aplysia, as recently described by Carazzi

(00), seems to stand asa connecting link. Here each of the J7’s

buds off four small cells, three of which are mesoblastic and one

entoblastic. Yet in Umbrella, according to Heymons (’93),

although the divisions are the same in number and quite similar

in character, all of the cells are stated to be mesoblastic.

Finally, in the aberrant cleavage of Capztella, corresponding

cells are believed by Eisig to give rise to the paedomesoblast.

The following interesting possibility has recently been sug-

gested by Wilson (’98) in regard to these cells. If we interpret

them as having the same morphological significance in every

case, ¢. g., entoblastic, we may arrange a series of annelids and

molluscs in which at one extreme the entoblast budded off from

the posterior member of the fourth quartet is greater in amount

than the resulting pole-cells of the mesoblast bands, as is actually

the casein Crepidula (Conklin), and at the other the entoblastic

element is contained in a mere rudimentary cell as in Avicza.

This graded series, according to Wilson, may represent a gradual

elimination of the entoblastic element from the posterior mem-

ber of the fourth quartet and the final complete conversion of

the latter into mesoblast. It also clearly indicates the possi-

bility that the mesoblast pole-cells are to be regarded phylo-

genetically as derivatives of the archenteron, as was long since

suggested by Kowalevsky (’71). With this idea the fate of the

small cells in Podarke and Thalassema also falls in line.

In the light of subsequent research, however, it would seem

that we must recognize the probability that the small cells

budded off from the ccelomesoblast pole-cells before formation

of the ccelomesoblast bands may be either entoblastic, meso-

blastic, or both. Of especial interest in this connection is a com-

parison of the results of Carazziand Heymons (see above). In

Aplysia (Carazzi) only one of the four divisions eliminates ento-

blast, while in Umdrella (Heymons) even this is lost and all of

the small cells are mesoblastic. This suggests the possibility

that the form of division has persisted while the resulting cells

have changed their prospective value, or, to adopt Wilson’s ter-

minology, that the small cells still remain homoblastic but are

220 TORREY

TEXT-FIGURE 9.

Optical sections of various stages to illustrate the history of the ectomesoblast

cells. 4, section at the same plane as Fig. 10, 4, but of a slightly older

stage, showing the teloblast-like budding of the right (em) and left (e/) ecto-

mesoblast, and also the migration of the median (e/7) ectomesoblast. The J/’s

have each budded off a small entoblast cell (2, e). £4, section at the same plane

as Fig. 10, B, but of an older embryo. /e, lateral ectomesoblast cells from the

right and left intergirdle regions of the first quartet; 7c, rudimentary cells sunk

into the entoblast cells and degenerating. C, section from the left side. The

blastopore (47) has migrated toward the prototroch. The J/’s have migrated

lateraliy leaving behind the small entoblast cells (2, ¢). An ectomesoblast cell, a,

in-sinking from the first quartet, probably from the 4 arm of the cross. J, longi-

tudinal section of a considerably older stage. The small entoblast cells, derived

from the J7’s, are seen in the posterior end of the enteron. The ectomesoblast is,

in part, becoming transformed into muscles.

EMBRYOLOGY OF THALASSEMA MELLITA 221

no longer equivalent. This idea has been clearly expressed by

Wilson in a discussion of a similar state of affairs. He says:'

“The old building pattern was still retained but adapted to a

Ore <>

OT (Oss

FIG. 9.

new use, precisely as has been the case with the evolution of

larval or adult organs, such as the branchial or aortic arches

and the limbs.’”’ Nevertheless, until we know more about the

1 Wilson, E. B., ‘* Cell- Lineage and Ancestral Reminiscence,’? Wood’s Holl

Biol. Lectures, 1898, p. 39.

222 TORREY

factors which underlie differentiation in development, I think we

should suspend our judgment in regard to the significance of

these cells. It should also be borne in mind that these small

cells have never, so far as I know, been proved to be the funda-

ment of a typical mesoblast organ, but have been considered

mesoblast merely because of their position.

The ccelomesoblast cells, which at first lie closely pressed to-

gether, under the posterior lip of the blastopore (PI. II, Fig. 24),

exactly as in Eupomatus and Podarke, soon separate and move

apart toward the sides (Text-Fig. 9, A, B, C). The pressure

of the entoblasts causes them to lie well up toward the proto-

troch. They may be distinguished without difficulty from the

fact that their protoplasm is much more finely reticulated than

that of the entomeres, and is also comparatively free from yolk-

granules, as has been noted by Conklin in Cvepfidula. The

lateral migration of the right cell is a little more rapid than that

of left, owing to the fact that it is less obstructed by the ento-

blast mass. When these two cells are about half way to the

future ventral side, each divides egual/ly, with the plane of the

division parallel to the prototroch. At length, after three more

divisions in the same plane, the two ccelomesoblast bands of

five cells each come to lie in the position already described.

These rows of cells (Text-Fig. 9, D) are thus shown to have

the same origin and early history as the mesoblast-bands in

other annelids. To this we may add the statement of Conn

that, during the post-larval development, these bands in 7ha/as-

sema increase in size, become segmented, and finally give rise

to the secondary body cavity in a typical annelid way. The

meager development of the ccelomesoblast in the trochophore

is clearly correlated with the long duration of its free-swimming

and (as far as development is concerned) almost stationary larval

existence.

It is a fact, as far as I know without exception, that in all

forms where there is a trochophore stage of long duration (as

is the case in all annelids with equal cleavage), the two ccelo-

mesoblast cells do not, in the earlier stages at least, bud like

teloblasts. This is certainly true in 7ydroides and the Newport

EMBRYOLOGY OF THALASSEMA MELLITA 223

species of Polygordius (Wilson, ’91). and also in Podarke and

Thalassema. Although Hatschek’s figures indicate that Aufo-

matus forms an exception to this generalization, I believe that

this is due to his confusion of the ccelomesoblast and mesen-

chyme, as will be explained immediately, and that in this form,

too, there are, in the earlier stages at least, no actively budding

pole-cells. It is reasonable to suppose, in fact, that the presence

of teloblasts in many types is a secondary adaptation to a more

direct development ; a conclusion supported by the conspicuously

teloblastic character of the divisions in leeches and oligochetes.

2. The Ectomesoblast.

Heretofore the study of the cell-lineage of a number of anne-

lids and molluscs has shown that the so-called “larval mesen-

chyme”’ arises from certain ectodermal cleavage cells of the

second or third quartet, and entirely independently of the

coelomesoblast. This is also notably the case in 7halassema

where ten large ectomesoblast cells sink in and give rise to all

the mesenchyme. Three of these cells are from the a, c and d

quadrants of the third quartet and seven from the first quartet

of ectomeres. The most important source of functional mesen-

chyme in 7halassema are the three cells from the third quartet,

momely, 34,521, 342121; and 34,,, The first two sink into

the cleavage-cavity, just before gastrulation (PI. II, Fig. 21), and

lie at first close to the two ccelomesoblast cells. They soon

migrate laterally and bud! off simultaneously small cells toward

the J cells (Pl. I, Fig. 24; Text-Fig. 8, Z, /), dividing like

teloblasts, but in the reverse of the ordinary direction. So close

is the connection of these cells with the ccelomesoblast (Text-

Fig. 9, d, B and C) that one would certainly be led to think

that they formed a part of these bands unless their cytogeny

had been carefully followed. The condition here observed is

similar to that described by Treadwell in Podarke. The progeny

of these two cells forms almost the entire mesenchyme of the

1Conn’s error in describing the mesenchyme as arising from the entoderm near the

blastopore is accounted for by the fact that these ectomesoblast cells lie in close asso-

ciation with the entomeres, and that he worked almost entirely on living material.

224 TORREY

post-trochal region, and becomes differentiated for the most part

into gut muscles (Text-Figs. 6, C, and 9, J). The teloblast-

like cells, themselves, finally lie on each side of the cesophagus

and give rise to a part of the ventro-cesophageal musculature.

I would call attention to the fact that Hatschek has described

cells similar in position, and probably also in fate, in Awpomatus.

The other ectomesoblast cell, 3a, .., divides equally as it

sinks in (Pl. 11, Figs. 22 to 24), and after two or more unequal

divisions, the cells migrate toward the mid-ventral line (Text-

Fig. 9, A). The progeny of the cell, which after the first equal

division lay nearest the 4 quadrant, makes good the failure of

this region to produce an ectomesoblast cell (as stated on p. 201

the corresponding cell in this quadrant produces a large cesoph-

agoblast). (See Text-Fig. 9, C, emm). The migration of this

cell in Podarke to a position symmetrical with the bilaterality of

the embryo is even more remarkable because it does not divide

until it lies in the future mid-ventral line and there equally and

bilaterally. In Uvnzo, according to Lillie, the entire mesen-

chyme arises asymmetrically from 2a, ,,, but ‘‘apparently by

active migration becomes symmetrical in later stages.’’ What

causes this migration it is impossible to say, but it certainly

well illustrates the idea expressed by Lillie (’o1) in the follow-

ing sentence: ‘‘That the entire organism at every stage of its

development exercises a formative influence on all its parts ap-

pears to me an absolutely necessary hypothesis.” By the

shifting of the blastopore and the formation of the cesophagus

the progeny of these cells becomes carried up into the pretro-

chal region and there gives rise in large part to the muscles

running from the body wall to the cesophagus (Text-Figs. 6,

D, and 7, 2).

The ectomesoblast cells from the first quartet sink into the

primary body-cavity somewhat later than those from the third.

The late period at which these cells are differentiated makes it

impossible to give their exact cell-lineage, but the general

regions, from which they arise, are as follows: Two cells sink

in on each side from the @ and c intergirdle regions and just

above the prototroch (Text-Figs. 8, 4, and 9, B, /e). They

EMBRYOLOGY OF THALASSEMA MELLITA 225

soon elongate just inside the body wall, and in all probability

form later a part of the gut musculature. Another large

ectomesoblast cell originates in the 4 cross region, near the

median line (Text-Fig. 9, C, a). This cell arises by delamina-

tion, and another from the ¢ cross region, also near the median

line, arises bya like process. A small cell sinks in at the same

time just in front of the apical plate (Text-Fig. 6, A). These

cells also contribute in part to the gut musculature. Conn

has found that the various gut muscles of the trochophore fer-

sist in the adult. He also thinks that some of the mesenchyme-

cells become converted into blood-corpuscles. It seems alto-

gether probable, too, that the undifferentiated ectomesoblast

cells which line the inside body wall of the trochophore (Text-

Fig. 8, A) later give rise to the ring musculature. As was indi-

cated on p. 208 the floating ectomesoblast cells, without doubt,

function as excretory organs. The term “larval,” accordingly,

applies to very little of the mesenchyme in 7ha/assema, for the

greater part persists in the adult ; as Meyer (’o1) has also found

to be case in his studies on the post-larval development of Poly-

gordius, Psygmobranchus and Lopadorhynchus.

It is, indeed, remarkable that the ectomesoblast in 7ha/assema

from the third quartet agrees so exactly in origin with that of

Podarke. Theanterior cell in both has exactly the same lineage,

and the only difference between the posterior cells in the two

forms is that in Zhalassema they bud off an extra small ecto-

blast cell before sinking in ; but in Podarke, according to Tread-

well, this same division takes place as the cells sink in and the

resulting small cells are mesoblast.

Although this is the first time that a study of the cell lineage

of an annelid or mollusc has actually shown a part of the ecto-

mesoblast to arise from the first quartet, this possibility was

clearly indicated by Kleinenberg’s (’86) and Meyer’s discovery of

neuro-muscular foundations in the prztrochal region of Lopa-

dorhynchus. In Dinophilus, too, the mesenchyme, according to

Schimkewitsch (’95), originates by an immigration of ectoderm

cells in the forward part of the embryo.

Investigations of the cell-lineage of a number of representa-

226 TORREY

tive annelids and molluscs have demonstrated, in recent years,

that a part of the mesoblast in these groups arises from the

ectoblast. This mesoblast, however, has commonly, and as I

believe erroneously, been considered to be purely larval and

transitory. In certain instances it has been possible to deter-

mine the blastomeres which give rise to the ectomesoblast, but

in many others merely the general regions. Nevertheless in

all the source has been either the second or the third quartet

of ectomeres. Inthe first class belong Unio (2a,,,; Lillie,

95); Crepidula (2a, 26,-2¢%° Conklin,-’07)-, -Pyysa |e we

Wierzezski, ’97); Planorbis (36, 3¢,; Holmes, ’00); and

Podarke (305 3, 36245) 3@a5 o3. Lreadwelly on) ela een

second class we may place Avicza (Wilson, ’89), Dretssensia

(Meisenheimer, ’00), Cyclas (Ziegler, ’85), Pesedium (Lankester,

75), Pholas (Sigerfoos, ’95), Patella (Patten, ’86), Paludina

(Erlanger, ’91). The figures given by Hatschek (81) for

Leredo, Goette (’91) and Schierholz (78) for Azodonta, and

Horst (’82) for Ostrea also indicate, as Holmes (’00) points out,

that the mesenchyme in these forms must have originated from

the ectomeres. A study of Hatschek’s (85) figures of Aujpo-

matus has led me to the conclusion that his description of the

origin of the mesenchyme is founded on errors in observation,

due to his working entirely on living material, and that in reality

a part, at least, of the mesenchyme has exactly the same origin

as in Lhalassema, e. g., from 3c and 3d. Hatschek described

the ccelomesoblast pole-cells as budding off mesenchyme before

giving rise to the ccelomesoblast bands, and, in fact, if the cell

lineage had not been followed carefully in Thalassema and

Podarke, the close proximity of the two forms of mesoblast

would have led one intoa similar error. The striking similarity

in the origin of the ectomesoblast in these two forms justifies

us, I believe, in supposing that we may have the same condition

of affairs in Eupomatus where the cleavage is also ‘ equal.”

Meyer (’01) has also expressed himself as sceptical in regard to

the accuracy of the observations of Hatschek in this case and

calls attention to the fact that he neither figures nor appears to

have seen a single division of the protoblasts of the mesoblast.

EMBRYOLOGY OF THALASSEMA MELLITA 227

In Aydroides (Wilson, ’91) there is a like close association

of the mesoblasts and, indeed, it is quite possible that in

all annelids with equal cleavage we have an identical origin

of the ectomesoblast, at least as far as the third quartet is

concerned.

Embryologists during the last twenty-five years have been far

from unanimous in their conception either of the origin or of

the phylogenetic significance of the mesoblast. Hatschek

(78) was among the first to lay emphasis on the differences

between mesenchyme and mesothelium, but his interpretation

of the embryology of Polygordius (’78), Echiurus (?81) and

Eupomatus (’85) led him to the conclusion that these two mor-

phologically different mesoblasts arise from a common founda-

tion. This view was adopted and developed by the Hertwig

brothers (’81) in their well-known ‘“ Ccelomtheorie,” which, as

Meyer observes, has formed the foundation of all later work on

the mesoderm. Among other investigators who have described

the mesoblast as having a single origin are: Roule (’89, ’94),

Fraipont (’88), Wilson (’89, ’92), Hacker (’95), Burger (’91, 94)

and Rabl (’89, 97). On the other hand, the great majority of

those who have studied the embryology of annelids and mol-

luscs are agreed that the mesenchyme must be regarded as hav-

ing an origin distinct from that of the ccelothel. Although a

few have ascribed an endoblastic source to the former, the con-

census of opinion seems to be at present that it originates from

the ectoblast. This was first described to be the case by

Kleinenberg (’78, ’86)._ Among those who have subsequently

confirmed his conclusions are: Whitman (’87), Berge (’go),

Vejdovsky (’90, 92), Schimkewitsch (’94), Meyer (’o1), and the

extensive list of cytogenists that has already been given.

Treadwell in a discussion of the phylogenetic significance of

the mesoblast takes the stand that “ no hard and fast distinction

can be made between the two forms of mesoblast.’’ He bases

his conclusion on the close association of the ccelomesoblast

and mesenchyme in JWVerezs, Lumbricus and Hydroides as de-

scribed by Wilson and also in Cafzitella (Eisig). This view is

diametrically opposed to that expressed by Meyer (’90, ’01), as

228 TORREY

a result of his extensive investigations of the post-larval devel-

opment of annelids, and by Wilson (’98) from a comparison of

the cell lineage of the mesoblast in platodes and annelids.

Although working from an entirely different point of view, both

of these authors have reached the conclusion that the ecto-

mesoblast (primary mesoblast, Meyer) and the ccelomesoblast

(secondary mesoblast, Meyer) are phylogenetically entirely dis-

tinct. The former has been found to resemble closely in origin

(Lang, Wilson) and in fate (Meyer) the parenchyma of platodes,

while the latter is not represented as such in the flat-worms, but

is a later formation. 7

The great body of embryological facts, it seems to me, is in

harmony with this view and the apparent exceptions emphasized

by Treadwell are not as serious as they may appear at first

sight. Although Wilson (’8g) has described the outwandering

of cells from the anterior part of the mesoblast bands in Lum-

éricus and their probable contribution to the primary muscula-

ture, yet it is also very important to bear in mind that the outer

pair of teloblasts (ectoblastic) in the embryos of certain oligo-

chetes and leeches have been found to give rise to the ring

musculature. Bergh (’90) and Vedovsky (’92) have found this

to be the case in Lumbricus, as has also Vedovsky (’g0) in

Rhynchelnus and possibly Whitman (87) in Clepszne. It is very

possible that in Verezs the true origin of the ectomesoblast has

been overlooked and the mesenchyme-cells, which Wilson

thought were differentiated from the ccelomesoblast bands, may

have come secondarily into close association with them; or,

again, the ectomesoblast may arise very late in the ontogeny,

as Meyer has found to be the case ina number of annelids. As

regards Hydroides, Treadwell calls attention to the fact that,

according to Wilson (’g91), ‘‘the mesenchyme cells graduate

both in form and position into those of the germ bands”’ ; but

such is also the case in 7halassema, where their origin, never-

theless, is entirely distinct. Finally, I think it is generally

agreed that Eisig’s unique description of the origin of the meso-

blasts in Cafztel//a should not form the basis of wide generaliza-

tions until it has been confirmed in that and other forms. It is

EMBRYOLOGY OF THALASSEMA MELLITA 229

possible that he has overlooked the true origin of the ccelomes-

oblast and that what .he describes as such is, in fact, the mesen-

chyme, especially as its origin is very similar to that of Zha/-

assema. Over against this case we may place thirty or more

forms of annelids, where the ccelomesoblast has been shown to

arise from the posterior member of the fourth quartet. I be-

lieve that Treadwell has not sufficiently considered the problem

in concluding that because the trochophore may ‘represent an

ancestral stage in the phylogeny of annelids, the mesodermal

structures found in it undoubtedly represent the mesoderm of

the ancestral forms.”’

Meyer, in his last paper (’o1), has given a most exhaustive

review of the whole mesoderm question and has shown how

strongly the great mass of the evidence, both embryological

and anatomical, points to the conclusion that, in annelids, at

least, there are two entirely distinct forms of mesoblast — the

primary (ectomesoblast) and the secondary (ccelomesoblast). Of

these he considers the primary mesoblast to be phylogenetically

the older and, although as a rule derived from the ectoderm

(Phillodocide, Aphroditide, Eunicide, Chetopteride), ‘ cannot

be considered a morphological unit, but is rather an embryologi-

cal synthetic tissue, in which temporarily the undifferentiated

foundations of very diverse organs and tissues are apparently

united to a whole.’ The ccelomesoblast, on the other hand, is

regarded as a later formation which has originated from gonad

cells. If we add to Meyer’s observations the results of the

study of cell-lineage, his conclusions, I think, are greatly strength-

ened. New light will certainly be thrown on this question by

a study of the cytogeny of some of the lower forms. In this’

connection the observations of Schimkewitsch on the develop-

ment of Dinophilus are, to say the least, very suggestive. He

found in this type two forms of mesoblasts, distinct in origin,

one originating at the posterior end of the embryo and forming

two bands, which later give rise to the gonads and possibly to

certain ventral longitudinal muscles, the other consisting of

scattered cells which have migrated into the cleavage cavity

from the anterior end of the embryo and produce all the mesen-

230 TORREY

chyme. Finally, in the adult, the secondary body-cavity is

represented only by the gonad cavity.

Although far from proven, the gonococle theory, toward the

development of which Meyer has done so much, seems to have

more points in its favor than any of the other theories dealing

with the origin of the mesoblast, and by it many apparent in-

consistencies in the origin and development of mesoblastic

organs may be explained. This is especially true, I think, if we

agree with Kleinenberg (81), Meyer (90) and Eisig (’98) that

the sex cells —the foundation of the later ccelomesoblast —

arose primitively (in a phylogenetic sense) before the somatic

cells had become resolved into the two primary germ layers,

as is the case at present in Volvox.

EMBRYOLOGY OF THALASSEMA MELLITA 231

V. RUDIMENTARY CELLS.

Perhaps the most interesting feature in the cleavage of Zhad-

assema is the seeming prodigality in the formation of cells that

degenerate and are ultimately completely absorbed by the ento-

blast. It is difficult to explain their existence save under the

assumption that they have lost their original functional signifi-

cance and only persist as a survival of an ancestral type of

cleavage. It is interesting to note that some of these cells,

when first formed, differ from their neighbors only in their

much smaller size and not in any special cytoplasmic or nuclear

feature.

The following eleven cells are budded off early enough in

the cleavage to admit of an exact determination of their cell-

lineage and fate. From each of the posterior arms of the cross

mses one cell (1d, 4221, 14.1.221)- (See Pl. I, Fig. 7 and

Text-Fig. 10, 4). They are the same in origin with the cells

which in JVerezs (“nephroblasts’’), Amphitrite and Capitella

form glands. In Podarke, however, they are rudimentary and

have been tentatively described by Treadwell (’o1) as suffering

a like fate to those in Zhalassema. The first dexiotropic divi-

sions of the intergirdle cells of the a, 6 and ¢ quadrants (PI. I,

Fig. 4), as has already been indicated, give rise to three more rudi-

mentary cells (1@,.94.2 10).91.2 14,21,2). In Amphitrite, too,

the cell, 1@,,. ,,2, is entirely rudimentary and the cells, 14,515

and I¢,5;., very small. In Avenicola these same cells are

also very small, with dark staining nuclei. Child (’00) was

not able to determine their fate, but thinks it possible that they

become mucous glands. Another rudimentary cell in 7Zha/-

assema arises in the d@ intergirdle region (1d, , » ,, Pl. II, Fig. 14).

An exactly similar cell in origin and appearance is figured by

Meade ('97) in Ampfitrite. The corresponding cell in the 6

intergirdle region (14,..5,) is also rudimentary in 7halassema

(Pl. I, Fig. 6). The second quartet contributes the following

rudimentary cells, 2@,,, 26.1, 2¢,, and X, 1.1, (Pl. II, Figs.

15, 18, 20 and 21). In addition to these there are several

found during the later development, making a conservative esti-

232 TORREY

mate of the total number at least sixteen. Treadwell has figured

a number of similar cells in Podarke and thinks it very probable

that they also occur in Lepzdonotus.

The fate of all these cells is most remarkable. Soon after

their formation they begin to decrease in size and the nuclei

become still more closely reticulated (Text-Fig. 10, A). After

a time they begin to sink in between the blastomeres (Text-Fig.

10, &) and finally lie inside the cleavage-cavity (Text-Fig. Io,

EMBRYOLOGY OF THALASSEMA MELLITA 233

TEXT-FIGURE Io.

Optical sections of early stages illustrating the origin and fate of the rudimentary

cells, 4, two rudimentary cells as first budded off at the surface; Ag, polar glob-

ules, one inside a cross cell and another within the cleavage cavity. £2, the same

two rudimentary cells sinking toward the cleavage cavity. C, a much later stage,

in which a large number of rudimentary cells are found within the cleavage cavity

and lying on the endodermal cells. JZ, a still later stage showing the rudimentary

cells inside the endodermal cells and undergoing dissolution. £, various stages in

the degeneration of the rudimentary cells.

234 TORREY

C’). By this time their nuclei are mere dots of chromatin and

it is impossible to distinguish them from polar globules (Text- Fig.

10, A), which, in fact, have an evactly similar fate. For a short

time they rest on the entoblast cells (Text-Fig. 10, C) and then

sink into them (Yext-Fig. 10, D), gaining entrance by rupturing

the cell wall. I have seen as many as five inside one entoblast

cell, but they interfere in no way with its later divisions. Once

inside they are quickly absorbed and, in the fourteen hour em-

bryo, they have completely disappeared. ‘This process of absorp-

tion consists first of the breaking down of their walls and then

the complete digestion of what is left of their cytoplasm and

nuclei (Text-Fig; 16; 24).

As far as I know, this is the Ace instance in which, beyond

all doubt, both the origin and the fate of rudimentary cells have

been determined, although similar cells have been described in

several other cases. E. B. Wilson ('92, ’98) first called atten-

tion to them in his description of the very minute cells budded off

from the ccelomesoblast pole-cells of Sfzo and Avicza. Again,

in Crepidula, according to Conklin (’97), the tip cells of the

anterior ends of the cross are very small and insignificant. He

believes that ‘‘in C. plana they are crowded entirely out of the

layer of the ectoblast cells and that they are thrown wholly

away.’ Miss Langenbeck (’98) describes two cells in the

blastoccel of the amphipod, Microdeutopus, which without doubt

have sunk in from the surface layer. They soon begin to

degenerate and finally disappear. The observations of Tread-

well (’o1), Mead (’97) and Child (’00) have already been touched

on. In Asplanchna, according to Jennings (’96) two very small

cells or “vesicles” are budded off from the entoblast entirely

below the surface at the time of gastrulation. He was not

able to determine their fate, but thinks that the whole process is

comparable to the successive formation of polar bodies. Hacker

('99) has grouped all such cells under the category of prepara-

tory or supernumerary divisions. ‘Their origin and fate,’ he

adds, ‘‘is a problem of the highest interest.”’

The behavior of these cells in Zia/assema bears a remarkable

resemblance to that of the padomesoblast (mesenchyme) cells

EMBRYOLOGY OF THALASSEMA MELLITA 235

in Capitella, which have been described by Eisig (’98) as wander-

ing through the entodermal mass and finally emerging as func-

tional mesenchyme-cells. Not alone in behavior, but also in

appearance these cells are strikingly similar in both. Every

step in their degeneration in Zha/assema, however, has been fol-

lowed and there is no doubt of their complete absorption.

Another point of great interest, which should be taken into con-

sideration in an attempt at their interpretation, is the fact that

the cells, 1d,,55, and 1¢,;92;, which are typically rudimentary,

in the radial variety (about 9 per cent. of the embryos) are very

large and apparently entirely capable of function. Again the cell

1d, 4510, Which is as a rule small but functional, may sometimes

be present as a rudiment (cf. Pl. I, Figs. 5,6 and 7). In the first

case, evidently, cells which were once functional have become

functionless and in the second a cell manifests a tendency to

lose its function. From every point of view, accordingly, the

most reasonable explanation of the occurrence and the fate of

these rudimentary cells seems to be that they are vestigial.

Child (’00) has expressed himself as rather sceptical of the

existence of true rudimentary cells. This is natural, as it would be

very difficult to account for their presence according to his theory

of the significance of spiral cleavage. ‘‘If they are formed,” he

says, ‘‘it seems to me that the reason for their formation must

be other than the absence of cytoplasmic material.’ This is

doubtless true, but may we not go further and say, that pos-

sibly they are formed because of the presence of superfluous

cytoplasmic (or nuclear) material. This possibility was indi-

cated by Wilson (’98) several years ago in a paper in which

he has called attention to the fact that we may not only have

“‘ persistence in cleavage of vestigial processes in the formation of

the germ layers”’ (larval mesoblast of annelids and molluscs), but

also ‘‘the persistence in cleavage of vestigial cells” (the rudi-

mentary enteroblasts of Avicza). He further says: ‘ It would

be difficult to explain ancestral reminiscence in cell lineage by

any theory which does not recognize in cell outlines the definite

boundaries of differentiation areas in the developing embryo.”’

Lillie in a recent paper agrees with Wilson that these rudimen-

236 TORREY

tary cells have as true a vestigial significance as the develop-

ment of a tooth germ in a whale embryo.’ With this conclu-

sion, too, the facts, as we find them in Zhalassema, fall in line.

It seems possible that not only the complete reversions to

radial symmetry are ancestrally reminiscent of a former condi-

tion, but also that the radially arranged rudimentary cells may

be reminiscent of the foundations of certain radial organs.

That these cells may have once functioned as mesenchyme is

indicated by their behavior, by the fact that the mesoblast has

a radial origin in the polyclades, as has also, in a measure, the

ectomesoblast of certain annelids and molluscs (Cvepidula, Po-

darke, Thalassema), and lastly, by the fact that the cell which

produces all the ectomesoblast in Umzo (2a, ,,) is very minute in

Amphitrite and entirely rudimentary in 7halassema. As bilat-

erality has been acquired, the function of producing all the ecto-

mesoblast has devolved on other cells. This whole process

is but one chapter in the history of the development of deter-

minate cleavage which finds its highest expression in the telo-

blastic development of oligochztes and leeches. Finally, the

retention of these rudimentary cells in cleavage and the fact

that they occur in exactly the same places in several forms, in-

dicates that the cell itself is of greater importance in the process

of differentiation than some recent writers have been willing to

give it credit.

COLUMBIA UNIVERSITY,

June, 1902.

LITERATURE REFERRED TO

Bergh, R. 8.

‘90 +##Neue Beitrage zur Embryologie der Anneliden. 1. Zur

Entwicklung und Differenzirung des Keimstreifens von

Lumbricus

Letsch. Vf. vwiss, 7 Z001., bd. Ls

Brooks, W. K.

°80 The Development of the Oyster

Studies Biol. Lab. J. Hopkins Univ., Vol. 1

Burger, O.

91 ~+Beitrage zur Entwicklungsgeschichte der Hirudineen. Zur

Embryologie von Nephelis

Zool. Jahrb., Bd. IV

EMBRYOLOGY OF THALASSEMA MELLITA 237

Burger, O.

94 Idem. Zur Embryologie von Hirudo medicinalis und Au-

lastoma gulo

Zettsch. f. wiss. Zool., Bd. LVIII

Carazzi, D.

00 ~=30©d L’embriologie dell’ Aplysia limacina

Anat. Anz., Bd. XVII

Child, C. M.

700 «30S s The Early Development of Arenicola and Sternaspis

Arch. f. Entwick. der Organismen, Bd. IX, Heft 4

Conklin, E. G.

97 ‘The Embryology of Crepidula

Jour. of Morph., Vol. XII

Conklin, E. G.

97 Cleavage and Differentiation

Biol. Lect.

Conn, H. W.

84 Life History of Thalassema. (Abstract)

Studies Biol. Lab. J. Hopkins Univ., Vol. Ill, No. 1

Conn, H. W.

84 Development of Serpula

Zool. Anzeiger, Bd. VII

Conn, H. W.

86 Life History of Thalassema

Studies Biol. Lab. J. Hopkins Univ., Vol. Ul, No. 7

Dahlgrun, W.

701. \+jUntersuchungen iiber den Bau der Excretionsorgane der

Tunicaten

Archiv Micr. Anat., Bd. LVIII

Drasche, C. von.

4 ‘Beitrage zur Entwicklung der Polycheten. Wien

Drew, G. A.

99 Some Observations on the Habits, Anatomy and Embry-

ology of Protobranchia

Anat. Anz., Bd. XV

Eisig, H.

98 «=36.: Zur Entwicklungsgeschichte der Capitelliden

Mitthetl. a. ad. Zool. Stat. Neapel., Bd. XIII

Erlanger, R. v.

91 Zur Entwicklung der Paludina vivipara

Zool. Jahrb., Bd. XVII

Fraipont, J.

gg .Legenre Polygordius. Fauna FloraGolf, Neapel.,Mon. 14

238 TORREY

Goette, A.

91 ~=Bemerkungen iiber die Embryonal entwicklung der Ano-

donta piscinalis

Lewtsch-f.;wiss, Lool,, Wao, TAL

Griffin, B. B.

99 Studies on the Maturation, Fertilization and Cleavage of

Thalassema and Zirphza

Journ. of Morph., Vol. XV

Hacker, V.

95 Die spatere Entwicklung der Polynoé-Larve

Zool. Jahrb., Bd. XVII

Hacker, V.

96 = Pelagische Polychatenlarven

Leisch. f:wiss. Zool. Bd. cat

Hacker, V.

99. ~=Praxis und Theorie der Zellen- und Befruchtungslehre. Jena

Hatschek, B.

‘78 = Studien iiber Entwicklungs geschichte der Anneliden

Arb. Zool. Inst. Wien, Bd. I

Hatschek, B.

81 Ueber Entwicklungsgeschichte von Echiurus

Arb. Zool. Inst. Wien, Bd, Tit

Hatschek, B.

81 Entwicklungsgeschichte von Teredo

Arb. Zool. Inst. Wien, Bd. III

Hatschek, B.

"85 Entwicklung der Trochophora von Eupomatus uncinatus

Arb. Zool. Inst. Wien, Bd. VI

Hatschek, B.

88-91 Lehrbuch der Zoologie. Wien

Heath, H.

99° +=The Development of Ischnochiton

Zool. Jahrb., Bd. XII

Hertwig O. und R.

81 ~=Die Coelomtheorie

Jenaische Zettschr., Bd. XV

Heymons, R.

"93 = Zur Entwicklungsgeschichte von Umbrella mediterranea

Lett. J. miss. Loo bade LV I

Holmes, 8. J.

00 The Early Development Planorbis

Journ. of Morph., Vol. XVI

EMBRYOLOGY OF THALASSEMA MELLITA 239

Holmes, 8. J.

00 = The Early Cleavage and Formation of the Mesoderm of

Serpulorbis squamigerus

Biol. fult.,.Vol. 1, No. 3

Horst, R.

82, On the Development of the European Oyster (Ostrea

edulis )

Quart. Journ. Micro. Sct., Vol. XXII

Jennings, H. 8.

96 =The Early Development of Asplanchna Herrickii

Bull. Mus. Comp. Zool., Vol. XXX, No. 1

Kleinenberg, N.

‘81 Uber die Entstehung der Eier bei Eudendrium

Lettschr. f. wiss. Zool., BA. XXXV

Kleinenberg, N.

86 ~=Die Entstehung des Annelids aus der Larve von Lopado-

rhynchus :

Lettschr. f. wiss. Zool., Ba. X1

Kofoid, C. A.

96 = Early Development of Limax

Bull. Mus. Comp. Zool., Vol. XXVII, No. 2

Kowalevsky, A.

‘71 ~~ Embryologische Studien au Wiirmen und Arthropoden

Mem. Acad. Sci. Petersbourg (7), Tome XVII, No. 12

Kowalevsky, A.

‘72 + Mittheilungen iiber die Entwicklung von Thalassema

ZLettschr. f. wiss. Zool., Bd. XXII

Kowalevsky, A.

83 ~~ Etude sur l’embryogenie du Dentale

Ann. Musée Hist. Nat. Marseille Zool., Tom. I

Langenbeck, C.

‘98 ~=6Formation of the Germ Layers in Microdeutopus gryllo-

talpa costa

Journ. of Morph., Vol. XIV

Lankester, E. R.

75 Contributions to the Developmental History of the Mollusca

Phil. Trans. Roy. Soc. London, Vol. CLXV, Part I

Lillie, F. R.

95 Embryology of the Unionide

Journ. of Morph., Vol. X

Lillie, F. R.

99. ~=Ss Adaptation in Cleavage

Biol. Lect.

240 TORREY

Hie, Fk.

‘01. The Organization of the Egg of Unio

Journ. of Morph., Vol. XVII

Mead, A. D.

‘97 = The early Development of Marine Annelids

Journ. of Morph., Vol. XIII

Mead, A. D.

98 = The Cell Origin of the Prototroch

Biol. Lect.

Meisenheimer, J.

‘01 = Entwicklung von Dreissensia polymorpha

Léischr. f.Wiss. Zoel., ba. LAVX

Metcalf, M. M.

93, = Contributions to the Embryology of Chiton

Studies Biol. Lab. J. Hopkins Univ., Vol. V

Meyer, E.

90. =Die Abstammung der Anneliden

Biol. Centralbl., Bd. X

Meyer, E.

‘01 ~—s Studien iiber der K6rperbau der Anneliden

Mittherl. a. d. Zool. Stat. Neapel, Bd. XIV

Patten, W.

°86. The Embryology of Patella

Arb. Zool. Inst. Wien, Bd. VI

Rabl, C.

’°89. ~=Theorie des Mesoderms

Morph. Jahrb., Bd. XV

Roule, L. |

’°89. ~=Etudes sur le développement des Annélides et en par-

ticulier d’un Oligochete limicole marin (Euchytraeoides

Marioni)

Anns Sa. Nats (7), rome Vil

Salensky, W.

"16 Uber die Metamorphose des Echiurus

Morph. Jahrb., Bd. 11

Schierholz, C.

‘78 Zur Entwicklungsgeschichte der Teich- und Fussmuschel.

Berlin

Schimkewitsch, W.

95 Zur Kenntniss des Baues und der Entwicklung des Dino-

philus von weissen Meere

Lettschr. f, wiss: Lool., Ba. VX

EMBRYOLOGY OF THALASSEMA MELLITA 241

Sigerfoos, C. P.

°95.° =The Pholadidz. I. Note on the Early Stages of Develop-

ment

Johns Hopkins Univ. Cire.

Spengel, J. W.

‘79 ~+Beitrage zur kenntniss der Gephyreen

Mitthetl. a. ad. zool. Stat. Neapel., Bd. I

Torrey, J.C.

‘02, »=The Early Development of the Mesoblast in Thalassema

Anat. Anz., Bd. XXI,'No. 9

Treadwell, A. L.

‘97 ~—s- Cell Lineage of Podarke obscura. Zo06/. Bull., Vol. I

Treadwell, A. L.

98 =Equal and Unequal Cleavage in Annelids

Biol. Lect.

Treadwell, A. L.

01. = The Cytogeny of Podarke obscura Ver.

Journ. of Morph., Vol. XVII

Vejdosvky, F.

‘90-92 Entwicklungsgeschichtliche Untersuchungen. Prag

Whitman, C. O.

‘78 Embryology of Clepsine

Quart. Journ. Micr. Sci., Vol. XVIII

Whitman, C. 0.

‘87 ~=~=Germ Layers in Clepsine

Jour. of Morph., Vol. I

Wierzejski, A.

‘97 += Entwicklung des Mesoderm bei Physa fontinalis

Biol. Centralb., Ba. XVII

Wilson, E. B.

’°89. =The Embryology of the Earthworm

Journ. of Morph., Vol. U1

Wilson, E. B.

‘91 = The Origin of Mesoblast Bands in Annelids

Journ. of Morph., Vol. IV

Wilson, E. B.

"92 The Cell. Lineage of JVerezs

Journ. of Morph., Vol. VI

Wilson, E. B.

"97 Considerations on Cell Lineage

Biol. Leet.

242 TORREY

Wilson, E. B.

98 = Cell Lineage and Ancestral Reminiscence

Ann. New York Acad. Sci., Vol. XI, No. 1

Wistinghausen, C. V.

‘91 ~=Untersuchungen iiber die Entwicklung von: /Verezs Bumer-

ilii

Mittheil. a. d. Zool. Stat. Neapel., Bd. X

Ziegler, E.

°85. = Die Entwicklung von Cyclas cornea Lam.

Leitsthr-f, wss. Zool; Bay AL

EXPLANATION OF PLATES.

All of the following drawings were made from camera outlines and

from preserved material. The mitotic figures are somewhat schema-

tized ; especially as regards the astral rays, which are actually very

indistinct.

PLATE!

Fic. 1. 48 cells forming 56. . Second division of the trocho-

blasts and first division of the intermediate girdle cells.

Fic. 2. 56 cells from the upper pole. The first divison of the

cross cells. Ag, polar globule.

Fic. 3. 60-64 cells. The cross formed.

Fic. 4. 74-80 cells. Rudimentary cells budded off in the pos-

terior arms of the cross and in the anterior and lateral intergirdle

regions.

Fic. 5. About 80 cells. Further divisions in the cross cells.

Fic. 6. Three cells have been added to the prototroch from the

anterior and lateral intergirdle regions — af” to cf’. ar to dr, ro-

sette cells. cv has divided. .

Fic. 7. Latest stage to which the divisions of the cross cells have

been followed. The posterior arms have become conjoined. All

of the rosette cells have divided.

Fic. 8. Posterior view of embryo containing 48-52 cells. Divi-

sions of trochoblasts and intermediate girdle cells. The fourth

quartet has been formed.

Fic. 9. 56 cells from the left side. The third quartet has divided.

Fic. 10. 64 cells from the left side. The primary prototroch

now forms a complete ring. The second quartet has divided off three

rudimentary cells — 2a, , to 2¢, ,.

Fic. 11. Posterior view of 64-cell stage showing the divisions in

the ¢ and @ quadrants. Formation of the small x, , cell.

Fic. 12. Postero-ventral view of an embryo containing 76-80

cells. Further divisions in the X group and also in the third quartet.

(244)

ANNALS N. Y. ACAD. SCI. VOL. XIV! umiecae

», 16 11.2.2.2

—

2b, Mae / b, 2

——.

12 142 22° ey

BAM 1.4.2.2.

= 4

Ree Pa

la N2-----—L fe Bas

pe be,

, , ‘

ANNALS N. Y. ACAD. SCI. VOL. XIV. PLATE I.

. 16 LO

16 112.34

Teri 10, 2,577 : :

112.2)

dpi

Idin223°

11.2,22

ip lin Id yy,

Op on

4 {

: ’ oy oh ON

~~ \ ‘te a \ a | a

= 7

Tine) eee

io <

yee: AY Sk

: ei wey

: SA.8 ped

Pd x ’

a) : x

: 4s i

~ , ¢

\ 23a A «

j =a :

rh) .

\. e

1. :

_. Be Ls \

>.) > | ’ ae

> *! <n \s'

L.£.5 ~~

=: -

‘

i al Ay

sy onal

. 4 ‘

; Pe ad

. 40

\ P

‘3.

im ¥ | a,

; i¢ 3.3 san vasa DA

" i j 4 :

: , i. « yr"

{ gi

} 7 i

< \ .

a 4

‘

- Gu

tee b ee

F ¢ LS

“eg

Sl a

Sh ee

} “ ee.

x eh a,

. ¥ pave < o

na OF ” .

“2 —nn “ z

at a

? t ie

4 aa

: ar

» ’ > i

r! * ; Lf

cap, &

”

(

—

i a

ere wo ar

PLATE. Ut.

Fic. 13. Posterior view of embryo containing 74-80 cells.

Fic. 14. Posterior view of a later stage. Bilateral division of 42.

Rudimentary cell budded off in the @ intermediate girdle region.

Fic. 15. Ventral view of 64-cell stage.

Fic. 16. Ventral lateral view of 86-cell stage. Fifth quartet

forming.

Fic. 17. Ventro-posterior view of 86-cell stage. Further divi-

sions in the X group.

Fic. 18. Ventral view of a later stage. Fifth quartet formed.

Bilateral cleavage of 4d.

Fic. 19. Postero-ventral view of the same stage.

Fic. 20. Postero-ventral view of a slightly later stage. Rudi-

mentary cell budded off in the X group. 4d has divided.

Fic. 21. Beginning of gastrulation. 3¢,.,,, em/, ectomesoblast left

and 3¢,,21;, emr, ectomesoblast right have invaginated. 34,.., emm,

ectomesoblast median is sinking in.

Fic. 22. Fourth quartet has divided. emm, ectomesoblast median,

about to divide. 4 —/, cells beginning to migrate through the dorsal

gap. oes.r, cesophagoblast right.

Fic. 23. Entoblast plate has almost entirely invaginated. 24,,,5

(ves m), cesophagoblast median, has increased in size. Nine-hour

embryo.

Fic. 24. Gastrulation completed. Small entoblasts budded off

from the ccelomesoblast (JZ — 7) cells. Ectomesoblast cells have

all divided. Migration of 4 — 4, cells. oes./, cesophagoblast left.

Ten-hour embryo.

(246)

ANNALS N. Y. ACAD. SCI.

i. te.

Id CORED

11229.. £ Se ; ot a >

=a . Cs 7 . Sf A |

Wd. > Oo PF Tar

: eee

VOL. XI

Xii207 $d. =

rim

PLATE Il.

SOL Ee: Op, £4 j.2

on a = ,

4 (OB “. We ia LB,» _2a

z ae # aA y Py

2 ~Sencrs » '@ », Ba, i»

gi Ra ee, 2a

E y =, a

eae

Re] aa

ae SaaS Siete . Gz

—-

ees

ANNALS N. Y. ACAD. SCI. VOL. XIV.

PLATE Il.

2,21

“2C12

t TA "SCn 124

(€mr)

4d.

(M) 7 , i Anzes un

oe ( \ oss

22 44, 1 ba %u22s

eee

—

42122 Veal

e. aT

‘

eyed z

; i

? d YR. R13 .

; ; é p

| bes

i | Ny de s -

i! \-- We oe

* . ree: +e.

° * a a ‘ - ¥

bs ? tu

a te ee ee ee rite eal ees einen ee oe

a ec

(ch): saan

PUBLICATIONS |

OF THE

~NEW YORK ACADEMY OF SCIENCES

[Lyceum oF NaturaL History 1818-1876]

The publications of the Academy consist of two series, viz :—

(1) The Annals (octavo series), established in 1823, contain

the scientific contributions and reports of researches, together

with the records of meetings, annual exhibitions, etc.

Publication of the Transactions of the Academy was discon-

tinued with the issue of Volume XVI, 1898, and merged in the

Annals. A volume of the Annals will hereafter coincide with

the calendar year and will be distributed in three parts, during

the year. The price of current issues is one dollar per part or

three dollars per volume. Authors’ reprints are issued as soon

as the separate papers are printed, the dates appearing above the

title of each paper.

(2) The Memoirs (quarto series), established in 1895, are is-

sued at irregular intervals. It is intended that each volume shall

be devoted to monographs relating to some particular depart-

ment of science. Volume I is devoted to Astronomical Mem-

oirs, Volume II, to Zoological Memoirs, etc. The price is one

dollar per part, as issued.

All publications will hereafter be sent free to fellows and

-members who desire to receive them, but other fellows and

members will only receive the Records, issued as a separate

from the Annals. The Annals will be sent, as before, to

honorary and corresponding members desiring them.

Subscriptions and inquiries concerning current and back

_ numbers of any of the publications of the Academy should be

_ addressed to THE LIBRARIAN

New York Academy of Sciences

Columbia University

New York City.

PRICES’ OF PUBLICATIONS

Annals of the Lyceum (Vols. I-XI), . . . per Vol., $5.00

Proceedings “ igen MOIS conn oe amare arte che MR UE OD

inane. or the Aeademy (Vols, TAVIS Sie the 25.60

Annals “ ‘Sy (Vols. I--X); ei ES} EEO

Annals <“ s (Vol. XI et seg. ), : 3.00

_ Memoirs “ ney NY T,.Pt. 1, Vol il Pts, L, I, MD),

DEP Ratta ot) sx. 1.00

PART I

me!)

ee ee

é Wie eae) wi

: SF een te es

‘ a Mc git ica ath

=e ‘ es oa che el) wean

a | 2 §

O E Ee =

N igh: ASS

Be aS

: if ra a

(x) os

. | oe :

< ars a is

ee O o

ee ah

—

Von, XIV » PART IV

ANNALS

NEW YORK

ACADEMY OF SCIENCES

Editor:

‘ CHARLES LANE POOR

The New Era Printing Company

Lancaster, Pa,

NEW YORK ACADEMY OF SCIENCES

OFFICERS, 1904

President—EDMUND B. Witson, Columbia University.

Recording Secretary-——HENrY E. CrRAmpton, Barnard College.

Corresponding Secretary—RICHARD E. DonceE, Teachers College.

Treasurer—CHARLES F. Cox, Grand Central Depot.

Librarian—Rarru W. Tower, American Museum.

FEditor—CHARLES LANE Poor, 4 East 48th Street.

SECTION OF ASTRONOMY, PHYSICS, AND CHEMISTRY

Chairman—CHARLES LANE Poor, 4 East 48th Street.

Secretary—C. C. TROWBRIDGE, Columbia University.

SECTION OF BIOLOGY

Chairman—\L,. M. Unvrerwoop, Columbia University.

Secretary —M. A. BicEtow, Teachers College.

SECTION OF GEOLOGY AND MINERALOGY

Chairman—JAMES F. Kemp, Columbia University.

Epmunp O. Hovey, American.Museum of Natural

History.

Secretary:

SECTION OF ANTHROPOLOGY AND PSYCHOLOGY

Chairman—F. J. k. WoopsripGeE, Columbia University.

AMES E. Loucu, School of Pedagogy, New. York

‘University.

Secretary

SESSION OF 1904

The Academy will meet on Monday evenings at 8.15 o'clock,

from October to May, in the American Museum of Natural —

History, 77th Street and Central Park, West.

By 3 fC eae

me ee re ea eo

. A

b +e

[ANNALS N. Y. Acap. Sci., Vol. XIV, No. 4, pp. 247-318, March 22, 1904. ]

Pot GHOLOGY OF THE: SAN JOSE DIS TRICE,

TAMAULIPAS, MEXICO

GEORGE [. FINLAY

(Read April 20, 1903)

[Pirates VIII—-XVIIT]

CONTENTS

PAGE

Peeamtrconuction> Acknowledement.......ccsccn-sccciense cnessscencoves hatewhe ances 248

SG RGeTAOly I UNAINBGS PCRUITES (0.5.25 eecceecooscncesces apiece rene eeseasore 249

SE rar A Dy ATIC! SITUCUULE. <0... y.cncuctinevfeneesosn sandy: seceaesveneanatesesaadcaass 253

NR aM ECA ESL ERCIUE go) fo sletaile.c s vin aia tieisicinsig wid sin aie Alans » sisieina ay sabiaSenesricesacwevensisa 254

etoile melations Of tHe LOMEOUS ROCKS. 6 ove cecsvcccesneetesncescd tester accesses 255

RRA Y I. y hs is sauient mModlddo swine dddedeideadeudecestecces Wei eric cbiacen 257

eee hee Cet INDIE) UVES oy <.cen acca sat cca voe Rocccsrinenessednaeans 100d cesees 257

i, Nepbelite syenite. General’ DesScriptien :........jccscoceadscsessees 260

ALATA IROL OC. Co anc nie eee ae ee conicinie a ccoeaisaetcnsenesmaavess 260

Pee PaCON ON LAM Me viet ssid sacaeie siavssncsarscavsdodevenisence 261

Gay LCSHe V CEG Sse oh eee ane enietAs, shes es as aantecsseeuscecesane 263

die Mesa V EFC y type SSI FACIES: ie. c.06 cc0css acscectscucensens 264

Analysis by Dr. H. S. Washington. Calculations........ 266

SES GS i Ae BG og A A OR 0 267

SpE VIS ti IU ALOU AION er peviabine Sinica cathe weeccceaatasien cxcesslveavee 268

em EPL VIC MU IESiee tea eee wennaiedncpacd icucasiovnseccercrepecoeseseed jseves 269

1. Andesite....... Peet cee eS vinhicselsv ovelseesl ecectnare vawenwans 270

eR ENS VET eee atoetecdaUsyies screenees ccuccetesuse ‘acocseus 270

RN Te OIRO Gs cre cede eu kde uicm Sam nagcascdeecdene stalnds sesescues 272

POEM Si eT MO RICMALIONS, .. oo ccsacsccencsansecnsssessvessseness'e 27%

A aR ean ern valyciacieaedGiets wok asidveuuniess £dss sees 273

I RPTL PINE, Bata cists Suis c'oece -lometied ov sieniesingn rons’ o4e yasiene 273

Pe RUAN PMSA SIO eae Sedans gia'n'is » 2 vardip dv 6 xn o> sles oid oaisnd wnw'siniiues 275.

Re ah Soe eae oeinins.\n'e sp ac cokeie'vsies su pein stig nucinca son aavies 277

Sm A Oe UST ds wuicin nian ce tin sone de sicaresinedssesincesonsias cess 278:

Rt ee eset occ sacdioseas we nes seb eanincsvacdvece.sasace 278.

a DN ERR ee aha cdi Ho nahin nh'<ishindn's wnpinlnng vena sede deccana sy suse. 280,

@, santa Rita Type...:.2.: Reece rst nnctnt = Uy tivohsn. watitcaheipalsiesen se 280

MT OND cera gh oy Sa taa viens. ove wae ares te sijenasslecn ened nstesines 282

eM iat CALGULAMIONE Ss ycesepsdnecacecseasinevareeseess acnene 282

247

ANNALS N. Y. AcAD. Sci., XIV, March 22, 1904—17.

248 FINLAY

2. Analcite Tinguaite ...4 0:22. .c.eacpueerece sea nena mane eee eee 282

@.°MtsAnmadillos: Vypeies aa-rrescesees dhs oss ease ote eee 282

b. GOLONAEL Y PE... ozecahancesoeaee eetasen cere ne eee eee 283

Analysis by Dr. H. S. Washington. Calculations. <:.......... 285

Bo CaMmptomite yess 0, b aodeecvesemcsanecacae tae Secene a etan eee eee oeeEee 285

@. oane@arlos, ly pe.-sacsssencocsene hash eawasimsecdaey bee waasda nena 285

b, Gaga Grande: “Py pe xneseseenatcs tion poeaiah eee eee eee 287

én ninco Uy pe... say coos eceeae cae ae caste eos nee 289

Analysis.’ Calculations: G51) srcesacsseseceeeee: ee eee 289

Az NOSES os. cccensdeednasn cemented eeenes enact scenes hee LEER OnE eeE 290

5. LAmbureite. 2.25; sc<cee in siow Gee op See Sock yoda nelaaeleen ec arene eae onee 291

VII. Chemical Relations of the San José Rocks.............. Gees atoh ee rseaN eee 293

1. INTRODUCTION. ACKNOWEEDGMENAS

In 1899, Mr. E. D. Self, a graduate of the School of Mines

of Columbia University sent a small suite of peculiar eruptive

rocks, which occur near the mines at San José, Tamaulipas,

Mexico, to Professor Kemp. They were at once recognized as

tinguaite and nephelite syenite, of great scientific interest. A

second shipment from Mr. Self of a larger series showed the

presence of camptonite and andesite. In December, 1901, the

writer accompanied Professor Kemp to San José with the ob-

ject of studying the copper ores and the neighboring eruptive

rocks. It was arranged that the writer should take up the

petrographic investigation of the latter, and the results are here

submitted. He cannot sufficiently acknowledge his indebted-

ness to Professor Kemp, not only for the opportunity so gener-

ously given him of studying the rocks petrographically, but

also for encouragement of every kind during his work. Every

facility was afforded him by Mr. Self, to whom his grateful

acknowledgments are due, as also to Mr. W. H. Nichols, Jr.,

president” of the San Carlos Copper Company: |) Dr pies:

Washington very kindly analyzed specimens of the nephelite

syenite, and of the tinguaite. The writer is anxious to express

his obligations to him for this, and for invaluable assistance

in the analytical work and calculations. The work was carried

on in the geological laboratory of Columbia University.

GEOLOGY OF THE SAN JOSE DISTRICT 249

If. TOPOGRAPHY

The town of San José, on the property owned by the San

Carlos Copper Company, lies in an elliptical depression narrowly

bounded by mountains on every side. The valley occupies

about nine square miles. Its lowest point is 2,250 feet above

the sea. The interior rounded hills near its center are five and

six hundred feet higher. Anacuas and Ladinas, which shut in

the view to the north are limestone mountains reaching altitudes

of 3,000 and 3,200 feet respectively. The sag between them

is inconsiderable, but there is a deep cut in the ridge immedi-

ately to the east of Anacuas. The road from San José to the

town of Linares on the line of the Mexican Gulf Railway fol-

lows the main stream channel through this valley. Immedi-

ately to the east of San José is a line of mountains stretching for

four miles from Mt. Anacuas tothe south. Mt. Armadillos, which

obtains an elevation above sea-level of 3,500 feet, is the highest

and most striking point to the east. (See Pl. XV.) On the north-

western and western sides of the hollow in which San José lies,

Mt. Tinaja, altitude 3,400 feet, and Mt. Parrefio, altitude 3,500

feet, stand forth prominently as the highest points in the ridge

which extends for seven miles southwardly from Mt. Ladinas.

From Mt. Parrefio it continues in that direction for a mile and

a half until it meets the line of the Baril Mountains almost at

a right angle. The Baril range terminates in two bold crags

on the east where it is separated from Mt. Armadillos by a deep

river valley. It extends westwardly from this point for a dis-

tance of two and a half miles with an average elevation of 4,800

feet to Mt. Baril, shutting in the San José valley on the south.

From Mt. Baril the ridge turns to the southwest, becomes ex-

tremely sharp, and after extending for two miles in this direc-

tion bends in a great half circle and joins the northeastern spur

of the Pic de Diablo. This mountain is 6,000 feet high. Its

summit is formed by the union of several extremely sharp al-

most inaccessible craggy ridges. Its northern face which is

bold and picturesque, looks down on the deep rounded valley

that has been carved out of the mountain mass by the two

250 FINLAY

forks of the Arroyo Grande. The north fork of this stream

heads up under Mt. Baril and the Baril Range forms the divide

on the north between it and the San José valley. The south

fork of the Arroyo Grande has its source under the divide

formed by the continuation southwestwardly of the Baril Range.

The bottom of the valley of the Arroyo Grande is nearly three

thousand feet lower than the Pic de Diablo. By the profound

erosion which has taken place in this mountain valley the divide

between the streams flowing eastwardly from the San Carlos

Range and those which flow westwardly has been pushed far to

the west. At the head of the Bocca de Alemos Arroyo, which is

the stream in the next great valley to the south, the main divide

has been driven well over toward the eastern side of the range.

(See Pl. XVIII.) The valley of the Bocca de Alemos Arroyo

opens from a rock-walled canyon, as one proceeds up stream into

a broad elliptical amphitheater covering about six square miles.

This great depression lies well in toward the center of the moun-

tain mass. From the Pic de Diablo the San Carlos Range grad-

ually declines toward the southeast. It extends in this direction

for nine or ten miles from the Bocca de Alemos, and through-

out its course exhibits the characteristic mountain forms which

are found in the long lines of precipitous crags and sharp trail-

ing ridges of the Pic de Diablo. The San Carlos Mountains,

with their foot-hills, are a unit on the great plains of north-

eastern Mexico. (See Pl. XVI.) The lesser mountains which

border on the central chain commonly show forms of high re-

lief. When they have been carved out of sedimentary rocks

their sides are invariably steep. They are at times precipitous

along lines of faulting. Their tops are continued by three or

four shoulders as pyramidal forms. When composed of igne-

ous rock they are often nearly perfect cones. The lowest out-

lying spurs of the range run down to the plains in rounded

contours, their line of slope being that of a parabola. The

San Carlos mountain mass is separated from the Sierra Madre

Mountains by a great plain, extending far to the northeast and

to the southwest. The distance across it between the two

ranges is fifty miles. When one travels across this plain it is

fd) |

GEOLOGY OF THE SAN JOSE DISTRICT 2

seen not to be a unit, for erosion has proceeded far enough to

level away a considerable space on either side of the main rivers

and lesser streams. These level stretches are all situated at the

same altitude. The ridges and rounded buttes which stand

above them rise to a uniform height so that their tops are parts

of a second common plane.

The mountain slopes of the interior salle in which San José

is situated are nearly as steep as loose material can stand. The

arroyos have commonly made V-shaped cuts with vertical

walled trenches at the point of the V. The climatic conditions

which affect erosion are peculiar, and deserve to be mentioned.

The surrounding country is very dry, almost arid, but the San

Carlos Mountains are high enough to be often surrounded by

clouds. The dews are commonly heavy, and slight showers

may fall once or twice in a fortnight, but the main portion of

the annual rain supply comes down in one or two weeks of hard

rain. . At such times the torrents are immediately concentrated

in the mountain gullies, and twenty minutes after the first drops

fall the streams in the center of the valley begin to rise. Many

which are dry throughout the greater part of the year then

carry three or four feet of water, and their currents are so rapid

that they are able to urge along bowlders which are over two

feet across. With continued rain the streams may rise five and

six feet, and be able to transport a great amount of detrital ma-

terials. Fifty thousand tons were removed in this way from a

mine dump in twenty-four hours.

The streams in that portion of the valley which is near the

town of San José and immediately to the northwest of it, have

‘lowered their beds for 15 or 20 feet through a rudely stratified

deposit of angular and subangular rock fragments. This rep-

resents the accumulation at low levels of the loosened material

which is everywhere in process of transit down the steep slopes

in the central portions of the valley. The andesite, which is the

country rock here, is capped by a very scanty cover of soil in

most places, while over wide stretches the bed rock comes to

the surface. This is covered uniformly by fragments which

have weathered away from its superficial portions. These have

252 FINLAY

a maximum size of six inches. Under the action of gravity,

and the occasional urging of torrential rains they are slowly

traveling down to the low ground in the valley bottoms. The

conditions by which weathering goes on in the San José region

are those in which a prominent part is played by the daily tem-

perature changes. Even in winter the extreme of cold is sel-

dom much below the freezing point, but the air is dry and the

nights are invariably cool. The maximum diurnal temperature

change in the exposed rock masses is not less than go° F.

There can be no doubt that in the San Jose district that form

of weathering which is accomplished by the alternate expansion

and contraction of rock masses by heat and cold is of unusual

importance. The riving action of frost is here reduced toa

minimum. Inthe Baril Mountain range many great scales of

the nephelite syenite have been stripped away from the exposed

masses.

The drainage of the San José valley is toward the north by a

stream which runs along the eastern flank of Mt. Anacuas, and

to the east by a trunk stream which leaves the valley under Mt.

Ladinas. The divide between the two systems coincides very

nearly with a line drawn from Mt. Armadillos to Mt. Baril.

About a quarter of the whole valley is drained by the second

stream. Many of the lesser divides are mere knife edges and

the Baril Range which lies between the drainage of the San José

valley and those streams which flow into the north fork of the

Arroyo Grande is so narrow that any further cutting must lower

its crest line. At no point, however, except near Mt. Ladinas

and Mt. Anacuas, have the arroyos which are everywhere gnaw-

ing headward against the ridge surrounding the valley of San

José succeeded in tapping its drainage.

The Arroyo Grande rises against the Pic de Diablo six miles

to the south of San José and takes an easterly course. (See Pl.

XVII.) The amphitheater which it drains, with the open valley

before it, bears a curious superficial resemblance to the cirques

and tributary valleys in a country which has been the home of

vigorous local glaciers.

The Bocca de Alemos Arroyo rises beyond the Pic de Diablo

GEOLOGY OF THE SAN JOSE DISTRICT 253

to the south. It receives the drainage from a much larger area

than the Arroyo Grande does, and makes its way to the plains

to the west through an extended canyon cut in limestone. The

interior valley at its head is similar to that about San Jose.

Le SiRALIGR APY. sc tRUCTURE

It will be seen by an inspection of the map that the sedimen-

tary rocks surround the central mass of andesite, adjacent to

the town of San José, almost entirely. The Baril Range ap-

pearing on the south is nephelite syenite. The sedimentary

series about San José is composed of limestone and shale. The

blue limestone is the important member of the series. Itisa

heavy bedded rock, in regular, gently dipping layers, capping

the andesite on mounts Parreno, Tinaja, Ladinas, Anacuas and

Armadillos. The limestone is siliceous, and has a dense even

grain. It scarcely ever shows traces of organic life. Two

poorly preserved fossils were found in it, a belemnite and an

exogyra. It is a part of the great mass of Cretaceous sedi-

ments in eastern Mexico. Rarely shaly layers, an inch or less

in thickness, are met in the limestone. They were carefully

examined for fossils but none were found. The limestone once

extended over the entire San José region. It has been stripped

away on all sides from the andesite beneath it. The dips, as

indicated on the map, are radially outward from San Jose at

every point. They average nearly 35°. The mass of andesite

is a laccolith. These relations are expressed in the sections

[Plate II]. A few small outliers of the limestone have been

left standing over the andesite near San José. A much larger

remnant is found a mile to the south above Bretafia Creek.

Three or four small outliers, besides these, are found to the

south near the Baril Range. These are all identical with the main

body of limestone. Like it they are but slightly affected, near

the contacts, where they stand against the igneous rock. Rarely,

the limestone is changed to marble for a foot and a half from

the contact. Smaller limestone inclusions in the andesite have

been thoroughly metamorphosed and made over into garnet

254 FINLAY

(grossularite) and vesuvianite. These are found by the score

over the whole region. They offer most interesting problems

in contact metamorphism. The main mass of the limestone

gives evidence of the dynamic effects of laccolithic intrusion.

The siliceous bands, which appear as dense flinty included

masses half an inch thick and a foot or more in length may

often be seen to have been broken and faulted repeatedly.

These effects were not observed at a distance from the andesite.

It is impossible to say how thick the cover over the laccolith

was. It is believed that the igneous rock was viscous rather

than liquid. The amount of silica present, sufficient to allow

for the formation of free quartz, is evidence in favor of this view.

The laccolithic intrusion is of comparatively small extent with

moderately high doming. No evidence could be gathered

which would help decide the question as to whether or not the

incoming of the molten rock was aided by the relief from pres-

sure consequent to the initial stages of anticlinal folding. The

limestone at a short distance from San Jose lies nearly hori-

zontal, but the shaly member of the series constantly shows

pressure effects. Exposures of this rock are found to the east

of the Pic de Diablo, replacing the limestone in the foothills of

the San Carlos Mountains. It is here a drab or gray coarse

shale, thinly bedded, and everywhere broken by countless joint

planes. These give it a platy parting horizontally. The ver-

tical joints are frequently so numerous as to cut the shale up

into small pieces. These fragments two inches or more in di-

ameter are quickly broken out and rounded by the agencies of

weathering.

In the slopes of Mt. Ladinas, and on Mt. Armadillos, as

well as various points to the southwest and southeast of it the

andesite has broken through the limestone cover in the form of

dikes.

FY. STREASE ADIUSTREE

The phenomena of drainage peculiar to eroded laccoliths

have recently been treated in a paper by: Dr TA. jageane jan

in the Twenty-first Annual Report of the U.S. Geological Sur-

GEOLOGY OF THE SAN JOSE DISTRICT 255

vey, on “The Laccoliths of the Black Hills.” The laws gov-

erning drainage changes on eroded laccoliths are there devel-

oped in a most interesting manner. The drainage of the San

José region is similar to that of the Citadel Rock type, but at

San José two originally radial streams have taken possession of

the dome and cut into the exposed mass of andesite. The

stream which flows past Mt. Anacuas is working at a lower

level than that one which lies beside Mt. Laureles. The divide

between the two drainage systems is slightly to the northeast of

a line joining Mt. Armadillos and Mt. Baril. It is a low divide,

and with a few feet of forward cutting capture of the Laureles

drainage would result.

fete RELATIONS OF THE IGNEOUS ROCKS

The igneous rocks of the San José region are granitoid nephe-

lite syenite and diorite, andesite, effusive basalt, and dikes of

tinguaite, diabase, camptonite and vogesite.

The nephelite syenite appearing over the southern portions of

the map is continued southward in the San Carlos Mountains

beyond the limits of the sheet for fifteen miles. The andesite

touches it in a fairly even east-and-west line along the northern

slopes of the Baril Range. At the contact the effects of quick

chill in the andesite are seen. The rock at this point is apha-

nitic, although elsewhere uniformly coarse-grained, as is com-

mon in laccolithic masses. The nephelite syenite is older than

the andesite. It is probable that the main mass of the San

Carlos mountains was faulted up through the sedimentary series.

The limestones and shales, in every part of the region which

was visited, are stripped back from the nephelite syenite, and the

actual contact between this rock and the sedimentary beds was

not found.

There are many slight faults in the San José region. It is

probable that some of the lesser stream courses have been

directed by them. There is no break between the nephelite

syenite and the andesite by faulting. The latter rock would

seem to have come in on the edge of the nephelite syenite under

256 FINLAY

the limestone cover. It is also later than the exposures of

diorite indicated on the map along the road leading to the Ve-

gonia Mine, and in the stream-way a mile to the northeast of

San Jose. The andesite has sent numerous small dikes into the

diorite. This rock is met in three rounded bosses, enclosed by

the andesite, and much weathered. It is often friable, and

readily breaks up into a rusty brown soil like that which is fur-

nished by the weathering of diabase.

On the eastern slope of the San Carlos range, and five miles

from San José to the south, there is met a lava flow of basalt.

The upper surface of the lava field, which is six miles long and

a mile in width, is rough and vesicular. Much has been car-

ried away from its surface by erosion. The body of the rock

in the field is dense and aphanitic, rarely glassy. The ba-

salt is black, at times with a slightly vitreous luster. It is of

course much more recent than the massive nephelite syenite

down whose flanks it flowed, and it is presumably younger than

the diorite and the dike rocks. None of these were found cut-

ting it. Nocinder cone could be located in connection with it,

if one ever existed.

The dikes, which are very numerous throughout the dis-

trict, are of tinguaite, camptonite, diabase and vogesite. They

vary in width from half an inch to ten or twelve feet. They

are usually found but slightly inclined away from the vertical.

The tinguaites are distinct in field habit from all the others.

They are uniformly colored green. Two types are found

among them —those which carry conspicuous phenocrysts of

sanidine, and those which are aphanitic, and are characterized

by showing no porphyritic developments in the hand specimen.

No tinguaite dikes were found cutting the nephelite syenite.

Where they lie in the limestone they are seen to have had

almost no effect upon it. The blue sedimentary rock continues

up to the contact without being changed in any way. Two

very large tinguaite dikes are indicated on the map in the

midst of the andesite. The longer of them runs for two and a

half miles. It carries phenocrysts of sanidine, by which its

even clear green color is mottled with white. Its outcrop

GEOLOGY OF THE SAN JOSE DISTRICT 257

appears across the country in a line of huge rounded bowlders

which lie four or five feet above the andesite. A second dike,

two miles long, cuts the first almost at a right angle. Numer-

ous other dikes similar to these in field habit but smaller are

given on the map. It is not known whether they are older

than the basic series of dikes or not, since the members of the

one are not found intersecting those of the other.

The basic dikes present considerable variety. They lie in

the nephelite syenite and in the andesite and diorite. They are

not found cutting across each other. None were met crossing

the flow of basalt. The camptonite dikes are as common as

those of diabase. The vogesite dikes are rare. The most in-

teresting of these is found along Bretanfa Creek half a mile

southeast of Mt. Parreno. Its appearance in the field is like

that of coarse diabase, but the feldspar proves to be orthoclase

and the dark silicate appears under the microscope as green

fibrous hornblende.

The order of succession among the igneous rocks of the San

José region is, therefore, so far as known, beginning with the

oldest, as follows:

1. Nephelite syenite and diorite.

2. Andesite.

3. Basalt, tinguaite, camptonite, diabase and vogesite.

V1. PETROGKAPH Y

A. THE GRANITOID TYPES

The granitoid rocks of the San Jose district are nephelite

syenite, exposed throughout the San Carlos Mountain range,

and diorite. The former may at times be free from nephelite

and then appears locally developed as true syenite. The dior-

ite is a medium-grained rock which is only found as isolated

patches underlying the andesite where the laccolithic mass has

been deeply eroded. Dikes and offshoots of the andesite cut

through the diorite, which antedates the formation of the lacco-

lith. The diorite has diabasic affinities.

Nephelite syenite, the product of long-continued, deep-seated

258 FINLAY

cooling in magmas which are of medium percentages in silica,

and contain large amounts of alumina and the alkalies, with low

iron, lime and magnesia, has thus far been reported from but

few localities in North America. It is found at Montreal, and

in the county of Dungannon, Ontario, Canada; near the town

of Litchfield, in Maine ; on Salem Neck, and at Marblehead,

in Massachusetts. It is met with at Red Hill, New Hampshire.

A great dike-like mass occurs near Beemerville, New Jersey.

Nephelite syenite has a large development near Magnet Cove,

Arkansas, and the rock has likewise been described from Crip-

ple Creek, Colorado, and from the trans-Pecos region of west-

ern Texas. Lawson’s nephelite-pyroxene-malignite from the

Rainy River district, Ontario, Canada, is a nearly related type.

Similar occurrences of nephelite syenite and related rocks have

been reported from the provinces of Sao Paulo, Rio de Janeiro,

and Minas Geraes in Brazil by Derby.

The San José nephelite syenite is remarkable for its uniform

character over large stretches. In the region studied it has not

been split up into widely separated types such as are usually

found where similar magmas have consolidated. Over nine

tenths of the San José district it is a medium-grained, light or

dark gray rock resembling granite. It is leucocratic and dull-

looking by reason of the oily luster of the nephelite contained

init. The prisms and aggregates of the ferro-magnesian min-

erals are jet black, sharply outlined and in strong contrast with

the lighter feldspars. Honey yellow, lozenge-shaped crystals

of titanite are always found. Jt is only rarely that portions of

the mass where the single crystals are locally developed in large

size are observed, but individuals of orthoclase are sometimes

an inch and a half in length; in other localities the basal sec-

tions of hornblende are three quarters of an inch in diameter,

and rectangular masses of nephelite may be half as long again.

Black fine-grained basic segregations, like the knots in gran-

ite, are characteristic of certain limited tracts where they are so

numerous as to give the nephelite syenite a mottled appearance.

They are at times elliptical and again angular, and are found in

all sizes up to five or six inches. They may be arranged in

GEOLOGY OF THE SAN JOSE DISTRICT 259

bands with great regularity, so as to cause the rock to resemble

gneiss.

The San José nephelite syenite carries a comprehensive series

of the commoner rock-making minerals at nearly every locality

which was visited. Feldspar, nephelite, amphibole and pyrox-

ene are the usual essential components of the rock. Mica is

rare as an accessory constituent, while titanite, magnetite and

apatite are common. No sodalite, cancrinite, garnet, calcite,

olivine, lavenite or wollastonite was found. The essential min-

eralogy lies between widely varied amounts of orthoclase and

nephelite with soda augite and brown barkevikitic hornblende.

Plagioclase is rarely present. Mica is never an important

constituent.

Varieties occur where by the disappearance of nephelite the

rock is a typical syenite. Again by the coming in of plagio-

clase it approaches litchfieldite. One variant from the normal

type very low in orthoclase consisting principally of nephelite,

hornblende and augite marks the passage over to the ijolites.

The San José nephelite syenite bears some resemblance to

the Red Hill, New Hampshire, rock, but it does not carry soda-

lite. It differs from the Litchfield and Dungannon occurrences

in its field habit, for it is never so coarse as these rocks are.

Nor is it except in rare cases so poor in the dark silicates. It

is unlike the Dungannon rock by reason of its large content of

orthoclase, and as being so poor in mica. It closely parallels

some of the more acid varieties from Magnet Cove, but its dark

silicates, though sharply automorphic, are not developed in such

perfection. Again the basic portions of the Mexican rock

might almost pass for certain facies of the Beemerville nephe-

lite syenite. The latter is commonly darker by reason of the

dusty iron inclusions which crowd its feldspars. This character

is never seen in the San José specimens. The rock was no-

where observed to grade into porphyritic varieties as would

seem to be the case at Beemerville.

The nephelite syenite in the San José district has not suffered

metamorphism. It never displays a schistose structure. The

effects of mechanical strains are not shown in thin sections.

260 FINLAY

Inclusions of another rock were not observed. The Mexican

nephelite syenite is a dense compact rock and its specific gravity

is high. Descriptions of the four chief types in the San Jose

district follow below.

1. NMephelite Syenite.

(2) Baril Type.

This variety of the nephelite syenite is exposed in the Baril

range just east of the mountain of that name. In the hand

specimen it is dark gray, with the colorless constituents in ex-

cess. It is fine-grained, and exhibits the usual non-porphyritic

granitoid texture. Nephelite is present in small amounts only,

and this variety of the rock lacks the characteristic greasy look

which that mineral commonly imparts to it. White feldspar is

a prime constituent, and with it are flashing black crystals of

amphibole and pyroxene, and honey yellow grains of titanite.

Examination with the microscope shows that this variety of

the nephelite syenite contains orthoclase, nephelite, hornblende,

augite, titanite, magnetite, apatite and pyrite. Of these the first

two make up perhaps 65 per cent. of the rock. The orthoclase,

which is far more abundant than the nephelite, has, as a rule, a

glassy habit. It is often much clouded over with inclusions,

which are seen with high powers to be stubby prisms, brown

and yellowish-green. They lie in the direction of the basal

cleavage. A second cleavage at right angles to this is well

developed. There is evidence that all the orthoclase crystals

were not contemporaneous. Now and then partly automorphic

individuals may be observed standing against others quite dif-

ferent from them in habit, owing to incipient kaolinization.

Intergrowths between the feldspar and the nephelite are fre-

quently seen, with irregular boundary lines between the two

minerals. |

The nephelite cannot readily be distinguished from the ortho-

clase except by its interference figure. It lacks the two systems

of cleavage cracks, however, which show in the feldspar, and

such cracks as do occur are very irregular. The mineral is

clear and glassy. It is often filled with inclusions essentially

like those in the orthoclase. (See Pl. IX, fig. 1.) .

GEOLOGY OF THE SAN JOSE DISTRICT 261

The hornblende crystals tend to be automorphic. Cross-sec-

tions are octagonal by the equal development of prism and pina-

coidal faces, rather than six-sided, as is usual where (100) is

suppressed. Terminal planes were not observed. The pleo-

chroism in certain instances is a = seal brown, b = yellowish-

green, ¢ = light brown. Changing conditions in the composition

of the magma are indicated by the dark green borders which

usually surround the brown hornblendes. They are younger

than the augite.

This mineral, which is much more abundant than the amphi-

bole, is pleochroic, between olive green and dull green. Its

surface is mottled by color changes in tones of green indicative

of differences in chemical composition. The central portions of

crystals are often tinged with violet. The short stubby prisms

show poorly developed forms.

Apatite in six-sided prisms with perfect basal cleavage is

common. The cryStals are .4 mm. or less in length. They

favor association with the dark silicates, as does also the mag-

netite. This mineral is in round grains .3 mm. across. Tita-

nite is important in the rock. Its crystals are often 1.2 mm. in

length. They are gray or nearly colorless. The Baril nephe-

lite syenite contains numerous small grains of pyrite dissemi-

nated through it.

(0) Arroyo Grande Type.

The variety of nephelite syenite here described occurs midway

between the Mesa Verde and Mt. Baril on the ridge overlooking

the valley of the Arroyo Grande to the south. Its field habit is

that of a very light gray rock in which the dark silicates make

up only a very small portion of the whole. In the hand speci-

men the nephelite is very prominent, contrasting strongly by

reason of its oily appearance with the kaolinized feldspar. With

the aid of a pocket lens twinning may be observed on the ortho-

clase. Some titanite may also be seen occurring close beside

the stray flecks of darker minerals. The texture is granitic

with no porphyritic developments, and the rock is medium-

grained.

Microscopic Characters. — Under the microscope the essential

262 FINLAY

minerals are seen to be orthoclase plagioclase and nephelite.

Augite is rare and no hornblende was observed. Magnetite,

titanite, apatite and epidote are the accessories. Measurements

were made by using the micrometer eye-piece to determine the

relative proportions in which these minerals are present. Some-

what over one hundred times the grain was recorded and the

assignments to orthoclase and nephelite were constantly checked

by interference figures. The result is given below.

Orthoelase: Jy..cewne sicgeseun seaseeteer sean eee eee net meee 60

PlaStOClASe”: Fcc seas ca deugade aaeaeeapnden sees ace e een ees 5

Iie phe lite cikis Sua sidcioes Sonia none ssncomenmmareeceoeancasenaarees 25

PUGTLE Si oo hors ar eaie ncvnei: /vedlasipemutecton ben ceeh OR ene a eeeen nets I

MA SMELLS mince csieniet siscawoecismccioune tes eeeanenes deemeranetes 8

PRRANIIEE. aie et avscesoss socsatdcae monte cree eee ecm ee ee vi

A VETAG Gu SLAIN 5 civisveaniianenseeceu ne ease ea eters .36 mm.

The large amount of feldspar and nephelite in this rock with

not more than Io per cent. of ferromagnesian minerals is very

striking. The large amount of magnetite present is also note-

worthy. Hornblende was not observed.

The orthoclase occurs as a rule in simple crystals, less often

in carlsbad twins, kaolinized and earthy looking. It presents at

times rectangular boundaries. Cleavage cracks, most numer-

ous parallel to the base, are unusually well developed, with a

second set of cleavage cracks parallel to (o10). The angle

between the two cleavages when they appear on sections ap-

proximately parallel to (O10) is 65°, or nearly that of the angle

8 for orthoclase.

The plagioclase, which marks by its presence the passage to

the variety of nephelite syenite known as litchfieldite, is albite,

in automorphic crystals, twinned in excessively fine lamelle.

Like the orthoclase it is often much altered.

The nephelite is older than the orthoclase as being, fre-

quently, entirely surrounded by it. The crystals are I mm. in

length and show a strong tendency toward an automorphic

habit. Their substance is fresh, so that they may usually be

separated from the feldspars by this character. The cleavage

cracks, extinctions and figure on the basal section are the usual

ones:

GEOLOGY OF THE SAN JOSE DISTRICT 263

The soda augite which occurs so sparingly in this variety of

the nephelite syenite is clear green in color. Its crystals are

small and irregularly bounded. They are conspicuously pleo-

chroic, apple green to brown. Titanite is found as a rule close

beside the magnetite. Reaction rims between the latter mineral

and feldspar are occasionally seen. Apatite is rare. Epidote

is present in minute amounts.

This variety of the nephelite syenite occurs immediately to

the east of the Mesa Verde. Seen in the hand specimen it is

of a dark gray color from the large amounts of ferro-magne-

sian minerals contained in it. Clear, greasy nephelite may be

recognized, and slightly weathered feldspar, apparently not so

abundant, its cleavage surfaces having a vitreous luster. Clear

yellow grains and crystals of titanite are present. The dark

silicates occur as black masses which, except for an occasional

six-sided crystal of hornblende, cannot be identified. The rock

is fine-grained with a granitic texture.

Microscopic Description. — Under the microscope it is found

that nephelite, orthoclase, hornblende and augite are the essential

minerals. Magnetite, apatite and titanite are the accessories.

By measurements with the micrometer eye-piece the miner-

alogical composition or mode of the rock was found to be as fol-

lows:

OE FA ore eek Cho as catia hs sande otha d viAenenwcks Aakwan dé 18

UNIS er NM! ats se honing acinus scaubas ote ndunewne.na stele 12

PIMC M OMY AE OR Cee tude ke cant rad swcnas | oodles seacaes 40

PATI Ato SPOR PEN ER 5 ochre a Fis anes Cele Wausceee aetee week «cas og

ET Se aa An See 9 SR CE Ys Ae 2.7

SPUR UaM Rae fe eA RNIN ee, ca tconld race damsengies alin suai weouke chaos 2

PORTE cos = dred MELNT AGS «clean Saves Jay [Axess Wrenn amenvoreis «see ts 1.2

The average grain is .2 mm. _ The structure is granitic with

all the minerals more or less completely xenomorphic. From

the above table the great prevalence of the dark silicates over

the feldspar and nephelite together may at once be noted, as

well as the excess of nephelite over orthoclase.

The orthoclase is in crystals inclining to a prismatic habit

which average .4 mm. in diameter. They may at times be

ANNALS N. Y. AcaD. Sci., XIV, March 22, 1904—18.

264 FINLAY

slightly clouded over by the products of alteration. Occasional

carlsbad twins are noted. This feldspar frequently surrounds

large portions of the nephelite.

The substance of the nephelite is quite fresh. Its outlines

tend to be rectangular. The cleavages parallel to the base and

the prism are at times developed and the extinctions are parallel

to these directions. Transparent microscopic crystals are pres-

ent as inclusions in the nephelite, and surrounding it a secon-

dary mineral, which is usually referred to cancrinite on account

of its low index of refraction and high interference colors, is

commonly developed.

Hornblende, the most abundant constituent of the rock, is the

only mineral which has an automorphic habit, excepting the

apatite. The unit prism and the pinacoidal planes, in the zone

parallel to the c axis are well developed. The crystals are

pleochroic from yellow to seal brown. The absorption is

strong. Twins are not rare.

The augite in rude prisms and aggregates of grains is pale violet

or greenish, with borders of deeper green from the coming in

of the zgirite molecule. Intergrowths with amphibole are com-

mon. The augite encloses grains of titanite, and apatite needles.

Titanite occurs sporadically, in patches which are sometimes

1.5 mm. long, “(Gee Pl. X, fig. 1.) Theunastetite assis tie

usual grains with purple black luster. Apatite is very abundant

in short stout crystals with its basal sections perfect hexagons

charged with irregular dust inclusions. Some minute needles

of epidote were observed.

The order of crystallization appears to have been as follows:

First apatite, magnetite and titanite. Then hornblende and

augite often enclosing the amphibole. The above minerals are

frequently grouped together in such a manner, however, as to

make it plain that their growth must have been in large measure

simultaneous. After the dark silicates nephelite followed, and

the feldspar came last.

(2) Mesa Verde Type. Basie Factes.

This variety of the nephelite syenite occurs closely associated

with the Mesa Verde type in the same locality on the Baril

GEOLOGY OF THE SAN JOSE DISTRICT 265

Range. It is a very dark gray, from the very large amounts of

black ferro-magnesian minerals present. These are in prisms

and grains surrounding masses of nephelite. No feldspar is

apparent to the naked eye.

Microscopic Characters. — The microscope reveals, as the

component minerals of this rock, apatite, titanite, magnetite,

biotite, hornblende, augite, orthoclase and nephelite, in the order

of their formation. The calculation of the mode by optical

methods makes plain that only the last four play an important

part in the rock. Hornblende is greatly in excess of all the

other constituents put together. Orthoclase is very subordinate.

Biotite is present in very small amounts. Its occurrence is sig-

nificant. It is not found anywhere in the district except in the

most basic forms of the nephelite syenite. The percentage

composition is as foilows:

Ee Oe [i Pte es Ve ee Pea ee i ais Ce ee ene ae Ls.2

Ohrinoelase. 2.5... 8. .vssa: We EA gears eats fae eee eke chee eee 5.6

PEACHES BORE i, olan Dewi ewaes Gal sda Siecinoas sean penne 60.5

POMPME os senen scent: ee eine ata Ranma mcecan ta te tna a= oes ar eke

OCC PES AEN) ae A ee ee eee ee 2:2

NARUC saa a ad as SUR ACA Daa vee weap cas we 0.4

LE Ee a ee eo a Cee 2.8

LD TEAS Sah hes ES ge Oe SE ce a ee 1.4

The average grain is .16 mm. _ The texture is granitoid.

The mineral nephelite is younger than the orthoclase, with

which it is in part intergrown. It appears in large areas, extin-

guishing at the same moment in which the feldspar and dark

silicates are enclosed. It is very clear, except for inclusions of

glass and fluid cavities. Its polarization tintis deeper than that

of the feldspar. It is shown to be uniaxial and negative.

Orthoclose is largely interstitial between the crystals of am-

phibole. No plagioclase was observed.

The anhedrons of amphibole are gathered together to form:

large patches in the slide. Intergrowths with pyroxene are not

found. The mineral is brown with pronounced pleochroism.

a= light brown, )= seal brown, t=deep brown. The optic angle

is large. The clinopinacoid is the plane of the opticaxes. Ex-

tinction 21°. These properties are those which we should expect

from barkevikitic hornblende.

266 FINLAY

The augite is light green. It differs from the usual varieties

of this mineral in never showing borders indicative of an in-

crease in the soda molecule. It is never tinged with violet.

Rarely it may be seen as if grown out from the ends of the

amphibole.

Brown biotite in thin lath-shaped plates .5 mm. in length is

present as anaccessory. It is notable for its inclusions, acicular

transparent prisms of an undetermined mineral resembling rutile.

They are usually inclined to the base at a sharp angle. Mag-

netite is rare, apatite and titanite common.

The specimen of the nephelite syenite (Baril type) analyzed

by Dr. H. S. Washington, represents the average grain and

mineralogy of the rock along the north end of the Baril range.

Nephelite makes up about 18 per cent. of the whole. Augite,

hornblende and biotite are ail present. Apatite is conspicuous,

and titanite may be easily seen in the hand specimen.

The results of analysis are given below, column J. Numbers

II, III and IV are placed beside it for reference.

I, UN LET. IV.

SiO, 58.40 59.01 60. 39 51.90

Al,O, 20.25 18.18 22-51 22.54

He,Or 1.78 1.63 .42 4.03

FeO 2.41 3.65 2.26 3052

MgO .49 1.05 «3 1.97

CaO 2.15 2.40 32 a1

Na,O 7.01 7.08 8.44 8.18

K,O0 5.39 5-34 4.77 4.72

Ouse 27, ns

H,Oig2 BW .50 a4 22

CO; none trace

HO; 25 SI

ZrO, none trace

BO; .20 trace

SO, .06

OG .O2 wi2

5 none

MnO trace .03 .08

BaO trace .08

CaO

100. 21 99.98 99.89 99.82

GEOLOGY OF THE SAN JOSE DISTRICT 267

I. Nephelite syenite, Baril type, Tamaulipas, Mexico. H.S. Washington, anal.

II. Nephelite syenite, Red Hill, N. H. W. F. Hillebrand, anal. W. S. Bay-

ley, Bull. Geol. Soc. Amer., III, 250, 1892.

III. Eleolite syenite, Litchfield, Me. L. G. Eakins, anal., Bull. Geol. Soc.

Amer., III, 241, 1892.

IV, Eleolite syenite, Brégger. Syenitpegmatitgainge, p. 33.

When the norm of this rock I is calculated in the standard

salic and femic minerals the percentage composition is as fol-

lows :'

RPELHOCIABG s.5 503 c5cccsveacs 31.69 ERE MOU vaca shen sies 0: 2.55

PPE. Sons ocosrinnvet cuca tes ay. 7% URN rece cicn. cake dvs 6.62

epee is. os 2 easterawent 11.64 CPAWINIES 5.0 Ad cots one 2 255

MGT s<.¢ reise oase ese 7.78 rR hac aaeeneses G72

par ie Sa ecw $8.84 15 Oe ee ae 84

The rock is therefore persalane, it belongs to order 6, rus-

sare, it is domalkalic viezzenase and dosodic, viezzenose.

2. Diorite

The two principal areas in which diorite is exposed lie along

the road leading to the Vegonia Mine, at a distance of about a

mile from San José. The rock is also found in the gulcha

mile due northwest of the town. It is usually deeply weathered

and shows a rusty brown color in the field. The andesite is

younger than the diorite and surrounds it completely, sending

many small dikes into it. As before stated, the diorite probably

lies below the andesite over much of the country where erosion

has not revealed it.

When seen in the hand specimen this rock has the appear-

ance of typical diorite. It has the granitoid texture. It is me-

dium-grained, and dark gray in color. Plates of biotite are

easily discernible through the rock. They are jet black, or

brownish-black, and large enough to allow cleavage pieces to

be scaled away. With the biotite small amounts of another

dark silicate having no good cleavage may be identified. The

microscope shows this to be a pyroxene. Taken together the

darker constituents which are so prominent are not quite so

1 « Quantitative Classification of Igneous Rocks,’’ Cross, Iddings, Pirsson, Wash-

ington. The University of Chicago Press, Chicago, 1903.

268 FINLAY

abundant as the white or colorless feldspars. Carlsbad twins

may occasionally be seen on these with the unaided eye. They

are dull and show something of the oily luster which is charac-

teristic of nephelite. Grains of titanite are scattered through

the rock, and minute pieces of pyrite appear from time to time.

When examined with the microscope the rock is found to

consist of plagioclase, augite, biotite, titanite, magnetite, apatite,

pyrite and zircon, in the order of their relative abundance.

There are no porphyritic developments. The outlines of the

minerals (with the exception of apatite) are quite irregular, al-

though the feldspars are commonly rectangular.

The plagioclase, as determined by the Michel-Levy methods

is in two kinds, labradorite with the composition Ab,, An, and a

more acid andesine Ab,An,. Its substance is fresh and glassy,

though broken by many irregular cleavage cracks. The feld-

spars are twinned polysynthetically on the albite and pericline

laws, with very fine twinning lamellz. A zonal structure is

occasionally observed.

The augite is in large irregular patches intergrown with bio-

tite. This variety of pyroxene has a high extinction angle. It is

light clear green and non-pleochroic. Twins may often be noted.

The enclosures are apatite and magnetite. (See Pl. XII, fig. 2.)

The mica is a rich chestnut brown biotite, with strong ab-

sorption for rays perpendicular to the cleavage. Irregular

masses of nearly colorless titanite are from time to time noted

in the slide. Magnetite is abundant in large grains, now and

then surrounded by rings of titanite. Rarely it shows a ten-

dency to form rods growing out from the borders of the mica.

The apatite prisms are well developed. The results of two an-

alyses of this rock are given below, columns I and II. Num-

bers III and IV are placed beside it for reference.

Ie INE IOUT LV:

>] 0) 4 Sis i atta 45-75 48.49 49.30 56.28

DRAB era. eeu 18.51 18.99 22.46 14.23

enn: eee cdasnae 6.55 9.59 12/04 4.69

ee rrcbinze tues 6.02 1.00 é 4.05

1) Si Os ee .16

Wi OR asec enc. 5.06 5.05 2.14 6.37

GEOLOGY OF THE SAN JOSE DISTRICT 269

RID s Se Sas gaat 11.85 10.78 9.30 7.94

1: CN C See peae ee 3.41 3.47 3.01 2.98

esis evan ven 2.35 1.42 1.27 1.23

(520 ee ie trace .40

EE OD8. occ cocicce 06 Io

i= (40 eae .20 55 .78 .93

99.76 99.44 100. 30 say G!

trace SO,

.o1 Li,O

100.28

less O for Cl .O4

100. 24

I. Diorite, San José, Tamaulipas, Mexico. G. I. Finlay, anal.

II. Diorite, diabasic facies, San José, Tamaulipas, Mexico. G. I. Finlay,

anal.

III. Diorite, Rosetown, near Tompkin’s Cove, N. Y. J. F. Kemp, Amer.

Jour. Sci., Oct., ’95, 298.

IV. Diorite, Electric Peak, Yellowstone Nat. Park. J. E. Whitfield, anal.

Monograph XXXII, Pax II, U. S. Geol. Surv., p. 116.

The percentage compositions in standard minerals which give

the norm for I and II are as follows:

(te Lr.

Js CC Sa ee 8.34 etpelease-. 5. o5.<scaseen 13.34

IOS Se. xe Sagi ide cenas 25.68 eM 2 gS Rae fo 7.34

EMME AIEEE vine napesn cus 34.97 OEE AEE) A oe ven nas <a arane 28.36

Rrepnelite:.<: J.) .6s2-3--s- 1.99 PRRDBEIES oo. 556s Save o oss 11.64

LTE ee eee 16.85 PIONS es as a nicsinisitnig se 24.40

ITE as pease cb sven 3.36 22 = ae ee 4.71

|S re 2:25 MaGREUEC.. wiecsce aecnenes 9.28

EPCHIAIIES eect eootcecis cot 7.30 99.07

98.74

O65

99-39

No. I is therefore salemose-limburgose, and No. II is sa-

lemose.

B. Porpuyritic Typrs

As may be seen in the geologic map, Plate VIII, the town

of San Jose lies in the depression formed by the erosion of the

central portions of a laccolithic mass of andesite. The rock

is exposed continuously over twelve square miles of territory.

Throughout the laccolith it varies but little from the even-

710 FINLAY

textured porphyritic habit which characterizes such intrusive

masses. Denser textures show but rarely along the borders

of the laccolith. The prevailing colors are light yellow and

blue gray. Portions of the rock are locally richer in silica than

the main mass, and show free quartz. All possible gradations

exist between the normal andesite and the more siliceous dacite.

Four types of these rocks will be described, as follows :

Andesite, San Narciso type; Vegonia type.

Dacite, Florencia type ; Imogenia type.

1. Andesite

(2) San Narciso Type. —This variety of the andesite is largely

developed to the north and west of San Jose.

In the field this rock presents an even gray ground-mass.

It is leucocratic, with the darker crystals as scattered grains but

sparingly developed, although basic segregations are more than

usually common.

The feldspar, which is by far the most abundant mineral

present, is recognized in the holocrystalline ground-mass by its

bright cleavage faces. These show occasional twinning striations.

Under the microscope the structure is seen to be holocrys-

talline porphyritic, and plagioclase, orthoclase, augite, quartz,

biotite, magnetite, titanite and zircon are determined as the con-

stituent minerals.

The sections of plagioclase are lath-shaped pieces of labra-

dorite, 1.2 mm. long by .5 mm. in breadth, appearing as por-

phyritic crystals in a very coarsely crystalline ground-mass

which consists of orthoclase and quartz. (See Pl. XII, fig. 1.)

The labradorite Ab,An, appears in fresh crystals, largely free

from the effects of weathering. These are twinned in fine

lamellz on the albite law, with many pericline lamella. When

viewed between crossed nicols in the 45° position, one half of

the crystal usually appears blue gray, the other yellow, indi-

cating twinning on the carlsbad law. Zonal structure is very

common. The outermost rims of the plagioclase crystals are

often deeply changed by weathering. This material has the ap-

pearance of kaolinized orthoclase.

GEOLOGY OF THE SAN JOSE DISTRICT 271

The crystals of orthoclase are shorter and stouter. They

occur as carlsbad twins and are much altered and kaolinized.

The largest crystals of orthoclase do not attain a diameter

greater than i mm. They are xenomorphic rude prisms which

show marked pleochroism from light green to brownish-yellow.

The quartz is in xenomorphic rectangular and square pieces

which give the characteristic uniaxial cross with one or two

rings. They may be distinguished from the orthoclase squares

by their glassy unweathered appearance. The quartz is seen

to make up but a very small part of the whole rock.

Biotite, in small patches not above .2 mm. in length, is still

rarer. Magnetite is found abundantly and small lozenge-shaped

individuals of titanite are met in the slide. Some zircon is also

present.

An analysis of the’San Narciso type of the andesite is given

below, as follows:

yA 6 Pee Wis 5c cote Boma wale Stvisen Saloadusmaans tis due eeue ot 18.63

eee earch, Sate ne teen Bane ceg ei aanenk s nacckuewne 2.38

“y'E Bape Ba pa, Voy eile 25 a ec ee ie

PN see Nace eb sheen eee & eM AA tis paveeas 60

Ne Ns asks 2 eri in pape iend iddde cdawats 5-91

Ln LS oe Beg oe ea AP Se EO an ra 4.97

WP Set gh ee REE eae eS Al SY Lae ae ee 3.52

ele oh ok CTEM Eee eee en els ne ns oe eee 07

ees he de ob neg iad ined isube Wen ddcokuauhewss 16

ee ee SS a an, oe ak icee su Shinn Gs oy Su .O7

99-95

The calculation of the standard mineral composition or norm

gives the following percentages :

PEAR 4d. sadedhicnssdideets 8.9 EERIE 9s s. BRAS te 8 4.1

STBOCIEGE oo <- ton 20.6 BUS 2 a ee 2.5

PL yee ee aa ee ee 41.9 (Ts 2 2 ee ae 3.5

PREBORE P EMME 02 eect brag ers oc 18.1 10.1

A mer A Re 89.24

The rock is persalane and belongs to order V canadare. It

is domalkalic and dosodic, laurvikose.

272 FINLAY

(6) Vegona Type

This rock is exposed along the brook course 100 yards south

of the Vegonia Mine. It is found as narrow dike-like stringers

and larger masses irregularly intruded into the San Narciso

type of andesite described above.

Megascopic Description.—When seen in the hand specimen it

appears as an even-grained bluish-gray porphyritic rock with

inconspicuous phenocrysts of feldspar and smaller grains of the

dark silicates. The feldspars are at times a quarter of an inch

long, but this is unusual. They average not more than one

sixteenth of an inch in length. They often show the character-

istic twinning of the plagioclases to the unaided eye. The

darker silicates are by no means so abundant as the feldspars.

Except for an occasional yellow crystal of titanite they are

black. Taken altogetherthe phenocrysts make up half the rock.

Microscopic Description.—In thin sections the principal con-

stituents of this andesite are found to be plagioclase, augite

and hornblende, in conspicuous phenocrysts, with titanite, mag-

netite and apatite as accessories, in a fine-grained holocrystal-

line ground-mass consisting principally of feldspar, with lesser

amounts of augite and magnetite in a second generation.

The plagioclase phenocrysts are in tabular crystals which are

equidimensional. J/(o10), 7(110) and (110) are conspicu-

ously developed faces. Polysynthetic twinning occurs on the

albite law and carlsbad twins are not uncommon. More rarely

lamellae which result from twinning on the pericline law have

been noted. The lamellz are generally broad, with intercalated

fine bands. The extinction angles indicate labradorite. When

a crystal cut at right angles to Jo10) which shows twinning

on the albite law and carlsbad law at the same time can be

found the concurrent extinction angles correspond to a labra-

dorite with the composition Ab,An,. The double refraction is

high, often yellow of the first order. The labradorite crystals

almost always show zonal structure. In habit they are usually

microtinic and quite free from alteration products, but the core

of a crystal has at times been shattered and afterwards sur-

GEOLOGY OF THE SAN JOSE DISTRICT 273

rounded by a glassy zone of later growth. Inclusions of apa-

tite, in very slender needles are common, and the whole sub-

stance of a labradorite crystal is often clouded with microscopic

irregularly disseminated inclusions, probably pyroxene. Again

iron-bearing solutions have stained the feldspar along cleavage

cracks.

Augite, which is the most important of the dark silicates, is

rather more abundant than hornblende. It is found in simple

light green crystals bounded in the prism zone by the faces

m(110), a(100) and 4(o10), which favor association with the

hornblende and magnetite. The crystals show an unusually

good cleavage parallel to a(100). Zonal structures are rarely

observed. The extinction angle is 42°.

The hornblende is in very long slender prisms which are

either rounded at the énds or terminated by two flattish faces.

Occasionally they are twinned. They are of a dull brownish-

green color and absorb the light strongly. Pleochroism is

confined to shades of green.

Titanite, which appears sporadically in large irregular crys-

tals, is the most notable of the accessory minerals present.

The customary cleavage parallel to (110) is not well developed.

Acutely rhombic sections are not common.

Magnetite, which but rarely shows crystal boundaries, is

abundant in this andesite. Apatite is common among the older

inclusions.

The ground-mass is a fine-grained aggregate of minute lath-

shaped and irregular feldspars, microscopic magnetite grains and

minute augite prisms of a second generation. The extinction

angles on the feldspar microlites are low and point to oligoclase.

Rude flow lines may at times be noted.

2. Dacivle

(a) Florencia Type. — The rock here described exhibits every

gradation towards the less siliceous andesite in the laccolithic

mass. It is found in the hills immediately south of San José.

Macroscopic Description. — This type is very fine-grained. In

the hand specimen the rock is of a pale brown color. It is

274 FINLAY

plainly porphyritic by reason of the larger crystals of feldspar,

with flashing cleavage faces, which are just large enough to be

recognized. A hand lens shows that their centers are some-

what weathered, while the outer rims are fresh. The dark

minerals are not determinable in the hand specimen. They

appear as minute black patches sparsely distributed through the

ground-mass. ,

Microscopic Characters. — The study of thin sections reveals

the presence of plagioclase, augite and quartz phenocrysts in a

ground-mass, which is an intimate mixture of quartz and feld-

spar. Apatite, epidote, titanite and magnetite are the accessory

minerals.

The plagioclase crystals are 1.2 mm. long, often in highly

complex forms with only (o10) and (110) distinguishable. The

center is often deeply corroded, and secondary muscovite pro-

duced inside a clear outer rim. Many of the medium-sized

individuals of the mineral are, however, quite glassy. Twinning

according to the albite law with extremely fine lamelle is very

common, but many other lamelle are often intercalated on the

pericline law. The two halves of the crystals twinned at once

on the albite and carlsbad laws show different interference colors

in the 45° position. One is usually yellowish, the other blue

gray. Symmetrical extinctions on the lamellz of the two halves

gives readings for an acid labradorite Ab,An..

The quartz phenocrysts are seldom above .1 mm. in diam-

eter, but they are very common. Their substance is clear and

glassy. It encloses needles of apatite, and only rarely shows,

gas or liquid inclusions. The mineral is never automorphic.

It has generally grown side by side with deeply kaolinized feld-

spar which comes in crystals much smaller than the labradorite

phenocrysts. No twinning was observed on this second feld-

spar, which is identical with the feldspar of the ground-mass.

The pyroxene makes up a very small part of the rock. It

is in irregular deep green twinned grains that are pleochroic

yielding light and dark shades of green. Apatite in minute

needles is a rare accessory, as is also epidote in short stubby

grains. Titanite is present in irregular pieces not above .I mm.

GEOLOGY OF THE SAN JOSE DISTRICT 275

in diameter, and the grains of magnetite which are fairly abun-

dant in the rock are still smaller. The ground-mass is a dense

aggregate of pieces of quartz and kaolinized feldspars. These

are on the average .o5 mm. across and appear to be in nearly

equal proportions.

(0) Imogenia Type.— The type here described occurs along

Vegonia and Bretafia Creeks in the foothills of the Baril range.

Macroscopic Description. —In the field this rock when un-

weathered is grayish in color and shows a rough fracture. It

is medium-grained and porphyritic in texture with a predomi-

nance of feldspar phenocrysts having bright cleavage faces as

against the smalle* proportions of the aphanitic ground-mass.

Dark specks, shown by the microscope to be pyroxene, are

scattered through the hand specimen.

Microscopic Characters.—The examination of this rock in thin

sections shows that it is made up of plagioclase, orthoclase,

quartz, augite, hornblende, biotite, magnetite, apatite and chlor-

ite. Owing to the intimate mixture of quartz and feldspar in

the ground-mass considerable difficulty is found in estimating

the relative proportions between them optically. It is probable

that there is an error of 5 per cent. in the subjoined table, which

could not be guarded against. The mineral percentages by

weight, as given in it, are however approximately accurate.

RPA CIE SOs rsa. 4s vaclon-cci die 1 iets aw'iwinn’ Mop cateaemeuaeans 32

(Ei) (Lo) 1S Sia ey A erseecn 8 A Aa eet Dec catioe 25

OCLC eerie ite UE OL ot ER escent Gr eee ae ae a 17

PRUNES Tee Ney peeteoe ema tet bt ad na (ouseieh Rabie aanvaees dulce 16

BOHN Ct emeech Ouse ay ter 4 de duwhscaddc avate sued SeccasGnes DA

RERUN IP ENC edge Me Mee ie acc ees Es Sao ce Boe oaman do wae ab's,cad 6.7

Hornblende

Apatite

Titanite 0 (ctettet eters ettee teste eee eeeseeeeesaee es eeeeas xe)

Chlorite

100.0

The phenocrysts are of feldspar and quartz, augite, some

biotite and the older generation of the magnetite. The acces-

sory minerals make up perhaps | per cent. of the quartz-feldspar

ground-mass.

276 FINLAY

The plagioclase of the older generation occurs in equidimen-

sional crystals which often are 2 mm. in length. The albite,

carlsbad and pericline laws are all represented in the twinning.

The lamellz on the albite law are excessively fine. The sym-

metrical extinctions given by them in the two halves of a carls-

bad twin make possible the determination of the plagioclase as

labradorite Ab,An,. Zonal structure is very common. The

substance of the plagioclase is often quite clear and glassy at

the center, while the outer border of the crystal is commonly

crowded with inclusions. Again the outer zone may be ob-

served to extinguish at the same instant as the center of the

crystal, while one or two intermediate shells have angles of ex-

tinction at variance with them. The outlines of the plagioclase

individuals, as of all the other phenocrysts, are ragged and

irregular.

Porphyritic crystals of orthoclase show twinning after the

carlsbad law. Quartz is frequently intergrown with the ortho-

clase after the fashion of microgranite, where all the enclosed

pieces of quartz extinguish at the same time. Perthitic inter-

growths with plagioclase on a microscopic scale also occur.

The orthoclase is always partly kaolinized.

The pyroxene does not usually show even an approach to

good crystal outlines. Irregular grains of this mineral are

common. It is light green, non-pleochroic, extinction 40°.

Embayments produced in the crystals by the caustic action of

the magma are frequently observed and the secondary minerals

thus produced are magnetite and some little hornblende. By

alteration the augite yields a dull green pleochroic fibrous

chlorite.

Patches of a dull green slightly pleochroic hornblende, with

an extinction of 15°, are rare, but may be as large as 2 mm.

They are always ragged on all sides. Occasional poikilitic in-

tergrowths between the hornblende and the pyroxene should

be noted.

Patches of biotite as large as the hornblendes may be found

at times. Secondary augite and magnetite grains occur around

them as products of magmatic resorption.

GEOLOGY OF THE SAN JOSE DISTRICT 277

The magnetite is usually surrounded by narrow rims of

titanite, which may be secondary. The larger pieces of mag-

netite .4 mm. in diameter are to be taken as phenocrysts.

Those of the second generation average .05 mm. They are in

definite square sections of octahedra. Apatite needles are rare

but titanite in dull grayish-yellow grains is often seen near the

dark minerals. No pyrite was observed.

3. Basalt

Occurrence. —A lava flow of basalt may be traced on the east-

ern side of the San Carlos Mountains, extending back toward the

range, along the course of the Arroyo Grande for four or five

miles. The sheet is scoriaceous and vesicular on its upper sur-

face, and appears to have issued from a fissure below the crags,

at this point on the east of the Baril Range. The flow is per-

haps half a mile in width. No volcanic cone was found on trac-

ing it to its source.

Macroscopic Appearance. —In the hand specimen the rock is

aphanitic and fine-grained. In color it is bluish-black. It

breaks with a smooth splintery fracture. Blow holes show over

its surface. The vesicular cavities are filled with calcite.

Microscopic Characters.—The rock is porphyritic with pheno-

crysts of feldspar and pyroxene. The augite was not observed

in a second generation in the ground-mass, where lath-shaped

feldspars, biotite and magnitite are the principal constituents.

The plagioclase phenocrysts are small, not above .4 mm. in

diameter. The mineral occurs in poorly bounded thick tablets

which are heavily charged with magnetite. The only inclusions

are minute prisms of pyroxene. Wavy extinctions from center

to margin are characteristic, but definite clearly marked zones

of varying chemical composition are not observed. Twins on

the albite law are common, but no other forms of twinning

occur. Symmetrical extinction angles point toward labrador-

ite. There is frequently a dense crowding together of magne-

tite grains for half a millimeter arounda core of feldspar. Often

the crystals of plagioclase have been acted upon by the magma

until a mosaic of feldspar grains has resulted. Large, very

278 FINLAY

irregular and ragged pieces of augite are found associated with

such evidences of disturbance. The mineral is of a bright green

color with faint pleochroism to yellowish-green. The extinc-

tion is 40 degrees.

Biotite, plagioclase and magnetite form the ground-mass, the

two first minerals being equally abundant. The feldspar is in

small lath-shaped crystals often arranged in rude flow lines.

They invariably show several minute twinning bands which give

extinctions indicating a more acid feldspar than labradorite.

They are believed to be andesine. They are automorphic and

have invariably crystallized before the dark minerals.

The biotite never occurs in phenocrysts. It is always xeno-

morphic and interstitial between the feldspars. Small brown

rectangular pieces sometimes attain a length of .1 mm. and from

that sink to microscopic dimensions.

Magnetite, in grains and skeleton crystals, is scattered all

through the rock and titanite occurs in notable amounts. An

unresolvable glassy base makes up a small portion of the

ground-mass.

The analysis and calculated standard mineral percentages of

this rock are as follows:

SION eer cree tetese voteseaze 48.03 Orthaclasesis..-27 ee 11.68

PSO yee ects seateekttetaces'e 20.98 ATBIte., ss iceman net kctens 24.10

1S) 6 aS. 2 ee ee Aj5r * Nephelitess.< 5. ee 1.99

MigGie es racavessadeurer set acs 4.43 Diepsidesaswcnn eens S237

CAD IIS eee sare che tee 9.54 Olivine... 4:5. -tee eee 6.25

INA): Sc Bote cteneceakcests 3.28 Mapmetitens: 2is5cecc ee 10.21

BO, sem Sears mactess asaneh 1.99 BY Oe i ic gare eee 61

Re ney sees ice os Reseed are 21 99.91

15 AG oe eR eet eee ha .40

100.49

G. I. Finlay, anal. The rock therefore belongs with order 5

of class II, in rang 4 and grad 3, hessose.

C... Dik® -Reexs

Over fifty separate dikes were observed in the region im-

mediately about San José. They fall into two groups, the

GEOLOGY OF THE SAN JOSE DISTRICT 219

more acid, tinguaites and offshoots from the andesite mass, and

the basic series. They tend to assume two general directions

in their distribution. Most of them strike nearly north and

south. The great tinguaite dike which extends from Mt.

Anacuas to the south of Mt. Parrefio is an exception to this

rule. Asecond set of dikes follows the east-and-west direction

at right angles to the first series. The great tinguaite dike

which belongs with these, running from the foot of Mt.

Armadillos to the slopes of Mt. Parrefio, has been faulted aside

for 150 yards near the town of San José.

The tinguaite dikes fall into two divisions :

1. The more acid types which in the field are easily recog-

nized by their abundant porphyritic crystals of orthoclase.

2. Those which are aphanitic and are characterized micro-

scopically by the presence of analcite.

The tinguaites cut the limestones and the andesites, but they

were not found in the nephelite syenite. The other dikes are

all of them presumably later, and they are believed to represent

several periods of eruption. They do not cut across the tingua-

ites in the region examined. In only one instance was a dike

found intersecting another. The basic dikes are seen cutting

through the nephelite syenite as well as the other rocks of the

district. Good exposures occur along the roads leading from

San José to the Santa Helena, San Narciso and Vegonia mines.

These dike rocks are all of them aphanitic and black-looking,

somtimes slightly inclined to bluish, brownish or grayish. The

following basic types are included in the descriptions :

Camptonite.

Vogesite.

Limburgite.

The tinguaites show a uniform field habit, with the charac-

teristic green color due to microscopic prisms of zegirite. They

are more numerous than any other of the San José dikes. They

may be without phenocrysts, and again are notably porphyritic

by reason of the orthoclase crystals which they contain. They

are found not only in the andesite, and cutting the limestone,

but far to the northwest of the San Carlos Mountains as well,

ANNALS N. Y. ACAD. Sci., XIV, March 22, I904—109.

280 FINLAY

and for many miles along the eastern and western flanks of the

range. In some cases single dikes may be traced for one and

a half or two miles with a width of ten feet.

1. LZinguaite

(a) Santa Rita Type. — The variety of the tinguaite here de-

scribed is met in a dike between the Mesa Verde and Mt. Par-

refio near the pass which the Santa Rita trail takes on leaving

the San José valley.

In the hand specimen the rock is noticeably darker than the

other tinguaites of the district. It is a dense compact rock

having a deep green aphanitic ground-mass in which tablets of

sanidine often 2 cm. in length occur prominently as pheno-

crysts. Without a hand lens it is difficult to distinguish the

larger crystals of egirite in the dense aggregate made up of

the minute individuals of that mineral. Amyegdaloidal cavities

occur which contain tiny shreds and patches of biotite, mag-

netite grains and the earthy aggregates that have resulted from

the weathering of the zeolites.

Microscopic Description. — Besides the sanidine and egirite

the microscope shows that nephelite, plagioclase, hornblende

and analcite are present.

The larger phenocrysts of feldspar are in sharply automor-

phic carlsbad twins bounded by (110) and (100). They attain a

maximum length of 3.5 mm. and are one quarter as broad.

(See Pl. X, fig. 2.) They contain many inclusions, minute

prisms of egirite zonally arranged with their long axes parallel

to the walls of their host, and bundles of microscopic brightly

polarizing needles having a high index of refraction. The feld-

spar crystals show peculiar effects of weathering and secondary

replacement. Good cleavage cracks appear rarely. Now and

then kaolinized cores remain, but nine tenths of their substance

is usually of secondary origin, largely orthoclase feldspar,

plagioclase and analcite. The cores of the original crystals have

been eaten out and in the central portions analcite is now found.

(See Pl. XI, fig. 2.) This mineral is isotropic, and it gives no

interference figure. It has two sets of cleavage cracks at right

GEOLOGY OF THE SAN JOSE DISTRICT 281

angles to each other. It may extend out from the center as far

as the original boundaries of the feldspar or it may be surrounded

by a zone of feldspar crystallites packed in together like the

skeleton crystal needles in spherulitic bodies. These bundles of

needles are intergrown with definite initial forms of egirite. The

microscopic growths of this mineral resemble the occurrence of

pyroxene inthe Arran pitchstone. Now and then lines of grains

of zgirite run out toward the center. Againa corroded space in

the original orthoclase has been filled by bundles of plagioclase

needles or by analcite and clear secondary feldspar, the latter

untwinned and surrounded by the zeolite. These circumstances

are favorable for deciding as to the relative indices of refraction

by the Becke method. ‘The lines of light migrate outwardly

from the analcite into the feldspar on either side. When ob-

served with high powers the zeolitic substance is clear and

glassy while the secondary feldspar associated with it is dis-

tinctly granular.

Two other generations of feldspars besides the large pheno-

crysts are well marked. Those belonging to the second period

are comparatively fresh. They appear as six-sided individuals

.3 mm. in length. Finally, feldspar appears as an aggregate of

orthoclase grains and minute lath-shaped crystals with soda

pyroxene in the ground-mass. Here the emerald green prisms,

arranged in felty aggregates, are noticeably shorter and stouter

than is usual in the ground-mass of other San José tinguaites.

They are not frayed at the ends and their edges are firm and

sharp. They have not been noticeably crowded together by

the growth of the large feldspar phenocrysts, but have been

forced to grow with their long axes parallel to the latter, when

they lie near them. The egirites at times cluster thickly about

a large grain of magnetite.

Individuals of the pyroxene three times as large as those in

the ground-mass represent an older generation. Very rarely

phenocrysts of chestnut brown hornblende, pleochroic in shades

of brown .1 mm. in diameter, twinned parallel to (100) are

observed as nuclei for clusters of zgirite. The biotite of the

rock, in minute patches, is rare and of secondary origin. Mag-

netite grains do occur but not commonly.

282 FINLAY

(6) Lman Tvpe.-—The variety of the tinguaite to be described

under this name is found in a dike four feet wide which is ex-

posed for fifty feet, extending in a north-and-south direction,

immediately to the west of the Piedra Iman.

Macroscopic Characters.—In the field the rock has a light

brown color. Its texture is porphyritic with many very small

white tabular crystals of feldspar appearing as the only dis-

cernible phenocrysts in a dense aphanitic ground-mass.

Microscopic Characteristics. —Under the microscope it is found

to contain, besides prevailing orthoclase and some little nephe-

lite, smaller amounts of zgirite, magnetite and limonite. The

ground-mass shows a marked fluidal arrangement.

The orthoclase appears in two distinct forms as the result of

as many periods of crystallization. The phenocrysts are nearly

always very long and narrow tablets twinned on the carlsbad

law, but rectangular more isometric crystals are now and then

found. The feldspar is always much kaolinized. The basal

and clinopinacoidal cleavages show distinctly. The orthoclase

laths in the ground-mass are very narrow, and hardly .2 mm.

long.

The nephelite presents clear surfaces of low relief not broken

by cleavage cracks. It is found in rudely hexagonal pheno-

crysts which give a uniaxial figure. (See Pl. XI, fig. 1.)

The ground-mass contains, besides the feldspar, rods of xgi-

rite, small amounts of nephelite, ragged pieces of magnetite, and

secondary limonite. The zxgirites are broader and less regular

than the feldspars. By weathering they take on a fibrous ap-

pearance and tend to lose their bright green colors. The

nephelite is fresh and clear. It gives rise to the deep blue-gray

colors with crossed nicols where it is seen in the interstices of

the ground-mass.

2. Analcite Tinguaite

(2) Mt. Armadillos Type. — The variety of the tinguaite here

described is found in the important dike which runs as a great

wall across the country from the western slope of Mt. Arma-

dillos to the foot of Mt. Parrefo. It is so much more resistant

GEOLOGY OF THE SAN JOSE DISTRICT 283

than the andesite which surrounds it that it is always left in

relief by the differential effects of weathering. It is of a light

green color in the field. Its texture is porphyritic, with glassy

sanidine crystals in a dense homogeneous ground-mass, as the

chief phenocrysts. Small specks of biotite may be seen in the

hand specimen. The rock has a peculiar greasy luster.

Microscopic Characters. — Under the microscope this tinguaite

is found to have the pilitic texture where minute egirite needles,

amounting to 50 per cent. of the whole, make up a dense felty

aggregate, in which sanidine, analcite, and, rarely, porphyritic

crystals of pyroxene and biotite patches are found.

The analcite crystals are in small squares less than .t mm.

in diameter, and in polygonal and rectangular sections. They

are colorless and appear so abundantly as to cause darkness by

crossed nicols over most of the field. _

The sanidine phenocrysts are clear and colorless. They

give blue-gray interference colors. Carlsbad twins may often

be noted. The sanidines have no good cleavage cracks, but

they exhibit the usual crude parting parallel to (100).

A few zgirite needles of an older generation occur. This

mineral in the ground-mass is faint green or almost colorless.

The individuals are very small, usually only .1 mm. in length.

They are sharply bounded, and appear packed in together with

tiny feldspars to form avery dense aggregate. The small crys-

tals of sanidine associated with them are all automorphic, and

many of them showtwinning. Traces of magnetite, rare patches

of biotite and areas of secondary limonite are to be noted.

(6) Corona Type.— The type here described could not be

found in place. The dike from which the bowlder, collected

in the bed of Bretana Creek, came, was doubtless up near the

waters of that stream against the Baril Range.

Megascopic Description. — The hand specimen shows a slate-

colored rock, having a felsitic texture. Phenocrysts of greasy-

looking nephelite and crystals of sanidine are visible to the un-

aided eye, and with a pocket lens the carlsbad twinning may

be noted on the feldspar. A dark silicate sparingly dissemi-

nated through the rock proves to be egirine-augite.

284 FINLAY

Microscopic Characteristics —Under the microscope two tex-

tures are observed. Besides the usually strictly porphyritic

phase of the rock, a fine-grained variety occurs in which all the

crystalline masses are of approximately equal size. Squares

and hexagonal sections of nephelite, grains of egirite and

titanite and carlsbad twins of glassy sanidine are the constitu-

ents, with accessory minute needles of apatite. These are the

commoner minerals which make up the rock. Analcite and

rare augite should be mentioned to complete the list.

The orthoclase is in extremely long narrow carlsbad twins

(1.2 mm. by .15 mm.), resembling the smaller ones common in

the normal trachyte ground-mass, or again in thick tablets,

colorless and glassy, but dusted over with extremely minute

rod-like inclusions which tend to lie parallel to the prism

directions.

Nephelite, in six-sided and rectangular sections .6 mm. by

.8 mm., is very common. This mineral gives at times a satis-

factory uniaxial interference figure. It is often white, inclining

to buff color. A*girite inclusions are observed in it with zonal

arrangement. Minute inclusions of the same pyroxene, in sharp

lines, produce an effect of ruling which is much like the ap-

pearance of definite cleavage cracks. The nephelite is altered

but little. Analcite, chiefly, results by weathering.

Augite is the usual pyroxene. Three generations in all of

the mineral are observed. It occurs in short stout prisms 1.2

mm. by .5 mm.as phenocrysts. The extinction angle is nearly

45°. Poikilitic intergrowths of the augite, tinged with a violet

color, andincluded emerald green patches of zgirite are very com -

mon. Zonal structures are seen at times in such crystals, the

several shells having unlike orientation optically. Much apa-

tite and some magnetite are associated with the larger individuals.

Titanite, showing no unusual characteristics, is found in

bladed crystals 1.2 mm. long. Patches of biotite were noted,

but the mineral is present only in extremely small amounts.

Grains of magnetite are scattered through the rock and pyrite

is sometimes present.

The ground-mass is very rich in laths of orthoclase feldspar.

These and egirite rods make up almost the whole of it.

GEOLOGY OF THE SAN JOSE DISTRICT 285

Two analyses of the analcite tinguaite are given below.

i IT.

SAEs: ip Tonics panies oe ee tab tek ccdseacka ates 52.83 49.42

£0 a eee nen, oor PORE AS SMe ex 16

a. 3 mets ate aene oe eR ak Paton babs 20.70 22.99

BE 2. peeae Wins oo Sateen case sieve ees sks 2.84 2.70

PICO Fhe ruc Pee aebuhc sete aka tane uboaase 1,19 1.89

TARE he a ec Oe ieee RR opens ce atlas 41 .45

SOT DEAN ano ea Bre Pella ae So 1.00 2.59

PON Pee Ce eeu eee tan seqean abet . 9.94 9.63

Od @ Sess, TRO Reet ee eae Se a 4.87 4.21

SUNG LACES A a Bee eee ey Pee 37

A es ear ch sca coe wes peak oo cane 263 ese 5.28 Ree

eee ee tttaes piee sn Reco ede swlens asian 03

ee ee anc tiius Poa tceaermnenespsnwes 06

99.62 99-99

I, Analcite tinguaite, San José, Tamaulipas, Mexico. H.S. Washington, anal.

II. Analcite tinguaite, San José, Tamaulipas, Mexico. G. I. Finlay, anal.

The calculation of I results as follows in percentage compo-

sition by standard minerals :

RPEROCIASE. ok <3. bonds scas ut 28.9 WNCGINGS Aig =. hn Sacanibasat. 4.2

PMNINEE Sa foe eS cele wsereSnaaccs + vd 25.7 PTO SIOS.2c-550s. 0 see ce ae ans 4.2

MRSC. Ny cc5. 23s one ua cans 29.0 Macnefite.......... egisteaetes 7 A

So SE Ee ae came eae 83.6 POTN Wiel Le wta Meareentels 52 10.5

The rock, therefore, belongs to order 6 russare of the per-

salanes. It is peralkalic miaskase and dosodic miaskose.

Number II gives the following mineral percentages for its

HOM -<

Wrihoclase.s. cn cte-ceste nce ss 25.02 MeCN tk cc tetna teases 3-94

PRICES erase wean t at aeaee 19.91 PO DSIIE ind perce ces eee 2 4.86

AMOUMTG S26. sce oe oc 723 Peri. ot.teteteeeesas 8.80

52.16

Ih Cn Ut | See ae or 33.23

Bah cet leacenes Cars dates dty 85.39

It is tasmanare order 7 of the persalanes. It is peralkalic

laugenase and dosodic laugenose.

3. Camptonite

(2) San Carlos Type. — Numerous small dikes of this rock

are found in the more basic portions of the nephelite syenite

286 FINLAY

mass. They are often less than an inch in width. To the un-

aided eye they present the appearance of dense basalt except as

being porphyritic by reason of the shining black crystals of

hornblende which they contain. The contacts with the enclos-

ing nephelite syenite are very sharp. Even in the smallest

dikes near the walls little included pieces of the nephelite

rock may at times be found. These dikes are almost always

quite fresh, but cavities filled with secondary minerals are

met.

Microscopic Description. — Under the microscope this variety

of the camptonite appears as a holocrystalline porphyritic rock

with marked fluidal arrangement. Hornblende in two genera-

tions makes up over four fifths of the whole. Augite is present

in phenocrysts, perhaps five per cent. of the total rock. Feld-

spar in minute areas is packed away in the interstices of the

ground-mass. Apatite and magnetite are prominent. The

ground-mass shows pronounced flow structure. The grain is

much finer near the contact with the enclosing nephelite syenite.

The phenocrysts are chiefly brown basaltic hornblende, with

no noticeable effects of alteration. The basal sections of this

mineral are sometimes .5 mm. in diameter. They are of the

usual six-sided forms and generally give indications of zonal

structure. Long prismatic individuals are often dull green at

the center with an outer rim of the brown hornblende. In other

crystals this order is reversed. ‘The angle of extinction is low,

not over 9°. Pleochroism is confined to shades of brown.

Twins are common. Apatite and magnetite are the usual in-

cluded minerals and rims of the latter due to magmatic resorp-

tion are sometimes seen. (See Pi Acie the.29)

Phenocrysts of augite are much rarer. This mineral is violet

gray in color and scarcely pleochroic. Its crystal outlines are

never perfect for a surrounding rim of serpentinic alteration pro-

ducts is invariably present. The smaller augites of the ground-

mass are entirely altered to serpentine. Almost the whole of

the ground-mass however is made up of hornblende and inter-

stitial feldspar. Magnetite grains at times .15 mm. across and

large perfect crystals of apatite occur sporadically.

GEOLOGY OF THE SAN JOSE DISTRICT 287

The hornblende prisms of the younger generation average

-07 mm. in length by .or mm. in breadth. They show the

same colors and pleochroism as do the larger hornblendes.

The pieces of feldspar packed in between the hornblendes are

very minute, seldom above .o2 mm. in length. No twinning

could be observed. The feldspar in thin sections is very clear

and fresh. Irregular pieces of magnetite, often nearly as large

as the augites, are surrounded as the pyroxene is by serpentinic

rims. The perfect crystals of apatite .o7 mm. across on the

basal section are notable for the inclusions which they contain

of microscopic hornblendes, zonally arranged.

(6) Casa Grande Type. — The variety of camptonite here de-

scribed is met in a three-foot dike on the road leading to San

Carlos just as one leaves San Jose.

Microscopic Characters. —Seen in the hand specimen the

rock is black and very fine-grained. Only a few shining prisms

may be made out in the dense aphanitic ground-mass.

Microscopic Appearance.— Under the microscope the rock

shows a holocrystalline porphyritic texture. The phenocrysts

are of hornblende and augite, embedded in a ground-mass made

up of little feldspars, hornblende, augite, magnetite and apatite.

Calcite and analcite are secondary products.

The augites of the older generation are by far the most abun-

dant phenocrysts. Eight-sided sections are developed, with

very perfect crystal boundaries, which are defined by the usual

faces (110), a(100) and d(o10).. The pyroxene prisms are

usually half as broad as they are long. They take all possible

orientations. The color varies considerably. Violet gray pre-

vails but light shades of green are often observed. Some crys-

tals are nearly colorless. The mineral is pleochroic between

gray and shades of green. A zonal structure is usually devel-

oped with green or violet cores, and a colorless outer shell.

Inclusions of apatite and magnetite are in linear arrangement

parallel with the crystallographic faces. An exterior shell of

magnetite grains has often been added by magmatic resorption,

or where no secondary magnetite has formed the crystal edges

are usually frayed out. The extinction angle is nearly 45°.

288 FINLAY

Intergrowths with hornblende have been observed but they are

rare. Sections approximately parallel with (oo1) show the

emergence of an optic axis at one side of the field.

Phenocrysts of hornblende are associated with the porphy-

ritic crystals of augite. This mineral is in eight-sided sections,

.g mm. by .6 mm., which have (110), 4(010) and a(100),

in the prism zone, very sharply developed. The pleochroism is

strong, a = pale yellowish-brown, 6 = deep earthy brown, c=

light brown. The crystals are often composed of two or more

shells of varying chemical composition, the inner core being the

darker. The whole individual may be surrounded by a thin

rim of grains of magnetite, although embayments resulting

from magmatic resorption are rare. The extinction angle is

low, 4°. Alteration at the center of the larger crystals leads

to the formation of calcite.

Both the above minerals occur in a second generation in the

ground-mass. The hornblende is in long and very narrow

clear brown blades which fray out at the ends. They are no-

ticeably fibrous. Their extinction angle is low. They attain a

maximum size of .7 mm. by .03 mm. but usually they are but

half as large. They make up about Io per cent. of the rock.

Augite occurs in the ground-mass in rough grains and stubby

prisms .2 mm. by .0o5 mm., gray or nearly colorless. It is

perhaps twice as abundant in the ground-mass as is the horn-

blende. Much magnetite is associated with it and square sec-

tions of this mineral are very common. Needles of apatite

which are large and perfect are found near the augite.

The feldspar of the ground-mass is commonly xenomorphic.

It seems to have been the last mineral to crystallize out of the

magma. Occasionally well-defined minute plagioclase individ-

uals are found which are evidently secondary. Their extinc-

tion angle is uniformly one or two degrees, indicating oligoclase.

Alteration products are very common in this rock. Calcite

is everywhere disseminated through itin granular masses. The

zeolitic minerals have frequently formed in small cavities, and

at the center analcite is generally found. In this rock the

mineral is colorless, with very few cleavage cracks. It is com-

GEOLOGY OF THE SAN JOSE DISTRICT 289

pletely isotropic. It clouds over when the section is heated to

redness, and gelatinizes with acid.

An analysis of the above rock gave the following per-

centages :

0 8 AE ae ey et hae 42.49 The calculated norm of the

Pe er acices th poten race 17.68 rock is given below.

Lok 0 Reena eee ts Saar 5.12 PIOUS PE eicissdacn's 20.02

ig) 2 eRe EEN See ee 5.90 ea ne eee ae 13.95

OD 8 oud xa sed tee ee a 5-28 PleoRelite, 2 aio... 22.5 é¢.% 19.60

20 ee A ey ae 15.81 Mispsides. 5.52452. . 305 14.84

Je 8 Uae te a ers 4.29 CONVING yank ee er 9.14

(hd 2.97 Pekermanite [0.202 cen33.5 LAL55

Re eect bat, ae wie ce 38 WEABMETEG ecto vc.cacceanest 7.42

99.92 99.52

It belongs with order 8 of class III and falls in rang 3 and

in grad 4, covose.

scribed occurs in narrow dikes at various points to the east and

southeast of San José.

Macroscopic Appearance. —In texture this rock is holocrys-

talline porphyritic with phenocrysts of plagioclase in a ground-

mass consisting of feldspar, augite, hornblende and magnetite.

Chlorite, muscovite, calcite and epidote are the common altera-

tion products. The plagioclase is in large complex individuals

twinned polysynthetically with many fine lamellz, the crystals

being often 1 mm. on either dimension. They afford favorable

cases for the estimation of the basicity when a section cut at a

right angle to the albite lamella may be shown to represent

the two halves of a carlsbad twin as well. Such readings indi-

cate anorthite, and the extinction angles on many albite lamellz

are high enough to give confirmation to this determination.

The phenocrysts of plagioclase often show an inner core sur-

rounded bya rim which has a different orientation optically, or,

more rarely, zonal structure, consisting of many shells, is

observed. Colorless mica, in patches 1 mm. long has _ re-

sulted where the feldspar is weathered, and with it more or

less chlorite is associated as having come from the same

source.

290 FINLAY

The small lath-shaped plagioclases in the ground-mass, which

are fresh and glassy, have low extinction angles, near 10°.

They are therefore much more acid than the feldspars of the

first generation. ‘They are often twinned in three or four fine

lamellz. They are automorphic and by their distribution they

cause the rock, at times, to approximate the diabasic texture.

Altogether plagioclase makes up about 50 per cent. of the

whole.

The augite, which was once the most abundant dark silicate

throughout the ground-mass, is now nearly all changed over

to chlorite. This mineral is faintly pleochroic from yellowish-

green to green, and shows but slight effects of double refrac-

tion.

The hornblende of. the ground-mass has a rich brown color.

It occurs as xenomorphic grains and patches which have a low

extinction angle. The interference colors are high. The pleo-

chroism is inconsiderable, various shades of brown prevailing,

Square pieces and irregular grains of magnetite make up about

5 per cent. of the rock. Calcite is very generally present as an

alteration product. Minute needles which give high interfer-

ence colors are epidote.

4. Vogesite

The rock to be described under this name occurs as a four

and a half foot dike in the andesite along Bretana Creek. It is

aphanitic and almost black. It carries no phenocrysts discern-

ible to the unaided eye.

Microscopic Characters. —Under the microscope it is found to

be holocrystalline and to contain hornblende, augite and ortho-

clase, with magnetite, some plagioclase and titanite and minute

foils of biotite. There are no well-marked porphyritic develop-

ments. The orthoclase, which was the last mineral to take crys-

talline form, encloses all the other constituents. It is without

good crystallographic boundaries. Carlsbad twins may occa-

sionally be noted.

The augite crystals are light buff-colored, xenomorphic,

.25 mm. in length by .1 mm. in width, and not pleochroic.

GEOLOGY OF THE ‘SAN JOSE DISTRICT ms

The extinction angle is large, nearly 45°. Zonal structures are

developed. The pyroxenes are often surrounded by prisms of

monoclinic amphibole.

The hornblende makes up by far the largest portion of the

rock. The individuals of the mineral are in fibrous blades

poorly defined by crystal faces in the prism zone. They attain

a maximum extension of .4 mm. and are eight or nine times as

long as they are broad. Their color is dull green. By pleochro-

ism changes to dull brown are produced. ‘The cores of the

hornblende crystals are at times different in composition from

the outer rims. Twins are rare. Extinction 20°.

Some plagioclase, evidently of secondary origin, occurs as

minute patches in the orthoclase ground. Biotite foils .1 mm.

or less in diameter are now and again associated with the clus-

ters of hornblende crystals. ‘Titanite is disseminated through

the rock in microscopic lozenge-shaped individuals. The larger

magnetite grains may be surrounded by rims of this mineral.

5. Limburgite

The rock to be described under this name is found in a dike

on the western flanks of the San Carlos Mountains five miles

south from San José. The hand specimen shows it to bea

lusterless black aphanitic rock.

Microscopic Characters. — Under the microscope a well-de-

veloped porphyritic texture with a fine-grained holocrystalline

ground-mass is at once apparent. The phenocrysts are augite

and olivine. Hornblende, augite and plagioclase make up the

ground-mass.

The augite phenocrysts as a rule are sharply bounded indi-

viduals which attain a length of .6 mm. or less. Their color

is violet gray and they are slightly pleochroic. A zonal struc-

ture with many concentric shells may usually be noted, and

with this the hour-glass structure is developed. Inclusions of

magnetite grains are arranged zonally. At times there is

evidence of magmatic resorption, and around the main crystal

a rim of secondary augite is developed. Again the center is

corroded while the outer zone is clear. Twins may often be

292 FINLAY

noted with (100) as the composition face. The twinning is

occasionally repeated in the same individual.

Olivine is the only other phenocryst. (See Pl. XIII, fig. 1.)

Several crystals of this mineral often grow together. They

almost always show corroded outlines. The inclusions are

augite and magnetite.

The chief mineral of the ground-mass is a pale brown horn-

blende in short stubby prisms of microscopic proportions .05

mm. by .o2 mm. These are slightly pleochroic. The basal

sections are eight-sided by the development of the prism and

pinacoid.

The many small augites of a younger generation are by no

means so numerous. They may be easily distinguished from

the hornblendes by their buff color. Interstitial feldspar is

found all through the ground-mass in pieces which are too

small to give a clue as to their characteristics. Grains of mag-

netite are everywhere present and secondary analcite should

be noted.

TAGLE_T

a3 He jONE IV. V. VI. VII. | VII.

SiO, 58.40 42.49 62.31 45.75 48.03 48.49 52.83 49.42

TiO, 25 .16

AiO; 20.25 | 17.68 | 18.63 | 18.51 | 20.98| 18.99 | 20.70 | 22.99

Heo; 1.78) 5-12.) .2.38| 6.55). 7.6O'l) O;50ry 92 ean uae

FeO 2.41| 5.90 | 1.33°) 6.02) -4-57)| “5.6019 -oguaetae

MgO .49| 5.28 60) 5.065)" #45431) 15-05 .4I 45

CaO 3-11 | 15.81 | 5.91?| 11.85 | 9254) 10:78 |) T.00 |e 2259

Na,O 7-01) 4.29 4.97] 3.41 | 3.28) 3.47| 9.94) 9.63

K,O | 5.39] 2.97 | 352i) e235 29g) Aad eeoge lee

LAGS 320 .O7 tr. .03

H,O1e 27 38 16 .06 son .10 oe .38

H,O12 Ey OF .20 .40 55 10; Fe2Ole ens

100.13 99.92 99.95 99.76 100.49 | 99.44 99.62 99.99

I. Nepheline syenite. H. S. Washington, analyst.

II. Camptonite. G. I. Finlay, analyst.

IIT. Andesite. G. I. Finlay, analyst.

IV. Diorite. G. 1. Finlay, analyst:

V. Basalt. G. I. Finlay, analyst.

VI. Diorite. Diobasic facies. G. I. Finlay, analyst.

VII. Analcite tinguaite. H.S. Washington, analyst.

VIII. Analcite tinguaite. G.I. Finlay, analyst.

GEOLOGY OF THE SAN JOSE DISTRICT 293

TABLE II

| ele “eee eee evant vay, | wire.

SiO, O73, 708 1.038. .762 | .800 | .808 | .880 | .823

ALO; “loa kgs fh PTO2"|, FOL |.200: |“. 550. |». 203 '|' 7226

FeO, (0. OFS 032 O15 .040 | .044 | .060 | .O18 | .O17

FeO 033-,| .682 O16 || 20383) || .6G2" |" i014 |) .017) | .027

MgO SOF2) sb 32. |} ORS || S826 _ +110 26>) COLO. OPE

CaO .056 | .282 105.21 | .170 | .193 .O18 | .047

Na,O -PE3. | 2069 -080 | .055 | .053 | .056 | ,160 | .155

K,O .057 | .032 037 | 024 | .021 | .O15 | .052 | .045

TABLE III

ete ie ‘| I. | iy eve te vie (0 van, | VELL.

Na,0 Hes) )2.05) | 2.8) | 2029)" /2752°%) 3.73° |'.307 | 3.44

K,O | | | |

oe 2000 2556 | MOR 2 OFee MAO. || .233)| 044) 1.58

FeO; | | | | |

| |

sr amas SPA, | kAm | ETS |. -TO3'| 092 | 1087 | ..240.| 243

SiO, | | | | |

Lins i SPLG! |, 2097 3} 2.077 | 1072)|. 2066 | 069)! (181 | A183

S10, lA a pe irene 8

VII. CHEMICAL RELATIONS OF THE SAN JOSE

ROCKS

In Table I, page 292, are given the results of the eight anal-

yses which have been made of the San José rocks. The per-

centage composition by weight is indicated here for each oxide.

In Table II the molecular amounts of the oxides have been

obtained by dividing the percentage composition for each con-

stituent by the corresponding molecular weights. In Table III

the ratios for certain of the oxides when compared with other

constituents in terms of their molecular amounts in every case,

are stated.

It will be noted, when the analyses which embrace nearly all

the rock-types of the district are examined, that the range in

silica between the most acid member, andesite, and the most

basic, camptonite, is not large. The nephelite syenite is more

acid than is usual with such rocks, and the tinguaites are more

basic. The type andesite is also poorer in silica than the aver-

age of many andesites. Alumina is high in every analysis.

294 FINLAY

Fe,O, and FeO vary between wide ranges. The rocks are all

comparatively high in lime, some of them, as the diorite and

camptonite, abnormally so. They are high in the alkalies, and

in every one soda is two or three times as great as potash.

High soda and alumina, with low silica, makes necessary the

formation of orthoclase and nephelite, with egirite in the

tinguaites, and light green soda augite in the nephelite syen-

ites. Here also the dark brown hornblende, rich in iron,

which appears in the more basic varieties, is edged with green

by relative increase in the amount of soda present in the later

stages of crystallization from the rock magma. Magnesia is

very low in the nephelite syenites and tinguaites. Biotite is al-

most entirely lacking in these rocks. It only enters into the

most basic of the nephelite syenites. The mineral is, however,

present in the diorites where MgO is relatively high.

The character of the augite in all the rocks of the district is

very uniform. It is a light green variety, poor in iron and mag-

nesia and rich in soda. Its appearance and optical properties

are much the same in the normal nephelite syenite, in the ande-

site, in the diorite, and even in the camptonites.

As stated above, the rocks of the San Jose district, so far as

the proofs are at hand, fall into three divisions, from the earliest

to the most recent.

1. Nephelite syenite and diorite.

2. Andesite and dacite.

3. Basalt, tinguaite, camptonite, vogesite and limburgite.

There are represented effusive and deep-seated rocks which

vary widely in chemical composition. The analyses, however,

when placed side by side in the order in which they have been

printed are seen to follow in a definite sequence. They are not

ina ““series,” according to Brogger's use of the term, ~ They

are related after the manner of his “faciessuite.’ The tingua-

ites when examined with the others are found to present

striking differences toward them. It is possible that they are

part of a tinguaite “‘series.”” The ratios between the sum of the

alkalies and silica, and between soda and silica are nearly the

same in the two tinguaites, but the alkalies function together in

GEOLOGY OF THE SAN JOSE DISTRICT 295

both, as do also the ferrous and ferric molecules, and in the

same sense.

The ratios for all the other rocks of the region, so far as

analyses are available, are found to vary in a definite manner.

Na,O

K,O and

They tend to fix themselves as multiplies of } for

FeO er

FeO)” and the variation is never more than .10, nor usually

2-3

K,O

so large. is constantly on the increase from left to right,

between 1.98 and 3.73. varies in the opposite sense,

FeO

FeO:

constantly decreasing, excepting in III, where 1.20 is a great

Na,O + K,O

deal too low. —= a 2— is at the same time decreasing from

Na,O

SiO,

For the San José district, soda increases at the expense of

potash, as silica decreases with reference to the combined alka-

lies and to soda alone. At the same time ferric iron is gaining

over ferrous iron.

left to right as is also

ANNALS N. Y. ACAD. Sci., XIV, March 22, 1904—20.

PLATE VIII.

Scale: 2 inches = 1 mile.

acm. —« kilometer,

(298 )

re" Laie i chs: eon ‘4

M 7

wre

Pet

i is yy

ANNALS Ni YY. AcCap: Scr Vor. XIV.

cae se Re

PRE SAG

ge Se GM

oe =

Tan un ae

HEATH } Maat ih LE

Heating eae ann

He Mt Aerie ue ie

ee SEN Se sok Mie it

Hr HN) MY) aes Wes XE

nies OR Hy, ei, we

EADS ONO Mi’ ENA

at XK RLY Me ae is

Hult i ie RM KX *

al an ik RA f Loo! ) Ay

Eon FRIAR EAN i

eaarnatoctaitcunni tt AN

ARON ne ai i

i nae OAK Oe ae i

a HS fie ie Ht a

ut Rit che HAE MHA

Pirate WELT;

: IN UN ©

\i~ \

Ue ees

nt HE tf Hee

: i Ein tt a LH %G SS Sea ae Y oe ie

Ba ates Baioen ree 2 ee

he RYN en CAS SN OERNIEC

TSN ee Canes E

MMR OK ROLES EAS ;

HR REA Hie E

il RK MKAKKK KX ) A> ae ae tne co

Hee OOO a SS

PRX KSA XIX NEM SS Sure eG

TOO iE Ae Sn Oe 2

PORK Keo

RY I Neg ase > CESAR 5

RRO Te E

BN ee ;

an Ww CORRE

RS Xs WANS

py CNR

SRS y,

We an RON

co . NS

‘ sae co

a BS ae ie

if LY mre XX xe

TSO RORY KX:

LereMuchanauenars A RX

SONA TREE ‘i

DRX STMT OMAR:

SHH eu the THE Hie 7 Svc Sean 3

inn inet UHH Sco

Gate Fauaue HARES “al a eee et

BLT I alee a HL ) rH i Ses ee eee ae

FTAA He | Hi HT SH iN oe BON=, O

HAHAH He <i oS ye3

THA ae BN hi ann: Le:

: ee

r, i <6 Se p= a

7 Ba Fe ee

DIC eo. ge Oe One Ragen ae ame gig

Awnnats N. Y

Acap. Sci. VOL. XIV.

Piate VIII.

—

Alnacuas:

Hal i fy AA LTT i ha L 7T=TALIN INJN* :

LL a | nlndadadolnly \ LW a

4 22 r PLLPLPLELELEPLL aucale :

Sera cual ty eneatatatetgtal tpt Uptateedat tata it slat lalnbe

Seal teladtada tials WHEW el ex

51 =| yy fq :

— ee LL | PL LPL eral =

4 tT og | qa ee LW

ial a WwW a iH 1 3

0) fy on = =<

Oo @ © SI ; ie

teal me _ y )

Q z = a

a <q =

b nm

ie)))

ct S =

| al

SLL i yh

ene ma = Y “4 (AK

WO Ee >

HA AA NOG

LSA A i

mf Hy ¢ f “ a

4) ‘ay nN

4 L} ha y (= { a

& ; x

<allallin’ § o

HS ‘\ = 3

4 et y e ie

naan WA 5

Le 9

WH Kx U )

\ Cc

HHH Ff 3

availa A \Y g

| VAY, E

Wu \ J X aT

Huu iH /\ as Vi

HAA \

WL 7 ®) &

Ldtotatelty iH Wis MeL

alla nA LI ; Lays i

WU | | | UAL?

HAA L i j ray

HHH HHH | £ Wis fF LI

LA ul ie al H H

PULL indmameica Bae i nanan

LOG ‘a 4 a L|

ot «2

—— oS, “ae

‘

Dee

»*

= i,” , 7s a i eee Ti 7

a5; a aS aes Dene nes ae 75 a8 :

or a > Sari -

. <. ast } : ou Balen “ar 9 e? ig rok ae x id : = Fi 25

Mr ey eee bres ee, are

righ’ ey 2 ADS ean

s- - i fe A ; ie 2 ae it ae Ch

O: “A eS A - oe ait be ot > ean

* 7 af .- aa eam 7 a

4 rot

= 1 Gdeae

7 . : oan

‘: : : = 7 1

eres . a

a = ~e :

aw er, - 5” ~

- = +@ ae Ve

; ese, TS 4 eo amy ee on the

tin Ma ail .

a on Ue wa a

betta ae 5. I oee

eae yates Kee

a a) _ a —

= a :

ee Ale

hs. 79 :

a 42 }

~~ SA: a= é

i - 7 fa On

oP lw ee or

ce eon ee = i,

ja aA? :

par cae :

a e

i a Se ee

aa vhs f

: 4 as at

: _ : - }

7 ¥

Bi we

: eo ty, >} i

7 a

“| .. % -

_ 2 4 >»

~ - a

. a 2 oa

a te

. = a

J : . 2

an al

. D

i ~

r -

- >

a _ = é

ane . a Gs Ee

Pa = = e

. nd

* rr —_

; a »

a > XN

ne. > Eee a

Oe a ae

Ye z- * 4s

“Ty te tar ws ihe he

anh, cae a

iy 6 mi,

—s - a a

a . ol we 7

ae a. a> ar a

are : 1 a

Ly) a Se ae - i

y fo L ae * we +r '

a a a 7 = . « >

~ 7 i . —.

, he a =

te eee Pe es lg = z

d ey \ ,

ied

PLATE IX.

Fig. 1. Nephelite Syenite. Ordinary Light. x33. The larger

grain of magnetite is surrounded by clear, crystalline

nephelite, and by augite. Kaolinized orthoclase ap-

pears in the upper part of the figure.

Fig. 2. Syenitic Dike Rock. Ordinary Light. 933" Uhedark

mineral is green fibrous hornblende. ‘The colorless

portions in the figure are orthoclase.

(300)

Meamans N. Y. ACAD. Scr. VoL. XIV. PEATE FX.

Pics us

PLATE 2

Fig. 1. Nephelite Syenite. Crossed Nicols. X33. The loz-

enge-shaped crystal is titanite. The grayish mineral

below it is nephelite. Orthoclase appears in the dark

and light areas above.

Fig. 2. Tinguaite. Crossed Nicols. x33. The ground-mass

consists of egirite needles and irregular pieces of

feldspar. The porphyritic crystal is orthoclase.

(302)

PATE Xe

VoL. XIV.

ANNALS N. Y. ACAD. SCI.

TE.

Fic.

Fic; 2:

PLATE Sof:

Fig. 1. Tinguaite. Crossed Nicols. x33. Crystal of nephe-

lite in ground-mass of zgirite and feldspar.

Fig. 2. Tinguaite. Crossed Nicols. x33. The phenocryst is

of weathered and corroded feldspar. The replace-

ment by secondary minerals, beginning at the periph-

ery of the crystal, is first by a zone of feldspar rods,

and intergrown pyroxene needles. ‘The dark zone is of

analcite. The colorless central portion is orthoclase.

(304)

mmmans N. Y. ACAD. Sci. Vou. XIV. PLATE XI

PLATE 2311.

Fig. 1. Andesite. Crossed Nicols. x33. Crystals of plagio-

clase feldspar in a crystalline oun of feldspar

and magnetic grains.

Fig. 2. Diorite in ordinary light. x33. The colorless mineral

is plagioclase. Augite appears above in contact with

a large mass of magnetite, below bordering on a

crystal of biotite.

(306 )

PiGAnE Onl.

PANINMALS N. Y. ACAD. Sci. Von. XIV.

FIG; 1.

Pies 2.

nae

PLATE XAgf,

Fig. 1. Limburgite Dike. Ordinary Light. x33. Crystals of

colorless olivine in a ground-mass of augite, magnetite

grains and brown glass.

Fig. 2. Camptonite. Ordinary Light. x33. A phenocryst of

augite appears in the lower left hand corner. The

ground-mass is made up of hornblende prisms, ir-

regular feldspar crystals (plagioclase) and grains of

magnetite.

(308 )

PLATE. XDI.

XIV.

VOL.

Scl.

YY. ACAD.

ANNALS N.

FIG. £2

Fig. 2.

PLATE XIV.

(309)

ca ye

Seva <

‘eed : cd /

_— = 7

- ert ‘ 5 Fishel

PLATE XIV.

Piedra Iman, south of San José, at the Santa Helena mine. The

mass in the center is of limestone included in the andesite. Mt.

Armadillos on the left.

(310)

mnrans N.Y. ACAD, Sci. VoL. XIV. PLATE XIV.

PLATE XV.

View from the west, looking across the San José valley toward Mt.

Anacuas (left) and Mt. Armadillos (right). Limestone nearly hori-

zontal capping andesite.

(312)

ANNALS Na Y. ACAD. ScI. VoL. XIV. PLATE XY.

PEATE XVI.

The San Carlos Mountains, (nephelite syenite), as seen from the

Baril range, looking south across the Arroyo Grande.

(314)

anmans N. Y. ACAD. Sci. VOL. XIV. PLATE XVI;

PLATE XVII.

View looking southeast across the valley of the Arroyo Grande

toward the town of San Carlos. ‘The mountain slopes on both side:

of the valley are of nephelite syenite.

(316)

ANINAGS N.-Y. ACAD. Scr. VoL. XIV. PEATE rL.

PLATE, XV EU

The Pic de Diablo from the head of Bocca de Alemos canyon.

Nephelite syenite.

(318)

ANMALS N.Y. ACAD. Scl. VOL. XIV. |PiANGes DONATE

bea Dashes ©

al al ain

PUBLICATIONS

OF THE,

NEW YORK ACADEMY OF SCIENCES

[Lyceum or NaturaL History. 1818-1876]

The publications of the Academy consist of two series, viz :-— |

(1) The Annals (octavo series), established in 1823, contain

the scientific contributions and reports of researches, together

with the records of meetings, annual exhibitions, etc.

Publication of the Transactions of the Academy was discon- °

tinued with the issue of Volume XVI, 1898, and merged in the

Annals. A volume of the Annals will in general coincide with

the calendar year and will be distributed in parts. The price

of current issues is one dollar per part or three dollars per

volume. Authors’ reprints are issued as soon as the separate

_ papers are printed, the dates appearing above the title of each

paper.

(2) The Memoirs (quarto series), established in 1895, are is-

_ sued at irregular intervals. It is intended that each volume shall

BS hy

be devoted to monographs relating to some particular depart-

ment of science. Volume I is devoted to Astronomical Mem- _

oirs, Volume II, to Zoological Memoirs, etc. The price is one

dollar per part, as issued.

All publications will hereafter be sent free to fellows and

members who desire to receive them, but other fellows and

‘members will only receive the Records, issued as a separate

from the Annals. The Annals will be sent, as before, to

honorary and corresponding members desiring them.

Subscriptions and inquiries concerning current and back

numbers of any of the publications of the Academy should be

addressed to THe LIBRARIAN

New York’ Academy of Sciences

Columbia University

New. York City.

PRICES OF PUBLICATIONS

Annals of the Lyceum (Vols. I-X1I), . . . per Vol., $5.00

Proceedings ‘“ Ai (Mots Telly ers is at 5.00

Trans. of the Academy (Vols. I-XVI), 2.02 * “5.00

Annals‘ Ny (Vols. I-X), eM er ee! eo e8 OOO

Annals. “ s (Vol. XI ef se 7.) 3.00

~ Memoirs ‘‘ Uy ree T} Pt: L Vol. II, Pts. I, II, MD),

Per Part; aah’, 1,00

ANNALS

NEW YORK

_ ACADEMY OF SCIENCES

;

VOLUME XIV

1901-1903

Editor:

a CHARLES LANE POOR

New York

Published by the Academy

The New Era Printing Company

Lancaster, Pa.

NEW YORK ACADEMY OF SCIENCES

OFFICERS, 1905

President—JAMES F. Kemp, Columbia University. .

Recording Secretary—HeErmon C. Bumpus, American Museum.

Corresponding Secretary—RicHARD E. Donce, Teachers College.

Treasurer—Cuares F, Cox, Grand Central Depot. :

Librarian—RALPH W. TowrErR, American Museum.

Editor—CHARLES LANE Poor, 4 East 48th Street.

SECTION OF ASTRONOMY, PHYSICS, AND CHEMISTRY

Chairman—ERNEST R. vON NARDROFF, 360 Tompkins Ave., |

Brooklyn.

Secretary—C, C. TROWBRIDGE, Columbia University.

SECTION OF BIOLOGY

Chairman—W. M. WHEELER, American Museum.

Secretary—M. A. BiceLow, Teachers College.

SECTION OF GEOLOGY AND MINERALOGY

Chairman—EpmunpD O. Hovey, American Museum,

Secretary—A. W. Grasau, Columbia University.

SECTION OF ANTHROPOLOGY AND PSYCHOLOGY

Chairman—F. J. E. WoopsripcE, Columbia University.

Secretary—R. S. WoopwortH, Columbia University.

SESSION OF 1905

The Academy will meet on Monday evenings at 8.15 o'clock,

from October to May, in the American Museum of Natural

History, 77th Street and Central Park, West.

GENERAL INDEX TO VOLUME XIV.

Names of authors in heavy face type.

Titles of papers in SMALL CAPS.

Achatinellide of Oahu.......... 132

Ackerman, Richard; ref........ 104

MUI EMMANITC 6. ce ce eos 289

EMTs oie <i" ew etQueusidb-t ms a 285

Pemtiia ATCCMISIA.. ... 02.0.8 ae 23

MeNeEASSICOIMNiS. .. ... .. «sess 15, 26

PATS os is os Se aw cee |

We €froeta Baster........... 13

Pereteeantissima . +... 26s. 34

SE ea 13

oT a 3

MPPIEMOGA, one nce ene eee UE e

A. plumosa Miiller......... II

ADS = 24. 25 eas ss ose ce

OS ee 27

Pee UTE gc ot. sedi is os 34

A. (Taractostephanus) ele-

2 ESS 18, 19

A. (Taractostephanus) xan-

PST AINIOICR 4... xs «haahe 36, 38

EE os soa eek de se Sta we 2-17

meuugioba dianthus............ 3

AcTIon, THE, OF ALCOHOL ON

Muscte, F. S. Lee and W.

PINE Po Sala alates aleve area 158 |

Adams, Edward D.; Life mem.. 120.

Address of the President of the

N. Y. Ac. Sci., Feb. 25, 1901.69-84

MINE) k's 9 ow a a ehets oe 16, 35, 36

MESOSSE | 2, s/s) cept wane « es

POPEERMIC-AMCICS 2... cs olan ee ictees 283

fEgirite..264, 279, 280, 281, 282, 283,

284, 294

mensciz, Alex.; ref...1, 31, 36, 37;

38, 40

Age-fraternity

8 ye ane

oo a WE Mee: 2 at a a

A. lucida Duerden

1 DULL Rae pee eo ag

A. sp. (Bermudas McM.).. 2,

nS A a eRe Ae ea

Atr MovEMENTS NEAR THE MoutTH

OF AN ORGAN PIPE, A PHOTO-

GRAPHIC Stupy oF THE, F. L.

Tufts IO0Q—-II0

oe abe) ame) ee

6) 6. 010, See ee) ee) 6/8, fa

| Ala cinerea

Albite..267, 269, 271, 277, 278, 2

289

Alcohol, Action of, on muscle... 136

ALCOHOL, THE ACTION OF, ON

Musctz, F. §. Lee and W.

SePINEL ye ket ae Ee a 6 oo 158

Bieonqtin stOcle.. ...: i206 ecias 143-144

JN Va OM es ere ee ee ae ed 79

PMEORIEL, he fees < etn 208 be RA gia 16

Fis MOGI Sele se 2 tek oud ee oie 16

Alimentary tract in Thalassema

Pele tba c fawn cnc a 8 Pay Sue's 207-213

TE ka eiby deere Sa arn te tan gs 258

ALSEA INDIANS, THE, OF OREGON,

iy. UNE ras a Rs ws Rarer 93

UNSAIN EIA Ook oie) ga tes o otee ek Bae 258

_Amphibole,

250, 260; 261, 264, 265; 201

Amphitrite..171, 175, 178, 180, 181,

185, 186, 190, 195, 198, 199, 201,

202, 204, 205, 200). 212; 238) 23%,

236

MOREE on. 5's 2 sheen ease 160

Analcite..279, 280, 281, 283, 284, 288

| RA RUELS 3s Lire so eats ee ee Seah: 292

Tinguite, Analysis of....... 285

Tinguite in San José Dis-

AE Bice tls ae hy eee 282-285

corona. type... 6s 283-285

Mt. Armadillos Type. 282-283

PAH aptomorphids 0. acs woe se a ree or

PUIPOCSINE own einai S ata bois Whe 2 268, 278

| Andesite. .248, 251, 253, 254, 255, 256,

| 257, 267, 269, 273, 279, 283, 290,

293, 294, 306.

Andesite, Analysis of........... 292

Andesite in San José District.270—273

| Andres, A.; ref..26, 28, 34, 35, 39, 43

sil aars bali wl 20 0 WME oS 122

VENTE VES Vc Cig aA NAS 5 vi ede,

ANNELIDS, THE NaturaL His-

TORY OF SOME TuBE-FoRMING,

He de invile -.. 2’... 158, 160-161

PA TANARIS ana oc a G8 vig bi0:'n oo 226

Anorthite..... 267, 269, 271, 278, 289

(319 )

320 INDEX.

Anthopleditas: -<.2 vos ay eee oe 16, 35-39 | Novae roan a ee 145-146

AD SI GWilile strc s eee Ske 38 | Dec. 2hg0T see 156-157

Ac Disehts Gelatin, cra stay 15 ATROPHY OF THE CEREBELLUM, A

AL Seraniglitera a vk % 4. dx a kos 17, 35-| ‘CASE OF “UniuATERAT Ones.

AU Wierebsiie.2 ee a2 ace chee 26 Strong and C. E. Doran..131, 133

A. xanthogrammica’. 36-39, 50, 52

ANTHROPOLOGY AT THE DENVER

MeetTinec, G. G. McCurdy..... 143

ANTHROPOLOGY IN BERLIN, Franz

BOAS AREAS Soke es etn ee ce 143

Anthropology, Section of,

Mecting; Jan: 2819601. ....% 92-93

Feb. 45, 1900...>. .2.900—To0.|

March 25> 1OG8 .i..7..0 117-119

ADEM 222. s0OOD., oer 125-127

Oct. 28) A00f. 23 aan: 142-144

Movs n25; TOGGr x wan 153-155

Apatite. .101, 259, 260, 261, 262, 263,

264, 265, 266, 268, 272, 273, 274, |

275; 277, 284, 286; 287,288

Aphroditidz) 255) 2-a2 cnt eae ake 229

WADI SIG. 3 Ak tenc as ser aie Rie eee 219

Apollonius: ret: 3-2-2. 72

ARAPAHOE INDIANS, NOTES ON

THE, A. Le Kroeber: :.. .:-2 125-126

Aschimedess=rei.~ 322-28 one 72, 73 |

Arenicola’.. 3: 171, .175,.175, 160, 1S1,4

EOS, 16, -197,. 165, 6100, 202. .204,

208,. 212; 25,0231

ATICIA. S175, TOS, 216,.210,. 226, 232

Avistarchuss<telen sc. on ote... 72

ATIStODe sar ely ies grt tetec cc alee 7

Avistyllis: were. we. . 35... 72

ARIZONA, THE TOROWEAP VALLEY

In, Richard E. Dodge....... 134

Arroyo Grande,

250, 252, 253, 277, 316

132

III

Articular

Artiodactyla

ASBESTOS REGION IN NORTHERN

VERMONT, A New, J. F. Kemp,

139, 140-141

ENS DERI Sermon cme ue ke a mene 147

meplanchita. sacs cos ek a eee 234

ASTATIC MAGNETOMETER, A DIF-

FERENTIAL, SUGGESTED BY PROF.

Roop, C. C. Trowbridge .130—131

ENSECLS I ten ME PTeeS Mann ee ee eee 123

ASTRONOMICAL PHOTOGRAPHY

WITH A VISUAL TELESCOPE,

Geo r Hale: fo 5s ec 94, 95-97

Astronomy, Section of,

Meeting, Jan: 7, 19o0r..-..2 88-89

BieD.e4; TGOL. ssi. eek 04-97

Marcha) 190 ..s ac. + I09—I10

PNPSEL ST: NE OOT waka. 120-122

May 16, T00t.. ..0:\6.130=131

Deka TOL as vest 134-135

Augite..259, 260, 262, 263, 264, 265,

266, 268,- 270, 272, (273; 274. 42s50

277, 278, 204, 286; 287, 286, 200.

290, 291, 292, 204

| Aueitecamptorite: 25... secon IOI

(Auieetiniac’. 2. nce cae £6; 35; 46

| A. Caplbatau 2 as.2 a eee ee 35

A. "Stelloides! «xe arenacuese eters re

ACO Vierrill. 12 cess ms aituc te eee 15

Balanoglossus.. \c ok a6..6. ae eee 138

NB aittd wie -accve t.3ociae Sore eee 126

Bardeleben; ref... caciacu stones 54

| Baril Range. .249, 262, 253. 255, 275;

hzzzeueces

BARRE, VERMONT, THE GRANITE

or, George I. Finlay...... IOI-102

Basaltici acer 256, 257; 2606) 204

Basalt, Analysis 06-5 4.6 Soe eee 292

| Basalt in San José District..277—278

| BATESVILLE, ARKANSAS, THE SI-

| LuRIAN Fauna, Gilbert van

Ingen «. . 30.5. eee 12

| Bayley, W. «Si; -zef.- oa cee 267

Bdellostomay a) .% Aa accnec cee 136

Becher*. refer); 2. aee.c setae 78

| Becke method)... 2. ie cos. t aoe 281

Becquerel “rays... ee oo ee 07

Beebe, C. W., Report of summer

WOPK 5 oo: 5 a wats Stacie pee eee 138

Belemnite) 2c\e- jh ate eee 253

| BELopont REPTILES, CHARACTERS

AND RELATIONSHIPS OF THE,

J. H.. McGregor: 4::55-2 ee 90-91

| Bergh, R&S ret ee 227,228. 236

Bigelow, M. A., Some Compari-

SONS OF THE GERM-LAYERS IN

ENTOMOSTRACA CRUSTACEA.IIO, II2

Tel oi sh se. We, Oe 98, 124

| Bitpao, SPAIN, THE Iron MINES

or, Heinrich Riess) ee 125

Biology, Section of,

Meeting, Jan. 14, 1901....89—92

Reb." "li, 00h ee cies 97-99

March a1 roar. ane IIO—I1I2

April (S$, 19o0teceetee 122-125

Mav. 15;40GOD.e eee 131-133

OGG nar) grgur<ace 136-138

Novy. Tisroqobe. caer 146-147

Dee 0; 1G0L.a ee 157-161

Biotite..101, 265, 266, 267, 268, 270,

271;, 275; 270; -277;. 276, 280.26

283, 284, 290, 291, 2904

Biotiteschist

INDEX. p 321

Buiacx Hitts oF SoutH DAKOTA B, californica ...<. 2... 5 ene te"

AND Wyominc, NoTES ON THE : OAs 2) ae a ee a5

TRIASSIC AND JURASSIC STRATA To CACTIANNIS | os: 2 Bis es. ote of 2s 17

oF THE, E. O. Hovey....... 148, 152| Bunodide ..... DE Or ERs TA; a5

Blastopore of Thalassema....195—198 Barfemmacen. las oe cvale ote 14

PG UIMANN® (TEL. 5. ess ie were s 216 | Bunodosoma:. .,.....: Ee. TOy0 45e5 20

fiwe lamestone ..........0. 0: 162, .163 Bere Cries. bores bot estate, 205

Boas, Franz, ANTHROPOLOGY IN Bureer, Oey ver. i. i.e ee ss 227, 236

0? Relea ere ree ieee Te WEIS oitala Gist tiers 2. 60) oS en eK 8 sae 216

Councillor ...........-...: TAGLAR Cec 3 Nie 3) a a a er oO 170

Bocca de Alemos Arroyo....250, 252-| Calciferous ....... Pes Uae FF

Bond; ERE Moe iescke! 6 x areas cee eae O5)|Galeite.).... 260, 277; 288,. 280, 290

0 ee ee Zit, 212) Calkms. Gary WN:, ref. 21, 4, 5; 11,

BorEAL VEGETATION IN A SWAMP beeen 245 40,041, 90,137, 40, 224

ON STATEN ISLAND, DISCOVERY Report of wofk at . Woods

or A Mastopon’s TooTH AND Elegie eaersis + 2 cates Reo 137

THE REMAINS oF A, Arthur Callosamia promethea.......... 160

Lo eerie 07-00) Gambian 22 fsenck. ee So. Tia. <0

Boroschek, L. and F. L. Tufts, CAMBRO-ORDOVICIAN OUTLIER,,

A Strupy oF THE ABSORPTION Tue, at WeELLSTown, HamiIt-

oF Licut spy Dyes oF FLUORES- | ton County, New York, J. F.

CEIN GROUP.... 01. ...-0-5 PAG TAG | ICTIPS. 2s. eka se esau vee: I13-I15

Botryllus Se miiehete ale. ‘ela PB) she's) efepiel wile + 216 Campbell, W.; Tah CEASE ARE Ew I2I

Boys, Charles Vernon; Hon. | Camptonite..248, 255, 256, 257, 279,

6 ee a 94, 103, 120) 293, 294, 308

FOE oe eee ee ee eee eens 109 | INGAIY SIS Os... Wan cae 6 Oe Me 292

BRACHYCEPHALY, DOLICHOCEPH- | In the San José District. 285-290

ALY AND, AS DoMINANT FAcTorRS | Caso Grande Type. ..287-280

IN THE SKULLS OF MAMMALS, Rineon Type... .....% 289-290

US 9 a 147 San Carlos Type....285—287

eee ie OR) Twa MOTSTIN= "=| Canadare ........0. +065 wee eae 271

GUISHED Puysrcrans, Dr. P@Aneameey Ais ee Eta 259, 264

EDOUARD SEGUIN AND HIS SON, |Cannea Venaticarum, 51, M..... I2T

Dr. Epwarp Secuin, A. E, |Carz Cod, Erosion By FLy1ne

SRG See ae 100; Sanp on THE BEECHES OF,

Brandt, J. F.; ref..13, 19, 36, 38, 43| A. A. Julien....:...: 148, 152-153

Bretafia Creek. .253, 257, 275, 283, 290

Bristol, C. L., Report of summer

work

British ASSOCIATION CoOMMIT-

TEE, A REVIEW OF THE REPORT

OF THE, ON UNDERGROUND TEM-

PERATURES, William Hallock...145

a) 6 5s, 'o) (Ohe;,0).6) 8) 'e a)! a rein’ a fale, ale 6) 6, 2p

Peotecon,” IN. Le (ref. 5... 5. ~ 92, 99

Bigst. Viee=Pres... 25 0's so 9s 103

Mroeeen: ref... .. 22s)... 267, 204

Brooks; W. K.¢ ref.......5. 204, 236

WGI cf) Sion nth, ci Pac craw 60

Brown barkevikitic hornblende.. 259

BuFFALO, GEOLOGICAL NOTES ON

THE NEIGHBORHOOD oF, D. S.

rr ri er 161, 162-163

iBulittead Rock ...i.02...45.. TO2, 162

Bumpus, Hermon C.; Res. Mem. 94

ReIMIMACTIOA satus kate atc ee 14, 30

Batetacts i570). doses eres 14, 16

Prmmmella. 25 26 SS fen hee 15; 16

ERPS SOS aris eee oe 14, 16,|

Capitella,

EOS;7 20S, 210, 227, 228, 231,. 234

VC anemriyss) TEL, wiss os te. 219, 237

(CAEDONYErAtes ~ 25 U5)s~ sce alse os 124

Carlsren, O's ref. .2,°7,/ 11; 15, 16, 26,

27, 27°33; 32; 343 39, 43

Carlsbad twins,

268, 271, 280, 283, 284, 289, 290

Catlviewaret.. eves 4 Wucnatan cs 72

Cast, A, oF UNILATERAL ATROPHY

OF THE CEREBELLUM, QO. S.

Strong and C. E. Doran..131, 133

Cattell, J. McK.; Psycuotocy at

THE DENVER MEETING........ 143

DEC eV IGG E TOSi stat oak eens 103

Cell division in Thalassema.173, 177

Cell lineage to gastrulation in

Ah ieiiei ere ee a oh re 169-194

CENTROSOMES, THE HISTORY OF

THE, IN ARTIFICIAL PARTHENO-

GENESIS, AND ITS RELATION TO

THE PHENOMENA OF NORMAL

oe INDEX.

FERTILIZATION, E. B. Wilson, Clymenellid’. 2... eee ee 138

122-124 | Coelomesoblast in Thalassema,

Cephalac=race Acres sees sek 118 218-223

Cerebellar peduncle... .......:. 133 | COLUMBIA UNIVERSITY ExXPEDI-

Cerebello-olivary (050... 24.02.66 res

CEREBELLUM, A CASE OF UNI-

LATERAL ATROPHY OF THE, O. S.

Strong and:C. E: Doran. -. 137, 133

Cerebratiltisasi enh coool one 187

Ceretis’ artenvisiac2s e+. ..s cess 23

Cereus pedunculatus ........... 20

Cerianthus’ americangs... 0.2... 21

CERTAIN RACIAL CHARACTERISTICS

OF THE BASE OF THE SKULL,

Ay Hedlickates con eee 93

CestraciOn™ 2... ft, o eee icnesk tee 136

Chactopiends:. men aac ular 229

Chaetopterus: |. e5: co eee Lye sore

CHARACTERS AND RELATIONSHIPS

OF THE BELoponT REPTILES, J.

HS MCGregotecn co) ore ae 90-91

Chelone squamata. 072) 2.0 oe Lie

Chemical Relations of the San

JOSEMRGEks oy eee eee 293-295

Chemistry, Section of,

Meeting, Jan.17., 100m... 20. 88-89

Peb: o 4s eLGOn sister 04-97

March 4. “r90T, 5. I09—IIO

ADIT, oO O-ceieah « 120-122

May <6, -1000e Le ae 130-131

Otte 77 160Tr Se es 134-135

Noy. 4) LOOT ayers. 145-146

DEC 2 tmOOrer nt. as 156-157

Child; ref..169, 171, 175, 184, 186,

187, 208, 231, 234; 235, 237

CHILDREN, ScHooL, PHYSICAL

AND MENTAL TEsts or, D. R.

NEAVOU err en ete hs 2 ais 100

Gharmerawire ne. annie eee wee 136

Chrtomeke nc eee eee es ale Sh ae 204

Chlamydoselachts'- 75... 2.8. 136

Ghiloritte - Nee ites i eos 275, 289, 290

Chondractinine s.4.s..2 0 oe 2

Chorda tympant nerve.-........ 132

Ghromatic-race +) 2. eee tc beak 119

CheOmMOSOMe sit. sce es ios 123

Chiaysoma, user ieee ss lt 92

CHRYSOMA _ PAUCIFLOSCULOSA,

Nores on, EF. E. Lloyd: ...- 90-91

Ciliation in Thalassema.189, 212-213

Giana: chins ves a ee <b oat 216

Girmiped: sleenass ciice dlese os. s Ses ra a

Clantsi seme mere tra Scin ake se Ae oc 128

laws eee eee ase ee TR

Clay Cham plati= o.0s, 6 at's swe Ee 141

Cleavage in Thalassema..189, 190-194

* Clepsine Pe ter he 228

Clymenella...175, 178, 186, 195, 199

o She 6, 6's) ssi6. 0 Je -.

TION TO PuGET SOUND DURING

THE SUMMER OF 1896, REPORT

ON THE HEXACTINIZ OF THE,

J. Playfair MceMurnich? , 2.8 I-52

CoMBINATION OF SIMPLE RHYTHM

Groups IN HIGHER SYNTHESES,

AND THEIR EQUIVALENCES,

Robert MacDougal........ 153-154

CoMPARISONS, SOME, OF THE

GERM-LAYERS IN ENTOMOS-

TRACA Crustacea, M. A. Bige-

TOW. 6. hicg es see ae eee 110; tre

CoMPOSITION, THE, OF THE

SHELLS oF TurRTLES, O. P. Hay,

IIO, III—-I12

CONDITIONS OF DEPOSITION OF

THE Fossit MAMMAL BEDS OF

THE West, William D. Mat-

thews

Conklin, .E. °G.;. ref.2167, 168) x60,

171, 174, 192, 193, 194, 216, (219,

222. 226. 22A0 227

Conn, H. W.; ref..166, 168, 170, 186,

TOO, 203, 205, 208,.:200,;° 201, 212.

2U3 4216, 22a eee sesyueay

Consanguinity sou.0 6 ee Ti7

CoNTRIBUTION, A, TO THE PROB-

LEM OF THE Ear-Bones, R.

Welle). ose ae eee 131-132

Copes ref «5.027 4k oe Tt

Coraco-clavicularis’ ¢es..e eee 59

Corniferous, limestone ..¥.. sc. 162

Corpus quadrigeminuny 2. #25, se 133

Corpus ‘restiforme (0..o.4006 senae 133

CoRRELATION, THE, OF MENTAL

AsiLities, E. L. Thorndike,

153) 154

Corresponding Secretary, N. Y.

| Ac.. Sci. Annual, Report yer... 104

; Conthony, Je Ps) retin 2.30 ee II, 44

COVOSEL A ne oie eet en eee 289

Cox, Charles F.; Delg. Sci. All. 109

GEES Aa iis. scalars alone coe eee 104

Crampton, H. E., Report of sum-....

Mer WORK... 1 soe eee 138

Gouneillor. sin de. coon oe eee L55

Fellow Gg: c= 2a ween 94, 103

POEs. ov easil:« sack ee eee 160

Crepidula,..274, 216, 208, 210,. 222

226, 234, 236

(Cplanianceten saree Me es <~, 238

Cretaceous ene ivest cm : 152

av.

C. artemisia....23-26, 38, 50, 52

LN DEX. 323

C. Ehrenberg

C. elegantissima,

18-23, 25, 28, 37; 38, 48, 50

RET ECDeo a wha os, S10 ic eye: area ee A

eeprinide.. 01.6 2% 14-17, 26, 36, 39

CriTICAL PoINTs, THE, IN THE

RELATION OF LicuHT To PLANTS,

me P MacDougal. .« . 0.6.24. 97-98

Ae 90

NT. | gk woth aucune ahs 267

CROSSLEY REFLECTOR OF THE LICK

OBSERVATORY, PHOTOGRAPHS OF

NEBULZ TAKEN WITH THE, J.

OE 120, I2I—122

NES) a. isin: wie ds oa wre ae ete 147

BEMERECTEDT! ... is ccdimi Olsens 733

DT Ok aly 5 Ss aw eeeda es T12

TS a bie wy aisep niin vps) She Ds pie a's 113

See peice ee 133

Conningham, J. T.; ref....... 44

Se 59

Suis, J. G.; Fellow...:.-....- 103

Cuzco, THe Warps or, Hager

Ss ee ae E17, 120

7 Ee 205, 218, 226

Re ore aS avs yf ealenab anaes 122

OS CEO ferrth (ee III

MR ER ey Canis, alii daa’ vile 123

ee 270, 2904

Piscires AMAlySIS Of .% 2 625. sas 275

Dacite in the San José District,

273-277

Daticrn, W.; ref.....:....- 216, 237

Beesemmert: ref... .....-045.% 75

AG |S SA ee 23, 24, 44

PeCC-SOCIELY ook uae ae a oo oem 8 one 126

_ COS Sa 2 ae 16

marwin, Urancis; ref... 025%. 92

Meamemport, C2 Bs ref. 3.0.52 es 98

meamaes-Colley; ref... 2.2.20. 55% 61

mens o5-4 TER... O22. See. 121

ran. Gashford: ref.......5..:. 160

Report of work in Japan.... 136

TE a ee 169

eet IT eas ve ee lsh we 204, 212

DEPOSITION, CONDITIONS OF, OF

THE Fosstr. MammMmat Beps

OF THE West, William D.

OEE sk « nano ce Coe ous 134

MPCIBOCHELYS 0.0. 5o ices Gales ne us re2

WT a) ns a 0 ogee woe Zu” 226, 257

Te SRS RST Ser aa ea 4

Dicquemare, J. F.; ref....... 28, 44

DIFFERENTIAL, A, ASTATIC Mac-

NETOMETER SUGGESTED BY PROF.

Roop, C. C. Trowbridge .130—-131

Dike Rocks in San José District,

278-293

OBiiraty sikh a 225, 229

TOA W ALAA Gh ons AIS Spe ns os nek 90

IG GlebIaH =) "Fel. oo we se 77

LEGGE CUDKEMs as. .55 sel scene o ots 160

Diopside. .267, 269, 271, 278, 285, 2890

TOTES ee 6s) ass, 257, 204, 306

Diorite, Analysis of..... 268-269, 292

Diorite of the San José District,

267-269

DISCOVERY OF A MASTODON’S

TooTH AND THE REMAINS OF A

BOREAL VEGETATION IN A SWAMP

on Staten Istanp, N. Y.,

Asti ABellick.. vo. ccs. sk. 67-68

Distribution. Of spécies........... 537

Dizon, G. ¥. and A. ¥.; ref..27,° 44

Dodge, Richard E., Tue Lanp-

SLIDES OF THE ECHO AND VER-

WUEE TON AoC ERE SE, oh. bonne wits ein 92

Tue ToROWEAP VALLEY IN

PRAZON AN oe osu ae ew 134

WSEs SEE ork hate eae 104

Ret. 7.53) 230; tae: 152:- 163

DoLICHOCEPHALY AND BrAcHY-

CEPHALY AS DoMINANT FACTORS

IN THE SKULLS OF MAMMALS,

ives (OSOOEN i ene ts + os sera 147

PPO ILE a Sg ces See ee ee eee 79

Domialkalic viezzenase.......... 267

Doran, C. E. and O. S. Strong,

A CASE OF UNILATERAL

ATROPHY OF THE CEREBELLUM,

Wg, 833

Doremus, C. A., Councillor..... 104

Report on research labor-

atory in chemistry........ 135

Dorsal gap in Thalassema...199—204

Dosodie langenose.......-.....5.: 285

Wosodie” Miaskose: . ... 2.0... + «sds 285

DCA BEEE Sy) CET. oe ss «pawn 95

DTAVEGN 2) €Cin fc. adhe... oR 16; 24

Dreissensia...sos.de5 eh £90; 276; 226

PORE hee WW o2taewtato te ade - ss 0 190, 237

BAe iF. PS eo Sic ee 54

PERLE Ce ts el so ee 35, 44

Deron: fF. Bes Tet. 6 ence ss +s 44

Dyar, Harrison G.; Curator.... 104

ON abe ae EE 6-0 2s re 267

Ear-Bones, A CONTRIBUTION TO

THE PROBLEM OF THE, R. Weil,

131-132

Henincts. .200, 282,213; 215,216; 227

EcHO AND VERMILION CLIFFS,

Tue LANDSLIDES OF THE,

Hichara E. .Dodge............<:

EcLIPSE EXPEDITION, RECENT, TO

324

INDEX.

SuMATRA, REPORT OF THE, S. | Jahien® icine ee 148, 152-153

A. SNCCHe: trate. cea 145 | Ethnie-races Vi. sete eee ee 118

Ectoderm, Differentiation of the, Buclids rete.) ae ee 72

in: <i halassemiasscu ce ees 209, | EGCOPE a acu sien ae 14h ome ae 99

Eetoderm im: Thalassema ..2.2it=212)| Runieide ... sce 204 sce 220

Ectomesoblast cells in Thalas- Eupomatus..190, 205, 208, 213, 215,

SOTA otadetwde: cici eutsiseiehedevactsilctiekelcs ye teen. 2217

Ectomesoblast in Thalassema. 223-230

Effusive basalt

ba te torte ae hh: SE eet 255

Pge-centrosome- wir 2052. a Cee 12

Ei go=truelenmsiny cis lacishees stele seh eoaeoesta 12

Ehrenberg: ref... .0ce<s ~. TANTS SAA

Eisig, W.; ref..166, 198, 209, 217,

227, 228, 230, 235, 237

ELASTIC PROPERTIES, THE, OF

HeELiIcaL Sprincs, R. S. Wood-

ward and J. W. Miller, Jr....

109

ELECTRICAL RESISTANCES, Ex-

PERIMENTS ON STANDARDS OF

Hier) H.C) *Parker. 4.5. 120-121

Blectrometer osc a oe Oe 120

Eleolite syenite, Analysis of.... 267

EMBRYOLOGY, THE -EarLy, OF

THALASSEMA MELLITA (CONN.),

John Cutler Torrey....... 165-246

Table of Contents of article. 165

Embryonic areas, Shifting oi, in

Thalassema Mellita...201, 202-204

Ementia teres

Ss a ee 133

Emission ‘theory... caetreccene 80

ENERGY DISSIPATION IN A WEAK

Macnetic Frietp, M. I. Pupin,

156-157

Hastatitel (ae sce een weet ede 140

Enteron, Formation of the, in

“Lhalassetialyecra eee tian 204-205

ENTOMOSTRACA CRUSTACEA, SOME

COMPARISONS OF THE GERM-

Layers In, M. A. Bigelow,

IIO—II2

Eocene). tees ata woe Ol = oe LIE

Eocene Adapadis\....o:0 "mae ace vn Ba

EocENE PRIMATES, AMERICAN,

SYSTEMATIC REVISION OF THE,

AND OF THE RopENT FAMILY

Myxopectip#, H. F. Osborn.. 110

Pi peathesis 12.0 in. «Jes ee ee ee 98

Pr OUlLeatdas. eects treme ee 98, 99

Hptachism er nk senate 16, 17, 39-43

EC MSEGMEULUS Pe 23.5.) ate ahicke eee eee 39

Ey proliteta. ion. nk i, 30=43, 52

Epidote..114, 262, 264, 274, 289, 290

EMP OMACES Myce ots.-4) solve in shore 16

Eratosthenes: “ref .).. 225% ....4 72. Fo

Erlanger e tetenucct.< feted cs 226, "237

ESTOS Ate echoes Lee ae. bee 88

EROSION BY FLYING SAND ON THE

BEECHES OF Cape Cop, A. A.

222, 223, 5220, e225

Burypterus:<io5 fo. 2ecee ee eee ee 162

Eustachian tube. 1. 2c a0 82 tone. 131

Foyaleticd a. d.0e rate ink SA cde ts 16,°26

Ee artenmista Sites eee rh. 23

Evolution? Doctrine offs. 2. c.cre 80

Excretory cells in Thalassema... 216

EROGY fay" Soak fee eae eee 253

EXPERIMENT, OBSERVATION AND,

R. S: Woodwards::) 42-20 69-84

EXPERIMENTAL Stupy, AN, OF

NuMBER PERCEPTION, J. F.

Messenger. 2 occu Sec 153, 154—7ee

EXPERIMENTS ON STANDARDS OF

Hicu ELectricaLt RESISTANCES,

H. Cy. Parker. 02 sees oe 120-121

Fallopian? 2 .seco ot fo oe eee 132

Farrand, Livingston; Librarian. 104

THe <ALsEeA- PNDIANS: — OF

OREGON} 8440.0: S oer eee 93

FAUNA, THE SILURIAN, OF BATES-

VILLE, ARKANSAS, Gilbert van

INCH st cei. 125

Feldspar: .10z2, 114, 257, ) 2505 acoe:

26%, .262.> 263, -2045) 2oOoer ee.

272, 2735 274-2755 27a ewes

280, 281, 282, 283). 236.267,

288, 289, 290

Orthoclase® 4) 23 .o5.ce'oon ane 284

White. 5.22.5 deca see rerenenee 260

Felin@im.. 2 acces. sce ee es oe ee 4

Fertilization in living sea-urchin....

CLES) 6 diac Seen ee ee 136

Fewkes, J. .W.3)-ref, o..c. an 39,.44

Finlay, George I., THE GroLocy

OF THE San Jost DIstrict,

TAMAULIPAS, Mexico. 247-318

Tue GRANITE OF BARRE, VER-

MONT! “Upors ¢5(s eee IOI—I02

Fischer, Emil.; Hon. Mem...94, 103

Fitzeeralds: 2ef jo xs 425s ae 128

Flemming: t6f .).).0°.', act 169

Florencia Type of Dacite in San

Jose. IDIStHCE:<..c. sae 273-275

FLUORESCEIN Group, A STUDY OF

THE ABSORPTION OF LIGHT BY

Dyes oF THE, L. Boroschek and

BE: Le Dass eae ee 145, 146

Force oF MovEMENT, VOLUNTARY

ConTROL oF THE, R. S. Wood-

WOlth <4: cote e eae aoe 125, L277,

Fossir MAMMAL BEDS OF THE

INDEX. 325

West, CONDITIONS OF THE Tee Mew, IRACE 1° 3i5. lesa I17—I1g

DEPOSITION OF THE, Wm. D. MPU TAGE Riis os NAR « «acs owaca 119

METIS a. ous ie Wh why EG AoMGNEISS. Chokes ss. eke ss T13) £14) 250

Fossits, A Metuop oF FAcIti- GOEtte, Alitef. i502. III, 226, 238

TATING PHOTOGRAPHY OF, J. Gorllog, .poatdse. . wh Rees Cok 149

Man Tagen... .... 6... Lrg, 215-10 | Grosse, PSH: ref.:2, 11;. 12; 14, 15,

Pe@urter- ref....... nh eee 163 OSS 56,45

EG 143-144 |Grabau, A. W., Recenr Conrri-

Fraas, Eberhardt; Cor. Mem... 125 BUTIONS TO THE PROBLEM

meeapont, Jes ref... ceca es 227, 237 CNM AR A owas ashes 139

SS a 96 Bete AG oe aven 6 108, 152, 193, 162

0 re 102 CSS 2 1 SR ae Bae > Be 145

FuLGuRITE, A SAND, FROM Po- Grain, THE, oF IGNEouS Rocks,

LAND, Note on A, A. A. Julien, mane Ouenerts $5... o5.(0-. 161, 163

MO Te Re A) Crt Phe teeters cs Ale aches wdssn Divi eSie sar ate - 258

MME rn aictSidiosd ny emis obs « 78 (OS LCS ofa trae pr eae ee ee oe a 149

SO ne 76, 79| GRANITE, THE, OF BarrE, VER-

DMEM Fag os sa See sk 114, 253, 259 mont, George I. Finlay... .101—102

RRND. GSP Ci Saks soho bwin PES 123 | Granitoid nephelite syenite..... 255

Gastrulation to Trochophore in.... | Granitoid types of the San José

Llu OSS i 195—209 DISERIEES cir ela tk tats Cate ahs 257-269

ES Sn ae ear (Giitnn, Bo Bis cret./. ot)... 070,238

MeeeaEs TCL. se ee ees en UNE OAT Ua s oN ars ot alg ako bp ln URS 170

Geikie, James; Hon. Mem., Gruber, Wenzel; ref...... 54) 565-59

GACT MOT eO GVTACEIS. 6 iota nt ativcrs ss chu Yoo cee & 17

Baer, ILUSOS Tel... se ee: 104 Ger PROVES. Lee os deren ee ES

GELATINE PuHoToGRAPHIC Dry Habits of the Thalassema....216—217

Pirates, NoTE on A CAUSE OF Hacker (Ves ren.) £. 0: 227, J234, 238

THE DETERIORATION oF, W. G. Haddon, A..C.3: réf..2, 14, 15, 16; 45

aS i ee ae Oren | dadinanertery. 1 dve os sce athe 76

oe Se ea 126 | Hager, Stansbury, THe Warps

Geoeentric theory 62. ...0...005.. 74 GBWOWZCO> se ee Cok nie he LI7~ 116

Geological Map of the San José LO AISI Packt O48 sah 5, Oy Qin od Gee 136

GroLocicaL NoTES ON THE NEIGH- PHOTOGRAPHY WITH A VISUAL

BORHOOD OF BurFaLo, D. S. NIST ADI 0 a ri 94, 95-97

Martin.............. my TH2 065 Mallere ret. se. koe econ as vines 56

GroLocy, NoTES ON THE, OF THE Hallock, William, A ReEvIEw oF

SALINE BASINS OF CENTRAL a ae ee a

New Mexico, D. W. Johnson, 1sH AssociaTIon CommMit-

: Joie TEE ON UNDERGROUND TEM-

Geology Section of,

Mieeing. Jans oi -Teodte. § oa PORATU RES: eats. %.. oloktouts 145

Reb: (28) Toor. 02%. IOI-102 Report on underground tem-

March 18, rgor..... 113-116 DELATULESH Aiea ou. o Liscstevecs ts 135

April 15, 1901.......-: 125 SoME PrEcuLIAR MINERALOG-

May .20, root. 2)... 7: 134 IcAL Errects or Licut-

et, 20. TGome cs Hoye 138-142 NING DISCHARGE......... 92

Nov. 18, 1901...... wigere a aOla,, C. Caso ret. ies s.. 124

Dec... 16;."FG0E Soo. Ve 161-163 Hartshorne; Meee EH ce ios 82, 83

GroLocy, THE, OF THE SAN JOSE

District, TAMAULIPAS, MEXICO,

Oral HINA youl ee eh aa 247-318

GERM-LAYERS IN ENTOMOSTRACA

CRUSTACEA, SOME COMPARISONS

oF THE, M. A. Bigelow....110, 112

Mereuld, Drs refi.) beds... 137

Giddings, F. H., THe Use oF

Hatschek, B....169, 186, 199, 204,

205, 206) 20h, 2712. 219, 229; 224,

226,7 227, 238

[Blinn 12 2 OU A RIBS oo gr ee Ra ara 90

Pawailan ~rslands.s. 4. ose. dea ee 132

Hay, O. P., THE CoMPpoSITION OF

THE SHELLS OF TURTLE,

I10, III-II2

326 INDEX.

Heath, H.; ref., Huysens>. rebegereeeeae Ve o "9G

174, 186, 194, 204, 238 | Hydroides,

HELICAL SPRINGS, THE ELASTIC 169, 185, 192) 222) 227, 228

PROPERTIES oF, R.S. Woodward | Hydrontedusal sino ae. cee ee 08

and Jy WoMiitler ir. sees 169.) Ebypsodontids: asc 0 TLE

Helix albolabris ae r62'| Pbypseduss 3. 4)53.53440 82 1 eee III

Hellemas rere ss. but fc sc & ee SO) ELYSEES « LEE, Lie oda teesha eee Cy,

Helmiholtz® sets. 22% <2 ce t28 | lehthyosauria-< i.7,< box. Sateen gI

Fiemarite® .no0 ose aoe eae oe ae 269 | hddings= eb. 25. Sate eae 267

Henly. Cet. c elas eee Cee 128 | leneous pyroxenite,.. <7... S..2 8s: 140

Fercules @ i's avesja vs in ee 122 IcNEous Rocks, THE GRAIN OF,

Hermanns: ‘et. 2s 5 2<-25 cota 24 | 2A. J, -Oueneait... “2c ha 161, 163

Herter, C. A; Fellow........ 94, 00g.| Ljolites,” \. sean ee eee 259

Hertwig, 'O. and (R.3 wefei 14, 1s, 26, )inea taipires: (3. peor 119

Si, 32, 40; 45, 124, 227... 238 ) ineubation Of €spsisncccr oe ee 138

Hewites: Tel... 20 hee ee ve ween TAG | BACUS:! ssc oe se rok oe ee 1ST; i 232

Hexactinisé..(.13oh nau eee oe oe 2-52|Inp1ans, Notes oN THE ARAPA-

HEXACTINIZ, REPORT ON THE, OF HOE, A. L. Kroeber....... 125-126

THE CoLUMBIA UNIVERSITY Ex- | InpIans, THE ALSEA, OF OREGON,

PEDITION TO PuGET Sounp L. sRatrand 6 snc 24 .e mee eee 93

DURING THE SUMMER OF 1806, Instincts oF LEPIDOPTERA, A.

J. Playfair MceMurrich...2.2. r52| 1G. Mayet a cot cae ee 158-160

iHeymons:: ref". 2-5, ee 219, 238| INTELLECT, ORIGIN oF HuMAN,

Hildebrand, W.. Bo: rebates 267)|/ >. Wy. Thorndike ~ 2 125, 126

Banton, J.°H.; Fine Comm... 22. 104!) Iater-elavicular’: =. 26. y ses te 57

Hipparchus; ref..72, 73, 74, 75, 79 | International Congress of Zodlo-

Hollick, Arthur, Discovery oF A SiStS +k... 2') goatee: Cee 136

MastTopon’s TooTH AND THE | Iowa AND OKLAHOMA, REPORT OF

REMAINS OF A BOREAL VEGE- Fietp Work Nn, William

TATION IN A SWAMP OF STATEN JONES: oops Hees eee 143-144

ISLAND ING Ns, Jalan ae 67568 | ISON. sted te ese oh eee 258

Holines:'S: 4:3 tet... ¢: 226, 238, 239 | Iron Mines, THE, oF Bivsao,

Holocrystalline porphyritic, | Spain, Heinrich Ries... -..4. 528

286,. 287, 280:| Ischnochiton.. <5 244.44 174, 186, 204

Holt, Charles; Res. Mem....... 145 | ISotealiaiccicc e's, ce eee 16, 172 36

HIOOKG? (net ne ate ee ain sie 79 | ], <antarctita, cis ase eeee 39

Hornblende. 14157 257, 258,250, 260, || Ixalactis.. a... sees eee TO, 317; vio

261, 262, 263, 264, 265, 266, 272,| Jacoby, Harold, A New Te te-

273 274,275, 276, 260, 281; 286, SCOPE FOR PHOTOGRAPHING THE

287, 288, 289, 290, 291, 292, 294 POLE, OF THE HEAVENS. 2.0: 88-89

Barkewikite ic eta ee 2 esses 265 | Report on photographs of

SCHiSt tee Sse s tee ees ee 140 Stars’. 47ers ieee 135

Orst, “Ri. cager ieee ee ee 226, 239 Cor, ‘Secye sane See eee 104

TIQELZ: Telos. 2ic'N nse ae eS. 128 | Jagear, T. Aa, Jes eet et 254

Hovey, E. O., Notes oN THE | Jennings, He: S.- ref. ciao. 234, 239

TRIASSIC AND JURASSIC STRATA Jesup, Morns Ks ret.) 106

OF THE Biack HILts oF SoutH Johnson, D. W., Notes on THE

DakoTA AND WYOMING....148, 152 GEOLOGY OF THE SALINE BASINS

Hrdlicka, A., CerTAIN RACIAL | oF CentraL New Mexico..161—162

CHARACTERISTICS OF THE BASE Jones, William, Report oF FIELD

Ge RE RADE Toi, 6 Shee wk ee 93 Work IN lowA AND OKLAHOMA,

HuMAN INTELLECT, ORIGIN OF, 143-144

EE EPhorndike. 2.06... 125, .126,| Jourdan, pee ratet-. wa, onan 45

Huntington, Geo. S., Tue Mor- Joyaux-Laffine; ref............ 216

PHOLOGICAL SIGNIFICANCE OF Judd, C. H., Practice in Visual

CERTAIN PERICLAVICULAR Su- Perce mtiGiicn ss t'aime 125, .126

PERNUMERARY MUSCLES...... 53-66 Coutieillor::<.) fae eae 104

INDEX. 327

urassic sandstone ......0.+ «ids Boe) Se Ct ofel . oi ee 163

Jurassic Strata, TRIASSIC AND, REN nn oars rye we itvon a ik ew 228

NoTES ON THE, OF THE BLACK angenbect, C.; ref......:..%. 239

Hitts oF SoutH DaKkoTA AND Lankester, E. R.; ref.,

Wyomine, E, O. Hovey. ..148, 152 | 166, 205, 226, 239

BR ATIAGSIC ARC. Soe eon oe 162 | Larve, Lepidopterous....... 158, 159

Julien, A. A., A PETROGRAPHIC Laudy, Louis H.; Curator...... 104

StupY OF THE SPECIMENS DASE ET ACEED eee nies de iw etnies ow Hie aca wd II4

DESCRIBED BY PROFESSOR Oe er a a er ae 259

ES ee oe oir p Be pegRVERANES: (SOTA Caisse os chins ows 83

EROSION BY FLYING SAND ON EGAPGIOE FOE icin ae RS 78

THE BEECHES OF CAPE Cop, Rr Or te REACIIORS ooo 5u. x Sekw ah 79

148, 152-153 | Le Conte, Joseph, Death of..... 138

Note on A SAND FULGURITE (Obituary), J. J. Stevenson,

wea POLAND... sch... IOI, 102 148, I50—-I5I1

DE AIRHE SB. & oo, Sidecar os rp4,| Le Dowules refi Si. .ck 0s os sh 56

eee i83. Pid, 116, 136, 142; 163 | Lee, .F.S.; Councillor... ......... 104

SS Oe Se ei I2I, 122 | Report on research of Dr.

Kellicott, W. E., Report of sum- ites, Sadan. 8. ested.’ 136

mer work ee Fate ae eee 137 | SoME OBSERVATIONS ON

Kemp, J. F., A New ASBESTOS Ricor MorTIs....122, 124-125

REGION In NortHERN VER- Lee, F. S. and W. Salant, Tue

OSS a a 139, 140-141 | AcTION oF ALCOHOL ON Mus-

NoTES ON THE PHYSIOGRAPHY oer ae Pee ee ee Oe See eee 158

ati wet (GeORGE..139,,141—t42 | Leiotealia... oo: 6... 608s BeAr. 40

THE CAMBRO - ORDOVICIAN L. badia Shire dees eta. 3 39

OUTLIER AT WELLSTOWN, _Leonips, OBSERVATIONS OF, MADE

Hamitton County, NEw (eae Bayport, L. I., J. K. Rees

Pera tas 6.) 99 3 o tis cts 113-115 | and C. A, Post A eee 156, 157

TuHeEoporE G. WHITE (Obit- | Lepas PRS 3 ans ouucke hal bear ole heres 11a

2) Se, 6 ern 148-149 | Lepidonotus,

ref..102, 116, 183, 162,163, 245, | EOG, 174, 375, 17S) 4022-232

269 _LeprpopTera, INsTINcTS oF, A. G.

Kingsley; ref......... : ORAS ae | 2 ee rr 158-160

a ES: ea Bee PS WOMi Ny Tel... Joe's sel ees 35

fu Se gp RE OG Le Ts 2 i a rrr ee pee 289

Kleinenberg, N.; ref.,

169, 225, 227, 230, 239

ref 16

Klunzinger;

Knott; ref

Kowalevsky, A.;

166, 204, 219, 239

Kroeber, A. L., NoTES oN THE

ARAPAHOE INDIANS........ 125-126 |

Kunz, George F., Curator....... 104

Me DEaGe 2 oie oX, via em te epee Mabie ae 153

Laboratory at Cansa, Nova

BNE RG 42 of chw cae SeeRy OVALS tha ace 137

Labradorite,

268, 270, 272,273,276, 276 |

Benen FET... oo. iaians Sims 102

LaKEeE GeorGE, NOTES ON THE

PHYSIOGRAPHY OF, J. F. Kemp,

139, I4I-142

Banners s . Tag: sane canesere 89 |

LANDSLIDES, THE, OF THE EcHO

AND VERMILION CLIFFS, Rich-

ard E. Dodge

| Limburgite

| Limburgite Dike

92 | Limburgite in the San José Dis-....

Levison, W. G., NoTE on a CAUSE

OF THE DETERIORATION OF

GELATINE PHOTOGRAPHIC

Wine SE EATES Os oss 5 eee 94, 97

2 he ee O24; ES FI6

Tghpacian of N. Y. Ac. Sci., An-

PAE NOTE OF. bere. ss Saws 107

Licut, A Stupy oF THE ABSORP-

TION OF, BY DYES OF THE FLU-

ORESCEIN Group, L. Boroschek

ihodte Wee GEES o's tls are 145, 146

|Ligut, REFLECTION OF, FROM

WuitE Swurraces, Geo. B.

PERM 2 Sam eek. ie aes 4 si. 2 88, 89

LicHT To PLANTS, THE CRITICAL

PoINTS IN THE RELATION OF,

BD. MipeDongal:.. oo... 97-98

Lillie, F. R.; ref.,

174, 184, 192, 193, 205, 224, 226, 239

279, 294

308

S00 66'S Rica a) ele 2 se

328 INDEX.

Geet Te FSheae «eee Raper 261=263 | Mallegs’ ...m eo. eee eee eee TSE, ge

Tae ee g-s-A ke arts, ee cas on EET 258." Mama ack Geta vok | eee ete 119

Limestoné€s.../.223 114, 116, 254, 279| MAMMAL BeEpsS, FOSSIL, OF THE

Cormiterous. oo siiies.« ose 162 TION OF THE, ‘William’ D;

Magnesian siliceous........ 140 Matthew... cc: 3:: coche tee 134

Medina ,4.5%. Butice setae eeete 162 | MAMMALS, DoLICHOCEPHALY AND

INS a Para ees arene = too oe ern 162 BRACHYCEPHALY AS DomI-

Perintiats acct ates eee 152 NANT FACTORS IN THE SKULLS

San. Jose) District: st... fees 253 or Haj Osborn. 35. eee 147

TRentOM scid so oe eee BOER EE 2133) Mandibular: “archi... oe seme 132

Water) 2.5 Ch. crew sas euler eee 162°) Marcus ‘Auteliis:"ceb.. 14 76

Limonite. ve cp sctrete sc te te 282 \Marshe ret. ce, sn hal eee TED

TA ATesi: ee het. ae eee nes 249 | Martin, D. S.; GreoLocicaL Notes

DAMME USS MEET A. oe eset oxaee eae 4 ON THE NEIGHBORHOOD OF

Linville, H. R., Report of sum- BUERALO... t-aategne 161, 162-163

Mer / WOTKS + <.. tare ew Coe eee 136 RY eR BRE UTR es Recah S52 108, 142

Tue NaturaL History oF Mastopon’s TootH, DISCOVERY

SoME TuBE-FoRMING AN- OF A, AND THE REMAINS OF A

NELIDS Ts Shi mec eters 158, 160-161 BoREAL VEGETATION IN A

HOTS cpdeecs bese ae tena ease ens 124 SwAMP ON STATEN ISLAND, N.

fatehheldites 4.24.0 ws sie eee 259 Y., \ArthurcHoliick? ae 67-68

Lloyd, F. E., Notes on Cury- Mathew: stef: 55 os. 1s erate a

SOMA PAUCIFLOSCULOSA..90, 91 | Matthew, Wm. D., ConpitTions

ON THE OCCURRENCE OF oF DEPOSITION OF THE FOSSIL

NECTARIES IN PTERIS MAMMAL BEDS OF THE WEST.. 134

AGUREINAY 2o.h. sancti: 90, 91-92! Maxwells refi 2s..4 2. ee eee 128

Report of work in Bonn..... 137| Mayer, A. G., INnsTINCTS OF

TETRAD-FORMATION IN THE LEPIDOREBRA ; 2-2 tyaeeeen 158-160

RG BEACH Be. eet ste eos 147 ON THE VARIATION OF SNAILS

Loeb’s magnesium chloride OF THE GENUS PARTULA

mMetHod Witte ak oc. eee atna nee? oie Gat 122 IN THE VALLEYS OF TAHITI,

Lopadorltynenis Ute eee te ee ee 225 13I, 132-133

Lough, FE. A.*) Res;Mem... 2) 45. 14g Report of summer work.... 137

Love, E: Gs Garatotaay.. 22-22% 104 THE VARIATIONS OF A

im DrmtCUSs ano sack ee 198, 227, 228 NeEwLy-ARISEN SPECIES OF

Luschkas sreiy eite 6 cate cite ce 56, 57, MEDUSA, (2.2. eee ee 97, 98-99

Lusk, Graham; Fellow....... 04, 103) Macalisters ures oes ae 55

Eyell* tet Bie ter an tates, 81 | McCurdy, G. G., Anthropology at

bE. cre RE oc eg 8 Se Na 122 the Denver Meeting.......... 143

IMS TIES ate be ycuct eke beds ee vs coe 258 | MacDougal, D. T., THE CriticaL

IMAGIeSIIINZeOCS... he a eee ek 123 IN THE RELATION OF LIGHT

MaGNneETIc FieLtp, Enercy Dissi1- TO’ PLANTS #.7. 2h oe 97-98

PATION IN A WEAK, M. I. Pupin, TOE: BAe lee eae eee 99

156-157 | MacDougal, Robert, Comsina-

Magnetite..259, 260, 261, 262, 263, TION OF SIMPLE RHYTHM

264, 265, 266, 267, 268, 269, 270, Grours IN HIGHER Syn-

271,272, 273, 274. 27270. 277s THESES, AND THEIR EQuIvA-

273, 280, 281, °282, 283. 284, 285, LENGBES: (igo otso-c Sree 153-154

286, 287, 288, 289, 290, 291, 292 Res. Meni... eens eee 145

MAGNETOMETER, A DIFFERENTIAL MacKarland®, “ret sigs daecane ee 123

ASTATIC, SUGGESTED BY Pro- McGregor, ji: 12 CHARACTERS

FESSOR Roop, Cum: Trowbridge, AND RELATIONSHIPS OF THE

; I30—-131 BELODON®S , REPTILES? ..°2 oo he 90-91

Major, D. R., PuysicaL anpb M. chondro-sternoclavicularis pos-

MENTAL TESTS oF SCHOOL CECIOF® (kN ds eAjaole eon eee 56

CuILpRUN. Vahl isc haan See es 100 | McMurrich, J. Playfair, Report

UN THE HEXACTINIZ OF THE

INDEX.

CoLUMBIA UNIVERSITY EXPEDI-

TION OF PuGET SOUND DURING

THE SUMMER OF 18096 I-52

Mead, A. D.; ref..168, 169, 187, 199,

204, 217, 231, 234, 240

Meeerelian bar... 6k sca tene ces 131

Medina limestone... ... 6005. 24% 162

ene FY, ee 2 wiald Rael Oe e-2 133

Mepusa, THE VARIATIONS OF A

NEWLY ARISEN SPECIES oF, A.

PME ke 6 as hate 97, 98-99

Meisenheimer, J.; ref..190, 226, 240

MECANIIES os osc bs wore eg ale 114

MENTAL ABILITIES, THE CORRELA-

TION oF, E. L. Thorndike.153, 154

MENTAL, PHYSICAL AND, TESTS

oF ScHooL CHILDREN, D. R.

ST es 8 a oe) es re 100

a 35

MPSARICEDMALY, to... So. ka we ee 147

UO ES os a rr 261, 280

Mesoblast, The, in Thalassema,

213-216, 218-230

Messenger, J. Franklin, An Ex-

PERIMENTAL StTuDY oF NumMm-

BER PERCEPTION....153, 154-155 |

Metco, MM ref... 2... ys

Geereorte dust oo... Lie... ras

meertiod of stris’’............ 109

Miramar” 0 eS 2, 3-13

Metridium dianthus,

O519,n 12h 1.3) AS

Metridium dianthus, European... 7

Metridium dianthus Oken.... 3-13

Metridium fimbriatum.3, 8, 9, Dire He

Metridium marginatum..3, 9, 11, 12

Metridium marginatum Auct.... 7

Meyer, E.; ref.,

166, 225, 226, 227, 228, 229, 230, 240

MM so... Ly 259, 268, 280

Michel-Levy method............ 268

meerbelotti, G.s refs j.a25 03's. ee wt

meas. -S.° ref... os. eas 104

MME. fa ch Sole ore gies a IOI

MAIC WONS, 8. os ses oS Gepe os eee III

Miscroedentopus ......-.. <r enc. 234

PierOPrAnite 2... a. chek os cee. 276

muller, J. W., jr, and R. S.

Woodward, Tue Exastic Prop-

ERTIES OF HELICAL SPRINGS...

Milne-Edwards; ref........... 5

MMSE LO oo ga Gres ee 98

MINERALOGICAL ErFFects, SoMeE

PEcULIAR, OF LIGHTNING Dis-

CHARGE, William Hallock.... 92

Mineralogy, Section of,

Meeting, Jan: 21, ro0r:... =: 92

Feb. 18, 1001: <2 IOI—102

329

March:18,. Toor... :. 113-116

PPLONTS; TOOT, os ade es 125

Mie e20; “TOOT. 2 is Sss ae 134

Mette 28. TOT s6.-2. 138-142

NOV -15,. TOOT s. cles 148-153

DGEs 16). FOOTY «04/0. 161-163

Mitchell, S. A., Report oF THE

RECENT EcLipSE EXPEDITION

Or TOA oa ac% ches a aceree ss es 145

Maltese PCR sf oils ceo d xs oe! decease LUE

Nila Odecnideet |. leis oc. ao cae nes 1

MorPHOLOGICAL, THE, SIGNIFI-

CANCE OF CERTAIN PERICLAVI-

CULAR SUPERNUMERARY MuSsS-

CLES, WITH A REPORT OF A NEW

M. SUPRACLAVICULARIS PRo-

PRIUS Posterior, Geo. S. Hunt-

REPL Voces Re eros RY «Shee 53-66

Mt. Anacuas,

249, 252, 253, 255, 279, 312

Mt. Armadillos..249, 252, 253, 254,

S5c 2765 2a2, 310. Fie

Mt Baril. 3.249, 250, 2527255, 265

Nits Madindseisn: ses ee ee 249, 254

VEEN Pergeebess os a. h. vw a tecete we ekaies 255

Mt. Parrefio,

| 240, 253, 257, 279, 200, 202

i hdl Mt ee a a 249, 253

| MovEMENT, VOLUNTARY CONTROL

| oF THE Force or, R. S. Wood-

(USVAGSS 6: a AR an et eae Re eT, as 7

(ME stetroclavicularis 2. 5.22.5 50% 55

M scapulo-clavicularis ...:..... 59

|M. scapulo-s. coraco-clavicularis. 64

_M. sterno-chondro-clavicularis... 64

M. sterno-chondro-scapularis..60, 64

IM: ‘sterno-clavicularfis: 222.5 2%. 64

Me supraciavicularis:.....<...20% 57

M. supraclavicularis proprius... 54

M. supraclavicularis proprius an-

Me rete re cre cin. oy Sep ohne a = sees 56

_M. supraclavicularis proprius pos-

Ee temoOtes:. . .<.054) 50,-5o, 50> 645 66

|M. SupPRACLAVICULARIS PROPRIUS

PosTERIoR, REPORT OF A NEw,

George S. Huntington....... 53-66

Rratler-Woyer fisure? 2.5 ies ws ee 126

CT DICT gah 2 eae ae ae eae 15

Murdoch, .J.¢ rete: clack Il, 34, 46

MuscLe, New SuPRACLAVICULARIS

Proprius POSTERIOR, REPORT OF

A, George S. Huntington... .53-66

| Muscies, THE MorPHoLoGcicaL

SIGNIFICANCE OF CERTAIN PERI-

CLAVICULAR SUPERNUMERARY,

George S. Huntington 53-66

Muscie, THe Action oF ALco-

330

INDEX.

HOL oN, F. S. Lee and W. Business meeting, Jan. 7,

Salant). hts co ee. 158 LOOT Hickok: Ree 87

Miiscovite ns ore. geese TOL." 274, 286 Peb. 45 290. sa58 ee 93-94

Musical instrument, A new form Marchi 4,0) 100m. jaece 108—109

Gf“ Wien see ears seers 135 April :17 190 rea. eee 120

Myonanthus ambiguus......... 2120 May. 6.210905: aa 127-129

My strieSucnus? 20.8 ae ae oe ee 90 Oct +7). 190i oe ee 134

Myxinele conic htc cee cones Stee 136 Novia TOOT sees 144-145

MyxopEcTIp#, RopENT FAMILY, Deer 2y room aoe 155

SYSTEMATIC REVISION OF THE Niagara “limestone, 3.0%. J.+.eee 162

AMERICAN EOCENE PRIMATES NiAGARA, RECENT CONTRIBUTIONS

AND OF THE, H. F. Osborn. .110, 111 TO THE ProsLeM or, A. W.

N ationalitya st osoAgo see eee 117 Grabat sa scnit ack on eee 139

Natural history of annelids..... 137 \(Nichols; W Hi, \}res net ssc 248

Naturat History, THE, oF SOME Northrup; Wx Bis Tete aes 142

TuBE-ForRMING ANNELIDS, H. NOTE ON A CAUSE OF THE DETERI-

Tanya By io Soke 158, 160-161 ORATION OF GELATINE PuHoTO-

Weballe a 0h Settee co Eee eee I2I—-122 GRAPHIC Dry P uates, W. G.

NEBULZ, PHOTOGRAPHS OF, TAKEN Levison')s.< ec30 Face eee 94, 97

WITH THE CROSSLEY REFLECTOR Note oN A SAND FULGURITE FROM

OF THE Lick OsseErRvaTory, J. Ponanb, A, A;: Julien. 2. IOI, 102

KK PROCS Pee sate 120, 121-122 | NoTE oN CHRYSOMA PAUCIFLOS-

Necrolemur re teedce eke oc ee a cULOSA; FE. B Lloyd? 223525 90, 9I

NECTARIES, ON THE OCCURRENCE NoTES ON THE ARAPAHOE IN-

OF, IN Pteris Aguiina, F. E. pans, A. L. Kroeber...... 125-126

PAW icc meee 90, 91-92; NOTES ON THE GEOLOGY OF THE

Nephelite...258, 259, 260, 261, 262,

263, 264, 265, 266, 267, 268, 260,

278, 280, 0202; 283 2 284) 4 2055, 260,

294

Nephelite-pyroxene-malignite..... 258

Nephelite syenite..248, 255, 257, 259,

261, 279, 285, 286, 293, 294, 300,

302

Nephelite syenite, Analysis of,

266, 292

Nephelite syenite, Arroyo Grande

ALEViD) Cos nani astute eas UMP GREEEe Re ahs 261-263

Nephelite syenite, Baril Type. 260-261

Nephelite syenite Mesa Verde

TVG Soeae 2 aliaie ee cin osreas aw 263-267

Nephelite syenite, of the San

ose Dirstrict’s 1 shen see 260-267

Nephelite syenite, Where found. 258

TOG, 202,, 203, -208, 218; 227; 228;

23%

Newcomb, Silas; ref... 62.2205. 104

New Mexico, Notres on THE

GEOLOGY OF THE SALINE BASINS

oF CenTRAL, D. W. Johnson,

161-162

Wewt0nmsireriars. 2) cdc an ose 75, 79

New York Academy of Sciences,

Annual Meeting, Feb. 25,

LQG eels was sols Ao oie S 102-108

SALINE BASINS OF CENTRAL

New Mexico, D. W. Johnson,

161-162

NoTES ON THE PHYSIOGRAPHY OF

Lake GeorcE, J. F. Kemp,

130, T4T—142

NoTES ON THE TRIASSIC AND

JurRASSIC STRATA OF THE BLACK

Hitts oF SoutH DAKOTA AND

Wyominc, E. O. Hovey..148, 152

Nothatctideeso4.5..5. 450 an See III

Nucleolus-Chromatin ........... 123

Niclas. a..57.0e ice ne eee 190, 212

/OBSERVATION AND EXPERIMENT,

R.’S. Woodward. ...2...2 69-84, 104

OBSERVATIONS OF LEONIDS MADE

AT Bayport, L. I., J. K. Rees

and <C>» Ao POStsc. = 2.kco cen 156, 157

OBSERVATIONS, SOME, ON RIGOR

Mortis, F. S. Lee...122, 124-125

Observatory at Helsingfors, Fin-

land): Nises 5a. oon eee eae 88

Ochiditina. 25 wos enaisicte ns ees 216

(Esophagus in Thalassema..205—209

OKLAHOMA, Report OF FIELD

Work IN Iowa anp, Wm.

JONES: an sce). See ee 143-144

Oligocene .siisaateos eeeee eee OE

Oligoclase cies eens 273, 288

Olives «id sete oh ee en eee 133

INDEX. ddl

Olivine,

259, 267, 269, 278, 289, 291, 292

On THE OCCURRENCE OF NEC-

TARIES IN Preris AQUILINA, F.

E. Lloyd 90, 91-92

ON THE VARIATION OF SNAILS OF

THE GENUS PARTULA IN THE

aces ees, «eee leg sr. e

Vatpevs or Tauri, A. G:

IS Sete SS. es ae 131, 132-133

ee ne res Baa de 114

DTath: 86a. oa a mes wine tis

OrEeGoN Report oF FIELD WorK

In WyominG anpb, H. H. St.

See he tt. See ee 143

DET MNEDCS oO. i oh ace eco 8 109

OricIn oF HuMan_ INTELLECT,

ie ae, Lhormdike. ........... 125, 126

AI OL Sri. g deeb ly oie eae 3 121

Orthoclase..101, 102, 257, 258, 259,

260, 261, 262, 263, 265, 267,

269, 271, 275, 276, 278, 279,

281, 282, 285, 290, 291, 294

RRS dls x aieoe vearela as 284

PGS ons was we Salas 262

Dee OOETCDEL Will ec a ell ea we ek 133

Osborn, H. F.; Delg. Sci. All.. 109

DOLICHOCEPHALY AND

BRACHYCEPHALY AS DomI-

NANT FACTORS IN THE

SKULLS OF MAMMALS.... 147

ME Coated Bloc ac sini Geaitees teh eo Sven 6 gI

SYSTEMATIC REVISION OF

THE AMERICAN EOCENE

PRIMATES AND OF THE

Ropent Famity Myxo-

Perea, oe: 6 2 Sas Prog “tit

Mertander, N. J.; ref. ...0...<%. 68

REMC Si ocs sas Sha age § nie 204, 226

Pee NMIOM is... dsc Bee ee Seen 132

Ganaets californica, .2.... 0/2. 20

OuTLIER, THE CAmMsBrRO-OrDOVI-

CIAN, AT WELLSTOWN, HAMIL-

ton County, New York, J.

PP eeOMip 8S Pk Se Das TI3-115

RaPeIeOSONETES!” «0S sete a eee 1T4

eMCOEIMG cs a on lslaly Ate ree ak sore Erg

Seema? Shs oS tenets Cares 226

Parserisis:: refs! cies ool ees 78

Peraticccitim | sok eet hc ee hrek a 137

Reena .. 5. SPs uae chee cms QI

eemer, G: F.s rebek nt ee ou. 46

Parker, H. C., ExperRIMENTS ON

STANDARDS OF HiGH ELEcTRI-

CAL. RESISTANCES JL OP 0s. 120-121

PARTHENOGENESIS, THE History

OF THE CENTROSOMES IN ARTI-

FICIAL, AND ITS RELATION TO

THE PHENOMENA OF NORMAL

FertiLization, E. B. Wilson,

122-124

204, 216, .226

204, 226, 240

ate a a8. ase, a ehe hy Ot a 0a

Patten, W.; ref

Peter als: MATOS . eek ae pieiaw ale n 66

LA OU Son ieee Mal A re een eee 122

PPCOTUAEUIG) oa ct we oe ahs aa me IOI

Pegram, Geo. B., REFLECTION OF

LIGHT FROM WHITE SURFACES,

88, 89

Pell, Mrs. Alfred; Res. Mem... 155

EV QOONIS TF ooo Rees | ca doles eyes III

PONMAMESCTCT ye. ince oo Sakae ee 4

Pl asc isie, ® eis wy 555 Re 4

Peralkahc Tavigenase /.......... 285

Petallralic. aitaskase,. oi... << we 285

PERCEPTION, VISUAL, PRACTICE

ret at, Co) « el ou 7 ee £25, 126

PERCEPTION, NUMBER, AN Ex-

PERIMENTAL Stupy oF, J. F.

Messengers... 1... 153, 154-155

PERICLAVICULAR SUPERNUMERARY

Muscies, THE MorPHOLOGICAL

SIGNIFICANCE OF, Geo. S. Hunt-

IBOLON: 2. ees « Sees es 53-66

PEON ce oeeu oh atk fn em Wee 146

Lede ball eos (ge: (Oe a oe a eee 162

Permian: limestone, .. 00... 20's eo P52

Persdiatees..\". «6 36 sn 267; 271; 265

PERSEUS, REMARKS ON TEMPOR-

ARY STARS, WITH = ESPECIAL

REFERENCE TO THE NEw STars

PE SRL GRD | 2 ae eerie 2 120-121

Petuwentt: ZONIAC | fe 6 sons ee ee se 119

PETROGRAPHIC Stupy, A, OF THE

SPECIMENS DESCRIBED BY PRo-

FESSOR Hatiock, A. A. Julien. 92

Petrography of the San José Dis-

OS Lee ea en ee eae 257-293

EGU ZOMG hd. soos 2s hoa Syale on 170

LEE Soy ae ae ie

Prrinpeaoriaee ol 2b. . S28 es oes 229

Pirtoriston,” THEOL !.. 2b. 6 ks 8's 78

PERE MAMET a Ca oil as ect 2 a Zee s 124

Pat eee ene Coats aude eka ackcacece te, a 226

ParOeeite: het attses fhe Saad 2h Witsoe 90

Pe aremitecta a7. see's woe ss 90

es TStMIA Ae aan o aiete, aa 90

Puoronis, A New SPECIES OF,

MS. VOrtey. Pais. «iss 2s 90

PuHotTocraPpuHic, A, STUDY OF THE

Atk MovEMENTS NEAR THE

MoutTH oF AN ORGAN Pipe, F.

ona Ty Es eee a IOQ—-IIO

PHOTOGRAPHIC Dry PLATES,

GELATINE, NoTE ON A’ CAUSE

OF THE DETERIORATION OF, W.

ere ee INO e eT ooo als haseir na 94, 97

332. IND

Photographing meteor trails

PHOTOGRAPHING THE POLE OF THE

Heavens, A New TELESCOPE

For, Harold Jacoby 88-89

PHOTOGRAPHS OF NEBULE TAKEN

WITH THE CROSSLEY REFLECTOR

ON THE LicK OBSERVATORY, AL

K. Rees 120, I2I—I22 |

Photographs of stars ros

PHOTOGRAPHY, ASTRONOMICAL,

157

fore aa

ee ee eee ee

Caen. s Lere pele: alle

WITH A VISUAL TELESCOPE,

Geo. ‘Hale:) 2". ot 94, 95-97

PHOTOGRAPHY OF Fossits, A

METHOD oF FaciLitTatinG, J.

Van aingen'’ (fe. -3) <>) II3, I15—116

Phototonus: . 770250000 a ee 97

Phymactis cavernata .......... Ds

R. clematis 2.2 2 so2 Jeet Dee

Pe florida > 7 ee ia ee 15

PM dw 2 4400 2 ee rs

Phymanthus crucifer....._...... 20

PY SAS. o52 tk ce Oe eee 218. 226

PRYSACliS.<; 650.00 ay ei ee TO. VEZ,

ScHoor Cuitpren, D, R. Major. roo

Physics, Section of,

Meeting, Jan. 7, too... 88-89

Febo94s oomene, oe 94-907

March. 4; 1905.2). IO09Q—II0

April i 19ers sae 120-122

May 16, 190m 4.245225 130-131

Oct FetOOTe oe 134-135

Nows4; Moers: eo 145-146

Dec: ey “moore 156-157

PHYSIOGRAPHY OF LAKE GEORGE,

Notes on, J. F. Kemp,

139,

Av ee fee oe ©

I4I—-142

Physiological Congress 136

Pic de Diablo,

249, 250, 252, 254, 318 |

Picea (Canadensis. 2.4.0. 0. 68

Pickering * et os soc. ka, eat oae 5 |

Bicdra Mimatie. 06.2 oer 282, 310

12 FC 0 ee ne Nm el pe cy 212

PAESSDNs “TERS ccn.5 asc. ee ke 267 |

PISOES) oat sae he ee ee ee 122 |

PST IMT) 2°20) ok ead toe 205, 226

Plagioclase..1or1, 2509, 262, 268, 270, |

272, 274, 275, 276, 277, 278, 280, |

281, 288, 289, 290, 201

Rlamonriis meses ct ape te cae 218, 226

Prants, Tue Criticat Pornts

IN THE RELATION oF LiGHT TO,

D. 1. MacDougal... ~... 2552: 97-98

Plasm@somom eo taccs. o. cee! 123 |

PletadGsr mg. bee eo 122

Podarke....167, 160, L7ly 17a, ae.

178, 180, I8t, 182, 183, 184; -18s5., |

| Ptolemy; ref

EX.

| 186, ror, 192, 193.795, 109, opt

202, 203, 204, 205, 208, 218, 2109,

222, 223, 224, 225, 226, 231, 232,

236

| Potlalites ‘tacece a-ha 284

| Poslcilitie. 5 Ga,oore soe ee 276

POLE OF THE HEAvens, A New

TELESCOPE FOR PHOTOGRAPHING

tHE, Harold: Jacoby ........ 88-89

Polyeycliss: .c¢ st ae a ee 216

| Polygordius....... 185, 223, 225, 227

| Polymnia shai hi pte losaioctelgs, ple Warns eee

| Pomateceras: .- os... 225 fos. 169, 208

|gEOINS's.< bricks scale oe Ona ee 133

jabontile, iiiness Jon eaten ee ee 133

Poor, C. Ly; sellowaes eae ee 94, 103

|Populus tremuloides............ 99

| Porphyrite..268, 277, 2709; 282; “283

| 284, 286, 290

Porphyritic Types in the San

Jose District)... : asec <s, oe 269

Post, C. A. and J. K. Rees, Os-

SERVATIONS OF LEONIDS MADE

Ag Bay PORTS da: lice) beeen 156,157.

Post, C..A::- Rellow. 0.5.6.0 94, 103

Pins.«Comim..e2) Jpn ke ee 104

INGE ss An ee oe aoe ae 121

ME Otsdamn. 661." aes ond ee 114

| PRACTICE IN VISUAL PERCEPTION,

eG. de adds 2 ge 2 areas 125, 126

| Praeclavicular....2 2 sen eee 54

| Priapus polypus Forskal...... 3, 14

PRIMATES, SySTEMATIC REVISION

OF THE AMERICAN EOCENE, AND

THE RopentT Famity Myxo-

DECTIDZ, H. F. Osborn...110, 111

| Prince, Prot.- ret. ae 137,

Rropingurty 0, 20 s60e.an eee mg

Prototroch in Thalassema.... 185-190

Pseudoacrorhagi- 472. 4 eee 30

Pseudoclytia pentata....:5. 402. 98, 99

Pseudophellia 3... 3-4... LO; ers

PSYCHOLOGY AT THE DENVER

MEETING, J. McK. Cattell..... 143

| Psychology, Section of,

Meeting, Jan. 28, 1901... . 92-93

Pepi 0s, «tag. oes - -99—100

Marcel 25: 7607) 06 II7—II9Q

April 22. 1o0Taoeee 125-127

Oct... 28) Toot... eee 142-144

Nov. 25, rool: 92 153-155

Psygmobranchus. )../.2 ek, 225

PTERIS AQUILINA, ON THE Oc-

CURRENCE OF NEcTARIES IN, F,

E. Lloyd 90, 9I—92

72,95», 765. 99

Pucet Sounp, Cotumsra Untr-

VERSITY EXPEDITION TO, DURING

Sfa's ay eo) “ape

INDEX.

THE SUMMER OF 1896, REPORT

ON THE HEXACTINIZ OF THE,

J. Playfair McMurrich....... I-52

Pupin, M. I., Enercy Drssipa-

TION IN A WEAK MAGNETIC

RereeI) Sh. ks egw eee 156-157

Meee MIO. 55°. fgca ee Bae tere 104

Pyrite...:101, 260, 261, 268, 277, 284

Pyroxene....259, 260, 267, 268, 276,

277, 251,.283, 284, a87, 291

RTGS S05. Ss vss ees aoe EST. 132

Deere Se rl: is. gees hale 61

(Mitte... TOI, 114, 254, 270; 271,. 274, |

275, 276

ISON alc. as g ge bux 68

Queneau, A. J., THE GRAIN OF

fompous. RocKS::: . 05.065 £61; ‘163

| A EES a rare 227, 240 |

“ Race,” THE USE OF THE. TERM,

tas SSIMOINGS 6c dyes 117-119

RaAcIAL CHARACTERISTICS, CER-

TAIN, OF THE BASE OF THE

peur A; Hrdlicka......2... 93

Ramsay, Wm.; Hon. Mem...94, 103

RECENT CONTRIBUTIONS TO THE

PrRoBLEM OF NraGcara, A. W.

Grabau

SOOT: wt Se tna ny SaaS 139

Recording Secretary, N. Y. Ac.

eee Annual’ Report of...... 104

Records of Meetings of the New

York Academy of Sciences,

January to December, 1901 87-163

Rees, J. K., PuHoroGraPHsS oF

NEBULZ TAKEN WITH THE

CROSSLEY REFLECTOR ON

THE LicK OBSERVATORY,

120, I2I—122

REMARKS ON TEMPORARY

STARS, WITH ESPECIAL

REFERENCE TO THE NEw

STAR IN PERSEUS..... £20, 120

Report on star photographs. 135

Rees, J. K. and C. A. Post, Osn-

SERVATION OF LEONIDS MADE AT

Peon, fs7 To. ekek oy £56, 157

REFLECTION OF LIGHT FROM

Wuite Surraces, Geo. B.

Per HME 1A oe Oo elie weet: 88, 89

OS SR gl ae oe eka ae he Sam 59

RELATION OF LIGHT TO PLANTS,

THE CRITICAL POINTS IN THE,

Dt. MacDougal... 7b 23.0 97-98

REPORT OF FIELD WorK 1Nn IOWA

AND OKLAHOMA, Wm. Jones,

143-144

REPORT OF FIELD WorK IN Wry-

OMING AND Orecon, H. H. St.

Clair, 2d

300

| REPORT OF THE RECENT ECLIPSE

| ExprepiTtion To SumatTRA, S. A.

Mitchell

St a A ee ee 145

REPORT ON THE HEXACTINIZ® OF

THE CoLUMBIA UNIVERSITY Ex-

PEDITION TO PuGET SOUND DUR-

ING THE SUMMER OF 1896, J.

a AR nC 9 9 cl: eae ee I-52

|ReptiLes, BELODONT, CHARACTERS

| AND RELATIONSHIPS OF THE, J.

[Eg ELS a ee 90

| RESISTANCES, EXPERIMENTS ON

STANDARDS OF HiGH ELECcTRI-

Po ls el oda 2h a) Sa. rir 120-121

PRESET FOES OG ct. ack flew ued e's 133

Review, A, OF THE REPORT OF THE

BriTisH ASSOCIATION COMMIT-

TEE ON UNDERGROUND TEM-

PERATURES, William Hallock... 145

PPRPE PRLS IIIS RL irae tua nobis sm erin 228

WIEN ii vag te! oget ers, 71°11 € i Sienna eel anate area ce

RHYTHM GROUPS, COMBINATIONS

OF SIMPLE, IN HIGHER Syn-

THESES, AND THEIR EgQuiva-

LENCES, Robert MacDougal,

. 153-154

IS VEREOGGEN, ys, .ceusi ci sin ataniers ans ees 90

(RPI Sr Ra = ae a nn eR, 163

Ries, Heinrich, THe Iron MINES

GP DIEEAO, SPALN 1.2 ip < scence &< 125

Ricor Mortis, SoME OBSERVA-

TIONS ON, F. S. Lee..122, 124-125

PRPRECMNO TOT CS foie Sy oc0d 2d weet 95, 96

RopENT FAMILY MyxopDECTID&,

SYSTEMATIC REVISION OF AMER-

ICAN EocENE PRIMATES AND

or tHe, H: F. Osborn... ERO) TTI

POC gee ors SM Ia 5G wins acca ae III

Bmenieh tet os 2252. WOOP sess re 79

.Reue aeeimnoo ret... coved stats 120

PireUlera tebe chs. 227, 240

Rowland, Henry A., Death of,.. 128

| RUBIACEE, TETRAD-FORMATION IN

rps Doe eee ae 147

Rudimentary cells in Thalassema. 232

jmucdemannm, Bee ref: Fo...) t 113

PASC ne: ae Sn ee 267, 285

PaeeettOLGe Perso oye sen a ss 95

[gl a1 Elie de Ry Cs ot i one ie re 266

PS 21, Se ie Pe Pee. 5 ee 169

| SATO 10 Sal aaa ale oer ar 2-13

UE TS ae ele sah =k

WORCRIEEGEIE SS, Teo cuore Sarat ocecé «oem 121

St. Clair, H. H., 2d, Report or

FIELD WorK IN WYOMING AND

UR ae ee a ee 143

Salant, W. and F. S. Lee, Tue

384 INDEX.

AcTION OF ALCOHOL oN Mus- Siserfoos;/C.4P: tet. 22s 226, 241

CLE tae tries chien vee Ee ee T58 |-Sildeal o55 Coke ene 254, 258, 270

Saleamayhuas sy. 0.1. 12 one ees 119 | Silicate..257, 261, 272, 273, 283, 200

Salemose vce eee eee eee eee ees 269 | Stturtan Fauna, THE, oF BATES-

Salemose-limburgose ........... 269 VILLE, ARKANSAS. Gilbert van

Salensky, W.; ref.......... 213, 240 | - Ingen’. .2. 2. re, cnn 125

Salina oe ees eho e atc el eae 162 Shon? eee... 50 ue eee s

SALINE Basins oF Centrar New !Simeing heach, ie. 30s. sren 114

Mexico, NoTEs ON THE GEOL- Sirius sabe 8 Racy ee 96

ocy or THE, D. W. Johnson.161-162 | sxuris or MamMats, DottcHo-

Salpa ae aes tee eee eee ee eee 216 CEPHALY AND BRACHYCEPHALY

Sania Cynthia. sv. ahem mae ee 159 AS DoMINANT FACTORS IN THE,

Sandstone en 114 Ho: “Oshore at en ae 147

PUPASSIOS wos servant 152 | Smith, Hi Ms ref eo. Meee 137

San Carlos Mountains..250, 254, 255,| Snairs. ON THE VARIATION OF,

256, 277, 279, 291, 314 OF THE GENUS PARTULA IN THE

ee = Sethe 280, 283, 284 VALLEYS oF Tauiti, A. G.

an Jose istrict Le

Field Relations of the Ig- ee eS dena en cticiee aa oe ae

a feh. Ae ene eee ee

neous Rocks ......... 295; 257:| Soda augite: ... +. seen 259, 263

Petrography of the...... 257-203 Saget : 260

Stratigraphy of the......253-254| Solidago ........s00.seeeeeeee 92

St hatte rena ape 254~255 | Some PrecuLiAR MINERALOGICAL

san Fonaman of thes-_ 2-250 | ermects on Taceree Dis

Mi ao Pa a ee cHARGE, William Hallock..... 92

Gent Rana a2 P SoutH DaKoTA AND WYOMING,

ea aks ce Pn Srp a eee 247 ps NoTES ON THE TRIASSIC AND

Saracen ese he v++2- 4/79) “‘Torassic STRATA“or Tee BruACE

San Narisco Type of Andesite in Hitts or, E. O. Hovey..148, 152

the San José District......270—271 Spengle, J ae ae cn ae

Santa Helena Mime Gur. sete. 279 EEE ya nhieodise eee

Sarasine Gers eae ate ee a 21616 a é Bee

< PetMm=CENneLOSOMe ss... ee een I24

Sarcolemur Ilr! ¢ be -

Sacre 3.5 sk eee ee eae wee 96 | Ce ee «Fa, take ae fs +

Sauk Sodianeess. suc pee 143-144 | eater gece hing hl Net

Sauropsidla; 5.2.05 Lee ee 1395 £32 | Spirogyra FT ee hn ok He ie ae 123

schierholz,C.s refs... sce: 226—240 | Spitzka, A. E., THe Brarns oF

Schimkewitsch; ref., Two DISTINGUISHED PuystI-

225, 227, 229, 240| CIANS, Dr. Epovarp SEGUIN

Selist, Horblendess22.4¢2<:320. E405) SP Hrs Son, Dr. Epwarp

ScHoot CHILDREN, PHYSICAL AND |) . SEGUIN: . «bey eee ne = pe te cae 100

Menta Tests or, D. R. Major. 100 | S. praeclavicularis subcutaneous. 54

SCIENCE, WHAT THEOLOGY OwES | Stahl: seks osu: aay shee gene eines F 78

To Movern, C. B. Warring.... 130) Stars, Photographs of.......... 135

Scientihe ) Alliance. .0.5)2.0 «oe 2 110. STARS, REMARKS ON TEMPORARY,

peculiar. coolnge. 4% wae a: cease els 135| WwiTH ESpPEcIAL REFERENCE TO

SEGuIN, Dr. Epovuarp, AND His | tHe New Star IN PEREUS, J.

Son, Dr. Epwarp SEecuin, Two | IK. PAR CGB): a ee ee ee 120,: 221

DISTINGUISHED PHYSICIANS, | STATEN IsLanp, N. Y., Discovery

Tue BRAINS OF, y aoe Spitzka. TOO | oF A MAsStTopon’s TooTH AND

Self, E. Ds TEES cs Career 248 THE REMAINS OF A _ BOREAL

Serpentine Bebe lie. Giretie Fee & ao en & eueMapkeunewees 140 VEGETATION IN A SWAMP ON,

Sfeigijeh lcci 011s ee eee ca me ees 64 at 218 | Arthur Hollick ............ 67-68

SHELLS OF TurRTLES, THE Com- | Sterriasmich 2 je vies in ween mee 175

POSITION OF THE, QO. P. Hay, ‘Sternoclavicularis . 58

Le ee ee Posteriae 4 bik.s hc Hiei

SHEDHEEAN EEr estos nck a versie as 59 | Superior if « ackeiee seas 56, 57, a6

Sierra Madre Mountains....... PION Roy eee feel PEE Se OS 60, 64; 66

INDEX.

Stevenson, J. J., JosepuH LE

ConTE (OBITUARY),

148, I50-I51

EG eR ay ew ea ieee E16; -HS62). 053

Stratigraphy of the San José Dis-

RN sete cds. aks a Sake aS 253-254

Strong, O. S., and C. E. Doran,

A CASE OF UNILATERAL

ATROPHY OF THE CEREBELLUM,

EST;

Stupy, A, OF THE ABSORPTION OF

Licut By Dyes oF THE FLUO-

RESCEIN Group, L. Boroschek

133

0 jeg RS ip ae re 145, 146

TE GET i0 coe a) oa ' « ovsiaagudee vs we 77

Supernumerary Clavicular Mus-

PRIN cla, ich sia ake ae one 53-56

BeMClagICUlATIS .i.« ak wesc ae 56, 58

Proprius posterior.......... 61

2 Se ee pee ae ee 259

Swenstse Dike Rock......4..5.. 300

PROMUNEIC. SOTIGISS 25-0. oa 2s oo ties 141

SYNTHESES, COMBINATION OF

SIMPLE RHYTHM GROUPS IN

HIGHER, AND THEIR Eguiva-

LENCES, Robert MacDougal,

153-154

SYSTEMATIC REVISION OF THE

AMERICAN EOCENE PRIMATES

AND OF THE RopENT FAMILY

Myxopectip#, H. F. Osborn,

EEO; TIE

TAHITI, ON THE VARIATION OF

SNAILS OF THE GENUS PARTULA

IN THE VALLEYS oF, A. G.

UAT 58. he ws ie ome T3i,- 1342-133

MMe Mas TOL oo. es oe cok) tg ee: = 55, 60

PPTRINAT ES cw iu 5 5.6m whan ange, ones 285

EMS net Pe Ba cits As Ste ioe 122

MEI DELL. ae es de eyes 59

mete. E. Pos ref. 22.45 oe 28, 29, 46

IEG coed «saa coe ata the oe Ty 7

fs -Grassicomis:...c kee. 32

RE 2, . Ga ye Vat ee C4," 16

ice 2 CRIES ea an ee on ae LO. 7

eth «F kalp CME ERA. 4 16

TELEScoPE, A New, FoR PHOTO-

GRAPHING THE POLE OF THE

Heavens, Harold Jacoby....88—89

TELESCOPE, VISUAL, ASTRONOM-

ICAL PHOTOGRAPHY WITH A,

oat ag Oe & bo ae 94, 95-97

Temperatures, Underground..... £35

TEMPERATURES, UNDERGROUND, A

REVIEW OF THE REPORT OF THE

BritisH ASSOCIATION CoMMIT-

TEE ON, William Hallock.....

TEMPORARY STARS, REMARKS ON,

145

335)

WITH ESPECIAL REFERENCE TO

THE NEw STAR IN PERSEUS,

Mees AEDES. FG Uae ess. 120, 121

Tempero-maxillary articulation.. 131

etson TaSCie, Collt..., . 5. «6.12 eae 54

Tensor tympani muscle......... 132

PCT COR Pict re Bek chs V lt ed 204, 212, 226

PE et EGov en ties Sousa we Meee 55, 60

AVS Piea res eR INE ee ia 3 be O4 os ats a Welw: penn WEN 137

THALASSEMA MELLITA (ConwN.),

THE Earty EMBRYOLOGY OF,

TG LEEW i) Ga ek 165-246

Thalassema Mellita,

BipMoOgranny.... ix @lsteie 3 236-242

Cell Lineage to Gastrulation,

169-194

Fully Developed Trocho-

elo 5 See ede Fy Pare ae Od a 211-217

Gastrulation to Trochopore,

195-209

Miresovlast, Sa wane oe 218-230

Rudimentary Cells ...... 231—236

GER IS havent aA Vs, gk nba cee ie af

THEonecy,. WHat, »Owrs. To

Mopern Science, C. B. War-

AMM id RE PG ec ch 5, bt Bs cc 130

CRORE VE ehh totes Pee och 46

Thorndike, E. L., Ortctn oF Hu-

MAW INTELLECT «.../.. ... 135, 126

THE CORRELATION OF MEN-

NA WRLITIES! , 20. fe. 153, 154

BietnGr an sit cs bas ck «hate 94, 103

woes, G) Tos refs. 72 aoe 13, 46

MUNG CNA (oak = act ab ce Mee eee LET

PeiBBEMATISS fel. ........cu~ eee 2 72

Tinguatte.)..248, 255, 256; 287) 204,

302, 304

minpusiwte dikes 056.030 o eek es 279

Tinguaite in the San José Dis-

ph At an aaa Re ee 280-282

Rectan CPOE Sues be eS 282

Saito Bates Types os.tev- ass 280-281

| Titanite. .tar;. 258, 259, 260, 262, 263,

26A4,° 265, -266,. (268, 270, ‘271; 272,

273, 274, 275, 277, 278, 284, 290,

291

DitAnGENeresiy sy vce sen oe a Re 147

(PORDICES soos oes ha ek ks 109

Topography of the San José Dis-

Pritt Sie trot ina mae ee. 249-253

TOROWEAP VALLEY, THE, IN ARI-

zona, Richard E. Dodge...... 134

MOGreiOns Wed Qelag es se vi clas rit

Torrey, H. B., A New SpEcIEs oF

FLOR OINT Ey ac tee aoa ares 90

a te tS dh a 5% nud eave 42

Torrey, John Cutler, THe Earty

EMBRYOLOGY OF ‘THALAS-

SEMA MELLITA (Conn.).165—246

Report of Summer work

atiBeaufort, “N: Caer Se 137

LOXOPRENSTES Mies. nel ees oe 122

TTApeziusmrsas eee Rieo ae 60, 64, 66

Trapezius and Sterno-Cleido-

Mastoid, Reported Instances of

Untousot- thes .o eres eee oe 60-61

Treadwell, A. L.; ref..167, 168, 169,

171, 4175, 179,. 161, 190, 192;.,093,

20d, 205. 223% Gor 226, 227, s220,

2295) S31 254.0 245

Treasurer, IN. Y. Ac:

nual Report of

Trenton, 170. saci ae eee

Pesaneclin i! ys. 6 ee aoe

TRIASSIC AND JURASSIC STRATA,

NoTES ON THE, OF THE BLACK

Hitts oF SoutH DAKoTA AND

Wyomine, E. O. Hovy....148,

PRMSEMINUG che oGear sae

Trochophore in Thalassema.....

Trowbridge, C. C., A DiFrrerEen-

TIAL ASTATIC MAGNETOMETER

SUGGESTED BY ProF Roop.130—131

Tufts, FF: L., A “Prorocraruie

STUDY OF THE AIR MovEMENTS

NEAR THE MoutTH oF AN ORGAN

PIPE I0Q—II0

Tufts, F. L., and L. Boroschek,

A Stupy oF THE ABSORPTION

or Licut sy Dyers oF THE

106

149

I22

eo; 0, @ 'e!Fe @ je ie «le: fo lense) @

152

132

215

FLUORESCEIN GROUP....... 145-146 |

Pullberg >. wel scwae es cee T |

Gurbellaria + wctosemvae ror ieee 194 |

TurTLES, THE CoMPOSITION OF

THE. SHELLS OF,<O. 2; Hay,

II0, I1I—II2 |

Py mapariinys 7 series. eke +. Pek ates

Wimibretla +3 aire a. See ak 218, 279 |

Underground Temperatures......

UNDERGROUND TEMPERATURES, A |

REVIEW OF THE REPORT OF THE |

British ASSOCIATION Com-

MITTEE ON, William Hallock..

Underwood, L. M.; Councillor...

145

104

Wadulatory theory. 2 .calaeee 80.

Winooski Se TO2,, 208; 224. 226, 2361

tonics hae See I be ee eee 205 |

Wtsamlajore sc s.!ca. aes Donen 122

Wisbicintay ees E'S, TO. 07s. 234 26-35 |

U. crassicornis,

16, 16,10; 22) 28-35, 48 |

UseE, THE, OF THE TERM

Fei Giddings: &. 2. cadens

Van Brunt, C.; Fin. Comm

Van Helmont;

Van

* RACE,”

Lilt Fp 119)

104 |

ee Boe) # <0)! (e's eptete

Ingen, Gilbert, Tue Sr-

INDEX.

LURIAN FAUNA OF BATESVILLE,

ARRANSAS) 27 ce ein dee bee eee eee

Van Ingen, J., A Method of Fa-

cilitating Photography of Fos-

sils II3 T15—116

VARIATIONS, THE, OF A NEWLY-

ARISEN SPECIES OF MEeEpDUSa,

ee eee eee eee eee eee

Al Gi Maver 335 Mee. eres 97, 98-99

Vegonia’ Greeleand 22 3. Shea 275

Vegonta’ Mine. ..ncueeee 256; 267 270

Vegonia Type of Andesite in the

San José. District. 2. 3a 272-273

Vejdovsky, F.; ref....227, 228, 241

Velpecula?:. 6 s:nciionteeeroee ee Ter

Ventral neural ciliated region in

Thalassema, Development of..

Vermont, A New Assestos RE-

GION IN NorTHERN, J. F. Kemp,

139, 140-141

211

Verrill, A.. .E.;) ret 2.2) 850; noe eae

15, 16, 17, 20, 27, 28, 31, 345 35; 36:

38, 39, 41, 42, 46, 114

Viesq tle, tele <a. e eo eee QI

Wesuvianite 4)..c4 Sin eeice eee 254

WieZZEnOSe. 6¢ - 47 Re eke wee ee 267

Vitchows:(fets cece eae ee 143

VISUAL PERCEPTION, PRACTICE OF,

CC. Juddis soe eee eee 125,526

Vogesite..... 255, 256; -257; 270 204

| Vogesite in the San José Dis-

LEEUW sc. 2 ces bere ee ee 290-291

VoLUNTARY CONTROL OF THE

Force oF Movement, R. S.

Woodwotth-:2...- eee 125, 127

Viol Vox wea chwik che sen ee 230

| von Drasche, C.; ref...169, 208, 237

| ‘von Heider; ACs “retat 3 eae 20; 45

von Leydig, Franz; Hon. Mem. 127

Warps oF Cuzco, THE, Hager

Stansbury: 0c, 2.550- eae LIZ, Lao

| Warring, C. B., WHat THEOLOGY

Owes To MopERN SCIENCE.... 130

_ Washington, H. S.; ref.,

248, 266, 267, 285

Water «lamestones. ns seeeeaee 162

Weber, M. J.; ref 55;

Weil, Re A CONTRIBUTION TO THE

Prost EM OF THE Ear-BoneEs,

I 31-132

White, Theodore G., DEATH oF.. 138

Reba eke et oe 108, ane 116

‘Wuirr, THEODORE G. (Oprtoary),

J. By Kemp ere. 26s seen 148-149

Whitman, C. 0.; ref..227, 228, 241

Whitfield: J.vBcs vets. t-. ee 269

Wierzejski, Avreteesdar ts 226, 241

Williams; H.oSis setts. 2 ..8e te 116